Aloha Table Service Users Guide Version 5.3

Aloha TableService
User’s Guide
Version 5.3
Copyright
Copyright ©2003, Aloha Technologies, LTD., Documentation Services. This
publication is confidential, proprietary information which is not to be repro-
duced or disclosed to others without written permission from Aloha Technolo-
gies, LTD., Documentation Services. No part of this document may be
reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any
language in any form by any means without written permission of Aloha Tech-
nologies, LTD.
Aloha Technologies, LTD. is not responsible for any technical inaccuracies or

typographical errors contained in this publication. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new
editions of this publication. Any reference to gender in this document is not
meant to be discriminatory. The software described in this document is pro-
vided under a license agreement. The software may be used or copied only in
accordance with the terms of that agreement.
© Aloha Technologies, LTD., 2003. All Rights Reserved. ALOHA® is a U.S.

Registered Trademark of Aloha Technologies, LTD. Microsoft®, and Win-
dows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft, Inc. IBM® is a registered trade-
mark of International Business Machines Corporation. Other products
mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective com-
panies.
Revision #20031126
Table of Contents
Introduction
What is TableService?......................................................................I-vii
What’s New?..................................................................................... I-ix
How This Book is Organized ............................................................I-xii
Conventions Used in This Book.......................................................I-xiv
Aloha Manager ...................................................................... 1-1
Standard Button Functions ............................................................... 1-4
Security Access ................................................................................ 1-5
TableService File Menu ................................................................. 1-5
TableService Screen Components ................................................... 1-8
Function Tabs ................................................................................ 1-8
Function Tab Title Bar ................................................................... 1-9
Function Subtabs......................................................................... 1-10
Perform Database Edits Using Right-Click ..................................... 1-11
Database Editing Commands ...................................................... 1-12
Navigation Options ......................................................................... 1-16
Navigation Bar ............................................................................. 1-16
Keyboard Support........................................................................... 1-22
HTML Pages................................................................................... 1-24
Functions............................................................................... 2-1
Edit Deposits..................................................................................... 2-4
Edit Punches..................................................................................... 2-6 v5.3
Edit Prior Days’ Time ..................................................................... 2-7
Other Wages................................................................................ 2-13
Basic Labor Scheduler.................................................................... 2-18
File Menu ..................................................................................... 2-19
Edit Menu..................................................................................... 2-19
Print Schedule Reports................................................................ 2-22
Assign Checkouts........................................................................... 2-25
Team Tip Distribution ..................................................................... 2-29
Screen Components.................................................................... 2-30
Column Headings ........................................................................ 2-32
Run Team Tip Distribution........................................................... 2-33
Print Reports ............................................................................... 2-39
House Accounts ............................................................................. 2-44
Payment Reconciliation.................................................................. 2-49
Export ............................................................................................. 2-50
Create ADP Pay File ................................................................... 2-51
Create ReMACS RealWorld Pay File .......................................... 2-52
Create ReMACS Menu File ......................................................... 2-53
Create Coconut Code Payroll File ............................................... 2-55
Create Coconut Code Daily Sales Files ...................................... 2-56
Create Coconut Code Sales Mix File .......................................... 2-57
Create Paychex Extract File ........................................................ 2-58
Create PayUSA Extract File ........................................................ 2-59
ICVerify........................................................................................... 2-60
Settle Current Batch .................................................................... 2-60
Print Settlement........................................................................... 2-61
Store Settings ........................................................................3-1
Order Entry....................................................................................... 3-5
Labor .............................................................................................. 3-21
Financials ....................................................................................... 3-50
Printing ........................................................................................... 3-64
Printing-Chits.................................................................................. 3-82
User Interface................................................................................. 3-96
Security ........................................................................................ 3-105
System ......................................................................................... 3-114
International.................................................................................. 3-127
Credit Card ................................................................................... 3-136
Delivery ........................................................................................ 3-138
Gift Card/Certificate Sales............................................................ 3-139
Video ............................................................................................ 3-140
Hotel ............................................................................................. 3-141
Survey .......................................................................................... 3-142
ii Table of Contents Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Labor Maintenance Functions ............................................. 4-1
Employees ........................................................................................ 4-5
Job Codes....................................................................................... 4-17
Access Levels................................................................................. 4-32
Labor Groups.................................................................................. 4-40
Performance Measures .................................................................. 4-42
Termination Reasons...................................................................... 4-44
Back Office Security Levels ............................................................ 4-45
Other Wage Types.......................................................................... 4-48
Edit Punch Reasons ....................................................................... 4-51
Menu Maintenance Functions.............................................. 5-1
Pricing Methods and Pricing Hierarchy............................................. 5-5
The Menu System............................................................................. 5-8
Submenus and Their Relationship to Item Availability................. 5-11
Items ............................................................................................... 5-12
Categories ...................................................................................... 5-29
Modifiers ......................................................................................... 5-34
Modifier Item Buttons................................................................... 5-37
Exception Modifiers ........................................................................ 5-39
Exception Modifier Item Buttons .................................................. 5-40
Menu............................................................................................... 5-42
Submenus....................................................................................... 5-46
Taxes .............................................................................................. 5-52
GST Taxes................................................................................... 5-60
Flex Taxes ...................................................................................... 5-72
Surcharges ..................................................................................... 5-87
Special Pricing ................................................................................ 5-90
Fixed Item Pricing ........................................................................ 5-90
Quantity Pricing ........................................................................... 5-91
Price Levels .................................................................................... 5-95
AutoMenu ..................................................................................... 5-101
Payments Maintenance Functions ...................................... 6-1
Tenders............................................................................................. 6-4
Promotions...................................................................................... 6-21
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Table of Contents iii

Promotion Types ............................................................................ 6-30
Buy One Get One (BOGO).......................................................... 6-30
Combo ......................................................................................... 6-32
Coupon ........................................................................................ 6-33
New Price .................................................................................... 6-36
Check Reduction ......................................................................... 6-37
Quick Combo............................................................................... 6-39
Comps ............................................................................................ 6-42
House Accounts ............................................................................. 6-51
Gift Certificates............................................................................... 6-53
Foreign Currencies......................................................................... 6-56
System Maintenance Functions...........................................7-1
Events .............................................................................................. 7-5
Button Functions ........................................................................... 7-6
Add New Events ............................................................................ 7-7
Required Fields .............................................................................. 7-40
Order Modes .................................................................................. 7-41
Order Entry Queues ....................................................................... 7-50
Revenue Centers ........................................................................... 7-51
Day Parts........................................................................................ 7-57
Concepts ........................................................................................ 7-59
Tables............................................................................................. 7-61
Void Reasons ................................................................................. 7-63
No Sale Reasons ........................................................................... 7-66
Petty Accounts ............................................................................... 7-68
Customizing Your FOH Screens .................................................... 7-70
Working with Tables Screen (Floor Plan) .................................... 7-70
Floor Plan Features ..................................................................... 7-72
Order Entry Screen ..................................................................... 7-82
Panel Editor Tools ....................................................................... 7-83
Panels ......................................................................................... 7-89
Single Buttons ........................................................................... 7-108
Group Buttons ........................................................................... 7-119
Button Functions ....................................................................... 7-133
Screen Editor............................................................................. 7-153
Surveys ........................................................................................ 7-157
iv Table of Contents Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Hardware Maintenance Functions....................................... 8-1
Terminals .......................................................................................... 8-5
Thumb Scanner Setup Requirements ......................................... 8-17
Pen Reader Setup Requirements................................................ 8-20
Cash Drawers ................................................................................. 8-22
Printers ........................................................................................... 8-26
Printer Configuration.................................................................... 8-32
Printer Groups ................................................................................ 8-34
Labels ............................................................................................. 8-36
Video Groups.................................................................................. 8-40
Video Queues ................................................................................. 8-41
Video Devices................................................................................. 8-42
Video Keypads................................................................................ 8-43
Display Boards................................................................................ 8-44
Accessories .................................................................................... 8-48
Cash Cards.................................................................................. 8-48
Drink Dispensers ......................................................................... 8-48
Scales and Tares......................................................................... 8-48
Message Maintenance Functions........................................ 9-1
Main Screen...................................................................................... 9-5
Guest Check ..................................................................................... 9-7
Clock In Information.......................................................................... 9-9
Server Messages............................................................................ 9-11
Utilities ................................................................................. 10-1
Refresh Data................................................................................... 10-5
Preferences .................................................................................... 10-7
Verify Data ...................................................................................... 10-9
View Debugging File..................................................................... 10-11
Create Diagnostic Files................................................................. 10-13
Start/Stop Front-of-House............................................................. 10-15
Force End-of-Day ......................................................................... 10-18
Database Upgrade........................................................................ 10-20
Grind Status.................................................................................. 10-22
Regrind Subdirectories ................................................................. 10-23
Fileserver Recovery...................................................................... 10-26
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Table of Contents v

Aloha Glossary
Networking Glossary
Index
vi Table of Contents Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Introduction
What is TableService?
TableService is software specifically written for the modern, fast-paced res-
taurant business. TableService supports the single restaurant environment, but
also handles the multiple-store corporate chain very well. TableService incor-
porates the redundancy necessary to ensure that no data is lost when a single
computer fails, or when electrical power fails in the restaurant.
TableService also incorporates the ease of use and completely integrated fea-
tures necessary to give you the freedom to manage your restaurant business
instead of managing your software. Some of the features available in
TableService are:
Intuitive touch-screen interface — Touch the screen to place orders, run

reports, and perform many other vital tasks directly from the Front-of-House
terminal.
Built-in redundancy — If a terminal fails, its sales information resides in

duplicate on the file server. If the file server fails, one of the order entry termi-
nals takes over its functions until it is returned to service.
Customizable screens and screen flow — Function and order entry screens
may be customized for ease of sales flow and for ease of access.
Simple check or item-splitting — Guest checks are simple to work with to

add, delete, and change items, and to split into several checks with equal ease.
Floor Plan feature — Create a functional floor plan of your restaurant that
shows table locations, seating arrangements, number of guests, who is serving
the tables, and how long it has been since the order was taken.
Comprehensive reporting — Complete information is available about sales,

inventory, profit, replenishment, and more.
Menu management — Add, edit, or delete items from the menu quickly and
easily.
Multiple graphical user interfaces — Define different interfaces for differ-

ent employees, maximizing efficacy of information dissemination.
Server performance measurements — Distinguish easily those employees

who are hustling for you from those who are not.
Built-in security — Easily configure access to provide the right access to the
right employees.
Multiple job codes and per-employee access levels — Establish two or

more jobs for each employee, with access levels to match each job code.
Job code-specific menu assignments — Define specific menus for two or

more different types of servers, such as bartenders, cocktail waitresses, fine
dining waiters and waitresses, pizza servers, and snack bar servers.
Modular design — Incorporates several modules for reporting, scheduling

employees, and numerous other functions.
viii Introduction Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

What’s New?
This section describes new features and functions made available to you in
each new release, with the oldest version being v5.2.8. If you are viewing this
manual in PDF format, each new reference contains a hyperlink. Click this
hyperlink to move to the page containing the information.
Aloha TableService v5.3

We added the following enhancements in the Aloha TableService User’s
Guide for version 5.3.
Regrinding Sub-directories
We added the Regrinding Sub-directories function to the manual to support

non-SuperSite environments. Refer to “Regrind Subdirectories” on page 10-
23 for more information.
Supporting Chit Consolidation for Table Entry Items
You can now apply consolidation rules to items going to the entire table when
you are using the ‘Pivot Seating’ feature. You must select either ‘Consolidate
Items with Identical Modifiers’ or ‘Consolidate Items with Different Modifi-
ers to enable the ‘Table Items Only’ check box. Refer to “Table Items Only”
on page 3-90 for more information.
Defining Default Item Weight for Guest Counting
You can now define the default weight value of an item when you count
guests by category. For example, you can set the guest count weight of an
item named ‘Fajitas for Two’ so that it increases the guest count by two when
a customer orders it. This check box works in conjunction with the ‘Use
Entrees for Guest Counts’ check box and the ‘Category’ selected in Mainte-
nance > Store Settings > Order Entry group on the Guest Counts subtab. The
default guest count weight is one. Refer to “Item Weight Inset” on page 5-24
for more information.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Introduction ix

Enabling the Delay Send Feature
You can now enable the system to enhance the functionality of the Hold but-
ton that displays in the bottom corner of the Order Entry screen. The addi-
tional functionality offers several different options to place items on hold and
then release the items at a defined time with an order mode of your choice.
You can enhance the current system generated Hold button with limited func-
tionality, or you can create a Hold button using the user-configurable Order
Screen panel for full functionality. Refer to the TableService Special Features
Guide for full information. Also refer to “Hold” on page 7-138, and “Auto-
matic Release” on page 3-13 for more information.
Aloha TableService v.5.2.8

We added the following enhancements in the Aloha TableService User’s
Guide for version 5.2.8.
Supporting Up to 999 Taxes
You can now define up to 999 taxes in Maintenance > Menu > Taxes. This
greatly helps installations for SuperSite and CDM environments, which com-
monly need to define and use a multitude of tax records. Refer to “Taxes” on
page 5-52 for more information.
Suppressing Voucher Printing for Non-Cash Tenders
You can now specify whether an individual non-cash tender prints a voucher
when you apply a payment. Select this option when you do not need a signed
voucher from the guest, such as meal discount cards. Refer to “Do Not Print
Vouchers” on page 6-11 for more information.
Supporting Russian Cyrillic Printing
The Aloha system now supports the Cyrillic (Russian) code page needed to
print certain international monetary symbols. Cyrillic joins the Euro in the
supported list of code pages by the Aloha system. Refer to “Code Page” on
page 8-29 for instructions and more information.
x Introduction Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Clarified Check Reduction Qualifications
We have clarified existing functionality in regards to qualifying items for a

Check Reduction promotion. If you select ‘Qualify’ with a qualifying cate-
gory, all items within the category are eligible for the promotion. If you clear
‘Qualify’ with a qualifying category, all items excluded from the category are
eligible for the promotion. Refer to “Qualify” on page 6-38 for more informa-
tion.
Clarified Pricing Hierarchy
We have clarified the order of the Pricing Hierarchy for the Aloha system.
Refer to “Pricing Methods and Pricing Hierarchy” on page 5-5 for more infor-
mation.
Supporting Up to 9,999 AutoMenus
You can now define up to 9999 AutoMenus in Maintenance > Menu >
AutoMenu. This greatly helps installations for SuperSite and CDM environ-
ments, which commonly needs to define and use a multitude of AutoMenu
records. Refer to “AutoMenu” on page 5-101 for more information.
Allowing 48 Items Per AutoMenu
You can now place up to 48 items on an AutoMenu. Submenus have the

unique ability to change the number of columns and rows to display more or
less items on each of the two submenu pages. Since AutoMenus overwrite
submenus, the maximum number of items you can place on an AutoMenu is
the lesser of the following: (2 submenu pages x submenu rows x submenu col-
umns) or 48. Refer to “AutoMenu” on page 5-101 for more information.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Introduction xi

How This Book is Organized
This book is designed to help you familiarize yourself quickly with Aloha
TableService. It is organized as follows:
Chapter 1: Aloha Manager

This chapter discusses functions necessary to establish a foundation for
understanding the Aloha system. Discussions about security, customizing, and
modifying the appearance of Aloha Manager are included.
Chapter 2: Functions
This chapter discusses the functions used to edit deposits and create employee
schedules. In addition, third-party accounting applications are accessed
through Functions.
Chapter 3: Store Settings

This chapter discusses the Store Settings functions within Aloha Manager.
You will gain an understanding of each store settings group, the available
functionality for each group, and how to create customized settings for your
store.
Chapter 4: Labor Maintenance Functions

This chapter explains how to create and maintain employee files, job codes,
access levels, and other labor related settings.
Chapter 5: Menu Maintenance Functions

This chapter outlines setting up menus and submenus. Topics include items,
taxes, modifiers, and categories, and how they interact with the menu system.
xii Introduction Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Chapter 6: Payments Maintenance Functions
This chapter discusses creating and setting up payment tenders, promotions,
comps, gift certificates, house accounts, and foreign currencies.
Chapter 7: System Maintenance Functions

This chapter discusses the features available in Aloha Manager that relate to
adding and creating events, order modes, revenue centers, and tables, and
defining void reasons, no sale reasons and petty cash accounts. This chapter
also includes information about the Floor Plan feature.
Chapter 8: Hardware Maintenance Functions

This chapter discusses the setup and configuration of hardware that is typi-
cally attached to the Aloha system, such as terminals, cash drawers, printers,
and remote display system devices.
Chapter 9: Messages
This chapter discusses the features available on the Messages menu. These are
used to generate messages for communicating with individual employees, the
restaurant staff, or the guests.
Chapter 10: Utilities

This chapter discusses the Aloha system features that deal with data verifica-
tion, controlling the Front-of-House, database upgrade, handling data, and the
End-of-Day functions.
Glossary
Index
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Introduction xiii

Conventions Used in This Book
Special graphic symbols are used in this manual to alert you to important
points. The following symbols are used:
Highlights a special point of interest about the topic under

discussion.
Alerts you that the operation being described can cause

problems if you are not careful.
Points to a more complete discussion in another chapter of

the current book, or other reference material.
Points to a useful hint that may save you time or trouble.
xiv Introduction Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Aloha Manager
This chapter discusses functions necessary to establish a foundation
for understanding the Aloha system. Discussions about security, cus-
tomizing, and modifying the appearance of Aloha Manager are
included.
Standard Button Functions ............................................................... 1-4

Security Access ................................................................................ 1-5
TableService File Menu ................................................................. 1-5
TableService Screen Components ................................................... 1-8
Function Tabs ................................................................................ 1-8
Function Tab Title Bar ................................................................... 1-9
Function Subtabs......................................................................... 1-10
Perform Database Edits Using Right-Click ..................................... 1-11
Database Editing Commands ...................................................... 1-12
Navigation Options ......................................................................... 1-16
Navigation Bar ............................................................................. 1-16
Keyboard Support........................................................................... 1-22
HTML Pages................................................................................... 1-24
Chapter
1
1 – 2 Aloha Manager Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3
This chapter introduces the Aloha system Back-of-House (BOH) application,
Aloha Manager. The Aloha Manager application and its interface brings a
Manager
Aloha
completely integrated feel to the BOH workstation. All BOH functions of the
Aloha system, regardless of their former locations in earlier versions, are now
accessible from within Aloha Manager. BackOffice applications, such as
Inventory Control, as well as unrelated software, such as Microsoft® Word®
and Excel®, launch from a single location... the Aloha Manager main screen!
This chapter contains information about establishing passwords for employ-

ees, and how to navigate within the Aloha system Back-of-House (BOH)
application, Aloha Manager. Also included in this chapter is information
about how to customize Aloha Manager to make commonly needed functions
readily accessible.
In this chapter, you learn how to:
• Establish and change passwords for all employees, including manag-

ers.
• Navigate within Aloha Manager to display and use program func-
tions.
• Duplicate or delete database records quickly.
• Add groups and tools to the navigation bar to make commonly used
features readily available.
• Make Aloha Manager the only application available to employees,
thus enhancing security.
• Tailor the Aloha Manager screen to display introductory graphics
directed at specific employee groups for communication or provide
access to other functions.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Aloha Manager 1–3

Standard Button Functions
Several button functions are generally available in Aloha Manager. The func-
tions of these buttons are the same in every case, and are similar to buttons
used in many Windows applications.
The Save, Edit, Delete, Cancel and Apply command buttons control action
taken on data within function tabs:
Save
Click Save to write the data to the disk any time a new record is added or
changes are made to an existing record. Otherwise, the changes and additions
are discarded.
Edit
Click Edit, press Enter, or click anywhere in the function to display the record
in Edit mode.
Cancel
Click Cancel to exit the function tab without writing the changes to disk. All
entries since the last time Apply was selected are not saved.
Delete
Click Delete to remove the active record from the database. Use caution when
deleting records. Carelessly deleting records can cause serious errors because
of the relational nature of the Aloha file structure.
Apply
Click Apply to write the changes to the disk. This is very similar to Save, but
keeps the record available for further edit.
Done
Click Done to exit the function.
1–4 Aloha Manager Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Security Access
Manager
Aloha
The Aloha system provides employees access to Back-of-House and Front-of-
House functions (BOH and FOH, respectively), with a log-in process requir-
ing the input of their employee ID and password. The employee ID and pass-
word provide access to both functions, in accordance with the security access
established for each employee. This log-in procedure avoids complexity by
requiring managers and employees to remember only one user ID and pass-
word. This security concept also enables card readers to interface with the
system for access to the BOH and FOH systems. The same employee card
provides access to the FOH terminal for order entry activities, and to the BOH
system for managerial activities, in accordance with the security level
assigned to each employee.
Define security setup through the Security Levels function in the BOH appli-
cation, Aloha Manager. Assign security levels to each employee through
Employee maintenance. When an employee logs in, the Aloha system grants
access only to functions permitted by the employee’s security level. Functions
to which the employee has no access are not displayed or display with obvi-
ously blocked functionality. This approach enables employees to easily recog-
nize the functions available to them. If an employee who does not have access
to back office functions attempts to log on, the only menus available are File,
Tools, View, and Help. Functions available on the Shared Navigation Bar dis-
play as padlocks, if the employee does not have access to them.
TableService File Menu

When you launch TableService, the Aloha Manager Login dialog box dis-
plays, as shown in Figure 1-1. When you are logged in, the File menu offers
three choices, Change Password, Logout and Exit. If you log out of TableSer-
vice, the program continues to run, and the Logout command changes to
Login. The Change Password selection is unavailable if you are not logged in
to TableService.

Login
To log in to TableService, select Login from the File menu. The Aloha Man-
ager Login dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 1-1:
Figure 1-1 Login
Enter your user name and password and click Login. The Aloha Manager
interface displays with the options defined in your security access level avail-
able to you.
Change Password
Use the Change Password command to change your password for security.
This command requires that you know your current password. Select File >
Change Password and the Change Password dialog box displays, as shown in
Figure 1-2:
Figure 1-2 Change Password
Enter your old password, and enter a new password in the 'New Password' and
'Re-enter Password' text boxes, and click OK. If the text entered in these two
text boxes does not match exactly, the system displays an error, and you must
try again, or click Cancel to exit the Change Password function.

If you have forgotten your current password, an employee with access to
Maintenance > Labor > Employees can delete your old password using the
Manager
Aloha
Clear Back Office Password button located on the Back Office Security sub-
tab. Once the password is cleared, select File > Login. Enter your user name
and click Login. The New Password dialog box displays, as shown in Figure
1-3:
Figure 1-3 New Password
Enter a new password in the 'New Password' and 'Re-enter Password' text
boxes and click OK. If the text entered in these two text boxes does not match
exactly, the system displays an error, and you must try again, or click Cancel
to exit the New Password dialog box.
Logout
Use the Logout command to log out of TableService without closing the
application.
Exit
Use the Exit command to log out of TableService and close the application.
Ensure all function tabs are closed before making this selection.

TableService Screen
Components
TableService displays the Aloha Manager interface consisting of multiple
components that enable and control access to functions and user tools. An
example of the Aloha Manager interface is shown in Figure 1-4:
Figure 1-4 Main Screen
Function Tabs
Function tabs, with the label at the bottom, are used for features that are dis-
tinctly different from each other. A function tab can contain any of several
standard Windows® control features, including but not limited to:
• Subtabs (with labels at the top)

• Check boxes
• Option buttons

• Function buttons
Manager
• Text boxes
Aloha
• List boxes
The sample TableService screen shows three Aloha Manager function tabs
running simultaneously. Aloha Manager does not allow more than one
instance of a function to run at the same time. The functions active in the
example are Taxes, Printers, and Items. The function currently in use is Items,
as its tab is on top of the others. To access Printers or Taxes, click the desired
tab, or use the Back button to return to the previously used function. Each
function currently running displays a tab along the bottom of the function
area, with the function name on the tab.
When a new function is executed, Aloha Manager appends the new tabbed
dialog to the existing list of currently running functions. If more tabs are dis-
played than can fit in the application window, buttons display in the bottom
right corner enabling you to scroll through the tabs.
Function Tab Title Bar

Each function tab has a title bar at the top containing the following informa-
tion:
Function name — The function title is left justified and spelled without
abbreviations.
Back button — The Back button is on the right side of the title bar. Click
Back to return to the most recently used function tab. For example, in the
Items function, you could click the Printer button on the Item subtab to launch
the Printers function, then click Back to return to the Items function.
Close button — The Close button is to the right of the Back button. This
button closes the active, selected function. Closing a function tab closes the
entire tab. It is not possible to close individual subtabs displayed on a function
tab.

Function Subtabs
Some functions contain subtabs, arranged along the top of a function tab. Sub-
tabs divide and organize related features assigned to the function tab into
smaller, separate, more manageable work areas, making it less cumbersome to
work with the specific function. Subtabs, as implemented in the Aloha Man-
ager interface, function the same way as subtabs in other software, such as
Microsoft Word and Excel (Select Tools > Options in these applications to see
an example). Click a subtab title to make its features active.
Subtabs differ from function tabs (which display along the bottom of the func-
tion area) in that a subtab enables you to work on different areas within a func-
tion. Function tabs, however, enable you to change to a completely different
program function.
The sample TableService screen shows the Items function tab, which contains
four subtabs: Item (the default subtab displayed immediately upon function
startup), Modifiers, Price, and Miscellaneous. When you click a subtab, the
function switches to the selected subtab and remains in the function, with the
current record still selected. The Save, Cancel, Edit, etc. buttons apply to the
Item record currently selected (you are not required to save information from
each subtab).

Perform Database Edits Using
Manager
Aloha
Right-Click
The Aloha system provides a quick method to copy and delete records, and
ranges of records, when performing maintenance in the database files. This
feature is extremely useful when you are building a database. For example,
create, and configure one steak, one salad, one soup, one sandwich, one ham-
burger, one non-alcoholic drink, one beer, one mixed drink, and one dessert.
Test each item for correct function in the database. After successfully using
these single, example items in a series of tests, use the database editing fea-
tures to make copies of each one of these proven items to fill out the remain-
der of the menu. Edit each item copy to give it unique characteristics.
The database editing tools are available only if the function tab is not in edit
mode. To access the database editing tools, place the mouse pointer in a
vacant area of a function tab, and click the right mouse button. A menu dis-
plays, with the following selections available:
• Copy Item
• Copy Range of Items
• Delete Range
If the function tab is in edit mode, the menu displays, but all selections on the
menu are unavailable.
Not all menu selections are appropriate for every function in the system. If
you make a selection that is not appropriate for the active function, a message
displays indicating the selection is not available for the active function.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Aloha Manager 1 – 11

Database Editing Commands
The basic processes of database editing are similar among the available func-
tions. Each command displays a secondary dialog box in which you may
specify the actions desired. Examples of these dialog boxes are provided
below. Each dialog box contains drop-down lists. You can select a drop-down
list, and then use the up and down arrow keys, on the keyboard, to move from
item to item. You can use the Page Up and Page Down keys to move through
the database four items at a time. In this section, the term ‘item’ is used to
denote a main record on a function tab. The Menu Items function tab is used
as an example for this section because it is one function for which all selec-
tions on the database editing menu are available. On other function tabs, the
term ‘item’ may refer to employees, printers, or messages, depending upon
the active function tab.
Copy Item
Copies an item and all selected attributes to a specific destination in the data-
base. Use the Copy Items dialog box (Figure 1-5) to specify all attributes and
modifiers to copy, and the destination to which the item is to be copied. You
can copy a single item to a single location or to multiple locations. You can
overwrite existing items or create new items. To overwrite existing items,
select them from the Begin and End drop-down lists. To overwrite a single
item, select the same item in both locations. To create one or more new items,
type the beginning and ending numbers in the respective text boxes, or select

existing items from the drop-down lists. Any items selected in these text
boxes are overwritten.
Manager
Aloha
Figure 1-5 Copy Items
Copy Range of Items

Copies a range of items to a specified destination in the database. The func-
tions available in the Copy Range of Items dialog box, as shown in Figure 1-
6, are very similar to those in the Copy Items dialog box.
Figure 1-6 Copy Range of Items

The source and destination functions are reversed, in that you select any num-
ber of items in a continuous series for the source, and specify a destination
item number to which you copy all selected items. Three selections are avail-
able for controlling the output of this function.
Create New Items — Creates new items in the database, replacing any items
selected or implied in the ‘To Range’ setting.
Condense Items — Condenses the blank spaces in the database until items
are added into them.
Spacing (Cond. mode) — Determines the numeric interval at which the new
items are created, if ‘Condense Items’ is selected. If you type ‘5’ in this space,
the new items are created five numbers apart in sequence, leaving four unused
item numbers between each new item.
Delete Range
Deletes items from a specified range. Use this feature to delete a single item
or multiple items, depending upon the selections made in the drop-down lists,
as shown in Figure 1-7:
Figure 1-7 Delete Range

Select the first item in the series in the ‘From’ drop-down list and the last item
in the series in the ‘To’ drop-down list. If you only want to delete a single
Manager
Aloha
item, select the same item in both drop-down lists. Click OK to delete the
selected items. When deleting a single item, it is much faster to do so from the
function tab in which the item is listed.
When copying items or ranges, or when deleting items or

ranges, it is important to exercise extreme care, and to
plan changes carefully. All changes made using database
editing functions are permanent.

Navigation Options
In addition to menu selections, the Aloha system provides navigation bar (nav
bar) or keyboard access to functions and user tools. The nav bar is located on
the left of the TableService screen. It includes only groups and shortcuts that
have been assigned to it (shared and specific to the employee), unlike the
TableService menu, which contains all functions to which you have access. A
function can be run from the nav bar or from the TableService menu.
Navigation Bar
The Aloha Manager navigation bar enables you to launch associated functions
as if the corresponding menu item were selected. The nav bar is displayed
upon login and holds groups which contain shortcuts to specific functions.
There are three different types of groups; user, shared, and user tools.
User groups are defined by employees for their own personal use. When the
employee logs in, the user-specific groups display on the nav bar. Every
employee may define user groups to display on the nav bar for their personal
use. However, the functions that can be added to the user group are deter-
mined by the security level to which they are assigned.
Shared groups are available to every employee that logs in to the system.
However, the functions to which the logged in employee does not have access
display as a padlock. Only employees assigned to a security level with the
Shared NavBar Configuration function selected can maintain shared groups.
Use the user tools group to access applications available on the back-office
system or a connected network. Microsoft Word and Excel are examples of
user tools. Only employees assigned to a security level with the User Tools
Configuration function selected can maintain the user tools group.

The advantage of declaring applications as user tools is they can be run
directly from the Tools menu, without leaving the Aloha Manager environ-
Manager
Aloha
ment. User tools can also be placed on the nav bar once they are added to the
Tools menu. For increased back-office security, set Aloha Manager up so that
it can not be shut down (it runs as a service immediately upon system start
up). Because all applications, whether they are Aloha software or not, can be
run from Aloha Manager, there is no reason to leave its controlled environ-
ment.
Customize the Navigation Bar

To access the navigation bar editor, select Tools > Customize from the menu
or right-click in the nav bar area and select Customize. The Customize Prop-
erties dialog box displays with up to three available subtabs, depending on
your security access, User Navigation Bar, Shared Navigation Bar, and User
Tools, as shown in Figure 1-8:
Figure 1-8 Customize Navigation Bar

User Navigation Bar Subtab
You may define groups to display on the nav bar for your own personal use.
This capability is defined by the security level to which you are assigned.
Groups — Contains a list of currently defined user groups.
New Group Button
Click New Group to create a new user group on the TableService nav bar.
Group Text — Holds the descriptive name of the user group that displays on
the user navigation bar.
Shortcut — Contains a list of currently defined shortcuts in the selected user

group.
New Shortcut Button
Click New Shortcut to create a new shortcut on the TableService nav bar.
Shortcut Text — Holds the descriptive name of the shortcut to display on the
user navigation bar.
Function — Lists the available functions for assignment to the user naviga-
tion bar. This list includes any user tools currently defined in the system.
Apply current settings as default for new users — Sets the selected user
navigation bar as a default for all new Aloha system users (i.e. employees
who have never logged in to the system before). This setting causes the sys-
tem to save the selected user navigation bar to the default user folder, \IBER-
DIR\Profiles\DefUser. New employees who log in to TableService have
access to this user navigation bar, in addition to any other default or shared
navigation bars that may be defined in the system.

Until a new employee logs in to TableService, there is no UsrNNNNN folder
for them under the Profiles folder. When the new employee logs in, this folder
Manager
Aloha
is created, with the employee number replacing the ‘N’ symbols in the folder
name. The system copies the NAVBAR.CFG file from the default user folder
(DefUsr) to the new employee’s user folder for use. All new User Navigation
Bars saved with the ‘default’ setting active become, by default, part of new
users nav bar configuration. New employees can then add shortcuts to their
nav bars, as needed.
New employees only have access to functions defined and made

available to them by their security levels.
To customize the user navigation bar:
1. Log in to TableService.
2. Select Tools > Customize from the menu or right-click in the nav bar
area and select Customize. The Customize Properties dialog box dis-
plays.
3. Click New Group, with the User Navigation Bar subtab selected. The
text 'New Group' displays in the Groups and Group text text boxes.
4. Select the 'New Group' text in the Group Text text box and type a
descriptive name to assign to the user group.
5. Press Tab. Do not press Enter. The entered text displays in the
'Groups' and 'Group text' text boxes.
6. Click New Shortcut. The text 'New Shortcut' displays in the ‘Short-
cuts’ and ‘Shortcut Text’ text boxes.
7. Select the function to add to the user group from the Function drop-
down list. Remember, the functions displayed in this list are deter-
mined by the security level to which you are assigned. The function
name is placed in the 'Shortcuts', 'Shortcut Text', and 'Function' text
boxes.
8. Select the Apply current settings as default for new user check box
if you wish to make this navigation bar available by default for all
new employees (i.e. employees who have never logged in before).
9. Click Apply. The record is saved.
10. Repeat steps 3 through 9 until the desired functions are added.
11. Click OK to exit the Customize function and add the new functions to
the user nav bar.

Shared Navigation Bar Subtab
Click the Shared Navigation Bar subtab to establish the functions available to
every employee that logs in to the system (Figure 1-8).
Logged in employees have access to functions assigned to their

security level only. If the logged in employee does not have access
to a shared function, a padlock displays on the nav bar.
Groups — Displays currently installed shared groups.
New Group Button
Click New Group to create a new shared group.
Group Text — Holds a descriptive name for the selected shared group or the
group that is about to be created.
Shortcuts — Displays currently defined shortcuts in the shared group. When

defining a new shortcut, the text ‘New Shortcut’ displays.
New Shortcut Button
Click New Shortcut to create a new shared shortcut.
Shortcut Text — Holds a descriptive name for the shortcut to display in the
shared group.
Function — Lists the functions available for assignment to the shared group.
To customize the shared group:
1. Log in to TableService.
2. Select Tools > Customize from the menu or right-click in the nav bar
area and select Customize. The Customize Properties dialog box dis-
plays.
3. With the Shared Navigation Bar subtab selected, click New Group.
The text 'New Group' displays in the Groups and Group text text
boxes.

4. Select the 'New Group' text in the Group Text text box and type a
descriptive name to assign to the shared group.
Manager
Aloha
5. Press Tab. Do not press Enter. The entered text displays in the
'Groups' and 'Group text' text boxes.
6. Click New Shortcut. The text 'New Shortcut' displays in the Short-
cuts and Shortcut Text text boxes.
7. Select the function to add to the shared group from the Function
drop-down list. Remember, the functions displayed in this list are
determined by the security level to which you are assigned. The func-
tion name is placed in the 'Shortcuts', Shortcut Text', and 'Function'
text boxes.
8. Click Apply. The record is saved.
9. Repeat steps 3 through 7 until the desired functions are added.
10. Click OK to exit the Customize function and add the new functions to
the Shared nav bar.
User Tools Subtab

Click the User Tools subtab to add access in TableService to applications that
are available on the back-office computer or network. Microsoft Word and
Excel are examples of user tools. When applications are added using User
Tools, they display in the Tools menu and only employees assigned to a secu-
rity level with access to the Tools menu can access them. Once applications
are added to the Tools menu, they can also be added to the Shared or User
navigation bars.
As with other functions in the Aloha system, applications to which employees

have no security level access display as a padlock on the nav bar. Only
employees assigned to a security level with the User Tools Configuration
function selected can add, edit, or delete items in the user tools group.

Keyboard Support
In addition to the uniformity in functions and their subtabs, there are several
standard methods used to move around within subtabs, and for entering and
selecting data. The most common method is to click the left mouse button in
the desired setting or on the desired button. Keyboard support is also provided
for navigating within Aloha Manager function tabs. The following keystrokes
are used to navigate within Aloha Manager using the keyboard:
F4 — Displays the drop-down list for the active text box, if applicable.
F10 or Alt — Activates the menu bar so that the keyboard can be used to
select a menu command. Use the right or left arrows to make a menu selec-
tion.
F12 — Toggles between the HTML page and the open function tab(s).
Ctrl + right or left arrow — Scrolls through open function tabs.
Ctrl + Tab — Moves from subtab to subtab within a function.
Escape — Exits a function.
Tab — Moves forward in the settings on a subtab or dialog box.
Shift + Tab — Moves backward in the settings on a subtab or dialog box.
Space bar — Click a check box or option to activate/deactivate the setting, or

tab to the desired setting and press the SPACE bar to select or clear it.
Up and Down arrows — Moves forward or backward through the records in

the database file.
In addition to these functions, the following keyboard shortcuts common to

most Windows-based software are available in Aloha Manager:
Alt+(A) — Selects a function on an active menu or menu bar. Hold down Alt
and press the underlined letter in a menu to select the item.

Ctrl+X — Removes (cuts) highlighted data and copies it to the Windows
Clipboard for subsequent use in another location.
Manager
Aloha
Ctrl+C — Copies highlighted data to the Windows Clipboard for subsequent
use in another location.
Ctrl+V — Pastes information from the Windows Clipboard to an active loca-

tion, with the cursor designating the point of insertion.

HTML Pages
TableService dedicates the center right portion of the Aloha Manager start up
screen to host HTML pages, and enables you to switch between the active
function tabs and the HTML page associated with your login.
Use this feature to: Provide managers with access to important information
such as restaurant policies and procedures or to keep them updated with cur-
rent news from the corporate office; run a local version of the company's
intranet; provide link to Internet sites, assuming the site has Internet access.
With Enterprise, sites are generally limited to accessing the company's aloha
enterprise.com web site only. However, if you prefer to give your employees
wider access, you can add additional links to the employee's start up HTML
page.
You can assign a different HTML page to display for each security level
defined in Back Office Security Level maintenance. Security Levels are then
assigned to employees using the Back Office Security subtab located in Main-
tenance > Labor > Employees.
For example, you can assign a MANAGER.HTM page to the Manager secu-
rity level. Corporate can be responsible for updating this file with current
news, etc. and downloading this file to each site. This file can also contain
links to other HTML pages, such as POLICIES.HTM, and CURRENT-
NEWS.HTM, which are also sent to the sites. When the manager logs in, the
MANAGER.HTM page displays. They click on the Policies link to access
POLICIES.HTM, and CURRENTNEWS.HTM to learn any information cor-
porate wishes to pass on to them.
The default HTML page is distributed by Aloha Technologies as part of the

installation and is stored in a file called MAIN.HTM in the \ALOHA\HTML
subdirectory. This HTML page displays when there is no-one logged in to

TableService, and also for employees assigned to a security level that does not
have an HTML page specified.
Manager
Aloha
The default HTML page (spinning globe) distributed by Aloha
Technologies is great for demonstrating the system. However, if you
perform dial-in support, we recommend you replace it with an
HTML page that contains generic bitmaps.
In addition to security level-specific HTML pages, you may wish to designate

a custom designed default HTML page. Because security is obtained during
the log on process, the default HTML page generally contains generic bitmaps
or graphics and does not include any type of links. The default HTML page
must be named MAIN.HTM. If you create your own default HTML page, you
must rename the current default page, and name the new page MAIN.HTM
for it to display in Aloha Manager.

Functions
This chapter discusses the functions used to edit deposits and create
employee schedules. In addition, third-party accounting applications
are accessed through Functions.
Edit Deposits..................................................................................... 2-4

Edit Punches..................................................................................... 2-6
Edit Prior Days’ Time ..................................................................... 2-7
Other Wages................................................................................ 2-13
Basic Labor Scheduler.................................................................... 2-18
File Menu ..................................................................................... 2-19
Edit Menu..................................................................................... 2-19
Print Schedule Reports................................................................ 2-22
Assign Checkouts ........................................................................... 2-25
Team Tip Distribution...................................................................... 2-29
Screen Components .................................................................... 2-30
Column Headings ........................................................................ 2-32
Run Team Tip Distribution ........................................................... 2-33
Print Reports................................................................................ 2-39
House Accounts.............................................................................. 2-44
Payment Reconciliation .................................................................. 2-49
Export ............................................................................................. 2-50
Create ADP Pay File.................................................................... 2-51
Create ReMACS RealWorld Pay File .......................................... 2-52
Create ReMACS Menu File ......................................................... 2-53
Create Coconut Code Payroll File ............................................... 2-55
Create Coconut Code Daily Sales Files ...................................... 2-56
Create Coconut Code Sales Mix File........................................... 2-57
Create Paychex Extract File ........................................................ 2-58
Create PayUSA Extract File ........................................................ 2-59
ICVerify ........................................................................................... 2-60
Settle Current Batch .................................................................... 2-60
Print Settlement ........................................................................... 2-61 Chapter
2
2 – 2 Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3
The Functions menu accesses such features as editing deposits, assigning
checkouts, and employee scheduling. In Functions, you also interface with
third-party accounting applications.
Select Functions from the menu bar, as shown in Figure 2-1:
Functions
Figure 2-1 Functions Main Menu
In this chapter you learn how to:
• Edit and create deposits.

• Edit and assign punches and paid time off (PTO).
• Edit and create employee schedules.
• Edit and assign checkouts.
• Edit and distribute tips to employees.
• Edit and post to house accounts.
• Interface with third-party accounting applications.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Functions 2–3

Edit Deposits
To make adjustments to deposits, select Functions > Edit Deposits. A Select
Date dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 2-2:
Figure 2-2 Select Date
Select the date to adjust from the drop-down list. Click OK and the Edit
Deposits screen displays, as shown in Figure 2-3:
Figure 2-3 Edit Deposits
All deposits for the selected date display in the Edit Deposits window. The
total dollar amount of the deposits for that date displays at the bottom of the
Edit Deposits dialog box.
2–4 Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Add Button
Click Add to add a deposit for the selected date. The Edit Deposit Entry dia-
log box displays, as shown in Figure 2-4:
Functions
Figure 2-4 Edit Deposit Entry
Amount — Holds the deposit amount.
Description — Holds a description for the deposit.
Enter an amount and a description and click OK. The new deposit is automat-
ically added to the selected date.
Edit Button
Select the deposit in the Edit Deposits window and click Edit. The Edit
Deposit Entry dialog box displays (Figure 2-4). Edit the amount and/or the
description of the deposit. Click OK to save the change.
Delete Button
Select the deposit to delete in the Edit Deposits window and click Delete. The
deposit is automatically deleted.

Edit Punches
Edit punches enables you to manually edit, add, or delete an employee's
punched time for prior days. Punches refer to an employee’s clock in and out
times, hence the phrase, ‘punching the time clock’. The Edit Punches feature
explained in this section can only be performed on prior days with available
subdirectories. Punches made for the current day are managed from the FOH
Refer to “Other
Wage Types” under Special Functions, provided you have appropriate access rights to make
on page 4-48 in Chapter 4, such entries for your employees. The entry does not display in the BOH until
Labor Maintenance Func- a new business day occurs.
tions, for more informa-
tion.
Once they are defined, entries for the Other Wages feature can be performed
in the bottom portion of the Edit Prior Days’ Time and Attendance screen,
shown in Figure 2-5. This enables manual additions, edits and deletions for
paid time off (PTO), as well as system generated entries that the employee is
due. Paid time off may include jury duty, sick time, vacation time, or any
other time that your establishment may designate. This time may be paid in
Refer to “Other
Wages” on the form of hours, dollars, or both. System generated entries populate the
page 2-13, for more infor- Other Wages portion of the screen based on the shifts and breaks rules defined
mation on adding and edit- in the Labor group section of Maintenance > Store Settings.
ing PTO.
Your wage types and pay procedures in general should

reflect the company policies defined and supported by
your establishment.

Edit Prior Days’ Time
Select Functions > Edit Punches to display the Edit Punches function tab, as
shown in Figure 2-5:
Functions
Click a column heading to
sort the information on
the screen by that heading.
Figure 2-5 Edit Prior Days’ Time and Other Wages
The Edit Punches function tab is split into two sections. The Edit Punches for
Prior Days section is devoted to punched time functionality. Non-punched
PTO and system generated time for shifts and breaks are managed in the Other Refer to the
Wages section of the function tab. “Employee
Settings Subtab” on page 3-
If 'Auto Clockout' is selected on the Employee Settings subtab located in 22 in Chapter 3, Store Set-
tings, for more information.
Maintenance > Store Settings > Labor group and an employee forgets to clock
out, the employee is clocked out by the EOD process. The employee hours
reflect in the selection list for the day.

If 'Auto Clockout' is not selected and an employee forgets to clock out, the
employee’s shift will not reflect in the selection list for the day. Before these
hours can be edited, the employee must clock out and an EOD must be pro-
cessed. The employee hours are posted to the next business day and can then
be edited by selecting this date from the selection list.
If the '24 Hour Operation' check box is selected on the End of Day subtab
located in Maintenance > Store Settings > System group, the EOD clocks out
all employees who are clocked in, and then clocks them back in when the
EOD is complete. Therefore, even if 'Auto Clockout' is not selected, if an
employee forgets to clock out, the employee's hours reflect in the Edit
Punches function tab.
You can edit an employee’s time for the number of prior weeks set
on the Employee Settings subtab located in Maintenance > Store
Settings > Labor group.
Date — Specifies the date in which you need to make adjustments to time and
attendance information from the drop-down list. All time and attendance
information for the selected date displays.
To edit punches for the current day, select the Special Functions >
Employee > Edit Clock-In or Edit Breaks button from the FOH
screen. You must have the appropriate access level to perform this
function.
When you click Add or Edit, the Edit Shift Data dialog box displays providing
the ability to add or edit the following information for an employee’s punched
time:
Employee — Displays a list of employees for selection in a drop-down list.

Time In — Holds the time the employee clocked in, hours and minutes, using
a 36-hour clock (Hours - 36, Minutes - 60). Using a 36-hour clock, the date of
business is extended by 12 hours so employee hours are accounted for during
the same date of business. For example, the date of business is 01/01/01. After
midnight, the date of business remains 01/01/01, but the system date becomes
01/02/01. For an employee who clocks out after midnight (i.e., 2:00 a.m.), to
ensure the hours are posted to the corresponding date of business (01/01/01),
the clock-out time must be entered using the 36-hour clock. A time after mid-
night is specified by adding 24 to the hour; therefore, 26:00 is the equivalent
of 2:00 a.m. the following day. When the EOD has completed successfully,
Functions
the date of business is changed and once again coincides with the system date.
Time Out — Holds the time the employee clocked out using a 36 hour clock.
Job Code — Displays predefined job codes for employees in a drop-down

list. This is controlled by the 'Punch Edit — Limit Job Codes' check box on
the Employee Settings subtab located in Maintenance > Store Settings >
Labor group. If this check box is not selected, all defined job codes are avail-
able for selection.
Rate — Displays the hourly wage for the employee.
Tips — Displays any declared tips. This amount must be at least as much as
the charge tip amount collected by the employee.
Store — Determines the store location to be charged with the employee's

hours. This field can only be changed if you are licensed for SuperSite.
Tippable Sales — Generated by the system and is not available for edit.

Add and Edit Buttons
Select a date from the ‘Date’ drop-down list (Figure 2-5) and click Add or
Edit. The Edit Shift Data dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 2-6:
Figure 2-6 Edit Shift Data
Here you can add time to the selected employee or edit the employee's time
out or time in. In edit mode, you can only enter information into fields that are
active.

Breaks Button
To add or edit a break, select the employee's name in the Edit Prior Days'
Time and Attendance window, then click Breaks. The Edit Breaks dialog box
displays, as shown in Figure 2-7:
Functions
Figure 2-7 Edit Breaks
Either the ‘Allow Paid Breaks’ or the ‘Allow Unpaid Breaks’

check boxes on the Job Code subtab must be selected to add or
adjust breaks. These check boxes are enabled only if ‘Use Break
Rules’ is selected in Store Settings > Labor group > Breaks subtab.
To access the Job Code subtab, select Maintenance > Labor > Job
Codes function tab.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Functions 2 – 11

Edit Break/Add or Edit Buttons
Click Add or Edit to display the Edit Break Record dialog box, as shown in
Figure 2-8:
Figure 2-8 Edit Break Record
Time In — Holds the clock in time for the selected employee using a 36-hour
clock.
Time Out — Holds the clock out time for the selected employee using a 36-
hour clock.
Paid — Indicates whether it is a paid break.
Enter the information and click Save.
Edit Breaks/Delete Button
To delete existing break information, select the employee break and click
Delete.

Other Wages
There are two types of other wages; user defined and manually applied, and
system generated and applied. You may tell the difference at a glance by look-
ing at the Review column, located at the far right of the Other Wages portion
of the screen, shown in Figure 2-5. An asterisk displays if the entry is system
generated, while the column is blank if it is a manual entry.
The Other Wages portion of the screen enables manual additions, edits and
Functions
deletions for paid time off (PTO), as well as edits and deletions for system
generated entries that the employee is due. Paid time off may include jury
duty, sick time, vacation time, or any other time that your establishment may
designate. This time may be paid in the form of hours, dollars, or both. Sys-
tem generated entries populate the Other Wages portion of the screen based on
the shifts and breaks rules defined in the Labor Group section of Maintenance
> Store Settings. System generated entries may include:
• Split Shift Premium

• 2nd Shift Minimum
• Meal Period Breaks
• Rest Period Breaks
Operators in California and other states that have specific laws regulating
wages, hours, and working conditions may find the functionality of the sys-
tem generated entries particularly useful. This functionality is reviewed in
more detail in Chapter 4, Store Settings, under Labor Group, Shifts and
Breaks subtab.

Select Functions > Edit Punches to display the Edit Punches function tab, as
Figure 2-9 Edit Prior Days’ Time > Other Wages
The Other Wages functionality is located in the lower section of the function
tab.
Employee — Displays a list of employees for selection in a drop-down list.
Hours — Specifies the total hours that employee is due for the corresponding
wage type. For example, a typical entry for one day’s pay of vacation time
might show ‘8’ hours.
You must enter five 8 hour entries, one for each day, to cover a 40
hour vacation.

Amount — Specifies the total dollar amount that employee is due for the cor-
responding wage type. For example, a typical entry for an employee who
earns $6.00 an hour and who will be paid for four hours of sick time is $24.00.
Job Code — Displays predefined job codes for employees in a drop-down

list. This is controlled by the 'Punch Edit — Limit Job Codes' check box on
the Employee Settings subtab located in Maintenance > Store Settings >
Labor group. If this check box is not selected, all defined job codes are avail-
able for selection.
Functions
Refer to Chap-
Wage Type — Displays predefined wage types in a drop-down list. Defaults ter 4, Labor
to the first defined wage type. Wage types can represent sick time, vacation, Maintenance Functions, for
jury duty, or any other predefined type designated by your establishment. more information on wage
types.
Store — Determines the store location to be charged with the employee's

hours. This field can be changed only if you are licensed for SuperSite. This
displays as the first store defined, if using SuperSite, or ‘Default Store’ for
non-SuperSite.
Review — Designates a system generated entry, if populated with an asterisk.

Designates a user applied entry if blank. The asterisk remains until the user
edits or reviews the record.
Before you add a record for other wages, you must set up the corre-
sponding wage type in Maintenance > Labor > Other Wages.

Add or Edit Buttons
Select a date from the ‘Date’ drop-down list at the top of the Edit Punches
function tab (Figure 2-9). Select a record to edit and click Edit, or click Add to
add a new record for that date. The Edit Other Wage Data dialog box displays,
Figure 2-10 Edit Other Wage Data
Pay Rate — Displays the pay rate for the selected job code.
Refer to “Other
Wage Types”
on page 4-48 in Chapter 4, A system generated other wage entry cannot be added
Labor Maintenance Func-
by the user. You may edit or delete the record. However,
tions, for more informa-
tion on system generated it is recommended that you do not delete any records
other wage entries. that pertain to the wage and pay policies supported by
your establishment.
Total — Displays the total pay rate for the selected job code times the number
of hours entered, or displays the amount in dollars entered. If more than one
day is selected in the date range, the calculation of this field will be multiplied
by the number of days. For example, If five days of vacation are added at the
pay rate of $5.25 and two days have been selected, the total in this field will
be $52.50.

Delete Button
Click Delete to delete an other wage entry. An entry could be system gener-
ated due to defined labor codes, common in states such as California. If an
entry is deleted, it is recommended that managers print the entry and have the
employee sign it to show an agreement. This protects the restaurant from
labor disputes.
Functions

Basic Labor Scheduler
Basic Labor Scheduler is a built-in feature to the Aloha system that enables
the creation of weekly employee schedules. Schedules can also be copied and/
or edited once they have been created.
An employee scheduler, such as Basic Scheduler, is a required fea-

Refer to Chap-
ter 3, Store Set-
ture when ‘Use Punctuality’ is enabled on the Scheduling subtab
tings, for more information located in Maintenance > Store Settings > Labor group.
on scheduling employees.
If the 'Use Schedule' or the ‘Use Punctuality’ check box is selected on the
Scheduling subtab located in Maintenance > Store Settings > Labor group,
Basic Labor Scheduler or Aloha Labor Scheduler must be in use. If 'Use
Schedule' is not selected, the Basic Labor Scheduler feature can still be used
to create schedules, if the manager has access to this feature, although it
would not affect employees on the Front of House (FOH).
Give managers access to Employee Scheduling in Back Office Secu-

Refer to “Back
Office Secu-
rity Levels located in Maintenance > Labor > Back Office Security
rity Levels” on page 4-45 in Levels.
Chapter 4, Labor Mainte-
nance Functions, for more
information. Select Functions > Basic Labor Scheduler to access the Employee Scheduling
menu, as shown in Figure 2-11:
Figure 2-11 Employee Scheduling

File Menu
The File drop-down menu contains two available choices: Print Setup and
Exit. Print Setup opens a standard Windows Printer Setup dialog box so that a
defined printer can be selected and the paper orientation, source, and size can
be set. Select Exit from the File menu to close Employee Scheduling.
Edit Menu
Functions
The Edit drop-down menu allows employee work schedules to be created,
copied and edited. If a schedule has not previously been created, the Edit
Schedule function is used to create a new schedule. If there are existing sched-
ules in the system, a copy of one can be made to use as a future schedule.
Changes and updates can be made to new schedules as well as existing or cop-
ied schedules. To access this feature, select Edit > Edit Schedule, as shown in
Figure 2-12:
Figure 2-12 Edit Schedule Selection

Copy Schedule
The Copy Schedule function enables you to copy an existing schedule to be
used as a future schedule. To copy an existing schedule, select Copy Schedule
from the Edit Menu. The Copy Week dialog box displays, as shown in Figure
2-13:
Figure 2-13 Copy Week
Select a date in the 'From' drop-down list, then select a date in the 'To' drop-
down list and click OK. The selected schedule is automatically copied.
Edit Schedule
The Edit Schedule function enables the creation or modification of new
schedules. To create a new work schedule, select Edit Schedule from the Edit
menu. The Select Week dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 2-14:
Figure 2-14 Select Week
The ‘Day of Business’, ‘Open Time’, and ‘First Day of Week’ set-
tings are all located on the Date/Time subtab located in Mainte-
nance > Store Settings > System group.

Select the date of the first day of the work week from the 'Week' drop-down
list and select OK. Sunday is the default setting for the first day of the week.
However, the first day of the schedule and the start time should correspond to
the first day of the week for the restaurant.
If the first employee needs to be scheduled at 6:00 a.m., 'Open Time' needs to
be set to 06:00, therefore, causing the Labor Scheduler screen to start with
6:00 a.m. If the default setting is used, all schedules begin on Sunday and end
on Saturday and are saved using Sunday's date. Click OK to display the Labor
Schedule dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-15:
Functions
days of the week
Figure 2-15 Labor Schedule
Days of Week — Determines the day of the week in which you are working.
Select a day of the week from the row of days at the top left of the screen.
Refer to Chap-
Job — Holds predefined job codes in the drop-down list. Related buttons for ter 4, Labor
job codes display next to the list. Employees assigned to the selected job code Maintenance Functions, for
display in the list box on the left of the screen. more information on Job
Codes.
Hours — Displays a running total of the hours for the selected day and week.

Wages — Displays a running total of the wages for the selected day and
week. Schedules are set up by day and job code.
Time Slice — Represents each employee's schedule, using a horizontal bar.
To create a time slice, position the cursor, using the mouse, to the right of the
employee's name at the desired start time. Click the left mouse button and
drag the cursor to the right until it is aligned with the desired end time and
release the mouse button. The time slice appears in blue for the selected
employee.
A time slice can be modified in length, or it can be moved to another

employee. Click the time slice to modify. The color turns to green, indicating
it is selected and in edit mode. To modify the length, place the cursor on the
start or end time until it becomes a double arrow, then click and drag to the
left or right to lengthen or shorten the time slice. To move the time slice to
another employee, place the cursor in the middle of the time slice until it
becomes a hand-shaped cursor. Click and drag the time slice to the new loca-
tion, and release the mouse button. Double-click a time slice to delete it, and
respond to the 'delete shift' confirmation prompt.
If an employee has more than one job code and is scheduled under a different
job code than the one currently being edited, the time slice displays in gray
and cannot be edited.
Print Schedule Reports

The Reports menu enables the production of printed reports for labor sched-
ules. Once selected, reports are sent directly to the printer defined in File >
Print Setup in Employee Scheduling.

The Employee Scheduling choice has three report format options: Regular,
With Wages, and By Job Code, as shown in Figure 2-16:
Functions
Figure 2-16 Reports Menu Format Options
Regular
Contains hourly information and can be used as a posted schedule.
With Wages
Contains estimated labor costs and is often used as a management tool.
By Job Code
Groups the report contents by job code.

All Scheduled Labor reports list scheduled labor for the week in dollars.
Select any one of the reporting options and a prompt for ‘Select Week to
Print’ displays, as shown in Figure 2-17:
Figure 2-17 Select Week to Print
Week — Displays dates for selection in the drop-down list.
Hide Clock Out Hours and Total Hours — Omits the employee schedule
and total hours from the report.

Assign Checkouts
Assign Checkouts is a management tool that enables you to group checkouts
by shift, area of the restaurant, or any other logical division of labor in the res-
taurant. This is useful for balancing checkout totals throughout the day.
Checkouts are assigned to checkout buckets that are created when the system
is installed. Checkout buckets are named by shifts (Shift A, Shift B, etc.), by
Refer to Chap-
meal periods (Lunch, Dinner, etc.), by areas of the restaurant, (Drive-thru,
Functions
ter 3, Store Set-
Counter, Patio, etc.), or any logical grouping of responsibility. Many Aloha tings, for more information
TableService installations use meal periods or shifts, but the choice is left to on Checkout Buckets.
the restaurant.
Assign Checkouts is also used to produce a printed report showing cash bal-
ances for each checkout bucket.
Select Assign Checkouts from the Functions menu. The Select Date prompt
Figure 2-18 Select Date Prompt
Select a date from the drop-down list and click OK.

The system reads the appropriate data files for the specified date and displays
the names of all employees and their assigned checkout buckets, as shown in
Figure 2-19:
Figure 2-19 Assigned Checkout Buckets
Assign Button
Click Assign to modify checkout bucket assignments for the selected

employee. The secondary dialog box listing the available Checkout Bucket
choices displays, as shown in Figure 2-20:
Figure 2-20 Checkout Bucket

Not Assigned — Indicates if the selected employee is assigned to a checkout
bucket. To assign an employee to a checkout bucket, click the desired bucket,
then click OK. The assignment is reflected in the selection list in the main dia-
log box.
View Button
Click View to access the Select Bucket to Print dialog box, as shown in Figure
2-21:
Functions
Figure 2-21 Select Bucket to Print
All — Includes all checkout buckets on the report.
In Figure 2-21, Breakfast, Lunch and Dinner are the defined checkout buck-
ets and the fields may vary depending upon the locations.

Select the checkout buckets to view on the report and click OK. The Preview
Report screen displays, as shown in Figure 2-22:
Figure 2-22 Preview Report
Print Button
After all assignments are made, click Print to print a report of all assignments
and corresponding cash balances due for the specified date. This report can be
used to verify and cross-check checkout responsibilities and cash balances.

Team Tip Distribution
Team Tip Distribution enables a manager to access guest checks with non-
cash tips and auto gratuities and distribute them to employees in a team ser-
vice environment. The team service environment is where several servers log
in using a specific job code with the intention of serving one or more tables
together (team servers), and the non-cash tip and auto gratuity is distributed
equally among them (service split). For example, a banquet requires multiple
servers to work together. There is usually only one check presented for pay-
Functions
ment and the non-cash tip and auto gratuity is distributed equally among the
servers.
This section
discusses the
To provide flexibility and control when distributing the non-cash gratuity, rev- Team Tip Distribution pro-
enue centers for each team service area, such as Banquet, must be created. cedures. Refer to the Spe-
Tables and job codes are assigned to the team service revenue centers, and cial Features Guide for
setup requirements.
employees are assigned to team service job codes, therefore, controlling the
employees available for the service split. For example, a party of 20 is
assigned to the Banquet revenue center and four servers are clocked in using
the Banquet team service job code with the intention of serving a party in
cooperation with each other. One guest check is opened for the party. The
server that closes the check is considered the ‘owner’ of the check, however,
each team service server can add items to the check.
After the End-of-Day process, using Team Tip Distribution, the manager can
access the Banquet revenue center, select the guest check, add or remove
employees for the service split, and distribute the non-cash tip and auto gratu-
ity.

Screen Components
Select Team Tip Distribution from the Functions menu to display the DOB
Selection dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-23:
Figure 2-23 DOB Selection
All dates available to view display in the 'Select Date of Business' list box.
Process Button
Click Process to process the tips and display sales by server, with non-cash
tips and gratuities. Here you can select a revenue center and assign tips to the
servers.
Print Report Button
Click Print Report to open the Team Service Tip Split Report dialog box. Here
you can select a range of dates or a single date to include in the report.
Quit Button
Click Quit to close Team Tip Distribution.
Select a date and click Process. The Check Association screen displays,
shown in Figure 2-24, with the checks entered on the selected day of business.

The checks are grouped by the revenue centers previously defined in Mainte-
nance > System > Revenue Centers:
Functions
Figure 2-24 Check Association
Revenue Center — Displays a list of available revenue centers. Select the

desired revenue center from the drop-down list to view the checks entered in
that revenue center of the restaurant.
Team Servers must be assigned to a job code with ‘Can Get Check’ Refer to Chapter
selected. 4, Labor Mainte-
information.
Servers Presently on Check(s) — Displays a list of all servers who entered
an item on the guest check. Servers can be added to this box or removed.
Servers Available to Add — Displays the employees who clocked in on the

date of business the check was entered. These are the available employees to
add to the tip distribution.
Approved for Processing — Approves the selected checks for tip distribu-
tion.

Column Headings
The menu bar is divided into column headings. Click a column heading to sort
the checks by that particular column. Click the same column heading again to
sort the column in reverse order. For example, click 'Check #' to sort by check
number.
Date — Displays the date each check was opened.
Check # — Displays the check numbers.
Owner — Displays the owner of the check. The owner is the server who
closed the check.
Open Time — Displays the time the check was opened.
F&B $ — Displays the total sales after tax.
Service $ — Displays the auto gratuity added to each check.
Gratuity $ — Displays all non-cash tips applied to the check. For example,
credit card tips and house account tips.
Gross $ — Displays the F&B + Service $ + Gratuity $ to equal the gross.
Split $ — Displays the amount of tips each server will receive on the check.
Split $ = (Service$ + Gratuity$)/ Employees.
Emp's — Displays the number of employees who are splitting the tips and
gratuities on the check. This number is equal to the number of employees in
the Servers Presently on Check(s) window in the lower left corner of the
screen.
OK'd — Displays the status for each check. A 'Y' indicates the manager has
approved the distribution on this particular check. An 'N' indicates the man-
ager has not approved the tip distribution on the check.

Refresh Checks Buttons
Click Refresh Checks to sort all checks by check number. This is the default
sorting method for checks.
Add Button
Select an employee in the 'Servers Available to Add' list box and click Add to
move them to the 'Servers Presently on Check(s)' list box.
Functions
Remove Button
Select an employee from the 'Servers Presently on Check(s)' list box and click
Remove to move the employee to the 'Servers Available to Add' list box.
Share These Tips Button
Click Share These Tips to evenly distribute the tips and gratuities among mul-
tiple checks. To select more than one check, hold down CTRL and select the
individual checks. To select more than one consecutive check, select the first
check, hold down the Shift key, and select the last check.
Run Team Tip Distribution

To distribute tips among team servers:
1. Select Functions > Team Tip Distribution to display the Team Ser-
vice - DOB Selection dialog box (Figure 2-23).
2. Select a single date to process and click Process. The Team Service -
Check Association screen displays (Figure 2-24).
The Team Service - Check Association screen defaults to the low-

est defined revenue center number.

3. Select a revenue center from the Revenue Center drop-down list.
The available checks display in the 'Select a Check for Association'
window, as shown in Figure 2-25:
Figure 2-25 Checks Available for Revenue Center
4. Select a check or multiple checks and make the necessary adjust-

ments, such as add or remove servers. (Refer to the Check Adjust-
ment section for instructions.)
5. With the check still selected, select the Approved for Processing
check box to approve the gratuity split among the servers. This action
changes the N in the OK’d column to a Y.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 until all checks for each revenue center are
approved for processing. The process is not complete until all checks
have a status of 'Y' in the 'OK'd' column.
7. Click Exit to return to the Team Service - DOB Selection dialog box.
8. Click Print Report to print the Team Service Tip Share Report.
(Refer to the Print Report section for instructions.)
9. Repeat steps 2 through 8 until each date is processed.
10. Click Quit to exit.

Check Adjustments
It may be necessary to make check adjustments before approving a check for
processing. For example, servers can be added and removed from checks
before approving the check for processing.
If an adjustment is made after a check is approved for processing,

the ‘OK’d status changes to an ‘N’. You must reselect the check
and select ‘Approved for Processing’ again.
Functions
To add a server to a check for inclusion in the tip distribution:
1. Select a check. A list of team servers displays in the 'Servers Pres-

ently on Check(s)' and the 'Servers Available to Add windows'.
2. Select a team server in the Servers Available to Add window. The
<< Add button is activated, as shown in Figure 2-26:
Figure 2-26 Server Available to Add

3. Click <<Add and the server is moved to the Servers Presently on
Check(s) window, as shown in Figure 2-27:
Figure 2-27 Server Added to Presently on Check
To remove a server from a check for exclusion in the tip distribution:
1. Select a check. A list of team servers displays in the 'Servers Pres-

ently on Check(s)' and the 'Servers Available to Add' window.

2. Select a team server in the Servers Presently on Check(s) window.
The Remove>> button is activated, as shown in Figure 2-28:
Functions
Figure 2-28 Remove Server Presently on Check
3. Click Remove>> and the server is moved to the Servers Available to

Add window, as shown in Figure 2-29:
Figure 2-29 Removed Server is Available to Add

To share the tips among multiple checks:
1. Select two or more checks at the same time. To do this, hold down
CTRL and select each check. The Share These Tips button is acti-
vated, as shown in Figure 2-30:
Figure 2-30 Share these Tips
2. Click Share These Tips to distribute the tips among all employees on
the selected checks, as shown in Figure 2-31:
Figure 2-31 Tips Shared Among Employees

If there is a fractional amount left over after the split, it is pooled
and given to the house.
Print Reports
Reports are printed and viewed from the Team Tip Service Tip Split Report
dialog box.
Functions
Select Team Tip Distribution from the Functions drop-down list to display the
DOB Selection dialog box (Figure 2-23).
Print Report Button
Click Print Report to view the Team Service Tip Split Report dialog box, as
Figure 2-32 Team Service Tip Split Report

Select a date, or multiple dates, to view or print. To select multiple dates, click
each date to select. To remove a date from the selection, click it again.
All checks must be approved before a report can be printed. Subse-

quent entries on the check require manager approval.
Settings Button
Click Settings to access the Team Service Tip Split Report Settings dialog box
shown in Figure 2-33, where you can change the sort order of the report
Figure 2-33 Team Service Tip Split Report Settings
Sort By
Server — Select Server to sort the report by the server assigned to the check.
This report lists the amount of tips distributed to the individual server.
Check — Select Check to sort the report by the check number. The report
lists the checks in numeric order and the servers who were assigned gratuity
and the amount of the gratuity split among the servers.

OK Button
Click OK to return to the Team Service Tip Split Report dialog box (Figure 2-
32).
View Button
Click View to open the Preview Report dialog box, shown in Figure 2-34, to
view the selected range of dates or a single date by server or check:
Functions
report title report page vertical scroll bar
horizontal
scroll bar
toolbar
exit enlarge and

reduce status bar
move forward/backward in print the
the report report current view
magnification
Figure 2-34 Team Service Tip Share Report
Print Button
Click Print Page to print the report to the default Windows printer.

The arrow buttons enable you to scroll up and down in the report. Click the
Magnifying Glass button to enlarge or reduce the report.
Sample Reports
Figure 2-35 displays a sample tip share report sorted by server number:
Figure 2-35 Tip Share Report by Server Number

Figure 2-36 displays a sample tip share report sorted by check:
Functions
Figure 2-36 Tip Share Report by Check

House Accounts
House Accounts lets you manage house account activity by applying credits,
payments, and debits to an account.
Select Functions > Post to House Account to display the Post to House
Account function tab, as shown in Figure 2-37:
Figure 2-37 Post to House Account
Select ‘Payment’, ‘Audit’, or ‘Debit’ before entering an

amount in the ‘Amount’ text box. This prevents the incor-
rect display of the running balance.
Account — Displays a list of predefined house accounts.
Amount — Specifies the amount to post to the account.
Payment — Indicates a payment is being posted to the house account

Credit — Indicates a reduction, other than a payment, is being posted to the
house account.
Debit — Indicates a debit is being posted to the house account.
Current Balance — Displays the current balance of the account.
New Balance — Displays the new balance of the account, once the current
transaction is applied.
Functions
Post Transactions to a House Account
Payments, credits, and debits can be posted to a house account for any day
from the BOH. This is usually done when the customer makes a payment or
credit to the account, however the credit is posted to the customer’s balance,
not to a particular check.
Select Functions > Post to House Account, as shown in Figure 2-38:
Figure 2-38 Post to House Account Path

The Post Payment to House Account dialog box displays, as shown in Figure
2-39:
Figure 2-39 Post Payment to House Account
To post a transaction to a house account:
1. Select a predefined house account name in the Account drop-down

list and press Enter.
2. Enter the amount to post to the account in the Amount text box.
3. Select ONE of the following options for the account. The amount is
reflected in the ‘Current Balance’ and ‘New Balance’ text boxes.
Payment — Indicates a payment is being posted to the house

account.
Credit — Indicates a reduction, other than a payment, is being posted

to the house account.
Debit — Indicates a debit is being posted to the house account.
4. Click OK and Done to exit the Post Payment to House Account dia-
log box.

Print House Account Invoices
You can print an invoice for a house account for distribution.
To print an invoice for a house account:
1. Select Reports > House Accounts, as shown in Figure 2-40:
Functions
Figure 2-40 House Account Invoice Path

The Print House Accounts Invoice dialog box displays, as shown in
Figure 2-41:
Figure 2-41 Print House Accounts Invoice
2. If applicable, click Balance to consolidate all existing transactions on

the accounts and create balance forward totals (display on statements
as a previous balance). This is normally done after printing statements
for the current month. Infrequent consolidation creates long state-
ments, and premature consolidation drops transaction details from
current statements.
3. Select an account from the list and click Print. The report is printed
to the local printer.
4. Click Done to exit the Print House Accounts dialog box.

Payment Reconciliation
Payment Reconciliation provides a simple automated method of reconciling
cash drawers. This functionality is an enhancement to the 'Must Declare Cash'
function by defining the requirements of how the employee declares the pay-
ments they received. For example, the employee can be required to enter the
transaction detail for a particular type of credit card or total of all transactions
for that credit card. A calculator is provided to assist in counting cash and
non-cash payments. This feature can be set up to run from the FOH, or from
Functions
the BOH for additional security.
Refer to the
Special Fea-
A variance level can be specified for an accumulation of cash tender types tures Guide for information
while non-cash tender types can require the employee to enter total amounts on setting up Payment Rec-
of itemized transactions per tender type. The difference between the entered onciliation.
amounts and the system-calculated amounts must be within these specifica-

tions prior to the completion of a checkout. If an employee exceeds a speci-
fied number of checkout attempts, a message displays and a manager is
required to complete the reconciliation.
The Payment Reconciliation command is not available unless it is set up to

run from the BOH. Refer to the Payment Reconciliation section of the Special
Features Guide, for information on running this function.

Refer to the
Export
“Electronic
Payroll Settings Subtab” on The Export submenu enables export files for use with third-party accounting
page 3-33 of Chapter 3,
Store Settings, for more
applications to be created.
information.
Select Functions > Export from the menu bar, as shown in Figure 2-42:
Figure 2-42 Export Menu

Create ADP Pay File
Select Create ADP Pay File. The ADP dialog box, shown in Figure 2-43,
prompts for the date(s) to use for creating the export file:
Functions
Figure 2-43 ADP Pay File
Select the date or range of dates to export and click OK.
The message, 'You must now run the ADP validation program' displays. Click
OK and run the ADP validation program. The EXTPAYxx.yyy file is created,
where xx is the ID and yyy is the company ID. This file is placed in the
\ALOHA\PCPERS subdirectory.

Create ReMACS RealWorld Pay File
Select Create ReMacs Realworld Pay File. The RealWorld Payroll dialog box,
shown in Figure 2-44, prompts for the date(s) to use for creating the export
file.
Figure 2-44 RealWorld Payroll
The PAYROLL.FLT file is created and placed in the \ALOHA directory.

Create ReMACS Menu File
Select Create ReMacs Menu File. The Menu Item Sales File Creation dialog
box, shown in Figure 2-44, prompts for the date(s) to use for the export file:
Functions
Figure 2-45 Menu Item Sales File Creation
The MENUSALE.FLT file is created and placed in the \ALOHA directory.

Settings Button
Click Settings to open the Menu File Settings dialog box, as shown in Figure
2-46:
Figure 2-46 Menu File Settings
Use Profit Center Code — Assigns a profit center code made up of the first
two digits of the category number plus the first three digits of the store num-
ber.
Report Sales by Period — Defines the sales report based on a period.
Click OK to return to the first screen. Click OK again to create the file.

Create Coconut Code Payroll File
Select Create Coconut Code Payroll File. The Create Coconut Code Time
Card Output File dialog box, shown in Figure 2-47, prompts for the date(s) to
use for the export file:
Functions
Figure 2-47 Coconut Code Time Card Output File
The CCTIME.TXT file is created and placed in the \ALOHA directory.

Create Coconut Code Daily Sales Files
Select Create Coconut Code Daily Sales File. The Coconut Code Daily Sales
File dialog box, shown in Figure 2-48, prompts for the date(s) to use for the
export file:
Figure 2-48 Coconut Code Daily Sales Output
Select a date or range of dates to export and click OK.
The following .TXT files are created and placed in the \ALOHA directory:
• CCGCREDM.TXT
• CCGCSOLD.TXT
• CCHOUSE.TXT
• CCNDPTY.TXT
• CCPETTY.TXT
• CCSLS.TXT

Create Coconut Code Sales Mix File
Select Create Coconut Code Sales Mix File. The Coconut Code Sales Mix
Output File dialog box, shown in Figure 2-49, prompts for the date(s) to use
for the export file:
Functions
Figure 2-49 Coconut Code Sales Mix Output
The CCPMIX.TXT file is created and placed in the \ALOHA directory.

Create Paychex Extract File
The Paychex Pay File created by the Aloha POS system contains the follow-
ing information, in addition to the Paychex branch number, client number, and
site code:
• Employee number
• Department number
• Regular hours worked
• Overtime hours worked
• Pay rate
• Tips due
• Declared tips
• Gross Wages
To create the Paychex Pay File, select Functions > Export > Create Paychex
Pay File. The Aloha Grind Program dialog box displays, enabling the Grind
program to process the Paychex Pay File. When Grind is through processing
the Pay File, a Notice message box displays. Click OK.

Create PayUSA Extract File
The Create PayUSA Extract File command creates two files. The first file
contains the following information:
• Employee number
• Hours worked code
• Hours worked
• Job cost
Functions
• Account number
• Rate
The second file contains the following information:
• Employee number
• Deduction / Earning code
• Hours
• Rate
• Declared tips
To create the PayUSA Extract File, select Function > Export > Create Pay-
USA Extract File. The Aloha Grind Program dialog box displays, enabling
the Grind program to process the PayUSA Extract Pay File. Running the Pay-
USA Extract File extracts data for the days selected in the pay period to the
PAYUSA folder in the \ALOHA directory.

ICVerify
The ICVerify submenu is used to interface the Aloha POS system with ICVer-
ify, a third-party credit card processing company.
Define the number of IC Verify terminals in the ‘Number ICVerify

Terminals’ check box on the EDC Setup subtab located in Mainte-
nance > Store Settings > Credit Card group.
Select Functions > ICVerify from the menu bar, as shown in Figure 2-50:
Refer to the
Aloha EDC
User’s Guide, if you are
using Aloha Credit Card for
credit card processing.
Figure 2-50 IC Verify Menu
Settle Current Batch

When you are ready to settle your batch, select Settle Current Batch from the
IC Verify submenu.

A confirmation dialog box displays to verify the settlement, as shown in Fig-
ure 2-51:
Functions
Figure 2-51 Settle Batch Confirmation
Click OK to run the batch settlement.
Print Settlement
The Print Settlement feature enables you to print a report of the batch you
have just settled. Click Print Settlement and a confirmation dialog box dis-
plays to verify printing, as shown in Figure 2-52:
Figure 2-52 Print Verification
Click OK to print settlement.

Store Settings
This chapter discusses the Store Settings functions with the Aloha sys-
tem. You will gain an understanding of each store settings group, the
available functionality for each group, and how to create customized
settings for your store.
Order Entry ....................................................................................... 3-5

Labor............................................................................................... 3-21
Financials........................................................................................ 3-50
Printing............................................................................................ 3-64
Printing-Chits .................................................................................. 3-82
User Interface ................................................................................. 3-96
Security......................................................................................... 3-105
System.......................................................................................... 3-114
International .................................................................................. 3-127
Credit Card ................................................................................... 3-136
Delivery......................................................................................... 3-138
Gift Card/Certificate Sales ............................................................ 3-139
Video............................................................................................. 3-140
Hotel ............................................................................................. 3-141
Survey........................................................................................... 3-142
Chapter
3
3 – 2 Store Settings Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3
Store Settings is used to create global settings for the restaurant. You can
establish order policies, labor and scheduling restrictions, tax policies, and
receipt print qualities. Policies that you create in Store Settings are enforced
throughout the entire restaurant.
To access Store Settings, select Maintenance > Store Settings from the Aloha
menu, as shown in Figure 3-1:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-1 Maintenance Main Menu
Upon selecting Store Settings, the Store Settings function tab displays. The
Group drop-down list contains groups which may be selected to set policies.
Each of the groups, their subtabs, and check box settings are discussed in this
chapter. Default values have been established in some of these functions,
therefore, they do not have to be edited. However, these items are specific to a
particular restaurant or group of restaurants, and should be reviewed.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Store Settings 3–3

• Define order entry settings, such as guest counts, tabs, tables, table
transfers, and club memberships.
• Establish employee scheduling and setting rules, clock in and out pro-
cedures, electronic payroll settings, and shift and break rules.
• Define automatic gratuity usage, taxes and surcharges, financial
reports, house accounts, memberships, and additional charges.
• Define print settings for checks, chits, reports, and configure
employee checkout.
• Select user interface options for the POS and Order Entry screens,
and configure pole settings.
• Define security settings for the POS, employee passwords, access
restrictions, and cash drawer restrictions.
• Set up system features, such as the date and time, security key infor-
mation, interface usage, disk maintenance, Aloha and End-of-Day
settings.
• Define international dates, currency standards and rounding options,
and taxes.
3–4 Store Settings Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Order Entry
The Order Entry group enables you to establish policies and procedures for
taking orders and handling guests. To access the store settings for Order Entry,
select Maintenance > Store Settings. The Store Settings function tab displays
with the Order Entry group as the default group, and the Guest Counts subtab
as the default subtab, shown in Figure 3-2:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-2 Guest Counts Subtab
The Order Entry group provides the following subtabs: Guest Counts, Tabs &
Tables, Transfers, Options, More Options, Pizza, and Memberships.
Guest Counts Subtab

The Guest Counts subtab enables you to determine the method to use for
establishing your guest count. You also define whether you use pivot seating.

There are three methods to count guests and the system uses the following
hierarchy when counting guests:
• User-entered Counts — Counts the guests based on the guest count

you enter in the FOH for each table. Select ‘Ask for Guest Count by
Check’ to enable this method.
• Pivot Seating Counts — Counts the guests based on the number of
seats for which you enter an order. This method overrides the ‘User-
entered Counts’ method. Select ‘Use Pivot Seating’ to activate pivot
seating and enable all employees to enter orders by seats. The system
counts guest by the number of seats. Select ‘Pivot Seating Requires a
Guest Count’ to force employees to enter the party size in the FOH.
You can also use pivot seating by job code by selecting ‘Pivot Seat-
ing’ in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes, or by revenue center by
selecting pivot seating options on the Guest Count Tracking subtab in
Maintenance > System > Revenue Center.
• Category Counts — Counts the guests based on the number of items
you enter in the FOH from a required category. This method overrides
the ‘User-entered Counts’ and ‘Pivot Seating Counts’ methods. To
activate Category Counts, select ‘Use Entrees for Guest Count’ and
then select a category from the drop-down list. You can also use cate-
gory counts by revenue center by selecting the category options on
the Guest Count Tracking subtab in Maintenance > System > Reve-
nue Center. Additionally, you can assign items to hold more than the
default weight of one in Maintenance > Menu > Items.
Regardless of the method you choose, if you select a category from the
‘Required Menu Category’ on the ‘More Options’ subtab in Maintenance >
Store Settings > Order Entry, the total count of items on the check must be
equal to, or greater than, the party size you enter in the FOH. For example, if
you enter a party of three, then you must enter at least three items from the
category specified in ‘Required Menu Category’.
A revenue item is not a sales item. If you have a guest check with
just a revenue item, such as a gift card, the guest count for that check
remains at 0 (zero).

Ask for Guest Count by Check — Tracks the number of guests using the
number entered in the FOH.
Allow a Guest Count of Zero — Permits servers to enter a zero guest count
for tables.
Pivot Seating Requires a Guest Count — If using pivot seating, requires

servers to enter the number of guests (party size) per table.
Use Pivot Seating — Automatically configures order entry terminals for the
Pivot Seating features, with numbered seats at each table.
Default Guest Count for Tables — Sets the default guest count used when
you open a new table. Use this setting when 'Pivot Seating' and 'Use Entrees
for Guest Counts' are disabled. For example, if you enter 2, the FOH defaults
the guest count to 2.
Default Guest Count for Tabs — Sets the default guest count used when
you open a new tab. Use this setting when 'Pivot Seating' and 'Use Entrees for
Settings
Store
Guest Counts' are disabled.
Confirm When Guest Count Exceeds — Sets the FOH to confirm the guest
count once it exceeds the number you enter here. When an employee enters an
unusually high number for the guest count, the system puts up a prompt to
make sure it was not an accident. For example, if this is set to 10, the FOH
receives a prompt to confirm the guest count once the guest count exceeds 10.
Default Bar Guests — Set the default number of guests for bar tabs. This
enables guest-count tracking without requiring bartenders to enter guest
counts each time they ring orders. Employees assigned to a bartender job code
are considered bartenders.
Auto Increment Pivot Seat on Category — Specifies the category number

in which to base seat increments. This feature adds a seat to the check every
time an item from the defined category is ordered.
Use Entrees for Guest Counts — Determines the guest count using the cate-
gory selected in the entree Category drop-down list. Each time an item from
the selected category is ordered, one customer is added to the guest check
count.

Category — Determines the category to use for entree counting, if guests are
counted by entree.
Category Button
Click Category to access the Categories function tab. Here you can perform
maintenance in the Categories function, including add new records if the cate-
gory you need is not already there.
Bartender Inset
Bartender May Enter a Guest Count at Order Entry Screen — Enables

bartenders to enter the number of guests, if desired. Bartenders use the
#Guests button in the FOH to override the default value.
System Requires a Guest Count when Check is Closed — Forces all bar-
tenders to enter the number of guests.
System Requests a Guest Count when Check is Closed — Forces all bar-
tenders to enter a guest count when closing a check. It is not required that a
guest count is entered.
No Guest Count is Requested when Check is Closed — Specifies all bar-

tenders can close checks without receiving a guest count prompt.

Tabs & Tables Subtab
The Tabs & Tables subtab establishes various options for tabs and tables, such
as table numbers, saving tabs, tipsharing, etc. Select the Tabs & Tables subtab
from the Order Entry group, shown in Figure 3-3:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-3 Tabs and Tables Subtab
List Most Recent Tables First — Sorts tables from the most recent to the
oldest on the Working with Tables screen.
Check # on Work w/Tables — Displays guest check numbers on the Work-

ing with Tables screen.
Allow Duplicate Table Numbers — Enables two different servers to enter

the same table number on order entry terminals. This is not advisable in cash-
ier operations.
Auto Save Tab when NEW TAB is Pressed — Automatically saves bar tabs
when 'New Tab' is pressed on the Order Entry screen.

Prompt for Amount when Fast Cash Is Used — Enables the Fast Cash
prompt to display on the FOH.
Limit Bartender to One Tab at a Time — Bartenders can have only one tab
open at a time.
Auto Consolidate Scanned Checks on Getcheck — Combines checks for

payment on the Get Check screen in the FOH. It is not necessary to select the
Combine button between scanned checks in order for the checks to be com-
bined.
Auto New Order — Prompts the bartender to open a new tab when the bar-
tender enters items on an open tab. It is for use by the bar only.
Disable Fast Cash — Prevents all bartender Fast Cash options from being
used.
Show Fast Cash Huge — Displays the amount owed in a large type size
when using Fast Cash.
Auto Name Saved Tabs — Automatically defaults bar tab names to 'Fast
Close'. It enables the Named Tab feature when opening a new bar tab.
Num Table Digits — Defines the desired number of digits in a table number.
Auto Ordering Inset
Disable Auto Ordering — Prevents automatic ordering of items if a screen

times out.
Toggle Auto Ordering — Enables managers to toggle automatic ordering, if

necessary. In other words, the manager can turn the automatic ordering feature
on or off, depending upon the needs of the restaurant.

Transfers Subtab
This subtab enables you to set order transfer policies throughout the restau-
rant. Select the Transfers subtab from the Order Entry group, shown in Figure
3-4:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-4 Transfers Subtab
Transfers Inset
Ask for Transfer Name — Prompts for a new table name on the order entry
terminal when tables are transferred. It does not require that a name be
entered.
Require Transfer Name — Requires that a new table name be entered on the
order entry terminal when transferring tables.
Force Accept on Manager Transfers — Transfers and accepts tables on

manager-forced table transfers. If not selected, the responsibility is removed
from the server transferring the tables. The other server still has to accept the
transfer.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Store Settings 3 – 11

Cashier Auto Accepts Checks — Gives cashiers the ability to automatically
receive transferred guest checks.
Pivot Seating Transfers Inset
Transfer Merges Seats — Merges seats with the same number, when tables
are combined, to avoid duplicate seat numbers. Otherwise, new seat numbers
will be added to the combined table. If this is cleared, the seats are renum-
bered. Use this setting only when 'Pivot Seating' is selected.
Options Subtab
The Options subtab enables you to set order attributes, replace the FOH Hold
button with an extra order mode, and define the open item to use if a SKU
number is not found. Select the Options subtab from the Order Entry group, as
Figure 3-5 Options Subtab

Use this open item if the order taker enters a SKU# that
cannot be found:
Items — Designates the item to use when the entered item is not recognized
by the system.
Enable Order Attribute — Enables certain predefined properties (order

attributes) to be assigned to a guest check. This information is kept in the
Grind files and can be utilized later through a reporting program such as Crys-
tal Reports. The predefined properties are set up by creating a file in the
DATA folder named ORDATTR.TXT, and then opening that file to enter a list
of attributes. Any properties or attributes that the establishment may need can
be defined. A designated number should precede each attribute, for example,
'3 Member', or '6 Nonmember'.
Name — Specifies the heading text for the Attributes screen.
Require Order Attribute — Forces one of the predefined order attributes

from the displayed list to be selected. After selecting 'New Tab' or 'New Table'
Settings
Store
on the FOH terminal and entering a table number, an order attribute prompt is
displayed (if this check box is selected).
Default Selected ID — Holds the number preceding the desired default

attribute. For example, to set the '3 Member' attribute as the default, enter a 3
in this text box. Every time a new table or tab is started, the '3 Member'
attribute is automatically highlighted. If order attributes are not being used,
enter 0.
Replace Hold Button with Mode Inset
Order Mode — Select an automatic order mode to replace the Hold button
on the FOH. Leave this blank if you want the Hold button to display.
Disable Hold — Disables the Hold button on the FOH, to prevent items on
the order entry screen from being placed on hold.
Automatic Release — Activates the Delay Send feature and enables you to Refer to the Delay
Send feature in
set a time of release for items placed on hold. the TableService Special Fea-
tures Guide.

Scale Inset
Scale Timeout Value — Specifies the number of seconds the system waits
for three consecutive identical scale readings. When the system exceeds the
number, you have the option to retry a reading or make a manual entry. Enter
from three to 99 seconds. The default number of seconds is five.
Manual Weight Message Text — Holds the text to display on the guest
check used when you enter a manual weight. Enter up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. The default text is ‘MAN WT’.
More Options Subtab

This subtab enables you to define the default menu settings and required cate-
gories for menus. Select the More Options subtab from the Order Entry group,
Figure 3-6 More Options Subtab

Default Menus Inset
Default Server — Defines a default menu for server use. A server is defined
as an employee assigned to a job code with the 'Order Entry' and 'Shift
Required' check boxes selected in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes > Job
Code subtab. If there is no default menu, set it to None.
Default Bartender — Defines a default menu for bartender use. A bartender

is defined as an employee assigned to a job code with the 'Order Entry' and
'Shift Required' check boxes selected in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes >
Job Code subtab and the 'Bartender' check box selected in Maintenance >
Labor > Job Codes > TableService subtab. If there is no default menu, set it to
None.
Default Cashier — Defines a default menu for cashier use. A cashier is

defined as an employee assigned to a job code with the 'Order Entry' and 'Shift
Required' check boxes selected in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes > Job
Code subtab and the 'Cashier' check box selected in Maintenance > Labor >
Job Codes > TableService subtab. If there is no default menu, set it to None.
Settings
Store
Required Menu Category Inset
Select a category that must be ordered on each check. All closed checks must
include an item from the selected category. Thus, if a restaurant has a policy
that all guest checks have at least one beverage included, set this to Bever-
ages. If there is no required category, set it to None. 'Required Menu Cate-
gory' is dependent upon which check boxes are selected in the Order Entry
group on the Guest Counts subtab. For example, if 'Use Entrees for Guest
Counts' is selected, the server must enter one of the required items for every
entree. If 'Use Pivot Seating' is selected, the server must enter one item per
pivot point. If 'Bartender Must enter a guest count' is selected, the bartender
only needs to enter one of the required items for the entire tab, no matter what
the guest count is.
Item Unavailable Message Inset
Text — Enter the text to display if items are ordered that are unavailable. Up
to 80 characters can be entered in this field. Item availability is entered by an
employee (usually the manager) assigned an access level with the Item Avail-

ability check box activated. As the item is sold, the available number is
reduced. If an attempt is made to sell an unavailable item, the Item Unavail-
able Message text displays on the screen, letting the server know it is not
available.
Pizza Subtab
This subtab enables you to establish pizza pricing options. Select the Pizza
subtab from the Order Entry group, as shown in Figure 3-7:
Figure 3-7 Pizza Subtab
Pizza — Select the predefined category that includes all the pizza menu items
from the drop-down list. A category must be selected, or the Pizza Modifier
screen will not display when ordering those items on the FOH terminal.

Pizza Button
Click Pizza to access the Categories function tab. Here you can perform main-
tenance in the Categories function, including add new records if the category
you need is not already there.
Left Half — Select the item to represent the left half of the pizza from the
drop-down list. Items are set up in Maintenance > Menu > Items. The name of
this item is displayed on the guest check when using the Pizza Mod feature.
Left Half Button
Click Left Half to access the Items function tab. Here you can perform main-
tenance to the Items function, including add new records if the item you need
is not already there.
Right Half — Select the item to represent the right half of the pizza from the
drop-down list. Items are set up in Maintenance > Menu > Items. The name of
this item is displayed on the guest check when using the Pizza Mod feature.
Settings
Store
Right Half Button
Click Right Half to access the Items function tab. Here you can perform main-
tenance in the Items function, including add new records if the item you need
is not already there.
Pizza Portion Pricing Inset
Percentage Pricing — Specifies the percentage of the topping price to charge

for half toppings. For example, if 60% is entered as the percentage and the
charge for the pepperoni topping on a large pizza is $1.00, the charge for half
a portion of pepperoni is $.60. The default percentage is 50%. Percentage
Pricing is the default selection.
Average Pricing — Adds the cost of the toppings on each half of the pizza to
the base pizza price as if it were charging for a whole pizza to get a total for
each half, adds the two totals, then divides it by two to get the average. For
example, if a customer orders a Large Pizza with a base price of $12.00 and
wants bacon - $1, extra cheese - $.75, and onions - $.50 on the right half, and

only green peppers - $.50 on the left half, the average price is calculated based
on the following:
Right Half: $14.25

Left Half: $14.25
$14.25+12.50/2 = $13.38
Higher Priced Item Charged — Adds the cost of the toppings on each half
of the pizza to the base pizza price as if it were charging for a whole pizza to
get a total for each half, then charges the customer the highest total. For exam-
ple, if a customer orders a Large Pizza with a base price of $12.00 and wants
bacon - $1 on the right half, and extra cheese - $.75 on the left half, the price is
calculated based on the following:
Right Half: $13.00

Left Half: $12.75
Result: The customer is charged the higher price of $13.00.
Whole Price for Topping — Calculates the toppings at full price. No dis-
counts are given for split toppings. For example, if a customer orders a Large
Pizza with a base price of $12.00 and wants bacon - $1 on the right half, and
hamburger - $1.00 on the left half, the price is calculated based on the follow-
ing:
Base Price: $12.00

Bacon: $1.00
Hamburger: $1.00
Total $14.00
Memberships Subtab
The Memberships subtab provides a method to create and manage club and
restaurant memberships using a special class of menu items. Memberships are
common in state jurisdictions that require club memberships to purchase alco-
hol to meet certain state or regional legal restrictions. For example, an estab-
lishment in a dry county may set up memberships for its patrons in order to
sell alcoholic beverages.

To utilize the membership functionality, the system requires necessary mem-
bership definitions be created with Item IDs greater than 30100, as well as a
membership category in Maintenance > Menu > Categories. To enable the
Memberships features, select the Memberships subtab from the Order Entry
group, as shown in Figure 3-8:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-8 Memberships Subtab
Enable Memberships — Enables the Memberships feature and activates the

remaining selections on the Membership subtab.
Require Memberships for Bartenders — Requires the bartender to enter

the customer's membership number before serving alcohol to the customer.
A Membership is Required if Items from this Category are

Ordered:
Category — Enables you to select a category from the drop-down list in

which a membership is required for purchases. For example, this category
may contain only alcoholic beverages.

Category Button
The Minimum Number of Digits in a Membership Number is — Speci-

fies the minimum number of digits for the club membership.
New Memberships Inset
Price — Represents the cost of a new membership.
Item — Designates the New Membership item number set up in Maintenance

> Menu > Items.
Membership Renewals Inset
Price — Represents the cost of membership renewal.
Item — Designates the Membership Renewal item number set up in Mainte-

nance > Menu > Items.
Existing Memberships Inset
Price — Represents the cost of an existing membership.
Item — Designates the Existing Membership item number set up in Mainte-

nance > Menu > Items.

Labor
The Labor group enables you to establish policies and procedures for schedul-
ing, payroll, checkout, and clock in/out functions. To access the Labor group
settings, select Maintenance > Store Settings. Select Labor from the Group
drop-down list. The corresponding subtabs display, with Scheduling as the
default subtab, as shown in Figure 3-9:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-9 Scheduling Subtab
The Labor group provides the following subtabs: Scheduling, Employee Set-
tings, Clock In/Out, Checkout Buckets, Electronic Payroll Settings, Breaks,
Shifts, and Labor Policies.
Scheduling Subtab
The Scheduling subtab enables you to define scheduling requirements for
each employee, such as multiple shift allowances, schedule requirements, and
punctuality control features.

Allow Employees only One Shift, Per Day — Employees can work only
one shift per day.
Prompt for Manager Password if Unscheduled — Prompts for a manager's

password if an employee attempts to clock in but is not scheduled to work.
Use Schedule — Activates either Aloha Employee Scheduling or Aloha

Labor Scheduler, depending upon which scheduling program you use.
Schedule is Not Required — Employees can clock in even if not scheduled

for the current day. If scheduled, the employee must clock in at the assigned
time.
Use Punctuality Inset
Use Punctuality — Enables the Punctuality Control features, subject to the

limits set in the three Punctuality Control fields. Employees must be sched-
uled to work in the scheduling program or they are not allowed to clock in.
Allow Clock-In Early — Specifies the number of minutes before the start of
a scheduled shift that an employee is allowed to clock in.
Allow Clock-In Late — Specifies the number of minutes after the start of a
scheduled shift that an employee is allowed to clock in.
Number of Minutes for Allow Clock-In Transaction — Specifies the num-

ber of minutes that employees have to attempt to clock in before manager
intervention is required.
Employee Settings Subtab

This subtab enables you to define employee settings such as minimum wage,
employee age requirements, time clock settings, tipshare requirements,

enabling edit punch reasons and break return options, and more. Select the
Employee Settings subtab from the Labor group, as shown in Figure 3-10:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-10 Employee Settings Subtab
Punch Edit Num Prds — Specifies the maximum number of weeks you can
edit in Functions > Edit Punches. Select from one up to four previous weeks.
Employee Minimum Age — Defines the youngest age that is allowed for
employees to work.
Min Wage — Specifies the minimum wage rate for non-tipped employees.
Min Wage Tipped — Specifies the minimum wage rate for tipped employ-
ees.
Default Tip Share — Specifies the default tip share rate. For example, 3.00
is equal to 3.00%. This is the percentage rate that employees who share tips
will receive.
Tipshare on Comp'd Item Sales — Calculates tip amounts on comp sales

separately from the total net sales amount.
Tipshare on Promo'd Item Sales — Calculates tip amounts on promo sales

separately from the total net sales amount.

Tipshare on Tax’d Item Shares — Calculates tip amounts on the sales tax
amount separately from the total net sales amount.
Punch Edit - Limit Job Codes — Limits job codes that can be selected to
those assigned to the employee.
Auto Clockout — Automatically clocks out employees who are still clocked
in during the End-of-Day routine. If an employee has already run a checkout,
the system clocks the employee out at the time of the checkout. If the job code
does not have 'Order Entry' selected, it clocks the employee out at the time the
EOD is run. If 'Auto Clockout' is not selected, employees who do not clock-
out properly do not appear on the Edit Punches screen until they have clocked
out, and an EOD is processed.
In a 24-hour operation, ‘Auto Clockout’ functions differently. At

EOD, clocked in employees are clocked out. Employees do appear
on the Edit Punches screen.
Can Edit Clock In/Out — Allows the clock in and clock-out times to be
edited from an order entry terminal by a manager.
No PTD Hours on Clockout Chit — Suppresses the accumulated hours line

on the clockout chit.
Print Detail Tips on Clockout — Prints detailed tip information on the

clock-out receipt.
No Minimum Declared Tips — Enables employees to declare less total tips

than their credit card tips.
Use Edit Punch Reasons — Enables you to specify reasons for editing a
punch from the BOH and FOH. Edit Punch reasons are defined in Mainte-
nance > Labor > Edit Punch Reasons and appear for each punch on the Edit
Punches report.
Enable Enforcement of Unpaid Break Returns — Activates the enforce-

ment of unpaid break times an employee takes to a set break time frame. If an
employee returns from a break too early, a manager can override the enforce-
ment and allow the employee to return to work. This setting also enables the

‘Approve Break Return Options’ inset, the ‘Enforce __ Minute Breaks’ check
box in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes, and the ‘Approve Unpaid Break
Returns’ check box in Maintenance > Labor > Access Levels.
Approve Break Return Options Inset
Select at least one of the following check boxes pertaining to returning from
an unpaid break.
Keep Break as an Unpaid Break — Retains the break as unpaid. Select this
to display the ‘Keep Break as Unpaid Break’ button on the FOH screen that
displays for a manager override.
Convert Break into a Paid Break — Changes the unpaid break to a paid
break. Select this to display the ‘Convert Break into a Paid Break’ button on
the FOH screen that displays for a manager override.
Remove Break — Removes the break time. Select this to display the
‘Remove Break’ button on the FOH screen that displays for a manager over-
Settings
Store
ride.
Enforce Unpaid Break Time Feature

The Enforce Unpaid Break Time feature enables you to enforce the unpaid
break time an employee takes to a set break time frame, based on a defined
number of minutes. If the employee returns from an unpaid break too early,
the manager can override the enforcement and allow the employee to return to
work. We discuss the following procedures for the Enforce Unpaid Break
Time feature:
• Activate the Enforce Unpaid Break Time feature and select approve
break return options.
• Define the number of minutes to enforce unpaid breaks.
• Define who can approve an unpaid break return.
• Operate the Enforce Unpaid Break Time feature from the FOH.
Approve break return options enable you to control how the break is recorded,
or if it should be paid or unpaid. You must select at least one approve break
return option or the system will not save your information. With each selec-

tion, the option appears on the FOH Break Options (manager override) screen
when the employee returns from a break too early. If you select only one
option, the override screen does not appear.
To activate the Enforce Break Time feature and select approve break
return options to appear on the manager override screen:
1. Select Maintenance > Store Settings. The Store Settings function

tab appears.
2. Select Labor from the Group drop-down list.
3. Select the Employee Settings subtab.
4. Select Enable Enforcement of Unpaid Break Returns.
5. Select at least one from the Keep Break as an Unpaid Break, Con-
vert Break into a Paid Break, and Remove Break options.
6. Click Save.
You must define the number of minutes an employee can take for an unpaid
break. A manager can override the return if an employee returns from a break
early.
To define the number of minutes for an unpaid break:
1. Select Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes. The Job Codes function
tab appears.
2. Select the job code for which the employee works with unpaid breaks
from the Number drop-down list.
3. Select either Allow Unpaid Breaks or Allow Meal Period Breaks.
4. Select Enforce __ Minute Breaks.
5. Type the number of minutes, between 1 and 999, an employee must
take for an unpaid break.
6. Click Save.
To override an early unpaid break return, a manager must have the ability to
approve the return.
To define the access level to approve unpaid break returns:
1. Select Maintenance > Labor > Access Levels. The Access Levels
function tab displays.
2. Select a manager access level from the Level drop-down list.

3. Select the Employee subtab.
4. Select Approve Unpaid Break Returns.
5. Click Save.
To override an early unpaid break return in the FOH:
1. Log in to the FOH after starting an unpaid break. The Clock In screen
appears.
2. Touch End Break. The manager approval screen appears with the
number of minutes remaining for the break, as shown in Figure 3-11:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-11 Manager Approval Screen

3. Enter a manager password using the numeric keypad and touch OK.
The Break Options screen appears with the appropriate approve break
return options, as shown in Figure 3-12:
Figure 3-12 Break Options Screen
If only one approve break option is configured, then this screen does
not display.
4. Touch one of the following available approved break return options to

return from the break and begin ordering:
Keep Break as an Unpaid Break — Leaves the employee’s break as

an unpaid break for the time frame that the employee took the break.
For example, if the employee began the break at 11:00 a.m., and the
manager selects this option at 11:20 a.m., the system keeps the break
as an unpaid break with a time frame of 20 minutes.
Convert Break into a Paid Break — Nullifies the unpaid break and
adds a paid break for the time frame that the employee took the break.
For example, if the employee took the break at 11:00 a.m., and the
manager selects this option at 11:20 a.m., the system creates a paid
break with a time frame of 20 minutes.

Remove Break — Nullifies the unpaid break. For example, if the
employee began the break at 11:00 a.m., and the manager selects this
option at 11:20 a.m., the system removes the unpaid break and makes
no other changes.
An exception occurs when converting an unpaid break to a paid

break for an employee clocked in with a job code that does not allow
paid breaks. An error message appears and the manager must select
a different option.
Clock In/Out Subtab

This subtab enables you to set labor reporting options, overtime calculations,
and clock in/out settings and rounding.
Select the Clock In/Out subtab from the Labor group, as shown in Figure 3-
13:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-13 Clock In/Out Subtab

Labor Reporting Inset
Clock In Report Available — Enables the employee to view the clock in

report from a FOH terminal.
Disable Labor Reporting — Disables labor reporting functions in both the

Front-of-House and Back-of-House. When this check box is selected, no
clock in or clock-out chits will print. Also, labor figures are not included in
the Restaurant Sales report for the FOH. This option is used in some interna-
tional operations.
Print Clock In — Prints a clock in receipt for each employee.
Labor Report Interval — Denotes the time interval (in minutes) that the
FOH Labor Report is calculated. Labor costs are reported in increments of
this interval.
Round Clock-In Times — Specifies the number of minutes in which to

round clock in times. When employees clock in, the time is rounded accord-
ing to the number entered in this field. For example, if '5' is entered, and an
employee clocks in at 7:58, the system rounds the time to the nearest 5-minute
interval, which is 8:00. Enter '0' for no rounding.
Clock-In Round Threshold — Specifies the number of minutes at which the

system rounds up the clock in time. If set to zero, the system automatically
rounds down to the nearest time interval listed in 'Round clock in times'.
Round Clock-Out Times — Specifies the number of minutes in which to

round clock out times. When employees clock out, the time is rounded
according to the number entered in this field. Enter '0' for no rounding.
Clock-Out Round Threshold — Specifies the number of minutes at which

the system rounds down the clock out time. If set to zero, the system automat-
ically rounds up to the nearest time interval listed in 'Round clock out times'.
Overtime Inset
Overtime Type — Specifies the overtime type used by the company. Select
from three different types; Weekly Overtime, Daily Overtime, and Extended

Daily Overtime. Depending upon which type you select, the applicable hours
and multiplier text boxes are available for entry.
After __ Hrs/Day — Denotes the number of hours an employee can work per
day before going into overtime.
After __ Hrs/Week — Denotes the number of hours an employee can work

per week before going into overtime. This is typically set to 40.
After __ Hrs/7th Day — Denotes the number of hours an employee can

work on the 7th consecutive day worked before going into overtime. Employ-
ees receive overtime pay for the 7th consecutive day worked, regardless of the
number of hours worked that same week. After a defined number of hours are
worked on the 7th consecutive day, employees can receive additional over-
time pay. For example, an employee who worked five hours a day for seven
days, using 1.5 as the overtime multiplier rate, the overtime is calculated as
follows:
Number of Hours Rate of Pay Overtime Rate Total Pay
Settings
Store
30.0 Hours $5.00 $150.00
5.0 Hours $7.50 1.5 $37.50
If that same employee worked 10 hours on the 7th consecutive day worked,
using 2.0 as the additional overtime multiplier rate, overtime is calculated as
follows:
Number of Hours Rate of Pay Overtime Rate Total Pay

30. Hours $5.00 $150.00
8.0 Hours $7.50 1.5 $60.00
2.0 Hours $10.00 2.0 $20.00
Mult — Specifies the multiplier rate used by the system when an employee's
hours exceed the hours per day and/or the hours per week limits. Typically,
the rate is 1.5.

Overtime Calculation Inset
Calculate Overtime By Average Rate — Calculates employee's overtime

pay by that employee's total pay earned for all shifts worked during the cur-
rent pay period, divided by the employee's total hours worked for all shifts
during the current pay period.
Calculate Overtime By Shift Rate — Calculates employee's overtime pay

by the shift rate of the job code the employee is logged in as when overtime
begins accumulating.
Checkout Buckets Subtab

This subtab enables you to establish checkout centers for employees to send
all monies upon checkout. A designated employee then verifies the amount of
money and clock out information of each employee with the amounts in the
checkout buckets. Select the Checkout Buckets subtab from the Labor group,
Figure 3-14 Checkout Buckets Subtab

This subtab contains the names of each assignable checkout center. For exam-
ple, checkout centers may be specific shifts or staff members. Up to 10 check-
out buckets can be created. To create checkout buckets, enter the name of each
checkout bucket in a Bucket name field.
Electronic Payroll Settings Subtab

This subtab enables you to create a file for ADP or other third party software
to read and process for payroll processing. Select the Electronic Payroll Set-
tings subtab from the Labor group, shown in Figure 3-15:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-15 Electronic Payroll Settings Subtab
ADP Inset
Use ADP — Specifies ADP as the third party payroll processor you are using.
ADP Company # — Represents the 3-digit ADP company number. This

number must be obtained from ADP.
ADP Store # — Represents the ADP store number. This number must be
obtained from ADP, and is for use by chain operations only.

ADP Version # — Represents the ADP software version number. This num-
ber must be obtained from ADP.
Omit Credit Card Tips — Eliminates credit card tips from the ADP export
file.
Omit Control Totals — For early versions of ADP software that do not sup-
port these fields.
Don't Output Primary Rate or Job Code — Excludes pay rates and job
codes from the export file.
Output Sales as Whole Dollars — Discloses sales in rounded, whole dollar

amounts, rather than exact dollar and cent amounts.
Output Cash Tips — Includes cash tips in the ADP export file.
Use RealWorld Payroll — Specifies RealWorld Payroll as the third party

payroll processor you are using.
Use Payroll One — Specifies Payroll One as the third party payroll processor
you are using.
PayUSA Inset
Use PayUSA — Specifies PayUSA as the third party payroll processor you
are using.
Pay Period Days — Represents the number of days in a PayUSA pay period.
PayUSA currently requires this number be either 7 or 14.
Company Code — Represents the assigned company code obtained from

PayUSA.

Paychex Inset
The Paychex export file lists each job an employee works in a specified pay
period. The job code ID identifies the jobs worked by an employee. The hours
worked for each job code is summarized. For example, the regular hours and
overtime hours are calculated by job code, then displayed as one record for
each job worked during the pay period. The export file displays as a comma-
delimited text file. The following table indicates the fields included in the
export order. They are listed in the order in which they exist in the file.
Field Import Size Notes

Employee Number 1 - 9999 Uses the Export ID on
Employee Maintenance
Department Number 1 - 9999 Uses the JOBCODEID for the
job that the employee worked.
Regular Hours -999.99 - 999.99 Summary of regular hours
worked for this Job Code ID.
Overtime Hours -999.99 - 999.99 Summary of overtime hours
Settings
worked for this Job Code ID.
Store
Pay Rate 0 - 999.999 The pay rate for this Job Code
ID.
Credit Card Tips -9999.99 - 9999.99 Total credit card tips for this Job
Code ID.
Declared Cash Tips -9999.99 - 9999.99 Total cash tips declared for this
Job Code ID.
Gross Wages -999999.99 - Total pay for this Job Code ID.
999999.99
Use Paychex — Specifies Paychex as the third party payroll processor you
are using.
Pay Period Days — Specifies the number of days in a Paychex pay period.
Paychex Branch # — Represents the Paychex branch number. This is a num-

ber from 0 - 999. Use leading zeros if the branch number is less than three dig-
its long.

Paychex Client # — Represents the four-digit (0 - 9999) Paychex client num-
ber.
Paychex Sitecode — Represents the single-character Paychex site code. The

site code is a code assigned to each location from which Paychex payroll data
is exported.
If using Paychex, an ‘Export ID’ must be assigned to each employee

in Maintenance > Labor > Employees.
Breaks Subtab
See the Other
Wages section of
Chapter 2, Functions, for more This subtab allows you to enable meal period and rest period break rules and
information on Other Wages set the parameters for those rules. If all criteria is met according to the param-
pay.
eters, the system automatically generates a pay record in Other Wages when
End-of-Day is run. This record is identifiable as system-generated and can
either be accepted or deleted when the Other Wages section is reviewed by the
manager. The system generated records for breaks are:
• Rest Period Premium

• Meal Period 1 Consent
• Meal Period 1 Mandatory
• Meal Period 2 Consent
• Meal Period 2 Mandatory
‘Meal Period 1’ refers to the period you designate for a typical meal period
during the first shift of a work day. ‘Meal Period 2’ refers to a meal period
typically worked on a second shift or extended work day, based on pre-
defined parameters set in the system. ‘Consent’ refers to rules for meal peri-
ods that may be waived when, for example, the employee’s work day will be
completed in less than a pre-defined and mutually agreed upon time. ‘Manda-
tory’ refers to rules that require mandatory pay for meal periods because max-
imum requirements are met.

Select the Breaks subtab from the Labor group, as shown in Figure 3-16:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-16 Breaks Subtab
Use Break Rules — Enables you to specify the parameters to apply to the
break rules.
Check the wage and payday laws for your state to

ensure your policies and procedures are in compliance.
Rest Periods Inset
The rest period rule enables you to pay an employee for a rest period, when
the defined criteria is met.
Rest Period net rest time minute(s) — Represents number of minutes of net
rest time per set number of hours worked. A valid range is 1 to 59.
Rest Period hour(s) worked — Represents number of hours worked as basis

for set number of rest time minutes. A valid range is 1.00 to 24.00.

Rest Period pay hours — Represents the number of hours added as Other
Wages if the employee is furnished less than set number of minutes of rest
period per set number of hours worked. A valid range is 1.00 to 24.00.
Refer to the Other
Wages section of
Chapter 2, Functions, for more Rest Period pay rate — Represents the rate of pay if employee does not
information on Other Wages receive rest period break. The default is the regular rate of pay. Minimum
pay. wage is an option.
The minimum wage rate can be set in Store Settings > Labor group >
Employee Settings subtab.
Rest Period total work time — Represents minimum total work time
required to receive a rest period break. A valid range is 1.00 to 24.00.
The following table shows examples of results generated by the criteria you
may set for rest periods:
Criteria:
10 minute net rest time for every 4 hours worked, 1 hour paid at Regular
rate, unless shift ends at less than 3.5 hours.
Scenario: Result:
Bob works 3.25 hours. Bob gets paid actual hours worked.
Bob works 3.75 hours. Bob gets paid actual hours worked plus 1 hour
of Rest Period bonus at the regular rate, since
he was not given a Rest Period break. The sys-
tem generates an Other Wages entry as “Sys-
tem-Rest Period Premium.”
of Rest Period bonus at the regular rate, since
he was not given a Rest Period break. The sys-
tem generates an Other Wages entry as “Sys-
tem-Rest Period Premium.”
Figure 3-17 Rest Period Table

Meal Periods Inset
The meal period rule enables you to pay the employee for a first and/or sec-
ond meal period, when the defined criteria is met.
First Meal Period
Meal period work hours — Represents the minimum number of hour(s)

required to work before a meal break. If the employee works more than this
set number of hours without a first meal period break of a set number of min-
utes, add additional hour(s) as Other Wages. A valid range is 1.00 to 24.00.
Meal period break length — Represents the length of the first meal period
break in minutes for a set number of hours worked. A valid range is from 1.00
to 24.00.
Meal period pay hour(s) — Represents the number of hour(s) entered as

Other Wages if the employee works more than a set number of hours without
a first meal period break for a set number of minutes. A valid range is 1.00 to
Settings
Store
24.00.
Meal period pay rate — Represents the rate of pay if the employee does not
receive first meal period break. The default is the regular rate of pay. Mini-
mum wage is an option.
Add as ‘Consent’ wage type — Represents the maximum number of hour(s)

worked before meal pay is mandatory. If the employee’s total work hours are
less than or equal to this number of hours, post the hour(s) as a ‘consent’ type
of wage in Other Wages. A valid range is 1.00 to 24.00.

The table in Figure 3-18 shows examples of results generated by the criteria
you may set for first meal periods:
Criteria:
Employee works more than 5 hours without a 30 minute meal break, pay 1
hour at regular rate. If total contiguous paid hours are less than 6 hours,
extra pay can be waived.
Scenario: Result:
Bob works 4.75 hours Bob gets paid actual hours worked only.
without a meal break.
Bob works 5 hours with- Bob gets paid actual hours worked plus 1 hour
out a meal break. of Meal Period pay. The system generates an
Other Wages entry as “System-Meal Period 1
Consent.”
Bob works 6.00 hours Bob gets paid actual hours worked plus 1 hour
without a meal break. of Meal Period pay. The system generates an
Other Wages entry as “System-Meal Period 1
Consent.”
Figure 3-18 First Meal Period Table
In the table in Figure 3-18, employee and employer can mutually

consent to waive the first meal period, if the employee’s work period
of not more than six hours will complete his day’s work.
Second Meal Period
Meal period work hour(s) — Represents the minimum number of hour(s)

required to work before a second meal break. If the employee works more
than this set number of hours without a second meal period break of a set
number of minutes, add additional hour(s) as Other Wages. A valid range is
1.00 to 24.00.
Meal period break length — Represents the length of the second meal
period break in minutes for a set number of hours worked. A valid range is 30
to 59.

Meal period pay hour(s) — Represents the number of hour(s) entered as
Other Wages if the employee works more than a set number of hours without
a second meal period break for a set number of minutes. A valid range is 1.00
to 24.00.
Meal period pay rate — Represents the rate of pay if the employee does not
receive a second meal period break. The default is the regular rate of pay.
Minimum wage is an option.
Add as ‘Consent’ wage type — Represents the maximum number of hour(s)

to work before meal pay is mandatory. If employee’s total work hours are less
than or equal to this number of hours, post the hour(s) as a ‘consent’ type of
wage in Other Wages. A valid range is 1.00 to 24.00.
The following table shows examples of results generated by the criteria set for
second meal periods:
Criteria:
Settings
Employee works more than 10 hours without a second 30 minute meal
Store
break, pay 1 hour at regular rate. If the total contiguous paid hours are less
than 12 hours, extra pay can be waived.
Scenario: Result:
Bob works 9.5 hours with- Bob gets paid actual hours worked plus 1 hour
out a meal break. of Meal Period 1 pay. The system generates an
Other Wages entry as ‘System-Meal Period 1
Mandatory’.
of Meal Period 1 pay plus one hour of Meal
Period 2 pay. The system generates an Other
Wages entry as ‘System-Meal Period 1 Manda-
tory’ and another as ‘System-Meal Period 2
Consent’.
Bob works 4.75 hours, Bob gets paid actual hours worked only.
takes a meal break, then
works 4.75 hours without a
second meal break.

Scenario: Result:
Bob works 4.75 hours, Bob gets paid actual hours worked plus 1 hour
takes a meal break, then of Meal Period 2 pay. The system generates an
works 6.0 hours. Other Wages entry as ‘System-Meal Period 2
Consent’.
Figure 3-19 Second Meal Period Table
Shifts Subtab
In the examples in Figure 3-19, employee and employer can mutu-

ally consent to waive the second meal period, if the employee’s work
period of not more than twelve hours completes his day’s work.
Meal Period 1 rules apply and are mandatory because total continu-
ous hours in all instances exceed the threshold of six hours.
This subtab allows you to enable and set parameters for split shift and shift
Refer to the
Other Wages
pay rules. If all criteria is met, the system automatically generates a pay
section of Chapter 2, Func- record in Other Wages when End-of-Day is run. This record is identifiable as
tions, for more information system-generated and can either be accepted or deleted when the Other Wages
on Other Wages pay. section is reviewed by the manager.The system generated records for shifts
are:
• Split Shift Premium

• Worked < half scheduled
• No Schedule minimum
• 2nd Shift minimum

Select the Shifts subtab from the Labor group, as shown in Figure 3-20:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-20 Shifts Subtab
Use Shift Rules — Enables you to specify the parameters to apply to the shift
rules.

Split Shifts Inset
The split shifts rule enables you to pay an additional wage if an employee
works a split shift, when the defined criteria is met. A split shift is recognized
as two clock in/clock outs in one work day. The references to ‘1st reporting’
and ‘2nd reporting’ that follow refer to an employee’s 1st shift and 2nd shift.
Split Shift hour(s) — Represents the number of hours added as Other Wages
if the employee has worked one shift and works a second shift in one work
day. Valid entries are from 1.00 to 24.00.

Split Shift pay rate — Represents the rate of pay if the employee works a
split shift. Minimum wage is an option. If the ‘regular pay’ option is selected,
the rate will be for the job worked on the first shift.
Your minimum wage rate can be set in Store Settings > Labor group
on the Employee Settings subtab.
The following table shows examples of results generated by criteria you may
set for split shifts:
Criteria:
Pay 1 hour at minimum pay rate.
Scenario: Result:
Bob works 1st shift for 3 Bob is paid 3 hours times $10, plus 2 hours
hours as a cook at $10 times $6, plus1 hour times minimum wage.
hour, and 2nd shift for 2 The extra hour pay does not count toward
hours as a dishwasher for overtime. The system generates an Other
$6 an hour. Wages entry as ‘System-Split Shift Premium’.
Figure 3-21 Split Shift #1 Table
Criteria:
Pay 1 hour at regular pay rate.
Scenario: Result:
Bob works 1st shift for 3 Bob is paid 3 hours times $10, plus 2 hours
hours as a cook at $10 times $6, plus1 hour times $10.00, since his
hour, and 2nd shift for 2 regular pay for 1st shift is $10.00. The extra
hours as a dishwasher for hour pay does not count toward overtime. The
$6 an hour. system generates an Other Wages entry as
‘System-Split Shift Premium’.
Figure 3-22 Split Shift #2 Table

Shift TimePay - 1st Shift Reporting Inset
The first shift reporting rule is that if an employee works less than half the
scheduled hours, the employee is paid additionally for half the scheduled
hours at the regular rate of pay. When this condition is met, the system gener-
ates an Other Wages entry with the wage type ‘System - Worked < half sched-
uled.’
The system has only one option to compute whether an

employee has worked at least half of the scheduled
hours. The ‘Use Schedule’ check box must be selected in
Maintenance > Store Settings > Labor group > Scheduling
subtab.
Shift Scheduled
Pay at least hours — Represents the minimum number of hour(s) to add as

Other Wages if the employee works less than half their scheduled hours on
Settings
first reporting. A valid range is 1.00 to 24.00.
Store
No more than hours — Represents the maximum number of hours to add as
Other Wages if the employee works less than half their scheduled hours on
first reporting. A valid range is from 1.00 to 24.00, but this value cannot be
less than the minimum value.
Pay Rate — Represents the rate at which the employee is paid. The default
value is regular pay. Minimum wage is an option.

set for split first shifts:
Criteria:
Pay 2 hours minimum and 4 hours maximum at regular pay rate.
Scenario: Result:
Bob is scheduled to work Bob is paid for his actual hours worked, since
4 hours, but works 3. he worked more than half his scheduled shift.
Bob is scheduled to work Bob is paid for his actual hours worked, plus 3
6 hours, but works 2.5. additional hours, for a total of 5.5 hours. The 3
hours is due to the fact that he was scheduled
for 6, half of which is 3. He received the 3
since he did not work at least that many. The
system generates an Other Wages entry as
‘System Worked < half scheduled’.
Bob is scheduled to work Bob is paid for his actual hours worked, plus 2
4 hours, but works 1.75. hours for working less than half his scheduled
shift, for a total of 3.75 hours. The system gen-
erates an Other Wages entry as ‘System
Worked < half scheduled’.
Figure 3-23 Split First Shift Table
Shift Not Scheduled
Minimum hours — Represents the minimum hour(s) to pay if the employee

is not scheduled to work. A valid range is 1.00 to 24.00.

set for split shifts:
Criteria:
System is set to pay 2 hours minimum, 4 hours maximum at regular pay
rate, but the employee does not have a schedule.
Scenario: Result:
Bob is not scheduled and Bob is paid 4 hours at the job code rate.
works 4 hours.
works 6 hours.
Bob is not scheduled and Bob will be paid 3 hours at the job code rate,
works 3 hours. plus 2 additional system generated hours at the
job code rate. The system generates an Other
Wages entry as ‘System-No schedule mini-
mum’.
Figure 3-24 No Scheduled Shift #1 Table
Settings
Store
Criteria:
System is set to pay 2 hours minimum, 4 hours maximum at minimum
wage, but the employee does not have a schedule.
Scenario: Result:
works 4 hours.
works 6 hours.
Bob is not scheduled and Bob will be paid 3 hours at the job code rate,
works 3 hours. plus 2 additional system generated hours at the
minimum wage rate. The system generates an
Other Wages entry as ‘System-No schedule
minimum’.
Figure 3-25 No Scheduled Shift #2 Table

Shift TimePay - 2nd Shift Reporting Inset
The second shift reporting rule is that if an employee reports to work for a
second shift of a day and works less than a pre-defined amount of hours, the
employee should be paid a pre-defined amount of hours at the regular rate of
pay or minimum wage. This rule does not rely on the ‘Use Schedule’ check
box, but rather checks clock ins and clock outs within a work day. When con-
ditions are met, the system generates an Other Wages entry with the wage
type ‘System - 2nd Shift minimum.’
Works less than hours — Represents the threshold number of hours the
employee must work less than on second shift to be eligible for additional pay.
A valid range is 1.00 to 24.00.
Reporting pay hours — Represents the number of hours to add to Other

Wages if the employee works less than the threshold hours on second shift. A
valid range is 1.00 to 24.00.
Reporting pay rate — Represents the rate of pay for additional hours if
employee is not furnished the set number of hours on his second shift. The
default is the regular rate of pay. Minimum wage is an option.
set for split second shifts:
Criteria:
Employee works second shift less than 2 hours. Pay 2 hours at minimum
pay rate or regular rate.
Scenario: Result:
Bob returns for his second Bob gets paid actual time worked plus 2 hours
shift. He clocks in and is either minimum wage or regular rate. The sys-
immediately sent home. tem generates an Other Wages entry as ‘Sys-
tem- 2nd Shift minimum’.

Bob returns for his second Bob gets paid the 1.5 hours he worked plus 2
shift. He works 1.5 hours hours at either minimum wage or his regular
and is sent home. rate.The system generates an Other Wages
entry as ‘System- 2nd Shift minimum’.
Bob returns for his second Bob gets paid his actual hours worked only
shift. He works 3 hours since he worked more than the threshold.
and is sent home.
Figure 3-26 Split Second Shift Table
Labor Policies Subtab

This feature is available if you are using Aloha Labor Scheduler. Refer to the
Aloha Labor Scheduler User’s Guide for more information about Labor Poli-
cies.
Settings
Store

Financials
The Financials group enables you to establish policies for gratuity, taxes,
additional charges, reports, house accounts, members. To access the store set-
tings for Financials, select Maintenance > Store Settings. Select Financials
from the Group drop-down list. The corresponding subtabs display, with
Automatic Gratuity as the default subtab, shown in Figure 3-27:
Figure 3-27 Automatic Gratuity
The Financials group provides the following subtabs: Automatic Gratuity,

Taxes & Surcharges, Reports, House Accounts, Members, and Add Charges.
Automatic Gratuity Subtab

Automatic Gratuity features determine when and how automatic gratuities are
used by the Aloha system.
Gratuity Inset
Use Automatic Gratuity — Activates the automatic gratuity function.

Manager Needed — Requires a manager to apply automatic gratuities.
Server Override — Enables servers to change the automatic gratuity per-

centage.
If the ‘Server Override’ or ‘Manager Override’ check boxes are not

selected, you cannot change the gratuity amount.
Manager Override — Enables a manager to change the automatic gratuity

percentage.
Combine Gratuity Tax with Other Guest Check Tax — Combines gratu-
ity tax with other taxes on the check.
For more
information
On Tax — Determines whether the automatic gratuity is applied to the net or about combining gratuities
gross amount of the guest check. When selected, the gratuity is calculated on on the guest check, refer to
the gross amount of the check, including tax. Printing, the Check Con-
tent 2 subtab later in this
Settings
chapter.
Store
Default% — Displays the standard automatic gratuity percentage to apply to
the guest check.
Maximum% — Displays the maximum gratuity percent permitted. The sys-

tem adds hundredths to any gratuity percent that is not entered in hundredths.
For example, if you enter 8 as a default or maximum percent, it displays as
8.00; if you enter 12.5, it displays as 12.50. Once the gratuity is applied, the
Add Gratuity button in the FOH is replaced by an Edit Gratuity button. You
can either accept the default gratuity or press Edit Gratuity to enter a percent
up to, but not exceeding, the percent specified here. If this value is set at 0.00,
the Edit Gratuity button does not display in the FOH.
Default $ — Displays the standard automatic gratuity dollar amount to apply

to the guest check.
Select ‘Combine Gratuity on Check’ located in Store Settings >

Printing group > Check Content 2 subtab to combine the $ and %
gratuities as one item on the guest check.

Maximum $ — Displays the maximum gratuity dollar amount permitted.
Once the gratuity is applied, the Add Gratuity button in the FOH is replaced
by an Edit Gratuity button.You can either accept the default gratuity or press
Edit Gratuity to enter an amount up to, but not exceeding, the amount speci-
fied here. If this value is set at 0.00, the Edit Gratuity button does not display
in the FOH.
Min Guest — Enter the minimum number of guests required to apply an

automatic gratuity.
Tax ID Button
Click Tax ID to access the Taxes function tab. Here you can perform mainte-
nance in the Taxes function.
Tax ID — Determines the tax type to use to tax automatic gratuities.
Grat Tax Cat ID Button
Click Grat Tax Cat ID to access the Categories function tab. Here you can per-
form maintenance in the Categories function, including add new records if the
category you need is not already there.
Grat Tax Cat ID — Designates the sales category in which gratuity taxes
should be included, if the BOH Sales report is configured to show detail for
the Sales by Category section. If a category is not selected, the grat taxes are
included in the Taxes column of the first sales/retail category displayed in the
list.
Tip Out Inset
Tip Out Account — Identifies the petty cash account to use for tipping out.

Allow Partial Tip Out — Enables a cashier to perform a partial tip out on
tips collected. Used in conjunction with the auto gratuity feature, a cashier
may tip out additional tips and gratuities to servers on a daily basis.
Tips and auto gratuities are displayed or printed separately only

when ‘Separate Tips and Grat in Tip Tracking’ is selected from Store
Settings > Printing group on the Employee Checkout Cfg subtab.
To perform a partial tip out in the Front-of-House:
1. Press Functions in the Cashier entry screen to display the Special

Functions screen shown in Figure 3-28:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-28 FOH Special Functions Screen

2. Press Financial. The FOH Financial screen, shown in Figure 3-29,
displays:
Figure 3-29 FOH Financial Screen
3. Press Tip Out to display the Select Employee to Tip Out screen, as
Figure 3-30 FOH Select Employee to Tip Out Screen

4. Select the employee name to tip out to and press OK to display the
Tip Out screen, as shown in Figure 3-31:
Figure 3-31 Tip Out Screen
Settings
5. Press Yes to display the Tip Out Amount Screen, as shown in Figure
Store
3-33:
Figure 3-32 Tip Out Amount Screen
6. Enter the amount of the tip out and press OK. The amount owed to
the server displays under the server’s name. You are returned to
Financial screen. Tender the remaining balance as necessary.

Taxes & Surcharges Subtab
This subtab enables you to select to use secondary or smart taxes, and to
enable surcharges. Select the Taxes & Surcharges subtab from the Financials
Figure 3-33 Taxes & Surcharges Subtab
Tax Settings Inset
Use Secondary Taxes — Enables the use of secondary taxes by the system. If
you associate any secondary taxes to an item in Maintenance > Menu > Items,
then you must select this setting.
Use Smart Taxes — Enables the use of smart (inclusive) taxes, if they are set
up in the system under Maintenance > Menu > Taxes.
Enable Surcharges Inset
Enable Surcharges — Activates surcharges in the system and applies them

to the designated menu items. Create surcharges in Maintenance > Menu >
Surcharges.

Surcharge Text — Specifies the text to display on guest checks when 'Enable
Surcharges' is selected.
Guest Always Pays Surcharge — Applies surcharges to designated menu

items and includes them on guest checks.
Use Smart Surcharges — Indicates smart surcharges are in use.
List All Surcharges as a Single Surcharge — Combines all surcharges into

a single entry on guest checks. If not selected, surcharges are listed separately
each time they are applied.
Reports Subtab
This subtab enables you to select to include comps and promos in net sales,
and to exclude open sales on the net server report. Select the Reports subtab
from the Financials group, as shown in Figure 3-34:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-34 Reports Subtab
Include Comps in Net Sales — Includes comp sales in the net sales amount.

Include Promos in Net Sales — Includes promo sales in the net sales
amount.
No Open Sales on Server Sales Report — Omits open sales from the Server
Sales report, and only closed sales are included on the Server Sales report.
Display FOH Labor Hours in Minutes — Controls display of hours and

minutes on FOH reports for Clock In/Out Times and the Labor report. When
this check box is cleared, which is the default setting, the hours display in a
decimal, or hundredths, format.
Display clock in/clock out chit in minutes and hundredths — Controls

display of hours and minutes on the clock in/clock out chit. When this check
box is cleared, which is the default setting, the times display in hours and min-
utes, or HH:MM. If selected, times and totals print in the HH:MM format and
in hundredths, or decimals.
Gross Sales Do Not Include Voids — Configures all gross sales calcula-
tions on reports to include voids.
Tip % Threshold: — Specifies the percentage to use when determining if an

employee’s declared tips are too low. This works in conjunction with the
‘Must Declare Tips’ and ‘Display Threshold Message’ check boxes located
on the Job Codes subtab in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes.
The employee receives only one chance to enter their declared tips at
the right percentage. Should the amount be too low, a warning mes-
sage displays. The manager must delete the employee’s clock out to
enable them to try again.

House Accounts Subtab
This subtab enables you to specify how the system searches for house
accounts. Select the House Accounts subtab from the Financials group, shown
in Figure 3-35:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-35 House Accounts
House Account Lookup Method Inset
Search Using Account # Only — Searches for house accounts by account

number.
Search Using Account Name Only — Searches for house accounts by the
account name.
Search Account # and then Account Name — Searches for house accounts
by the account number, then if nothing is found, searches for the account
name.

Members Subtab
This subtab enables you to select various membership options to dictate how
to handle member names and charges. Use these settings to enable the Mem-
ber Lookup screen, change a member name on a closed check, allow a mem-
ber to charge if not found in the member database, and more. The Aloha key
must be authorized for use with the Aloha Membership Interface.
Refer to the Inter-
facing Member-
ship with Aloha Users Guide Select the Members subtab from the Financials group, shown in Figure 3-36:
for more information.
Figure 3-36 Members Subtab

Add Charges Subtab
The additional charge feature enables you to add one flat or percentage charge
to a guest check. In addition, you can exempt one category, or you can
exclude additional charges when using specific order modes.
If you select a category on the Add Charges subtab, the

items sold from that category are exempt from the addi-
tional charge.
Select the Add Charges subtab from the Financials group, as shown in Figure
3-37:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-37 Add Charges Subtab
Use Additional Charges — Enables additional charges be applied automati-

cally to the guest check per the defined criteria. Once selected, the system
checks for an inclusive GST tax in use. If one is used, the system selects and
disables both the ‘On Comps’ and ‘On Promos’ text boxes and adds addi-
tional charges to the full item prices. In addition, the system disables the
‘Amount’ text box so that you may not use a flat rate for the additional charge.

If ‘Use Additional Charges’ is not selected, the additional charge does not
appear on FOH or BOH reports.
The GST tax is the only tax that may be applied to an additional
charge.
Name — Denotes the name of the additional charge.
Text: — Determines the text to print on the guest check when the additional
charge is added. For example, you may wish to print ‘Service Charge’ as the
description on the guest check, rather than ‘Additional Charge’.
On Promos? — Indicates whether the additional charge is applied to

promo(s). If selected, the additional charge is applied to the guest check sub-
total, which includes the amount of the promo(s). If ‘On Promos’ and
‘Amount’ are both selected, the On Promos and On Comps check boxes
become disabled. You are unable to change the settings as long as a fixed
amount is used. If you change the ‘Amount’ setting to ‘Percentage’ at a later
time, the On Promos and On Comps check boxes become fully enabled again.
On Comps? — Indicates whether the additional charge is applied to comp(s).

If selected, the additional charge is applied to the guest check subtotal, includ-
ing the amount of the comp(s). If ‘On Comps’ and ‘Amount’ are both
selected, the ‘On Comps’ and ‘On Promos’ check boxes become disabled.
You are unable to change the setting as long as a fixed amount is used. If you
change the ‘Amount’ setting to ‘Percentage’ at a later time, the check boxes
becomes fully enabled again.
Print on Reports? — Enables you to report additional charges on the FOH

and BOH Sales and Sales by Revenue Center reports.
Format Inset
For more infor-
mation on exclud-
ing additional charges in Amount — Displays a numeric value which represents the flat charge the
specific order modes, refer to system automatically adds to each guest check. The default value is 00000.00.
Chapter 7, System Mainte- If this check box is selected, the ‘Percentage’ text box is disabled.
nance Functions, Order
Modes.

Percentage — Displays a numeric value which represents the multiplier used
in concert with the subtotal on the guest check. The default is 00.0000. If this
check box is selected, the ‘Amount’ text box is disabled.
Category Button
Click Category to access the Categories function tab. Here you perform main-
tenance in the Categories function, including adding new records, if needed.
Category drop-down list — Designates a category to exempt from the addi-

tional charge.
If you select a category on the Add Charges subtab, the

items sold from that category are exempted from the
additional charge.
Settings
Store

Printing
The Printing group enables you to set up various check print styles and con-
tent, as well as employee checkout configuration and report settings. To
access the Printing group options, select Maintenance > Store Settings. Select
Printing from the Group drop-down list. The corresponding subtabs display,
with Check Content 1 as the default subtab.
Check Content 1 Subtab

The Check Content 1 subtab, as shown in Figure 3-38, enables you to select
subtotals and totals that print on guest checks.
Figure 3-38 Check Content 1 Subtab
Guest Check Totals/Subtotals Inset
Print a Grand Total — Enables the grand total, including the total, gratuity,
and tips, to print on the closed guest check.
Print Category Totals — Prints sales category totals (subtotal and grand
total) for each category that is rung up.

Print a Subtotal before Comps — Prints an extra subtotal line on the guest
check before the comp is applied. This is useful in assisting customers to base
tips on the full check total instead of the discounted amount.
Print Seat Totals — Totals the guest check by seat. It is used with pivot seat-
ing only. The pivot seating check box is located in Maintenance > Store Set-
tings > Order Entry Group > Guest Counts subtab.
Do Not Print Tax Line if Tax Amount is Zero — Omits printing a tax line
on the guest check if the total amount of tax on the check is zero.
Print Comps/Promos Above Subtotal — Prints comp and promo informa-

tion before the subtotal.
Print Total, Tip and Signature Lines on All Checks — Adds the Total, Tip,
and Signature lines to the guest check.
Print this Text before Tip Line — Denotes the desired text to display before
the tip line in the lines provided. For example: If Paying by Credit Card, Enter
Settings
Store
Tip and Total Here.
Text to Replace Tip — Replaces text that displays instead of the standard Tip
line on the guest check.
Defining Comp Information to Print on Guest Check
Print Defined Comp Check Lines — Enables defined information, using a

text file, to print with a guest check when a comp is applied. The printed mes-
sage can be different based on the applied comp. Use this for record keeping
purposes in restaurants that require a manager to complete a short form for
each check containing a comp.
The comp form only prints when the check is closed and when you apply a
comp to the check. Configure the comp form layout by creating a text file
titled COMPFORM.TXT in the \DATA folder. Only one instance of the comp
form prints per check. For example, if you apply the same comp to a check
twice, the comp form prints one time.

The system also supports multiple comp forms. Rather than have a COMP-
FORM.TXT, which prints any time you apply a comp to a check, you can
configure multiple comp forms titled, CPFnnnnn.TXT, where nnnnn is the ID
number of the comp. For example if you apply comp ID 101 to a check, and
CPF101.TXT is found in the \DATA folder, CPF101.TXT prints. In the event
a comp ID number does not have a corresponding comp form file, COMP-
FORM.TXT prints.
Use the following rules when adding content to COMPFORM.TXT:
• Start each line with 'MSG'. All other lines are ignored.
• Insert an '&' in the fifth text line position (MSG plus one space) to
instruct the printer to perform a partial cut (if the printer is capable).
• Insert an '^' in the fifth text line to insert the system date and the check
number on the left side of the form. This uses a yyyymmdd – 99999
format (for example, 20010606 – 10001).
• Insert an '@' in the fifth text line to instruct the printer to start using a
large font.
• Insert a '#' in the fifth text line to instruct the printer to stop using a
large font.
• If the printed guest check is set to use the large font, then the comp
form will default to the large font. You must use a '#' at the beginning
of the form to default to the smaller font.
• Since the paper cutter on the printer is not at the same location as the
print head, paper cuts may appear several lines above the location
defined in COMPFORM.TXT. You will have to experiment with your
printer type and compensate for this in your comp form design.
The following is an example of a COMPFORM.TXT:
MSG &
MSG
MSG ^
MSG
MSG @
MSG COMP SLIP
MSG
MSG Restaurant: ___________________________
MSG

MSG Shift: _______
MSG #
MSG
MSG Check All That Apply and Print Name
MSG
MSG ___ Customer Relations _________________
MSG Explanation: _________________________
MSG ____________________________________
MSG ____________________________________
MSG __ Executive Meal
MSG __ Manager Meal
MSG __ 50% Emp Meal
MSG
MSG ------------------------------------------------------
MSG Date 20
MSG ------------------------------------------------------
MSG Description Amount
MSG ------------------------------------------------------
MSG Liquor
MSG ------------------------------------------------------
Settings
Store
MSG Beer
MSG ------------------------------------------------------
MSG Wine
MSG ------------------------------------------------------
MSG Food
MSG ------------------------------------------------------
MSG Total
MSG ------------------------------------------------------
MSG
MSG ____________________________________
MSG Waitperson Emp #
MSG
MSG _____________________________________
MSG Customer/Employee Signature
MSG
MSG ____________________________________
MSG Manager Signature

Check Content 2 Subtab
The Check Content 2 subtab enables you to select additional items to print on
guest checks. Select the Check Content 2 subtab from the Printing group, as
Figure 3-39 Check Content 2 Subtab
Do Not Print Voided Items — Prevents voided items from printing on the
guest check. If not selected, voided items are printed and shown as voided.
Consolidate Like Items on Check — Combines like items on guest checks.

For example, if one guest orders a salad, and another guest orders a salad on
the same check, the salads are listed as '2 Salads', rather than as separate line
items.
Print PMS Guest Name — Prints the guest name on the guest check.
Print Revenue Center — Prints the revenue center on the guest check. This
is useful for guests who want to remember from what area (bar, dining room,
etc.) the check originated.

Print PMS Info — Prints the Room Number and Guest Name lines on the
guest check. The guest can fill in this information when charging a meal to the
room.
PMS options are used when the Aloha system interfaces with a
hotel’s property management system (PMS) and the PMS Interface
product is installed.
Print Order Attribute on Check — Prints sales types on guest checks. This
is used in country club environments where revenue generated by special
functions, such as a banquet, must be tracked separately. This works in con-
junction with the order types defined in the Aloha Membership Interface, and
is not valid if the Membership Interface software is not being used.
Suppress Check Number — Disables the check number from printing on the
guest check.
Suppressing the check number on the guest check disables competi-
Settings
Store
tors from learning the number of orders served within a given time
period.
Print Order Mode on Check — Prints the order mode on the guest check.
Print the Number of Guests/Items — Prints the number of guests and the
number of each item ordered on the check.
Print Complete Subtotal — Prints a complete check subtotal, including

comps and promos.
Print Bar Code — Prints the bar code on the guest check.
Print Menu Name — Prints the current menu name on the guest check. If a
check contains items from multiple menus, the menu name of the first item
will print.
Combine Gratuity on Check — Determines how the gratuity % and the gra-
tuity $ print on the guest check. This check box works in conjunction with the
check boxes for gratuities located in Store Settings > Financial group > Auto-
matic Gratuity subtab.

If this check box is selected, the two gratuities are combined and print as a
total on one line on the guest check. The percentage shows only when it is the
sole type of gratuity applied to the check.
Refer to the
section earlier
in this chapter on Finan- If this check box is not selected, the gratuity % and the gratuity $ print sepa-
cials, the Automatic Gratu- rately on the guest check.
ity subtab, for more
information on gratuities on
the guest check.
Print Day Part on Check — Prints the day part on the guest check.
Print Business Number — Prints the business or ID number on the guest

check.
Print Member Number on Check — Prints the ID number of the member

on the guest check, when the Members Interface is in use.
Tax Detail Inset
Print Tax Detail — Prints and separates taxes by ID number on the guest
check. When selected, the ‘Print Total Tax Line’ check box is enabled.
Print Total Tax Line — Prints a total of the detailed taxes directly below the
tax detail on the guest check. This check box cannot be selected unless ‘Print
Tax Detail’ is selected.
The sample guest checks shown in Figure 3-40 illustrate the tax detail print
options. The guest check on the left was printed with ‘Print Tax Detail’
selected, and shows detail for food and alcohol taxes. The guest check on the
right was printed with ‘Print Tax Detail’ and ‘Print Total Tax Line’ selected,

and shows the same detail as the one on the left, with an additional line for the
total of the two taxes.
Settings
Store
Figure 3-40 Sample Guest Checks With Tax Detail

Check Style Subtab
The Check Style subtab enables you to specify font options, postfix and prefix
lines, and auto-print checks. Select the Check Style subtab from the Printing
group, shown in Figure 3-41:
Figure 3-41 Check Style Subtab
Prefix Lines — Specifies the number of blank lines to appear at the top of the
guest check. This positions the guest check on the page when it is printed.
Postfix Lines — Specifies the number of blank lines to appear at the bottom
of the guest check.
Item Tax Indicator — Designates the character to print next to any taxable
item on the guest check or receipt. This is a one-character field, and is useful
in a retail environment when wanting to differentiate between taxable and
nontaxable items.
Manager Required for Multiple Check Reprints — Permits the server to

print a guest check once before manager intervention is needed.

Hard Check Inset
Prefix Lines — Specifies the number of lines to skip down when printing
checks on a slip printer.
Lines Per Sheet — Specifies the total number of printable lines on the check,
not including lines skipped, when printing checks on a slip printer.
Font Options Inset
Use Large Font for Check — Uses a larger font size on the guest check.
Print the Order Number in Bold — Prints the order number in bold.
Use Large Font for the Check Total — Prints the guest check total in a
larger font size.
Auto Print Checks Inset
Settings
Store
Auto-Print When Food is Ordered — Enables guest checks to print auto-
matically when food is committed to an order mode, or ‘sent to the kitchen’.
Don't Auto-Print When Manager Adjusts Checks — Prevents the guest

check from automatically printing when it is adjusted by a manager.
Don't Auto-Print When Bartender Closes Checks — Prevents the guest

check from automatically printing when closed by a bartender.

Multi-Part Checks Subtab
The Multi-Part Checks subtab enables you to choose if you want to print two-
part checks, and if so, the text to display on the check. You can also enable the
Print Check Stub feature and define how and what prints on the output. Select
the Multi-Part Checks subtab from the Printing group, shown in Figure 3-42:
Figure 3-42 Multi-Part Checks Subtab
Print Check Stub
The Print Check Stub feature supports environments where a guest orders as
they walk into the restaurant. The person taking the order enters the items into
the system, without ordering them, and a check stub prints for the guest to
take with them to the table. The guest will then hand the check stub to the
server. The server verifies the order, accesses the guest check in the system,
and begins the process of ordering the items. The server maintains the guest
check during the meal, and provides the guest with a check when they are
ready to leave. The guest pays the server or the cashier, upon exiting.
Using the options in the ‘Print Check Stub’ group box, you can define the
information to print on the check stub, as well as control whether to print a

check stub at initial order entry or to print a new check stub every time the
server modifies the guest check.
To enable the Print Check Stub feature, you must select ‘Disable
Auto Ordering’ in Maintenance > Store Settings > Order Entry >
Tabs & Tables.
An example of a check stub displays as shown in the following example:
(Guest Check Message)

(Address)
(Telephone)
(Stub Text Line 1)

(Stub Text Line 2)
(Stub Text Line 3)
Settings
(Employee Name) (Date)
Store
(Check Number) (Time)
(Order Items)
(Bar Code)
Print Check Stub — Enables the remaining options in the ‘Print Check Stub’
group box.
Use Guest Check Heading — Displays two areas of guest check information
on the check stub. The top area displays lines as defined in Maintenance >
Messages > Guest Checks. The next area displays the ‘Address’ and ‘Tele-
phone’ text boxes defined on the Store Information subtab in Maintenance >
Store Settings > System.
Print on Check Exit — Prints the check stub each time you exit the check.
The check stub does not print until you exit the check, regardless of whether
an item was ordered or not.
Single Print Only — Only prints the check stub the initial time you open and
close the check. It does not print when you make modifications to the check.

Suppress Bar Code Printing — Does not print the bar code on the check
stub. The bar code display is only supported on thermal printers.
Stub Text — Specifies the text to print on the check stub. Type up to 50 char-
acters.
Print Two- Part Checks
Two-part checks enable you to print a regular guest check and an extra slip
containing the total, check number, date, time, and a message you define. An
example of a two-part check displays as shown in the following example:
(Guest Check Message)

(Address)
(Telephone)
(Employee Name) (Date)

(Check Number) (Time)
(Order Items)
(Balance Due Line)

(************Cut***************)
(Two-Part Check Text)
(Check Number)
(Total Line)
(Table # ) (Time and Date)
Print Two-Part Checks — Enables you to prints two-part checks.
Check Text — Specifies the text to print on the bottom portion of the two-
part check.

Employee Checkout Cfg Subtab
The Employee Checkout Cfg (Configuration) subtab enables you to deter-
mine the information to print on the employee checkout slip when an
employee completes a shift and completes the checkout process.
If an employee has multiple checkouts per shift, the checkout displays the fol-
lowing lines:
Shift: 1
Checkout 1/2
Shift: 1
Checkout 2/2
Select the Employee Checkout Cfg subtab from the Printing group, as shown
in Figure 3-43:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-43 Employee Checkout Cfg Subtab
Print Only Custom Checkout — Prints only the custom checkout when an
employee performs a checkout.

Print Zero Lines on Checkout — Prints all lines on the checkout report,
even though some may be zero. When cleared, lines with zero values do not
print.
Ckout Cash — Prints an alternate cash calculation on the checkout. The nor-
mal cash calculation adds all sales and subtracts all noncash payments to
arrive at the cash amount. An extra section prints showing cash sales less
charge tips to arrive at a cash owed figure.
Print Non-Cash Tenders — Prints a separate listing for noncash tenders.
Inc. Tax in Perf. Measures — Includes taxes in the totals printed for the Per-
formance Measures report.
Print Deposit Balance — Includes the balance of all deposits.
Change Due Detail for Non Cash Tenders — Prints, by tender, the total
amount of change received from a noncash tender (gift certificates, travelers
checks, etc.). If a guest check has multiple noncash tenders, the change due is
allocated to the first noncash tender found on the check.
Print Check Count — Prints the number of checks closed during a shift.
Separate Tips and Grat in Tip Tracking — Splits the non-cash tips from
the auto gratuity in the Tip Tracking section of the checkout report. Use this
setting in environments where tips are paid each night, but auto gratuities are
paid on the employee's paycheck.
Print Guest Count — Prints the number of guests on guest checks on the
checkout report.
Print True Comp Sales on Checkout — Prints the name of the employee
who applied a comp in the Comp section. This ensures the correct employee
receives the credit. For example, if an employee applies a comp, but another
closes the check, the employee who opened the check receives the sales infor-
mation.
Print True Promo Sales on Checkout — Prints the name of the employee
who applied a promo in the Promo section. This ensures the employee gets

credit. For example, if an employee applies a promo, but another closes the
check, the employee who opened the check receives the sales information.
Print # of Check Splits — If a check is split between customers, prints the

number of splits on the check.
Print PTD Tips — Prints the day part and charged tips on the employee
checkout. The sales for the current day and the percentage of sales are also
printed.
Print Checks Inset
Print Checks — Prints a separate listing for tendered checks.
Sort by Revenue Center — Sorts guest checks by the revenue center in

which they originated. Revenue center information is listed with the check
detail information.
Settings
Store

Reports Subtab
The Reports subtab enables you to print and define the time interval for the
FOH Flash report. Select the Reports subtab from the Printing group, shown
in Figure 3-44:
Figure 3-44 Reports Subtab
FOH Flash Report Time Interval — Represents the number of minutes per
interval for the FOH flash report.
Print Flash Report — Enables the Print button to display on the FOH Entire
Day Summary page of the Flash report.
No Interval Report — Disables the 15-minute interval report. The Interval

report prints every 15 minutes on a FOH printer as long as the sales data has
changed within the 15-minute period. Do not select this check box if you want
the report to print. This is used in cafeteria environments using TableService.
Printers Button
Click Printers to access the Printers function tab. Here you can perform main-
tenance in the Printers function, including add new records if the printer you
need to select is not already there.

Printers drop-down list — Identifies a printer to which reports will print for
the Interval report.
Printer Groups Button
Click Printer Groups to access the Printer Groups function tab. Here you can
perform maintenance in the Printer Groups function, including add new
records if the printer you need is not already there.
Printer Groups drop-down list — Prints the Interval report to all printers in
the selected group.
FOH Sales by Revenue Report Sorted by Day Part — Enables the Reve-
nue Center Sales report to sort by day part. If multiple revenue centers are
selected to print, each sorts by day part and a total prints at the bottom. If one
revenue center is selected, no total prints.
To run a sales report sorted by day part across all revenue centers,
Settings
select Reports > Restaurant Sales > Print > Select Sales Periods and
Store
select all periods.
Suppress FOH Labor Report Wages — Does not print wages on the FOH
Labor report.

Printing-Chits
The Printing-Chits group enables you to set up various chit print styles and
content. To access the Printing-Chits group options, select Maintenance >
Store Settings. Select Printing-Chits from the Group drop-down list. The cor-
responding subtabs display, with Chit Content as the default subtab.
There are three types of production chits:
• Regular chits
• Tray chits
• Expediter chits
A regular chit prints items ordered per station. When pivot seating is enabled,
item and seating information are included.
A tray chit is used in a pivot seating environment and is used by the person
assembling the order and distributing it to the table by seat position. This fea-
ture provides the kitchen with a summary of the order’s contents, and the seat
number to which each item belongs. All items from an order print on the tray
chit, including the items routed to a specific printer station. The chit prints the
summary by seating arrangement.
An expediter chit is similar to a tray chit, but prints a summary grouped by

like items, instead of seating arrangement.

Chit Content Subtab
The Chit Content subtab enables you to define what prints on the kitchen chit.
Select the Chit Content subtab from the Printing-Chits group, as shown in
Figure 3-45:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-45 Chit Content Subtab
Chit Type
Select Summary Chit, Single Chit Only, or Summary Chit with Single Chit, to
determine the information on chits and the way you print them.
Summary Chit — Prints the standard Aloha chit with a summary of all items
for the order, followed by a full cut.

Single Chit Only — Prints a chit for each item ordered, followed by a half
cut, as shown in Figure 3-46:
Figure 3-46 Single Chit Printing
Summary Chit with Single Chit — Prints the standard Aloha chit with a
summary of all items for the order, followed by a full cut, and a chit for each
item ordered, followed by a half cut, as shown in Figure 3-47:
Figure 3-47 Summary and Single Chit Printing
Single Chit Printing Options Inset
When you select ‘Single Chit Only’ or ‘Summary Chit with Single Chit’, you
can consolidate like items on a single chit and specify up to 30 characters to
print at the top of each single chit.
Consolidate Like Items — Prints same items with same modifiers in consol-
idation on the chit. For example, with single chit printing, an order with two

Hamburgers and three Snappers prints five separate chits for each item. With
consolidation, only two chits print, one with (2) Hamburgers and one with (3)
Snappers, as shown in Figure 3-48:
Figure 3-48 Consolidated Chit Printing
Settings
Store
Optional Single Chit Text — Prints additional text, up to 30 characters, at
the top of the chit.
Disable Standalone Chit Printing — Disables chit information from print-

ing to a local printer. Standalone chit printing is when the local terminal is the
master and no other terminals are in use, therefore, all chits are routed to the
local printer.
Print Message if Order Contains Items Routed to More Than One Order
Printer — Prints a message on the chit, if an order is sent to multiple printers.
The message is summarized at the top of the chit as follows:
More Items @
Food
Bar
Grill

Use Full Paper Cuts — Cuts printed receipts completely instead of partially.
Print all Items Being Ordered — Prints all items of an order that have not
been committed to an order mode. This is for a normal printing environment.
Chit Style Subtab

The Chit Style subtab enables you to define how lines are printed, expediter
printing, and sort options for the chit. Select the Chit Style subtab from the
Printing-Chits group, shown in Figure 3-49:
Figure 3-49 Chit Style Subtab
Leading Lines — Represents the number of blank lines that appear at the top
of the chit. This positions the guest check on the page when it is printed.

Trailing Lines — Represents the number of blank lines that appear at the bot-
tom of the chit.
Max Lines per Chit — Sets the maximum number of lines permitted on the
chit.
Max Items per Chit — Sets the maximum number of items permitted on
each chit.
Max Seats per Chit — Sets the maximum number of seats permitted on each
chit.
Expediter Printer Button
Click Expediter Printer to access the Printers function tab. Here you can per-
form maintenance in the Printers function, including add new records if the
printer you need is not already there.
Expediter Printer — Designates the printer in which a chit containing all
Settings
Store
menu items for orders will print. An order that has been split between two or
more printer groups in the kitchen also prints in its entirety on the expediter
printer. Orders not split between printer groups have no effect on the expe-
diter. This only affects the printers defined with the 'In Kitchen' check box
selected in Maintenance > Hardware > Printers > Options subtab.
Expedite Even When Items Only Route to 1 Printer — Prints an expe-

diter chit when all ordered items are routed to one kitchen printer. If this check
box is cleared, expediter chits print when an order is routed to two or more
kitchen printers.
Sort Options Inset
Sort Items According to Priority — Causes menu items to print on the chit
in the assigned priority. Items are sorted before printed and according to prior-
ities assigned in Maintenance > Menu > Items.

Always Use Maximum Modifier Priority — If a modifier has a higher pri-
ority than the item it is modifying, the entire item takes on the priority of the
highest modifier priority.
Print a Separator Line Between Priority — Prints a separator line between

menu items with different priorities. This works in conjunction with 'Sort
Items according to Priority'.
Modifier Sorting — Sorts the modifier on the chit according to the method
selected in the drop-down list. Select one of the following sorting methods:
None Displays modifiers in the order you enter them for the
item.
Priority (1) Sorts based on the priority defined for the modifier in
Maintenance > Menu > Items. (2) If modifiers have the
same priority, then sorts based on the order of the modifier
groups attached to the menu item. (3) Sorts in alphabetical
order.
Priority Only (1) Sorts based on the priority defined for the modifier in
Maintenance > Menu > Items, but identical modifier items
are kept together. (2) Sorts by alphabetical order.
Modgroup (1) Sorts based on the order of the modifier groups
attached to the menu item. (2) Sorts based on the priority
defined in Maintenance > Menu > Items. (3) Sorts in
alphabetical order.

Chit Appearance Subtab
The Chit Appearance subtab enables you to define the appearance of the chit,
such as font attributes, and how to print modifiers. Select the Chit Appearance
subtab from the Printing-Chits group, as shown in Figure 3-50:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-50 Chit Appearance Subtab
Consolidate Items with Identical Modifiers — Consolidates like items with

the same modifiers on the chit. This enables the ‘Table Items Only’ setting.
2 TBone
Rare
Salad
Beans

Consolidate Items with Different Modifiers — Consolidates like items on
the chit even if the modifiers are not the same. This enables the ‘Table Items
Only’ setting.
2 TBone
1 Rare
Salad
Beans
1 Medium Rare
Salad
Beans
Table Items Only — Applies consolidation rules to items going to the entire
table when you are using the ‘Pivot Seating’ feature. You must select either
‘Consolidate Items with Identical Modifiers’ or ‘Consolidate Items with Dif-
ferent Modifiers’ to enable this check box. This accommodates banquet envi-
ronments. The following example shows table consolidation with identical
modifiers:
2 TBone
Rare
Salad
Beans
*******For Table*******
The following example shows table consolidation with different modifiers:
2 T-Bone
1 Rare
Salad
1 Medium Rare
Salad
*******For Table*******

Print 1 in Front of Quantity 1 Items — Prints a ‘1’ in front of any quantity
1 item on the chit, instead of ‘>’.
1 TBone
1 Rare
1 Salad
1 Beans
Print (parentheses) for Quantity Items — Prints the total number of like
items in parenthesis.
(6) BBQ Sandwich
Default Item Justification — Enables items to print with left, right, or cen-
tered justification.
Irregular Item Justification — Enables No, Side, Extra, and Sub to print
with left, right, or centered justification.
Settings
Store
Font Inset
Print Modifiers in Red — Prints all modifiers in red ink when printed on
color printers, or in reverse type on other printers.
Print Only Selected Items in Red — Prints menu items in red ink when
printed on color printers when the ‘Highlight’ check box is selected, or in
reverse type on other printers.
Show Entry Fields in Inverse — Displays text lines in white against a

shaded background.
TBone
Print in Large Font — Prints the chit in a larger font.
Print Double Height Text — Doubles the height of the text.
Print Entrees in Bold — Prints entrees in bold face type.

Print Table Number in Red — Prints table numbers in red when printed on
color printers, or in reverse type on other printers.
Print Native Items in Bold — Prints items used as a modifier in bold. For
example, a salad used as a modifier for a steak, prints in bold.
Print Chit Time in Bold — Prints the time the order was placed in bold.
Print Irregular Items in Bold — Prints No, Side, Extra, and Sub in bold.
Print Irregular Items in Red — Prints No, Side, Extra, and Sub in red.
Print Typed Item Indicators — Prints the preceding and succeeding excla-
mation point indicators when you enter the item using the QWERTY key-
board.
Print Typed Items in Red — Prints the entry in red when you enter the item
using the QWERTY keyboard.
Wraparound Modifiers Inset
One Line Per Modifier — Prints one line per modifier under the item being
modified. This setting is the default for normal operations.
Contiguous, on Same Line as Item — Prints modifiers as one single line

along with the item being modified.
2 TBone Rare Salad Beans
Contiguous, on Next Line Following Item — Prints modifiers as one single

line under the item being modified.
2 TBone
Rare Salad Beans
Tab Stops — Specifies the number of characters used to separate each modi-
fier.

Chit Fields Subtab
The Chit Fields subtab enables you to define what prints on the chit for certain
fields, such as the check number, guest count, and more. Select the Chit Fields
subtab from the Printing-Chits group, as shown in Figure 3-51:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-51 Chit Fields Subtab
Print Check Number — Prints the check number on the chit.
Print Order Mode on Chit in Red — Prints the selected order mode(s) in
red ink on the chit.
Print Guest Count — Prints the number of guests on the chit.
Print Member Name on Chit — Prints the member's name on the chit.

Other Chits Subtab
The Other Chits subtab enables you to specify various chit settings for other
types of chits you print. Select the Other Chits subtab from the Printing group,
Figure 3-52 Other Chits Subtab
# Copies of Cash In/Out — Denotes the number of chit copies to print for
each petty cash in/out transaction. Set this to a number greater than zero.
Print Void Chits at Remote Printer — Prints only voided chits to a remote
printer.
Print Void Chit when an Item is Voided — Prints a void chit when an item
is voided.
Tray Chits Inset
Print Tray Chits — Enables tray chit printing on the printer designated in the
Tray Chit Printer drop-down list. The designated printer prints complete chits
by seat. This option facilitates tray setups, particularly when orders are split
between printer groups and is used with the Pivot Seating feature only.

Tray Chit Printer Button
Click Tray Chit Printer to access the Printers function tab. Here you can per-
form maintenance in the Printers function, including add new records if the
printer you need is not already there.
Tray Chit drop-down — Specifies the printer is used as a tray chit printer.
Exclude Category Button
Click Excluded in Category to access the Categories function tab. Here you
can perform maintenance in the Categories function, including add new
records if the category is not already there.
Exclude Category drop-down — Indicates the category to exclude from the

chits. This feature is used with the 'Tray Chit Printing' and 'Pivot Seating'
check boxes, so that a category of items, such as Beverages, does not print on
kitchen chits.
Settings
Store
Exclude All Modifiers — Does not print the modifiers on the chit.
Exclude Specific Category — Excludes the category listed in the Category

text box from the chit print. It is used when 'Tray Chit Printing' and 'Pivot
Seating' are enabled, so that a category of items, such as Beverages, does not
print on kitchen chits.
Max Seats per Tray Chit — Sets the maximum number of seats per tray for
each chit.
Order Taker Chits Inset
Print Order-Taker Chits — Prints order taker chits. This works in conjunc-
tion with the 'Order Taker' check box located in Maintenance > Labor > Job
Codes > TableService subtab.
Check text — Specifies the text to print on order-taker chits. This text box is
used only if 'Print Order-Taker Chits' is selected.

User Interface
The User Interface group enables you to define settings for the FOH touch
screen, such as screen timeouts, screen beeps, and order entry screen settings.
To access store settings for User Interface, select Maintenance > Store Set-
tings. Select User Interface from the Group drop-down list. The correspond-
ing subtabs display, with POS as the default subtab, shown in Figure 3-53:
Figure 3-53 POS Subtab
The User Interface group provides the following subtabs: POS, Order Screen,
and Pole Settings.
POS Subtab
The POS subtab, (Figure 3-53), enables you to define the screen display and
screen timeout settings.
Show Cursor — Changes the cursor to a large 'X' on the FOH touch screen.
Normally, the cursor is a single dot.
Show Redundant Mode Indicator — Displays a red outline on the logon

screen if the system is in Redundant mode.

Sort Checks by Check Close Time — Sorts guest checks based on the clos-
ing time.
Sort View Tables Screen by Server, Then by Time — Sorts view tables
based on the server, then by the time.
Use Quick Search Employee Lookup — Enables a FOH lookup screen for
every instance that an employee must be selected. With this feature, employ-
ees can be searched alphabetically or by numeric ID.
Qwerty — Determines if and when the Qwerty screen keypad option is

enabled. The keypad configuration is designated in the employee record, but
this field can be used to either override or accept that designation. This can be
set to 'Never' use the Qwerty keypad, 'Always' use the Qwerty keypad, or 'By
Employee', to designate the use of the Qwerty keypad by employee prefer-
ence.
The ‘Qwerty’ setting in the employee’s record overrides the setting
Settings
Store
in Store Settings.
FOH Theme — Denotes the pre-defined design theme for the Front-of-
House interface, instead of the basic Aloha theme shown in this manual. The
themes and corresponding bitmaps must be installed from the installation
disk. The four available themes are:
• Blue Stone
• Fabric
• Marble
• Wave

Enhanced Graphics Interface (EGI)
The Enhanced Graphics Interface (EGI) feature enables you to use gradient,
shadowing, and texture enhancements on buttons on the FOH. The computer
running the interface must be set for High Color (16 bits or greater), and have
64 MB of RAM or greater. For new installations, Aloha Technologies auto-
matically enables the Enhanced Graphic Interface on any system meeting
these requirements. If the system does not meet these requirements, the regu-
lar default screen appearance displays. For upgrades, you must enable this
feature, and select a scheme. You can select from the schemes provided by
Aloha Technologies, or define your own EGI scheme.You can not use this
feature with any of the cool interface FOH themes.
Graphic Theme — Specifies the enhanced graphic interface scheme to use

on the FOH and BOH. Leave this set to ‘Default’ to display the basic inter-
face, or select a scheme designed by Aloha Technologies, such as ‘Lemon-
Lime’ or ‘Pineapple’. You can also custom design your own schemes. This is
done using EGI2.CFG. All schemes you define in EGI2.CFG display at the
bottom of this list.
Disable Graphic on FOH — Disables the enhanced graphic interface on the

FOH screens.
Disable Graphics in Maintenance — Disables the enhanced graphic inter-

face on the BOH screens representing the FOH, such as menus, submenus,
modifiers, exception modifiers, Panel Editor, and the floor plan.
EGI.CFG and EGI2.CFG
EGI.CGF and EGI2.CFG are configuration files that define the colors and bit-
maps used by the schemes. Although the BOH and FOH read the configura-
tion files in ALOHA\DATA, you should store a copy of both of them in
ALOHA\NEWDATA and in ALOHA\DATA, and only edit the version in
ALOHA\NEWDATA.
EGI.CFG is the default configuration file supplied with the Aloha POS sys-
tem and contains the schemes designed by Aloha Technologies. EGI2.CFG is
intended for user-defined schemes, and it is not overwritten during an
upgrade. We recommend only editing EGI2.CFG.

Each configuration file is a text-based file that contains variables and values
that set the configuration. Each scheme within the configuration file has a
scheme name label [Scheme n], where n is the scheme number. For example,
EGI.CFG contains a Scheme1 label, and others. When you create new
schemes for EGI2.CFG, number your schemes starting with 100 to avoid con-
flicts with the scheme numbers used by Aloha Technologies in EGI.CFG.
EGI.CFG and EGI2.CFG use the following variables:
Name Default Description

NAME None The name of the scheme. Recommended 20 char-
acters or less.
BUTTONCOLOR 176,176,208 Red-Green-Blue (RGB) value of the default but-
ton color.
BACKGROUND None The name of a bitmap to use as the background
texture for dialog boxes.
BACKGROUND- 255,255,255 RGB value of the default dialog box background
COLOR color.
MSGBOXCOLOR 192,192,193 RGB value of the default message box color.
Settings
Store
BORDERPIXELS 8,7, or 3 The number of pixels around the button border.
The defaults are based on resolution:
1024x768=8, 800x600=7, 640x480=3
CHECKBACK- None The name of a bitmap to use as the background
GROUND texture for the check display. This function is cur-
rently not used.
CHECKCOLOR 255,255,255 RGB value of the default color for an inactive
check.
SELECTEDCHECK- 51,204,255 RGB value of the default color of a selected
COLOR check.
TRAININGCHECK- 102,255,153 RGB value of the default color of training checks.
COLOR
LABEL 0,0,0 RGB value of the default color for text labels on
the window background.
RED 255,0,0 RGB value of the color to substitute for red text
on buttons.
GREEN 0,255,0 RGB value of the color to substitute for green text
on buttons.
BLUE 0,0,255 RGB value of the color to substitute for blue text
on buttons.
WHITE 255,255,255 RGB value of the color to substitute for white text
on buttons.

Name Default Description
BLACK 0,0,0 RGB value of the color to substitute for black text
on buttons.
PURPLE 255,0,255 RGB value of the color to substitute for purple
text on buttons.
MAROON 128,0,0 RGB value of the color to substitute for maroon
text on buttons.
MSGBMPPREFIX Msg The prefix for the default message box animation
bitmaps. Name the files as the following: x1.bmp,
x2bmp, x3bmp, and so on, where x is the prefix.
For example, Msg1.bmp, Msg2.bmp, and so on.
PRTBMPPREFIX MsgPrt The prefix for the printer error message box ani-
mation bitmaps. Name the files as the following:
x1.bmp, x2bmp, x3bmp, and so on, where x is the
prefix. For example, MsgPrt1.bmp, MsgPrt2.bmp,
and so on.
ARROWBMPPREFIX Arrow The prefix for the six scroll button bitmaps. Name
the files as the following: xUp.bmp,
xPageUp.bmp, xDown.bmp, xPageDown.bmp,
xLeft.bmp, and xRight.bmp, where x is the prefix.
For example, ArrowUp.bmp, ArrowPage-
Down.bmp, and so on.
You must store all bitmaps in the \BMP folder. If you are not using a setting,
do not leave it blank. Comment it out by using a semicolon at the beginning of
the variable. Otherwise it will force the value to zero or blank, instead of the
default. Use the RGB value 192,192,193 to specify gray, because the usual
value of 192,192,192 has a special meaning to the Aloha system.
POS Screen Timeouts Inset
Default — Denotes the number of seconds that an order entry terminal stays
in display mode in the absence of any activity. When this time passes, the ter-
minal will exit and the employee must log in again. This number should be set
to reflect the individual needs of the restaurant, although 30 seconds is a stan-
dard setting.
Bar — Denotes the number of seconds that a bartender screen is kept in dis-
play mode on order entry terminals in the absence of any activity. When this
time passes, the bartender screen will exit and the bartender must log in again.
This number may be set to an appropriately high value to reflect the work
habits of bartenders.

Manager — Denotes the number of seconds that a manager screen is kept in
display mode on order entry terminals in the absence of any screen activity
before exiting. When this time passes, the manager screen will exit and the
manager must log in again. Ordinarily, this number should be set substantially
lower than the default timeout.
Rapid Access — Denotes the number of seconds that the Rapid Entry screen
stays in display mode in the absence of any activity.
For more infor-
mation on Rapid
Touch Screen Beeps Inset Access, refer to Chapter 4,
Labor Maintenance Func-
The four text boxes in the Touch Screen Beeps inset, Button Frequency, But- tions, under the section on the
Functions subtab.
ton Duration, Background Frequency, and Background Duration, are used to
set the frequency and duration of audible signals generated by the Aloha sys-
tem. Under normal circumstances, these numbers should not be changed with-
out first consulting the Aloha dealer.
Logo Screen Contact Information — Displays the text for contact informa-
tion on the Floating Logo screen.
Settings
Store

Order Screen Subtab
This subtab enables you to define the number of rows and columns in your
order entry screen, and to define categories available for use. Select the Order
Screen subtab from the User Interface group, shown in Figure 3-54:
Figure 3-54 Order Screen Subtab
Order Entry Inset
Modifier Screen Rows — Specifies the number of rows of item buttons to

display on the Modifiers function tab in Maintenance > Menu > Modifiers and
on the FOH.
Modifier Screen Columns — Specifies the number of columns of item but-

tons to display on the Modifiers function tab in Maintenance > Menu > Modi-
fiers and on the FOH.
Submenu Screen Rows — Specifies the number of rows to display on the

Submenu function tab in Maintenance > Menu > Submenu and on the FOH.
The maximum number of items you can place on a submenu is the lesser of
the following: (2 submenu pages x submenu rows x submenu columns) or 48.

Submenu Screen Columns — Specifies the number of columns to display
on the Submenu function tab in Maintenance > Menu > Submenu and on the
FOH.
Place PLU/SKU Button on POS Submenus — Adds a PLU (or SKU) but-
ton to the FOH menu.
Confirm Close Checks — Enables a confirmation prompt asking the

employee if they want to order all items on open checks so that the check can
be closed.
Category for Item Lookup Inset
Category — Enables the price of an item to be located using its name or PLU
number on the FOH, and enables a predefined Nonsales category of items to
be selected that will be available when using the Item Lookup function on the
FOH. 'Allow Item Lookup' must be selected in Maintenance > Labor > Job
Codes > Job Code subtab before a particular job code can use this function.
Settings
Store
Enable Recipes — Enables recipes to show by displaying the Recipe button
on the FOH.
Disable Multimedia — Disables item multimedia functions in the FOH.
Disable Repeat Order Button — Prevents the Repeat Order button from
displaying on the order entry terminal.
Pole Settings Subtab

The Pole Settings subtab provides options to display a user-defined message
on the pole display when the terminal is not in use, display the guest check
subtotal during ordering, and enable any remaining gift card balance to

appear. Select the Pole Settings subtab from the User Interface group, as
Figure 3-55 Pole Settings Subtab
Display Message on Pole Display When Not in Use — Enables text to dis-
play on the pole display when not in use. If employees self-assign their draw-
ers, the message displays after the FOH “You are now assigned to the bank”
message.
Text — Designates the text to display on the pole display, such as “Closed” or
“Next register”.
Show Subtotal on Pole Display — Displays the running subtotal on the pole
display.
Display Gift Card Balance on Pole Display — Displays the remaining bal-
Refer to the
Aloha TableSer-
ance of a gift card when closing the check to a gift card tender. This setting is
vice Special Features Guide enabled when you select ‘Use Gift Card Sales’ in the Gift Card/Certificates
for more information on gift group and you are authorized for gift cards.
cards.

Security
The Security group enables you to define security settings for the POS sys-
tem, POS passwords, restrictions, and the cash drawer. To access the Security
group settings, select Maintenance > Store Settings. The Store Settings func-
tion tab displays. Select Security from the Group drop-down list. The corre-
sponding subtabs display, with POS Security as the default subtab, shown in
Figure 3-56:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-56 POS Security Subtab
The Security group provides the following subtabs: POS Security, POS Pass-
word Settings, Restrictions, and Cash Drawer.
POS Security Subtab

This subtab enables you to establish global server and bartender security lev-
els, and activates the use of Aloha Spy. It also lets you establish the location
from which Payment Reconciliation will be processed. Select the POS Secu-
rity subtab from the Security group.
Use Non-Reset Totals — Carries totals forward without resetting them to

zero. These figures appear on the BOH sales report.

Manual Day Parts — Requires day parts to be manually changed instead of
the FOH doing it automatically.
Server Security Inset
Disable Transfers — Disables the ability of servers to transfer tables.
Blind Server — Prevents servers from seeing sales totals until checkout.
Use Aloha Spy — Activates the Aloha Spy program. Aloha Spy interfaces
with the TVS security video in the BOH, to pass data from the FOH to display
on the TVS camera in the BOH.
Bartender Security Inset
Print Bartender Audit Check — Prints bartender audit chits on the local
printer when bartenders place orders.
Print Prices on Audit Check — Prints prices on bartender audit chits.
Full Summary on Checkout — Prints an extensive summary at bartender

checkout.
Show Total on Order Entry Screen — Enables the bartender to see running
totals of checks on order entry screens. Normally, the employee sees the total
only on the Close Check screen.
Blind Bartender — Prevents the bartender from seeing sales totals until
checkout.
Disable Add to Tab Button — Disables the Add to Tab button on the FOH,
preventing items from being added to tabs from the order entry screen.
Allow Merge Tabs — Enables tabs to be merged even if comps and promos
have been applied.

Run Payment Reconciliation From Inset
Refer to the Pay-
ment Reconcilia-
Front and Back of House — Provides the ability to run the Payment Recon- tion section in the Special
ciliation process from the FOH POS terminal and from the Functions menu in Features Guide, for more
Aloha Manager on the BOH terminal. This is beneficial when several servers information on this functional-
ity.
need to run the Payment Reconciliation process and the FOH terminal is
being used.
Back of House — Sets the Payment Reconciliation process to operate from

the Functions menu on the BOH terminal only.
POS Password Settings Subtab

This subtab enables you to define employee password and number digits, as
well as to enable, disable, or require a password for each employee. Select the
POS Password Settings subtab from the Security group,shown in Figure 3-57:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-57 POS Password Settings
Min Password Digits — Specifies the minimum number of alphanumeric

characters permitted for passwords.

Max Password Digits — Specifies the maximum number of alphanumeric
characters permitted for passwords.
Number Employee — Defines the number of characters to use when logging

in to the system. Enter a number from 3 to 9 digits. Enter leading zeros when
logging in to the system. For example, if the employee number is '105' and the
'Number Employee' text box is set to '4', enter '0105' on the FOH terminal
when logging in.
Password Inset
Disabled — Disables the FOH password function that enables employees to

log in using only their employee login number. If 'Disabled' is selected, the
Change Password button does not display on the FOH Employee Functions
screen. The button does not display, even if the 'Uses Password' check box is
selected in the Job Codes subtab. (The Job Codes subtab is located in Mainte-
nance > Labor > Job Codes.)
Optional — Enables employees to choose whether they use a password to log

in to the FOH.
Required — Requires employees to use numeric passwords to access the

FOH.
If you are using numeric passwords and not magnetic cards,

‘Required’ must be selected.

Restrictions Subtab
This subtab enables you to specify minimum and maximum open item prices,
the time allowed to void entries, and other restrictions. Select the Restrictions
subtab from the Security group, as shown in Figure 3-58:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-58 Restrictions Subtab
Maximum Check Amount — Sets the maximum value of a guest check.

Enter a dollar amount of $0.01 to $999999.99. Enter 0 if you do not want to
set a restriction. As you are adding items to the check, the system monitors the
total, and when the complete total, including taxes and surcharges, exceeds
the specified amount, an error message displays. You can no longer add items
to the check. You must close the check, and start a new one.
Disable Real Time Updates — Requires a full refresh be performed to

update employee and PLU item changes or updates.
Allow Refund Orders, by Access Level — Gives employees assigned to

specific access levels the ability to do refunds.

Allow Split Promos, Comps, Tax Exempt — Allows guest checks contain-
ing promotions, comps, or tax exempt items to be split.
Cannot Move Payment Types — Disables the ability to move payments

when using the split check function. In other words, once a check is split and
payments for the split checks are entered, they cannot be moved from one
check to another.
‘Clear’ Removes All Ordered and Unordered Items — Enables the FOH
‘Clear’ button to remove all items on the check whether they are ordered or
unordered.
Allow Adjust Payments — Permits servers to adjust payments on their own

closed checks. If not selected, managers are required to make payment adjust-
ments.
Disable Split Items — Disables the ability to split items between checks.
Disable Tax Exempt — Prevents the Tax Exempt button from showing on
the FOH payment screen.
Disable No Sale — Prevents the cash drawer from opening for non-sales
transactions, such as making change for a customer.
Disable Petty Cash Accts — Disables the use of petty cash accounts.
No Gift Certificate Numbers — Disables the gift certificate number entry

prompt and the gift certificate range checking and tracking features.
Allowable Open Item Amounts Inset
Min — Sets the lowest price that can be entered for an open item.
Max — Sets the highest price that can be entered for an open item.
Time Allowed to Void Entries Inset
Restrict Void Items — Limits the amount of time an employee has to void
entries after they are committed to an order mode.

# of Minutes After Ordered — Specifies the number of minutes that can
pass between the time an item is committed to an order mode, and the time it
can be voided.
Cash Drawer Subtab

This subtab enables you to specify cash drawer security settings. Select the
Cash Drawer subtab from the Security group, shown in Figure 3-59:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-59 Security Cash Drawer
Hide Cash Drawer Amount — Conceals the cash drawer amount so it is not
displayed in drawer functions. If you select this check box, the Drawers
screen in the Cash Drawers function displays the text ‘Paid In/Outs’ on the

Paid In/Outs button. If you clear this check box, the calculated dollar amount
in the drawer displays on the Paid In/Outs button instead.
The CASHFUNCS variable in Aloha.ini affects how you enter your

paid in/outs. If this variable is set to TRUE, and you clear ‘Hide
Cash Drawer Amount,’ the calculated dollar amount in the drawer
displays on the Paid In/Outs button on the Drawer screen. However,
if you select ‘Hide Cash Drawer Amount,’ the Paid In/Outs button
on the Drawer screen is blank. A new button called Cash Functions
appears on the Financial screen. Use this button to enter your paid
in/outs. The CASHFUNCS variable is normally set to FALSE.
Use Access Level to Determine Bar Drawer Access Rights — Controls

access to the bar drawer through job code settings. Unless an employee is
assigned to a job code that has access to the bar drawer, they are unable to
open the drawer.
Limit Public Cash Drawers to Revenue Center — Controls access to the

public cash drawers through job codes assigned to a revenue center. Unless a
cash drawer is assigned to a revenue center accessed by the employee’s job
code, the employee is unable to open the drawer.
Drawer Security Settings Inset
Beep on Timeout — Causes the cash drawer to start beeping once it has
timed out.
Logout on Timeout — Automatically logs the current employee out of the

system once the cash drawer has timed out.
Message Box on Timeout — Causes a message box to display once a

drawer times out.
No Entry on Timeout — Prevents orders from being entered once a drawer

times out.
No Sale with Items — Prevents the cash drawer from opening while orders
are being entered. Once an order is complete, the cash drawer opens.

Open on Refund Check — Automatically opens the cash drawer when a
refund check is closed.
Allow Auto-Open on Zero Total Checks — Automatically opens the cash

drawer when the check is reduced to a zero balance. A zero balance occurs
when you add items to a check, then the check is reduced to zero, using a
void, comp and/or a promotion. A zero balance also occurs when an employee
try to close a check with a zero priced item, such as water. This setting over-
rides the ‘Open Drawer on Close’ check box in Maintenance > Payments >
Tenders > Tenders subtab.
Drawer Timeout __ Seconds — Sets the number of seconds before a drawer

will timeout if it is left open. You cannot perform any functions when the time
elapses until you close the drawer.
Settings
Store

System
The System group enables you to set up your system date and time, security
key information, store address and phone number, interfaces for the FOH,
maximum number of items, disk maintenance functions, and EOD settings.
Select Maintenance > Store Settings. Select System from the Group drop-
down list. The corresponding subtabs display, with Date/Time as the default
subtab, shown in Figure 3-60:
Figure 3-60 Date/Time Subtab
The System group provides the following subtabs: Date/Time, Licensing,

Store Information, Interfaces, Aloha Settings, Disk Maintenance, and End Of
Day.
Date/Time Subtab
The Date/Time subtab enables you to define the business date, open time, first
day of week, and time zone settings.

Day of Business — Displays the business date as recognized by the system,
regardless of the actual calendar date. The EOD procedure automatically
updates this field when the system is in operation, and the value should corre-
spond to the calendar date.
Open Time — Displays the daily restaurant opening time.
First Day of Week — Displays the first day of the payroll period. Select the
appropriate day from the drop-down list.
Time Zone Inset
Some countries do not follow the United States rules for DST or do not
observe DST at all. For example, in the Southern Hemisphere DST is
observed by springing forward one hour in September or October, instead of
during April, which is the month that DST is observed in the United States.
Daylight Savings Time for the U.S. and its territories is NOT observed in
Hawaii, American Samoa, Guam, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, the Eastern
Time Zone portion of the State of Indiana, and most of Arizona (with the
Settings
Store
exception of the Navajo Indian Reservation in Arizona). The TIMEZONE
variable is used for these situations.
U.S. Daylight Savings Time — Sets the system to use United States DST
settings. This is the default value, which uses the United States rules for DST
to spring forward in April, and fall back in October.
No Daylight Savings Time — Specifies your area does not observe daylight
savings time. This prevents the Aloha programs from springing forward or
falling back. Note: All terminals and the file server must be set to a state or
area that does not observe DST for this variable to work properly.
International Daylight Savings Time — Specifies you are outside the

United States and do observe daylight savings time. The DST rules of the
local country are followed.
When assigning INTL (international) to the TIMEZONE variable, TIME-

ZONE.INI, which stores the time zone settings on the file server, is created.
The latest versions of data in the \DATA directory, and the new TIME-
ZONE.INI with the new settings, is copied from the file server to the FOH
when the FOH terminals synchronize upon boot up.

Synchronize POS Time with Back Office Time — Makes the time setting
on your POS terminal correspond to the time setting on your back office ter-
minal. This causes the SYNCTIME.EXE file to run every two hours for all
terminals on the system, which synchronizes the terminal time with the time
on the file server. It does not interfere with normal operations.
To set Daylight Savings Time to NO DST or INTL, the fol-

lowing procedures must be done. It is not adequate to
select the No Daylight Savings Time check box or the
International Daylight Savings Time check box, without
also performing the following procedures.
On each FOH terminal and on the BOH file server:
1. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel.

2. Double-click the Date/Time icon.
3. Select the Time Zone tab.
4. Select the appropriate state or area from the drop-down list.
5. Select the Automatically adjust the clock for daylight changes
check box. Note: This check box must be selected on the BOH file
server, and all FOH terminals.
6. Click OK.
On the BOH file server:
1. Delete the TIMEZONE.INI file located in ALOHA\DATA.
TIMEZONE.INI only exists in the \DATA directory if the timezone

was set to INTL at one time. This file should not be in the \NEW-
DATA directory. If it is, delete it from this directory also.
2. Log in to the BOH.

3. Select Maintenance > Store Settings to display the Store Settings
function tab.
4. Select System from the Group drop-down list.
5. Select the Date/Time subtab.
6. Select either No Daylight Savings Time or International Daylight
Savings Time.

7. Click Save and exit the Store Settings function.
8. Select Utilities > Refresh Data.
9. Exit the BOH.
10. Launch the BOH again with the new time zone settings. The TIME-
ZONE.INI file is built (if the time zone is set to International Daylight
Savings Time).
11. Select Utilities > Refresh Data to update the TIMEZONE.INI file on
all FOH terminals.
Licensing Subtab
This subtab enables you to enter the security key numbers provided as part of
the Aloha system installation. (Some Aloha products require six security
codes.) The key information is specific to each restaurant, and must be
entered correctly before the system is enabled. Incorrect security key informa-
tion disables the Aloha system. Select the Licensing subtab from the System
Settings
Figure 3-61 Licensing Subtab Store

Security Key Information Inset
When entering the security key information, enter the codes exactly as printed
on the key. Enter only zeros, there are no letter O's in the code.
Line 1 — Represents the numbers labeled SEC1 on your security key infor-
mation sheet.
mation sheet.
mation sheet.
mation sheet.
mation sheet.
mation sheet.

Store Information Subtab
This subtab enables you to enter your location's name, address, and phone
number(s). Select the Store Information subtab from the System group, as
Settings
Store
Figure 3-62 Store Information Subtab
Unit No. — Displays a unit number, up to six digits. This is optional and is
useful for chain operators with unique store numbers for each location.
Unit — Displays the store name.
Address — Displays the physical street address, city, state, and zip code on
the two address lines.
Mailing Address — Displays the street, box, or other address used by your
establishment for postal purposes.
Business Num: — Represents your business or federal ID number you want

to display for tax reporting purposes.
Telephone 1: — Denotes the phone number at your store.

Telephone 2: — Denotes an alternate phone number for your store.
City/Town: — Denotes the city or town address used for your store for postal
purposes.
State: — Denotes the state used for your store for postal purposes.
Postal Code: — Denotes the federal zip code used by your store for postal
purposes.
Interfaces Subtab
This subtab enables you to specify automatic BOH settings, FOH interface,
third party interface, etc. Select the Interfaces subtab from the System group,
Figure 3-63 Interfaces Subtab
Auto Start Back of House Upon Startup — Works in conjunction with the
selected terminal to automatically start the BOH on the selected terminal at
system startup. This check box is normally selected when the Aloha network
file server is the same as the master terminal.

Terminal — Select the BOH terminal on which to automatically start at star-
tup from the drop-down list.
Terminal Button
Click Terminal to access the Terminals function tab. Here you can modify or
update terminal settings, including add new records if the terminal you need is
not already there.
Third Party Interfaces Inset
Third party interfaces permit the selection of a third party table management
and/or frequent diner system software interface.
TMS — Designates the third party Table Management Service product you
are using. Aloha supports ProHost as a table management interface. If you are
not using a third party interface, select 'None'.
Frequent Diner — Designates the third party Frequent Diner product you are
Settings
Store
using. Aloha supports Customer Knowlogy as a frequent diner interface. If
you are not using a third party interface, select 'None'.
Use FOH COM Interface? — Activates the Aloha FOH interfaces.
Generate Clarifye Export File — Creates an export text file during the
Grind process for the selected category.
Category — Identifies a category from which to export a text file during the
grind from the drop-down list.
Category Button

Aloha Settings Subtab
This subtab enables you to establish the maximum number of items that can
be stored in the system, log actions, and to disable the auto-grind process.
Select the Aloha Settings subtab from the System group, as shown in Figure
3-64:
Figure 3-64 Aloha Settings Subtab
Maximum Number of Items — Specifies the maximum number of items (in

thousands) that can be created and stored in the system. The default is 15,000.
The maximum number of items that can be defined is 100,000.
Disable Auto-Grind — Disables the automatic data processing and summa-

rizing of previous day's activities. This check box should only be selected dur-
ing initial setup or when troubleshooting the Aloha installation.
Debug Events — Writes events to the debout log. This is found in the
\ALOHA\TMP\DEBOUT directory.
Continue FOH on log error — Enables FOH terminals to automatically fix

corrupt transaction, printer, and video logs and remain operational. If errors
appear in these logs, a notification message appears on the FOH.

Cannot Close Aloha Manager — Restricts logged in users from closing
Aloha Manager when Ctlsvr.exe is registered as a service. This setting only
displays when you log in with the ‘Super Secret Password’. This restricts the
three methods of closing Aloha Manager.
Figure 3-65
Disk Maintenance Subtab

This subtab enables you to control warning messages and purged information.
Select the Disk Maintenance subtab from the System group, shown in Figure
Settings
Store
3-66:
Figure 3-66 Disk Maintenance Subtab

Warning Threshold — Specifies (in megabytes) the amount of hard drive
diskspace left when the low disk space warning is given.
Number of Days to Keep On — Specifies the number of days to store dated

subdirectories on the hard drive. During the end-of-day process, the system
compares the current system date against dated subdirectories and removes
the dated subdirectories that are older than the number of days specified in
this text box. Do not enter a value in this text box if you do want to use the
purge function, or if you do not perform regular backups.
Use the Archive Bit to Purge Data — Purges only the files that have the
‘Archive’ attribute cleared (turned off). There are many ways in which to
clear the ‘Archive’ attribute, but normally this is done by a third-party backup
program. You would not normally select the ‘Use the Archive Bit to Purge
Data’ check box unless you are using a third-party program to perform regular
backups.
When you create or change a file, Microsoft® Windows® sets the ‘Archive’
file attribute (turns it on). If you specify a number in ‘Number of Days to
Keep On’, and do not select ‘Use the Archive Bit to Purge Data’, during the
end-of-day process, the system purges all dated subdirectories older than the
number of days you specify. If you specify a number and you also select ‘Use
the Archive Bit to Purge Data’, the end-of-day process will not purge any file
in which the ‘Archive’ attribute is not cleared (turned off), regardless if it is
older than the number of days you specify.

End of Day Subtab
This subtab enables you to create various End-of-Day (EOD) settings. Select
the End of Day subtab from the System group, as shown in Figure 3-67:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-67 End of Day Subtab
Winhook — Contains the name of a custom batch file to launch following the
EOD. Custom batch files allow the automation of certain routines that are out-
side the Aloha system but that address Aloha data files, such as compressing
or zipping data files, and copying them to another drive.
Num Minutes 'Til EOD — Represents the number of minutes before auto-
matic EOD runs. A warning message displays on the order entry terminals,
indicating EOD is about to run.
Do Not Copy CDX Files at EOD — Prevents the .CDX files from being
copied to dated subdirectories at EOD. Two files, ADJTIME.CDX and GND-
BREAK.CDX, are copied regardless of this setting.

24-Hour Operation — Indicates the restaurant is open 24 hours per day. This
causes all open sales and labor to carry over from one business day to the next
during the EOD process. Open checks remain open and carry over to the new
business day. Employees are clocked out and clocked back in for a new day of
business, but are not checked out. The Employee Break Report will report the
end time as the time that EOD was run.
Carryover Items — Represents the category created for item availability

Refer to the
Item Availabil-
carryover items from the drop-down list. The selected category must be a non-
ity section in the Special sales category. All items for which item availability will be tracked must be
Features Guide, for more assigned to this category. If a category is not selected, item quantities are reset
information on carryover
to zero at EOD.
items.

International
The International group enables you to establish policies for international cur-
rency use, taxes, and international date settings. This permits customizing of
the system to match local currency requirements. Select Maintenance > Store
Settings. Select International from the Group drop-down list. The correspond-
ing subtabs display, with International as the default subtab, shown in Figure
3-68:
Settings
Store
Figure 3-68 International Subtab
The International group provides the following subtabs: International, Special

Currency, Inclusive Taxes, International Date and GST.
International Subtab
The International subtab enables you to define international formats, check
counter settings, and to define rounding indicators.

International Field Formatting — Enables up to nine alphanumeric charac-
ters to be entered in the Social Security Number field. This is important for
International countries that do not use the standard nine-digit social security
number format.
Print Cash Drawer Serial Number — Prints the cash drawer serial number
on top of the cash in/out chit.
Use International Bar Codes (EAN) — Indicates your system is supporting

International (EAN) bar codes. The weight on the bar code prints on the guest
check when this is selected.
Print Check Counter Inset
Use the Print Check Counter inset to set up the perpetual check counter func-
tion available to international sites. This function prints a perpetual check
number in the top left corner of the guest check.
Once set up, the counter is automatically activated when a guest check is
entered on a FOH terminal. A binary file, COUNTER.BIN, in created in the
root directory (C:\) on the terminal in which the guest check is generated. All
sales information is stored in this file.
The system tracks the following items on each terminal when the counter is
activated:
• The total sales generated on a terminal.

• The total number of checks generated from a sale.
• The total number of server checkouts.
• The total number of sales reports printed.
The perpetual check counter does not roll over at EOD. To reset the
counter for the terminal, delete COUNTER.BIN located in the root
directory of the corresponding terminal.

Select from the options located in the Print Check Counter inset to activate the
check counter feature and determine the information to print on the guest
check:
Print Check Counter — Enables a check counter that never resets, and
prints the sequential number on the guest check.
Print Store Id — Works with the ‘Print Check Counter’ feature and prints
the store ID on the guest check.
Print Terminal Id — Works with the ‘Print Check Counter’ feature and
prints the terminal ID on the guest check.
Text to Print Before — If ‘Print Check Counter’ is selected, specifies the

text to print before the sequential number (check number) on the guest check,
for example, Check Number.
Print Item Count before Subtotal — Prints the total number of items on
the guest check.
Settings
Store
Text — Specifies the text to print before the item count number on the guest
check, for example, Item Number.
Country/Region — Indicates the method to use for expanding data text

boxes. This accommodates regions which require extra characters for names,
addresses, and phone numbers. Select between United States, United King-
dom, or Universal Format.
No Check Rounding — Displays check totals as the exact check amount, not
rounded.
All Tenders Round to 0.05 — Rounds check totals for checks paid by all
methods of payment to the nearest nickel. This cannot be selected in conjunc-
tion with ‘Cash Tenders Round to 0.05’.
Cash Tenders Round to 0.05 — Rounds check totals for checks paid by cash
only to the nearest nickel. This cannot be selected in conjunction with ‘All
Tenders Round to 0.05’.

Display Adjustment — Displays the rounding benefit on the guest check.
The rounding benefit describes the variance between the sales total and the
payments total when using check rounding. The rounding benefit may also be
viewed on various reports in BOH.
Print Rounded Indicator — Prints a mark on the check to indicate that the
check total is a rounded amount.
Method — Specifies the rounding method to use on the check total. The three
specific rounding methods are: Nearest, Up, and Down. The Rounding feature
is a global setting, meaning that it applies to all checks and not by employee
or job code.
Special Currency Subtab

This subtab enables you to specify special currency regulations, such as the
number of digits allowed, the currency symbol, etc. Select the Special Cur-
rency subtab from the International group, shown in Figure 3-69:
Figure 3-69 Special Currency Subtab

Use Special Currency — Indicates you are using a currency other than the
U.S. dollar. The system overrides the standard decimal and monetary settings
and uses values entered on this subtab. Values entered in the International
options are ignored unless this check box is selected.
Number of Digits — Denotes the number of digits to the right of the decimal.
Although two is the standard for North America, many nations require three
digits to the right of the decimal.
Decimal Separator — Denotes the character used to separate whole values

from fractional values (dollars versus cents, for example). If custom dictates
that the separator is a period, such as in the United States, enter a period in
this field.
Symbol — Denotes the symbol that indicates the amount is monetary. North
America uses a '$' while England uses a '£'.
Thousand Separator — Denotes the customary character that is used to sep-

arate numbers in thousands. For example, North American custom is to use a
Settings
Store
comma as the thousands separator; European custom is to use a period.
Print Check Total in all Currencies — Enables the guest check total to print
in all currencies in use.

Inclusive Taxes Subtab
This subtab enables you to set various tax policies, such as whether to exempt
inclusive tax, print tax breakouts, etc. Select the Inclusive Taxes subtab from
the International group, shown in Figure 3-70:
Figure 3-70 Inclusive Taxes Subtab
Do Not Print Subtotal and Tax on Check — Disables printing the subtotal
and tax on guest checks. Use this option with 'Use Inclusive Tax Breakout'. In
European countries, only a total amount is required to print on checks.
Exempt Inclusive Tax — Removes inclusive taxes from the item price.
Indicator — Denotes the character or text to appear on the printed receipt to

indicate the inclusive tax has been backed out of the price.

Inclusive Tax Breakout Inset
Use Inclusive Tax Breakout — Enables you to print a breakout of VAT

(Value Added Tax) on the guest check. The breakdown separates and
describes the pre-tax price and the corresponding tax. The VAT is the predom-
inant tax method in European and Latin American countries and is very simi-
lar to inclusive taxes. The tax breakdown is displayed at the bottom of the
guest check. Before you can display the VAT breakdown, you must first create
the appropriate VAT tax or taxes in Maintenance > Menu > Taxes. Remember
that VATs are inclusive taxes. You should not use this feature if exclusive
taxes are being used.
Do Not Print Tax Breakout on Check — Omits inclusive tax information

from guest checks. It disables printing the subtotal and tax on guest checks. In
European countries that use VAT, it is confusing when the subtotal and tax
lines print and VAT information prints on the bottom of guest checks.
Pre Text — Contains the text to display before the tax information on the
guest check.
Settings
Store
Tax Text — Contains the text to display before the tax amount on the guest
check.
Base Text — Contains the text to display before the item's pre-tax amount on
the guest check.

International Date Subtab
This subtab enables you to specify the format for dates entered into the sys-
tem. Select the International Date subtab from the International group, shown
in Figure 3-71:
Figure 3-71 International Date Subtab
Date Format Inset
Separators specify the character to use for separating the month, day of the
month, and year. Each separator is one character; the separators do not have to
be the same character.
One — Denotes the character to separate the first two fields (such as / or -).
Two — Denotes the character to separate the last two fields.
Month Digits — Specifies the number of digits to display. The default num-
ber is two.
Day Digits — Specifies the number of digits to display. The default number is
two.

Year Digits — Specifies the number of digits to use for the date. Set this to
two or four digits. The default is four digits.
YMD Order — Displays the date with the year first, followed by the month,
then the day of the month.
DMY Order — Displays the date with the day of the month first, followed
by the month, then the year.
MDY Order — Displays the date with the month first, followed by the day
of the month and then the year. This is the default setting.
Sample Date — Displays an example of how dates display throughout the

system, based on the selected order option (YMD, DMY, or MDY).
GST Subtab
This subtab enables you to specify Goods and Services Tax parameters. Select
Refer to Chapter
the GST subtab from the International group, shown in Figure 3-72:
Settings
5, Menu Mainte-
Store
nance, for more information
on GST taxes.
Figure 3-72 GST Subtab

Credit Card
The Credit Card group enables you to define EDC settings, credit card autho-
Refer to the
Aloha EDC
rization procedures, and voucher printing. It provides on-line credit card
User’s Guide for more infor- authorization, preauthorization, verification, and settlement of credit card
mation. transactions. In addition, it provides a number of built-in management tools,
such as real-time transaction tracking, maintaining transaction history files,
and customized reporting functions.
Select Credit Card from the Group drop-down list. The default subtab, EDC
Settings, displays, as shown in Figure 3-73:
Figure 3-73 Credit Card Subtab
Enable EDC — Activates EDC functionality.
Number of ICVerify Terminals — Specifies the number of ICVerify termi-

Refer to ICVerify
in Chapter 2,
nals to use. This text box is typically set to 1.
Functions, for more informa-
tion on ICVerify terminals.

If you are not using the Aloha EDC software, 'Enable EDC' and 'Number of
ICVerify Terminals' are the only check boxes that you must select or enter a
value. All other settings refer specifically to the Aloha EDC software.
Settings
Store

Delivery
The Delivery group enables you to establish delivery order types and policies
Refer to the Aloha
Delivery/Frequent
for operations that offer delivery service. This group will only be listed if you
Buyers User’s Guide for more are set up to use Delivery/Frequent Buyer, which is part of the Customer
information. Management Solutions package. Delivery/Frequent Buyer is a program used
to track customer's sales history. It also provides the ability to set up different
programs to reward the guest, and encourages guests to buy more frequently
with the use of coupons and bonus plans.

Gift Card/Certificate Sales
Use the Gift Card/Certificate Sales group to establish the type of gift cards or
gift certificates you will be selling. The Aloha system supports the following
types:
• Basic Gift Certificates

• Aloha Gift Certificate Manager
• Aloha eCard
• Paymentech
• ValueLink
Basic Gift Certificates is an internal feature within the Aloha system used to
track paper gift certificates. The Basic Gift Certificates feature does not
require a security key license.
Aloha Gift Certificate Manager is an Aloha BackOffice product and requires a
Settings
Refer to the
Store
security key license. You can set the rules for gift certificates in advance, Aloha Gift
making it easier to sell and redeem them. There is no need for forms or man- Certificate Manager User’s
ual design and it lets you create or inventory preprinted gift certificates easily. Guide for more informa-
tion.
The system tracks each certificate you issue and redeem to reduce the risk of
missing certificates and compromising security.
Aloha eCard is a feature of the Aloha Enterprise product to sell and redeem
Refer to the
plastic gift cards. It provides an extensive list of features, such as providing Aloha
the ability to overpay when redeeming, requiring employees to enter gift cards TableService Special Fea-
with a mag card reader, and more. With Aloha eCard, you do not need a credit tures Guide for more infor-
mation on setting up gift
card processor to transfer transactions.
cards with Aloha eCard,
Paymentech, or ValueLink.
Paymentech is used as a host to sell and redeem plastic gift cards, as well as
its own credit card processor. It provides a variety of features for gift cards,
such as entering a range of gift cards using the Range feature, offline transac-
tions, and more.
ValueLink is used as a host to sell and redeem plastic gift cards, using either
the CES (First Data South) or Nabanco (First Data North) credit card proces-
sors. It provides a variety of features, such as enabling preauthorization,
offline transactions, and more.

Video
The Video group enables you to define remote display system setup, display
Refer to the
Remote Display
options, and keypad bump codes. This group will only be listed if you are set
System User’s Guide for more up to use emote display system. Video can complement or replace remote
information. order or chit printing in the kitchen or food preparation areas. Menu items that
are entered by a server in the FOH can automatically be displayed in the
kitchen or other food preparation areas within seconds. Items on order can be
assigned to more than one preparation area, depending on the restaurant's
preference. After preparing an order, employees in the kitchen or preparation
area can bump orders off the video screen by using a connected keypad or
bump box. Bumped orders can be recalled as needed.

Hotel
The Hotel group enables you to define Property Management System (PMS)
Refer to the Inter-
settings. This group will only be listed if you are set up to use the PMS Inter- facing PMS with
face. PMS Interface was developed specifically for the hospitality industry to Aloha User’s Guide for more
increase the power of Aloha so it is dynamically linked to a hotel's property information.
management system (PMS). When PMS Interface is installed, the Aloha EDC
program is automatically installed on the system to assist the Aloha system
communicate with the hotel's PMS system. This enables hotel restaurants and
cafeterias using an Aloha system to inquire about a hotel guest's status, and to
charge orders to a room pending hotel approval.
Settings
Store

Survey
The Survey group gives managers the ability to do selective customer call-in
surveys via guest check. It is available for an additional cost and requires a
new security key code. To access the Survey subtab, select Maintenance >
Store Settings. Select Survey from the Group drop-down list. The Survey sub-
tab displays, as shown in Figure 3-74:
Figure 3-74 Survey Subtab
Use Survey — Select this option if your restaurant uses surveys. A custom
banner and message then prints on guest checks. The contents of the banner
and the message are in the SURVEY.TXT file located in the <iberdir>\DATA
directory. The banner prints on the check directly below the check header
information and above the items. The message prints immediately after the
check items and before the first subtotal line. Refer to Chapter 8, System
Maintenance Functions, for more information on Survey settings.

Labor Maintenance
Functions
This chapter explains how to create and maintain employee files, job
codes, access levels, and other labor related settings.
Employees ........................................................................................ 4-5

Job Codes....................................................................................... 4-17
Access Levels................................................................................. 4-32
Labor Groups.................................................................................. 4-40
Performance Measures .................................................................. 4-42
Termination Reasons...................................................................... 4-44
Back Office Security Levels ............................................................ 4-45
Other Wage Types.......................................................................... 4-48
Edit Punch Reasons ....................................................................... 4-51
Chapter
4
4 – 2 Labor Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3
This section discusses the preparation of Labor settings in the Aloha system,
and establishes such things as employee and job code information, security
access levels, performance measures, and more. Labor is the backbone of a
restaurant and must follow certain state and federal regulations. The settings
described in this chapter determine which functions the employee performs
and restrictions placed on the employee.
Select Maintenance > Labor to access the Labor menu, as shown in Figure 4-
1:
Maintenance
Figure 4-1 Labor Menu
Labor
• Enter and edit employee information.

• Assign, enter, and edit job codes.
• Establish access levels for job codes.
• Establish labor groups.
• Define performance measures.
• Establish termination reasons.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Labor Maintenance Functions 4–3

• Establish back office security levels and define the functions each
security level can access.
• Define other wage types for the administration of paid time off (PTO).
4–4 Labor Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Employees
The Employees function tab contains all pertinent data on current and past
employees. Use this function to enter, edit, or delete employees, as well as to
maintain various settings and records for the employee. Due to certain state
laws and labor codes, always terminate employees instead of deleting them
from the Aloha system.
Select Maintenance > Labor > Employees to display the Employees function
tab, as shown in Figure 4-2:
Maintenance
Labor
Figure 4-2 Employees Function Tab
Number — Holds the employee’s name and a unique number that identifies
each employee. Use this number to log in to the Aloha Front-of-House and to
perform certain functions that require approval to continue.
When using the employee number to log in to the FOH system, all
leading zeroes must be entered. For example, if the number of
employee digits (specified in Maintenance > Store Settings > Secu-
rity Group > POS Password Settings) is set to four, an employee
that has been assigned an employee number of 0523, must enter
0523 in the login screen, not 523.

To add a new employee, enter an unused number from 0001 to 9,999, and
press Enter. Create employee numbers in a designed numbering system for
organization and manageability. One suggestion is to group employee num-
bers by their job functions, such as:
Refer to the
Security group
in Chapter 3, Store Settings, 0100—0199 Management positions
for instructions on how to 0200—0499 Counter staff
set up employee number
specifications. 0500—0599 Prep employees
0600—0799 Kitchen employees
0800—0899 Other employees
0900—0999 Training positions
In this way, employees are easily associated with a specific position within the
organization.
To edit an existing employee, scroll through the ‘Number’ drop-down list,

select the employee, and press Enter.
The Employees function tab provides the following subtabs, which are used to
maintain employee records: Employee, Job Codes, Zap, Delivery, Tax, and
Back Office Security.
Employee Subtab
Use the Employee subtab to enter general employee information, such as the
social security number, name, and address.
SSN — Denotes the nine-digit employee' social security number. Hyphens are
entered by the system when you advance to the next setting.
Last Name — Holds the employee's last name.
First Name — Holds the employee's first name.
Middle — Holds the employee's middle name.
Nickname — Designates the name printed on the guest check. Use this set-
ting for employees who do not want their real name shown to customers. If
left blank, the employee’s first name is used.

Birthdate — Holds the employee's date of birth. Enter as mm/dd/yyyy.
Hire Date — Holds the date the employee began working. Enter as mm/dd/
yyyy. This is not necessarily the first day the employee worked.
Export ID # — Contains the employee identification number that is recog-

nized by a third party software for electronic payroll processing. For example,
enter the employee ADP number for an ADP interface.
Address — Represents the employee's home address. There are four address
lines available for entry, if needed.
City/Town — Represents the city in which the employee lives.
State — Represents the state in which the employee lives.
Postal Code — Represents the zip code or Canadian postal code for the
employee's home address.
Telephone — Accepts a standard seven-digit telephone number. Enter all ten

digits for the phone number and area code.
Prefers Qwerty Keyboard — Designates the standard QWERTY typewriter

keyboard is preferred by the employee. Clear the check box to display an
alphabetic keyboard layout. These keyboards display on order entry touch
screens, and used for data entry, such as typing the name for a bar tab. The
Maintenance
QWERTY layout is usually preferred by employees who know how to type.
Labor
Must Use Mag Cards — Forces the employee to use a magnetic card when
logging in to the FOH, and when accepting credit cards for payment. The
employee cannot manually enter their password or credit card numbers. This
option is specific to each employee. A global setting is available in Mainte-
nance > Store Settings > Labor. When selected, the ‘Mag Card Password’ but-
ton is enabled.
Select ‘Must Use Mag Cards’ or ‘Must Use Thumb Scanners’, but
never in conduction with each other.

Must Use Thumb Scanner - Clock In — Requires the employee to place
their thumb on the scanner hardware for identification to clock in. This option
is specific to each employee and is suited to employees who must clock in but
do not enter orders.
Refer to Chap-
ter 8, Hard-
ware, for more information Must Use Thumb Scanner - Log In/JIT — Requires the employee to place
on the use of electronic their thumb on the scanner hardware for identification to log in. This option is
thumb scanners. specific to each employee and is suited to order entry employees who log in
frequently and to managers who must approve certain functions. Use this fea-
ture alone or in conjunction with the ‘Must Use Thumb Scanner - Clock In’
check box.
Mag Card Password Button
Click Mag Card Password to assign a mag card to an employee. You have the
option to update mag cards in the FOH immediately, or after the next system
refresh.
To add an employee's magnetic card information:
1. Click Must Use Mag Cards to force the employee to use a mag card
with the Aloha system. Mag cards can be used even if 'Must Use Mag
Cards' is cleared.
2. Click Mag Card Password. The Read Magnetic Card dialog box dis-
plays, shown in Figure 4-3:
Figure 4-3 Read Magnetic Card Dialog Box

3. Swipe the employee's mag card. You are prompted to re-swipe the
mag card to confirm the number, as shown in Figure 4-4:
Figure 4-4 Repeat Mag Card Swipe
4. Re-swipe the employee's mag card for confirmation. The Update

FOH Now message box displays, as shown in Figure 4-5:
Figure 4-5 Update FOH Now Message Box
5. Click Yes to update the FOH with the mag card information immedi-
ately. The employee can now use the mag card to log in to the FOH.
Click No to update the FOH with the next refresh.
Maintenance
Job Codes Subtab
Labor
Use the Job Codes subtab to assign job codes, access levels, and pay rates to
an employee. Job codes describe what an employee can do, and access levels
determine if an employee can do it. Pay rates display only on selected reports.

Select the Job Codes subtab from the Employees function tab to enter or edit
employee job code information, as shown in Figure 4-6:
Figure 4-6 Job Codes Subtab
Job Codes and Access Levels must first be defined on their respec-
tive function tabs before assigned to an employee. These are dis-
cussed in detail later in this chapter.
Job Codes Button
Click Job Codes to access the Job Codes function tab and create new job
codes, if necessary. Changing job code information in the function tab
changes the job code information for all employees assigned to it.
Job Codes drop-down list — Determines the set of functions the employee
performs. Assign up to 10 job codes for each employee. Use these lists for
employees with several job positions. Select the job codes, in descending
order, starting with the most used job code first.

Access Levels Button
Click Access Levels to access the Access Levels function tab and create new
access levels, if necessary. Changing access level information in the function
tab changes the access level information for all employees assigned to it.
Access Levels drop-down list — Determines the set of functions the

employee can perform without manager intervention. Select the access level
to associate with the corresponding job code.
Rate — Holds the base-level hourly rate for the associated job code to the
left. Enter the rate as a decimal number or in fractional cents.
Zap Subtab
Use the Zap subtab to terminate employees in the Aloha system, and enter a
reason for an employee’s termination, as well as add comments as to why an
employee is leaving. Select the Zap subtab from the Employees function tab
to enter or edit employee termination information, as shown in Figure 4-7:
Maintenance
Figure 4-7 Zap Subtab Labor
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Labor Maintenance Functions 4 – 11

Terminated Inset
Terminated — Identifies the employee as no longer working at your restau-

rant.
Reason # — Identifies the reason for leaving.
The Termina-
Reason # Button
tion Reason
function tab is discussed in Click Reason # to access the Termination Reason function tab to add or edit
detail later in this chapter. termination reasons.
Last Day — Holds the employee's last date worked. Enter the date in mm/dd/
yyyy format.
Eligible for Rehire — Indicates the employee is eligible for rehire.
Explanation — Holds comments, such as additional reasons for leaving.
Leave of Absence Inset
Return Date — Denotes the date the employee is expected to return to work,
if the employee is out for a period of time due to a leave of absence. Enter the
date in mm/dd/yyyy format.
Transfer Inset
Transfer to Unit — Contains the unit number of the location to which the
employee is transferring, provided the employee is transferring to another res-
taurant within the company.
Will Employee Move — Indicates the transfer requires the employee to

move.

Delivery Subtab
Use the Delivery subtab to specify delivery fees, the driver license expiration
date, and insurance expiration dates for an employee. Select the Delivery sub-
tab from the Employees function tab to enter delivery information, as shown
in Figure 4-8:
Figure 4-8 Delivery Subtab
$Driver Fee — Represents the dollar amount the employee receives for each
Maintenance
delivery.
Labor
% Driver Fee — Represents the percentage of merchandise charges the
employee receives for each delivery.
$Mileage Fee — Represents the dollar per mile reimbursement the employee
receives for each delivery.
DL Exp — Holds the employee's driver license expiration date in mm/dd/

yyyy format. It is the manager’s responsibility to monitor expired dates.
Insurance Exp — Holds the employee's automobile insurance expiration

date in mm/dd/yyyy format. It is the manager’s responsibility to monitor
expired dates.

Tax Subtab
Use the Tax subtab to enter employee information for tax filing purposes and
to track additional user-definable information. Select the Tax subtab from the
Employees function tab to enter tax information for the selected employee,
Figure 4-9 Tax Subtab
Job Status — Denotes whether the employee is Full-time, Part-time, Hourly,

Salary-Exempt, or Salary-Nonexempt. The default is Full-time.
Marital Status — Specifies the employee's marital status.
# Dependents — Denotes the number of dependents the employee claims.
Sex Inset
Male — Indicates the employee is male. Male is the default setting.
Female — Indicates the employee is female.

Other Employee Codes Inset
Use the undefined employee codes to track additional information, such as

whether the employee is a smoker, owns a car, and other information. To
define the text to appear on the subtab in place of 'Undefined code x', edit the
EMP1TEXT through EMP5TEXT variables in the ALOHA.INI file. For
example, to track the number of smokers you employ, edit ALOHA.INI and
replace 'Undefined code 1' in the EMP1TEXT variable with 'Smoker'. The
word 'Smoker' will appear in Employee Maintenance. The Aloha system does
not use the information on any Aloha reports.
Undefined Code #1 through 5 — Captures additional information about the

employee. Once you define the undefined employee code, the text you set in
ALOHA.INI becomes the text for the text box.
Back Office Security Subtab

Use the Back Office Security subtab to define the security level of access to
logging in to the BOH. Assign security levels only to employees who perform
BOH maintenance, such as managers. Select the Back Office Security subtab
from the Employees function tab to enter or edit back office security informa-
tion for the selected employee, as shown in Figure 4-10:
Maintenance
Labor
Figure 4-10 Back Office Security Subtab

Security Level Button
Click Security Level to access the Back Office Security Levels function tab
and create or edit security levels as needed. Changing the security level in the
Back Office Security Levels function tab changes the selected security level
access for each employee assigned to that security level.
Security Level — Determines the access the employee has to BOH func-
tions. Security Levels are defined in Labor > Employees > Back Office Secu-
rity Levels.
The Back Office Security Levels function tab is discussed in detail

later in this chapter.
Login Restrictions Inset
Refers to the time interval that the selected employee is allowed to access the
BOH. The time appears in 24-hour time. For example, the start time may be
entered as 08:30, representing 8:30 a.m., and the end time may be entered as
15:00, representing 3:00 p.m. If the start time and end time are left at 00:00,
the employee can access the BOH at any time.
Start Time — Start time of day when the employee can access the BOH.
End Time — End time of day when the employee can access the BOH.
Clear Back Office Password Button
Click Clear Back Office Password to remove the password used by an

employee to log in to the BOH. The next time the employee logs in to the
BOH, they receive a prompt to enter a new password.

Job Codes
Job codes are user-defined job descriptions that categorize employees and
tasks into logical groupings. They describe what the employee can do. Use
this function to define the tasks for each job code, as you would do when writ-
ing a job description. For example, kitchen employees typically do not have
order entry privileges (the Order Entry check box is cleared).
Select Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes to display the Job Codes function
tab, which defaults to the Job Codes subtab, as shown in Figure 4-11:
Maintenance
Labor
Figure 4-11 Job Codes Function Tab
Number — Holds the name and a unique number that identifies each job
code. To add a new job code, enter an unused number from 001 to 999, and
press Enter. To edit an existing job code, scroll through the ‘Number’ drop-
down list, select the job code, and press Enter.
Revenue Center — Attaches a job code to a specific revenue center. Select a

revenue center from the drop-down list if the Hourly Sales and Labor report
needs to be determined on a per revenue center basis for each job code. When
you generate the Hourly Sales and Labor report, select the ‘Split Hourly Sales

and Labor by Revenue Center’ check box. Revenue center information is
entered in Maintenance > System > Revenue Centers.
Each job code is assigned to a revenue center. If a revenue center is

not assigned, the values on the Hourly Sales and Labor Report dis-
play incorrectly.
Revenue Center Button
Click Revenue Center to access the Revenue Center Maintenance function tab
to create or edit revenue centers, as needed.
The Job Codes function tab provides the following subtabs which are used to
maintain job code records: Job Code, Table Service, Functions, and Delivery.
Job Code Subtab

Use the Job Code subtab (Figure 4-11) to create jobs and to assign functions
to those jobs.
Name — Holds the abbreviated form, up to 10 characters, of a job title.
Description — Holds the full name, up to 20 characters, of a job code.
Icon — Associates a specific bitmap with a job code. Bitmaps display on

order entry terminals, and serve as a visual representation of the job code.
This is particularly useful when an employee is assigned to more than one job
code. The available bitmap images are stored in the ALOHA\BMP directory,
labeled 'Icon##', with ## representing the number to enter in this text box,

with no leading zeros. Customized job code bitmaps can be created for use on
order entry terminals. Examples are shown in Figure 4-12:
Maintenance
Labor
Figure 4-12 Customized Job Code Icons
Group — Designates a two-digit number used in conjunction with the Event

Scheduler located in Maintenance > System > Events. Assign a different num-
ber to each job code. To group certain job codes together, assign them the
same number. Then use Event Scheduler to assign specific menus to desig-
nated Job Groups. Use this feature when different job codes need to access
different menus.
Export Code — Associates a secondary job code, used by a third party soft-
ware system or the labor report, with the equivalent job code in the Aloha sys-
tem. This text box holds 10 characters.

Order Entry — Signifies that order entry screens are displayed for all
employees with this job code. If this check box is cleared, employees with this
job code do not have access to order entry screens and cannot ring sales or
close checks. This option requires the 'Shift Required' check box to be
selected. It also labels the employee as a server in regards to menu assign-
ment, events, and customer polling functionality.
Training — Signifies the employee is in a training status. Employees with

this job code have access to all rights and privileges provided by other check
boxes, but sales and other data are not saved. This is an emulation mode, and
any activity creates temporary data that has no impact on the system. Order
chits, guest checks, and checkouts have bold disclaimers identifying them as
training mode. When an employee is working in this mode, checks are dis-
played in green instead of blue on order entry terminals.
Shift Required — Requires the employee clock in and clock out at the begin-
ning and end of every shift, and gives the employee access to employee and
manager functions. This check box does not enable order entry capabilities
unless selected in combination with the 'Order Entry' check box.
Allow Paid Breaks — Enables a new button on the FOH Employee Break
screen called Start Meal Period Break.
Allow Unpaid Breaks — Enables a new button on the FOH Employee Break
screen called Start Unpaid Break.
Allow Meal Period Breaks — Enables the employee to take meal period
breaks, when activated by the ‘Use Break Rules’ option on the Breaks subtab
in Store Settings > Labor.
Allow Rest Period Breaks — Enables the employee to take rest period
breaks, when activated by the ‘Use Break Rules’ option on the Breaks subtab
in Store Settings > Labor.
Enforce ___ Minute Breaks — Defines a specified number of minutes,

Refer to the
Enforce Unpaid
between 1 and 999, of unpaid break time the employee must take. This option
Break Time feature in Chapter is available only when you select ‘Allow Unpaid Break’ or ‘Allow Meal
3, Store Settings, for more Period Break’. For example, if company policy dictates all employees take a
information.
20 minute break, type 20 minutes. The employee can not return from the

break until the 20 minute time frame elapses unless the manager has the abil-
ity to override the early break return.
Indirectly Tipped — Indicates an employee assigned to this job code

receives indirect tips. This information is used by ADP only.
Manager Must Checkout — Prompts for manager authorization before the

employee can perform a checkout.
Manager Must Clockout — Prompts for manager authorization before the

employee can clockout.
Any employee assigned to an access level with ‘Approve Checkout’

or ‘Approve Clockout’ selected can authorize the employee to per-
form the corresponding function, however, these check boxes are
normally reserved for manager access levels only.
Uses Password — Requires the employee enter a password at login.
Go Directly to Close and Get Check — Sets the Get Check screen as the
default screen. Use this for cashiers whose main job is to tender and close
checks.
Do Not Update Flash/Hourly Sales Report — Prevents the job code's labor
hours and dollars from being included in the Flash report and Hourly Sales
report in FOH and BOH. For example, excluding the manager could give the
Maintenance
report a more realistic total if their pay is higher than other employees.
Labor
Do Not Print Jobcode — Prevents the job code from printing on the follow-
ing reports:
• ADP export file

• Coconut Code export file
• Real World Payroll export file
• Labor Report
• OT Warning Report

Allow Item Lookup — Enables you to look up any item defined in Mainte-
nance > Menu > Items. To order the item after you look it up, select the Allow
Add Item check box.
Allow Add Item — Enables you to add an item after you have looked it up
using the Item Lookup feature. You must select this in conjunction with the
‘Allow Item Lookup’ check box. When ordering, forced modifiers accom-
pany the item as normal.
Ignore Labor Schedule — Enables the employee to clock in without actually

being scheduled to work specific hours. This is often used for managers and
other exempt employees.
Password Expires — Sets the password code to expire. Upon expiration, the
employee must select another password for use.
Can Get Checks — Enables the employee to get open checks from other
employees. Use this option primarily in a cashier environment where cashiers
close checks assigned by another employee.
Renew After _ Days — Specifies the number of days to pass before a pass-
word must be changed. Use this only if ‘Password Expires’ is selected.
Must Declare Tips Inset
Must Declare Tips — Requires employee to declare tips upon checking out.
Display Threshold Message — Displays a warning message when employee

declares tips less than the defined threshold, or minimum, amount.
The tips threshold is user defined in Store Settings > Financials >
Reports.
Cash Drawer Inset
Cash Drawer — Enables assignment of a cash drawer to the employee. Use

this setting for employees who manage cash drawers, such as bartenders and
cashiers. The most employees you can assign to a cash drawer is five.

Multiple Drawers — Enables assignment of the employee to more than one
cash drawer at a time. Select ‘Cash Drawer’ to enable this check box.
Start Check on PMS Inset
Start Check on PMS — Launches the room request keyboard on the FOH
when the PMS Check button is clicked.
Force PMS Check — Forces employees to use the PMS system to start a
check. The New Table button on the FOH is disabled when this check box is
selected. Select ‘Start Check on PMS’ to enable this option.
The ‘Force PMS Check’ check box is not recommended for bar-
tender job codes because it forces them to exit out to the main
Working With Tables screen each time they begin a new check.
Maintenance
Labor

Table Service Subtab
The Table Service subtab allows you to further define the functions and tasks
for a selected job code. Select the Table Service subtab from the Job Codes
function tab to select job code tasks and functions, as shown in Figure 4-13:
Figure 4-13 TableService Subtab
Bartender — Grants employee access to the bartender screens and the fast
cash options. This is used with the 'Sees Tabs' and ‘Cash Drawer’ check
boxes.
If the ‘Bartender’ and the ‘Cashier’ check boxes are both selected,
the ‘Cashier’ setting overrides the ‘Bartender’ setting in Mainte-
nance > Store Settings > Order Entry > More Options > Default
Menus.

Cashier — Indicates the employee is a cashier and receives the default menu
assigned in Maintenance > Store Settings > Order Entry > More Options. Use
events to change the menu. This setting does not automatically provide cash
drawer permission. 'Cash Drawer' must be selected in the Job Codes function
tab in order to be assigned a cash drawer.
Order Taker — Enables a cashier environment where the customer orders

and pays for their food when they walk in. They sit at their table and hand a
special chit to the server who then gets the food for them. If this check box is
selected, the message defined in Maintenance > Store Settings > Printing >
Other Chits prints on the chit the customer hands to the server.
The ‘Order Taker’ check box has no bearing on the employee’s

order entry or check closing abilities.
Sees Tabs — Grants visibility of named tabs and tables instead of table or tab
numeric values. Use this option for bartenders and cocktail waitresses.
Require Tab Name — Requires a new tab name be entered on the order
entry terminal when a new tab is opened. The FOH requires tab names with
all order mode buttons and the following FOH buttons: Close, Fast Cash, and
Tables.
Pivot Seating — Enables pivot seating usage by job code. Pivot seating func-
Maintenance
tionality splits chits and guest checks per seat, rather than per table. A global
setting is located in Maintenance > Store Settings > Order Entry > More
Labor
Options.
Pays Tip Share — Enables employee contributions to the tip-sharing pool.
Allow Tip Out — Enables access to the Tip Out button on the FOH Special
Functions Financial screen.
Allow to Void Own Items — Enables the employee to void their own items
from the order entry screen without a manager's override. This check box
overrides the 'Void Items' check box in Maintenance > Labor > Access Lev-
els. The employee does not select a void reason, therefore the Void Report dis-
plays ‘Void Reason UNKNOWN’ for these transactions.

Allow to Reprint Own Checks — Enables the employee to recall and reprint
their previously closed checks on demand. This setting places a ‘Reprint’ but-
ton over the ‘Hold’ button on the FOH Order Entry screen. If you select this
check box, any employee you assign to this job code cannot place items on
hold. Do not select this option for normal order entry employees, including
servers and bartenders, due to potential misuse.
Use the ‘Reprint Check’ button on the FOH Special Functions

Financial screen as an alternative to selecting ‘Allow to Reprint
Own Checks’ for the employee, since reprinting closed checks is
generally a manager function.
Disable Self Xfer — Prevents employee from transferring tables or tabs to

themselves.
Restrict from Seeing Sales — Prevents employee from seeing their sales
when they touch the Sales button on the Tables screen in the FOH.
Allow Breaks with Open Tables — Enables employee to take a break, even
if they have open tables. Select 'Allow Paid Breaks' or 'Allow Unpaid Breaks'
for this function to work properly.
Cannot Close — Prevents the employee from closing a check whether or not
they are assigned to a cash drawer. Use this setting in a cashier-type environ-
ment where servers who cannot close checks must transfer them to a cashier
for closing. The ‘Print’ button displays on the Order Entry screen in place of
the ‘Close’ button.
Require Drawer to Close — Prevents the employee from closing a check

when they are not assigned to a cash drawer. This accommodates operations
where a server works during the day without a cash drawer and without the
ability to close checks, then the server works during the evening with a cash
drawer and the ability to close checks. Instead of creating two separate job
codes for both scenarios, when the employee logs in, the system verifies if the
server has a drawer assigned to them. If not, the ‘Print’ button displays on the
Order Entry screen in place of the ‘Close’ button. After the manager assigns
them a drawer, the ‘Close’ button replaces the ‘Print’ button, allowing the
employee to close checks. For bartenders, the ‘Fast Cash’ button does not dis-
play until a manager assigns them a drawer.

No Cash Transactions — Prevents the employee from processing cash trans-
actions.
Auto Return Get Checks — Automates the return of checks that were
retrieved using 'Can Get Checks'.
Equal Payment — Applies equal payments to the current guest check. Select
this check box to display the Equal Payments button on the FOH close screen.
For example, a guest check with two guests and a total balance due in the
amount of $24.02, shows Guest 1 owes $12.01 and Guest 2 owes $12.01.
At a table with separate checks, each ‘equal payment’ check is split

into equal payments. Checks are not combined and then split into
equal payments.
Send All Checks to Local Cashier on Close — Sends all tendered and
closed checks to a cashier. The credit for the sale is given to the server, but the
cashier is financially responsible for the check.
Send All Checks to Local Bartender on Close — Sends all checks to the
first bartender clocked-in. If the first bartender to clock in has left for the day,
checks are sent to the second bartender clocked-in, then the third, etc. The
bartender is given credit for the sale and is financially responsible for the
check. Use this setting in club environments where bartenders handle all
orders for the wait staff.
Maintenance
Participates in Vizor — Indicates all employees with this job code can par-
Labor
Refer to the
ticipate in the VizorVest Mutual Fund Investment program and allow tipped TableService
employees to divert some of their tipped earnings into an account. Special Features Guide for
more information regarding
Store Collects Tips — Prevents employee from deducting tips from cash the VizorVest installation
and configuration proce-
owed. The tips total is not deducted on the checkout report. Use this setting dures.
for cashier operations only.
Order Mode Inset
Order Mode — Designates the order mode for the job code, such as To Go,
and As App. Select None if restrictions are not placed on the order mode.

Order Mode Button
Click Order Mode to access the Order Mode function tab. Here you perform
maintenance in the Order Modes function, including adding new records if the
order mode you need is not already there.
Refer to the Floor Plan Inset

Floor Plan section in Chap-
ter 7, System Maintenance,
Use Floor Plan — Determines whether the job code works with the Floor
for more information on
Floor Plan. Plan screen or the Working with Tables screen.
Screen Button
Click Screen to access the Screen Editor function tab. Here you perform
maintenance on screens, including adding new screens, if the one you need is
not already there. Select ‘Use Floor Plan’ to enable this setting.
Screen drop-down list — Designates the screen used for the Floor Plan
Interface, as defined in Maintenance > System > Floor Plan > Screen Editor.
Functions Subtab
Use the Functions subtab to define checkout details for a selected job code,
such as whether an employee must declare their cash at the end of a shift.

Select the Functions subtab on the Job Codes function tab to select checkout
options, as shown in Figure 4-14:
Figure 4-14 Functions Subtab
Must Declare at Checkout — Requires employees to declare payment

counts upon checking out for over/short calculations and activates the remain-
ing options in the inset. If this is selected, 'Declare Cash Only' is selected by
default.
Checkout Details Inset
Maintenance
Labor
Declare Cash Only — Requires employees to declare cash only upon check-
ing out for over/short calculations. All other tender types are not required. The
Aloha Cash Owed Report includes all employees who ring sales, regardless if
this check box is selected. However, ***** prints for employees who are not
required to declare cash (this check box is not selected).
Reconcile All Tenders — Requires employee to reconcile all cash and non-
cash tenders at the end of each shift.
# of Attempts — Sets the number of attempts at reconciliation allowed to

declare tenders before manager intervention is required.

Rapid Access Inset
The Rapid Access feature enables you to speed login for multiple employees
in a rapid transaction environment. For example, a bartender does not have to
wait for another bartender working from the same terminal to log out before
he can log in. Select ‘Bartender’ and ‘Cash Drawer’ in the job code to enable
this functionality.
Disable Auto Ordering — Ensures that when the bartender presses ‘Done’
on the FOH order entry screen, all unordered items on the check are not
ordered automatically. This setting overrides the ‘Enable Auto Ordering’
selection in Maintenance > Store Settings > Order Entry > Tabs & Tables.
Use Rapid Access Login Screen — Enables multiple bartenders to work

from the same cash drawer using the FOH rapid access single touch screen.
To set up a bartender for rapid access entry:
1. Select Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes. The Job Code function
tab displays (Figure 4-11).
2. Select Bartender from the Number drop-down list.
3. Select Cash Drawer.
4. Select the TableService subtab. (Figure 4-13)
5. Select Bartender.
6. Select the Functions subtab. (Figure 4-14)
7. Select Use Rapid Access Login Screen.
8. Click Save.
9. Select Maintenance > Store Settings and select User Interface from
the ‘Group’ drop-down list to display the POS subtab.
10. Enter the number of seconds for the Rapid Entry screen to timeout in
the Rapid Access timeout text box.
11. Click Save.
If ‘Bartender’ on the TableService subtab and ‘Cash Drawer’ on

the Job Code subtab are both cleared, a warning displays when you
try to save after selecting ‘Use Rapid Access Login Screen’. The
warning states that ‘Bartender’ and ‘Cash Drawer’ must be
selected.

Team Get Check Inset
The Team Get Check feature enables you to get a check from another
employee, add items, and automatically return the check to the originator. All
employees assigned to a job code using Team Get Check may use the feature
among themselves. For example, if two bartenders are working and a cus-
tomer asks for another drink, the nearest bartender can get the check and add
to it, regardless of who originated the check.
Team Get Check — Enables an employee to access checks opened by

another employee. Use this setting for all job codes requiring this capability.
Limit to Labor Group — Limits an employee to accessing checks opened

by another employee who is defined in the selected Labor Group. Labor
Groups are set up in Maintenance > Labor > Labor Groups.
Delivery Subtab
Use the Delivery subtab to define the delivery tasks for a selected job code,
Refer to the
and to interface with Delivery/Frequent Buyer. Delivery/Fre-
quent Buyer User’s Guide for
more information.
Maintenance
Labor

Access Levels
Access Levels control security settings and the corresponding rights and priv-
ileges assigned to each security access code. They determine IF the employee
can perform a certain function without manager approval. In addition to the
check boxes in Job Codes, these options further define job functions, but more
importantly, they control who can perform certain functions.
Select Maintenance > Labor > Access Levels to display the Access Levels
function tab, as shown in Figure 4-15.
Level — Holds the description and a unique two-digit number that identifies
each access level. To create a new access level, enter an unused number, and
press Enter. To edit an existing access level, scroll through the Level drop-
down list, select one to edit and press Enter.
Description — Holds the full name, up to ten characters, for the access level.

Reports Subtab
Use the Reports subtab, as shown in Figure 4-15, to allow employees assigned
to the access level the ability to view certain FOH reports.
Figure 4-15 Access Levels Function Tab
Select any of the following check boxes to activate the associated feature for
the selected access level.
Maintenance
Restaurant Sales — Enables employee to run sales reports from FOH termi-
nals. This check box does not enable you to view the Flash Report. Select
Labor
'Mgr Flash Rpt' or 'Server Sales' to view the Flash report.
Server Sales — Enables an employee to run server sales reports for all serv-
ers from FOH terminals.
Labor and Clock Reports — Enables an employee to run FOH clock in and
clock out reports.
Mgr Flash Rpt — Enables an employee to view FOH configured sale

reports.

Server Flash Rpt — Enables an employee to view FOH sales reports that are
broken down by individual.
Product Mix — Enables an employee to view the FOH product mix report.
Payment Report — Enables an employee to run noncash payment reports

from FOH terminals. This report prints only credit card payments.
Financial Subtab
Select Labor > Access Levels > Financial to display the Financial subtab,
Figure 4-16 Financial Subtab
Assign Promo — Enables an employee to apply manager-level promotions to

guest checks. This is generally reserved for managers.
Delete Promo — Enables an employee to delete a promotional item directly

from the check.
Assign Comp — Enables an employee to apply manager-level comps to

guest checks. This is generally reserved for managers.

Delete Comp — Enables an employee to delete a comp directly from the
check.
Assign Gratuity — Enables an employee to perform manager-level gratuity

functions. This is useful for automatic gratuities, such as large groups and
banquets, and is generally reserved for managers.
Delete Gratuity — Enables the employee to delete an auto gratuity directly

from the Close Check screen on the FOH.
Assign Menu — Enables an employee to assign menus, such as reactivation

of an inactive menu for a specific check. For example, if a menu fires for
lunch, but the establishment still has breakfast items to sell.
Assign Day Part — Enables an employee to manually set the current meal
period. Select the 'Manual Day Parts' check box in Maintenance > Store Set-
tings > Security > POS Security subtab in combination with this check box.
View Tables — Enables an employee to view all open tables.
Manage Transfer Tables — Enables an employee to transfer an assigned

table to another server.
Split Checks — Enables an employee to access the ‘Split’ button from the
FOH to split guest checks. If this option is cleared, manager approval is
required to split a check.
Maintenance
Reopen Check — Enables an employee to reopen a check that has been
Labor
closed for any employee.
Reprint Check — Enables an employee to reprint clockouts, checkout

reports, and guest checks.
Void Items — Enables an employee to void ordered items already on a check

for any employee. The manager password prompt displays. If this option is
selected, the employee enters their own password, and then enters the void
reason to complete the void. If this is cleared, a manager enters their pass-
word, and then enters the void reason. The void reason displays on the Void
Report.

Cash Drawers — Enables an employee to access cash drawer management
and petty cash functions.
Item Availability — Enables an employee to mark items as unavailable or

available, as well as to set the availability count.
Override Category Limits — Enables an employee to enter more than the

number of items defined in the ‘Max per Check’ text box in Maintenance >
Menu > Categories, or to enter their employee number in the Manager
Approval screen to approve the entry when more items are entered than
defined in ‘Max Per Check’.
Adjust Payments — Enables an employee to make adjustments to payments,

comps, or promos for any employee. Typically this is reserved for a manager.
No Sale — Enables an employee to access the 'No Sale' function in the FOH.
Cash Refunds — Enables an employee to issue cash refunds.
Non-Cash Refunds — Enables an employee to issue refunds for non-cash

tenders other than credit cards. Examples include: room charges, accounts
receivable charges, and gift certificates.
CC Refunds — Enables an employee to issue credit card refunds.
Manual Card # — Enables the employee to bypass the Manager Approval

screen that normally displays when they attempt to manually enter a credit
card or gift card number. The Manager Approval screen displays if you select
‘Use Magnetic Card Only’ in Maintenance > Payments > Tenders > Type sub-
tab, or ‘Use Mag Card Only’ in Maintenance > Store Settings > Gift Card/
Certificates Sales group.
Force Auth — Enables an employee to force authorization on credit card

and gift card payments.
Members Override — Enables an employee to perform the options found in

the Members subtab in Store Settings > Financials, without needing manager
access. This feature is only available with the Membership Interface exten-
sion.

Employee Subtab
Select Labor > Access Levels > Employee to display the Employee subtab, as
Figure 4-17 Employees Subtab
Approve Clockin — Enables an employee to approve clockin transactions.
Maintenance
Approve Checkout — Enables an employee to approve checkout transac-
Labor
tions.
Approve Clockout — Enables an employee to approve clockout transac-

tions.
Approve Break Returns — Enables an employee to approve an early break

Refer to the
return. You define the number of minutes in the ‘Enforce ___ Minute Breaks’ Enforce Unpaid
check box in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes. Break Time feature in Chapter
3, Store Settings, for more
Delete Checkout — Enables an employee to delete checkout transactions. information.
Delete Clockout — Enables an employee to delete clockout transactions.

Clear Password — Enables an employee to clear passwords for other
employees. This setting is generally selected for managers.
Assign Pen ID’s — Enables an employee to assign Pen IDs to other employ-
ees for system access.
Enroll Thumbprints — Enables an employee to assign login system access,

via the thumbprint scanner system, to employees.
Force Reconciliation — Forces an employee to reconcile, even if the number

of attempts at reconciliation exceeds the number specified in that employee's
job code. This is generally reserved for a manager.
Open Any Drawer — Enables an employee to open cash drawers associated

with a specific terminal. A reason for opening the drawer is required. The
event is recorded like the No Sale event, and displays in the audit log.
Enter Other Wages — Enables an employee to enter other wages from the
FOH manager screen.
Downtime — Enables an employee to transfer the BOH system to another

computer.

System Subtab
Select Labor > Access Levels > System to display the System subtab, shown
in Figure 4-18:
Figure 4-18 System Subtab
Reroute — Enables an employee to reroute printers, printer groups, or remote

display systems.
End of Day — Enables an employee to run EOD functions from FOH termi-
Maintenance
nals.
Labor
Shutdown Terminal — Closes the FOH, then goes directly to the Windows
95 shutdown screen. This applies only to terminals running Microsoft Win-
dows® 95 and prevents employees from simply turning off the machine, which
could cause data corruption.
Calibration — Enables an employee to calibrate the touch-screen server ter-

minals.
Query Cash Card — Enables an employee to query balances of cash cards.

Labor Groups
Labor Groups are sales categories and job codes combined for reporting pur-
poses. These are used by management as a tracking and analysis tool. Only
the existing sales categories and job codes are available for selection.
Select Maintenance > Labor > Labor Groups to display the Labor Groups
function tab, as shown in Figure 4-19:
Figure 4-19 Labor Groups Function Tab
Group ID — Holds the name and a unique two-digit number that identifies
each labor group. To create a new labor group, enter an unused number and
press Enter. To edit an existing labor group, scroll through the Group ID drop-
down list, select one to edit and press Enter.
Name — Represents the description assigned to a labor group.

Sales Categories — Lists the sales categories available to place in the
selected labor group. To remove a category from the selected labor group, Refer to Chap-
ter 5, Menu
click it again. Select up to 20 sales categories per labor group. The categories Maintenance Functions, for
listed are the sales categories found in Maintenance > Menu > Categories. information on categories.
Job Codes — Lists the job codes available to place in the selected labor
group. To remove a category from the selected labor group, click it again.
Select up to 99 job codes per labor group. The available job codes are found in
Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes.
Maintenance
Labor

Performance Measures
Use the Performance Measures function tab to set profiles for sales targets and
comparisons to track employee performances against the objectives of each
performance measure, Define up to 99 performance measures. These mea-
sures display for the current day in the FOH Server Sales report and checkout
report. Each profile can have one check box selected to govern how the mea-
surements are calculated.
Select Maintenance > Labor > Performance Measures to display the Perfor-
mance Measures function tab, as shown in Figure 4-20:
Figure 4-20 Performance Measures Function Tab
Performance Measure — Holds the description and a unique five-digit num-

ber that identifies each performance measure. To create a new performance
measure, enter an unused number and press Enter. To edit an existing perfor-
mance measure, scroll through the Performance Measure drop-down list,
select one to edit and press Enter.
Description — Holds a description, up to 15 characters, that identifies the

performance measure.

Target Category — Represents the item category to use in performance cal-
culations.
Base Category — Compares against the target category when 'Count To

Count' or 'Sales To Sales' is selected.
Straight Sales — Provides a sales count and total in dollars of the target cate-
gory.
Sales per Hour — Provides a sales per hour figure (in dollars) of the target
category.
Count to Guests — Provides a total count of the target category divided by

the number of guests served.
Sales to Guests — Provides total sales of the target category divided by the
number of guests served.
Count to Count — Compares target category count to base category count.
Sales to Sales — Compares target category sales to base category sales.
Sales per Check — Calculates sales per check of items in the target category.
Maintenance
Labor

Termination Reasons
Use the Termination Reasons function tab to establish up to 50 termination
reasons, which are used in the Employee function tab to document why an
employee left the company.
Select Maintenance > Labor > Termination Reasons to display the Termina-
tion Reasons function tab, as shown in Figure 4-21:
Figure 4-21 Termination Reasons Function Tab
Reason # — Holds the reason and a unique three-digit number that uniquely
identifies each termination reason. To create a new termination reason, enter
an unused one and press Enter. To edit an existing termination reason, scroll
through the Reason # drop-down list, select the reason to edit and press Enter.
Type — Contains a selection list of reason types, such as Termination, Leave

of Absence, and Transfer.
Voluntary — Indicates the listed reason is a voluntary termination.
Reason — Represents the long description of the termination number.

Back Office Security Levels
Use the Back Office Security Levels function tab to create security levels to
provide employees access to functions located in the back-of-house. Select
various functions in which to give run, add, edit, and delete permissions.
Select Maintenance > Labor > Back Office Security Levels to display the
Back Office Security Levels function tab, as shown in Figure 4-22:
Maintenance
Labor
Figure 4-22 Back Office Security Levels Function Tab
ID — Holds the name and a unique four-digit number that identifies each
back office security level. To create a new level, enter an unused number and
press Enter. To edit an existing level, scroll through the ID drop-down list,
select the level to edit, and press Enter.
Name — Specifies a unique name and should be descriptive of the type of

level.

Screen Timeout — Denotes the number of seconds before access to the BOH
times out from inactivity. Once the screen times out, employees must log in
again to re-gain access. Enter 1 if you do not want the BOH to time out.
HTML Page — Holds the path to the HTML page, if the selected security
level is associated with an HTML page.
Function — Contains all BOH security functions.
Run — Enables the employee to access and view the selected function.
Add — Enables the employee to add records to the selected function.
Edit — Enable the employee to edit records in the selected function.
Delete — Enables the employee to delete records from the selected function.
Start Level Inset
Start Level — Displays existing security levels to use with the copy function
to change the access of existing levels or create new levels. To create a new
security level, choose an existing security level from the drop-down list that
contains most or all the security access functions the new level should con-
tain. Click Copy. The confirmation displays, shown in Figure 4-23:
Figure 4-23 Back Office Security Attributes Copy Confirmation
Click OK to copy the security level access settings from the existing security
level to the new security level. The new security level contains all functions
from the copied security level. Enter a new security level ID and name to
identify the new level. Complete any additions or deletions of security func-
tions to the new level by selecting the function from the Functions list and
selecting the appropriate options from the Security Level inset box.

Copy Button
Click Copy to copy the security level specified in Start Level to a new security
level.
Maintenance
Labor

Other Wage Types
Use the Other Wages feature to manually enter and edit PTO in the form of
sick, holiday, or vacation time for your employees. Calculate the PTO pay in
hours, dollar amounts, or both. In addition, you set parameters for system gen-
erated adjustments relating to meal and rest period breaks, split shift premi-
ums, and others. Enter other wages from either the FOH or the BOH, with
appropriate access.
The Other Wages feature uses wage types you define. In addition to sick pay,
holiday, and vacation pay, here are some examples of PTO wage types:
Name Description
Bonus Pay for bonus hours or dollar amount.
Bereavement Pay for funeral leave.
Jury Duty Pay for jury service.
Training Pay for time spent while employee is in train-
ing.
Cash Tips Dollar amount or hours employee is given for
tips.
Adjustments Pay adjustment to correct a previous error,
deduct an authorized deduction, or any other
adjustment needed.

It is recommended that any adjustments to wages be
authorized in writing by the employee and the supervi-
sor.

Establish wage types in Maintenance > Labor > Other Wages. The Other
Wages function tab displays, as shown in Figure 4-24:
Figure 4-24 Other Wages Function Tab
Wage Type# — Holds the description and a unique four-digit number that Refer to the
uniquely identifies each wage type. To create a new type, enter an unused Edit Punches section in
Chapter 2, Functions, for
number and press Enter. To edit an existing type, scroll through the ID drop-
more information about
Maintenance
down list, select one to edit, and press Enter. managing PTO.
Labor
Description — Designates a descriptive name to be used on screens.
Short Name — Denotes a descriptive name to be used on reports.
Export ID — Designates a unique code for each wage type to enable export-
ing in third party software application interfaces.
Your wage type parameters and pay procedures should

reflect the company policies defined and supported by
your establishment.

Type Inset
Type — Enables you to configure a wage type that calculates by number of

hours, dollar amount, or both.
If you identify a wage type as one that calculates by hours, the

‘Amount’ text box is disabled when PTO records are added. Like-
wise, if you identify a wage type as one that calculates by a set dol-
lar amount, the ‘Hours’ text box is disabled when PTO records are
added. If you identify a wage type as one that calculates by both
hours and amount, both text boxes are enabled when a PTO record
for that wage type is added.

Edit Punch Reasons
Use the Edit Punch Reasons function to define specific reasons to use when
editing a punch on the BOH and FOH. For example, if you commonly edit a
punch for employees who forget to clock in, you can define an edit punch rea-
son stating ‘Employee forgot to clock in’. The reason appears with the corre-
sponding punch on the Edited Punches report. You must select ‘Use Edit
Punch Reasons’ in Maintenance > Store Settings > Labor Group > Employee
Settings subtab to activate the feature.
Select Maintenance > Labor > Edit Punch Reasons. The Edit Punch Reasons
function tab displays, as shown in Figure 4-25:
Maintenance
Labor
Figure 4-25 Edit Punch Reasons Function Tab
ID — Holds the name and unique number that identifies each edit punch rea-
son. Enter a number up to 99.
Description — Describes the reason for the punch up to 40 characters of text,

such as ‘Forgot to clock in’ or ‘Returned early’.

Menu Maintenance
Functions
This chapter outlines setting up menus and taxes. Topics include mod-
ifiers and categories and how they interact with the menu.
Pricing Methods and Pricing Hierarchy............................................. 5-5

The Menu System............................................................................. 5-8
Submenus and Their Relationship to Item Availability................. 5-11
Items ............................................................................................... 5-12
Categories ...................................................................................... 5-29
Modifiers ......................................................................................... 5-34
Modifier Item Buttons................................................................... 5-37
Exception Modifiers ........................................................................ 5-39
Exception Modifier Item Buttons .................................................. 5-40
Menu............................................................................................... 5-42
Submenus....................................................................................... 5-46
Taxes .............................................................................................. 5-52
GST Taxes................................................................................... 5-60
Flex Taxes ...................................................................................... 5-72
Surcharges ..................................................................................... 5-87
Special Pricing ................................................................................ 5-90
Fixed Item Pricing ........................................................................ 5-90
Quantity Pricing ........................................................................... 5-91
Price Levels .................................................................................... 5-95
AutoMenu ..................................................................................... 5-101
Chapter
5
5 – 2 Menu Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3
This section discusses the menu building process, in detail, and establishes
such things as the components of the menu system, the interdependencies
between the components, and the recommended method for building a menu
system. Before building the menus, you must first understand the available
pricing methods and the hierarchy used to determine the price in effect for the
item when it is ordered. This understanding will help you determine the com-
ponent(s) of the menu building system in which a price for the item must be
entered to meet your pricing requirements.
Select Maintenance > Menu to access the menu setup, taxing, and pricing
options. The Maintenance Menu submenu displays, as shown in Figure 5-1:
Figure 5-1 Maintenance Menu
Maintenance
• Determine the price of an item using the available pricing methods
and their hierarchy.
Menu
• Create required items, including menu items, modifiers, and excep-
tion modifiers.
• Create categories and add items to them.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Menu Maintenance Functions 5–3

• Create modifier groups and attach them to items.
• Create exception modifier groups.
• Create taxes and attach them to items.
• Create submenus using the items you have created.
• Create menus using the submenus you have created.
• Create AutoMenus using item categories.
You also learn about the relationship between submenus and the Item Avail-
ability feature.
5–4 Menu Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Pricing Methods and Pricing
Hierarchy
There are a variety of pricing methods available in the Aloha system. Using
the different pricing methods, you can control the price of an item no matter
the circumstances under which it is ordered. For example, the price of an item
when you order it as a menu item might be $2.00, but when you order it as a
modifier, there is no charge associated with it.
The available pricing methods are Item Level Pricing, Price Level Pricing,
Price Change Pricing, Button Pricing, Fixed Item Pricing, and Quantity Item
Pricing, in that order from lowest to highest. Quantity Pricing and Fixed Item
Pricing override all other pricing methods, even when using a scanner, or the
PLU function.
Item Level Pricing

Item Level Pricing assigns the price to the item record in Maintenance >
Menu > Items and is the lowest level of the pricing hierarchy. All other pric-
ing methods overrides ‘Item Pricing’.
Price Level Pricing

Price Level Pricing assigns a price to a group of items that carry the same
price. For example, if all medium drinks are $1.15, create a $1.15 price level
and attach it to all medium drinks. You can change the price of all medium
drinks by changing the price of the price level. You create the price level in
Maintenance > Menu > Price Levels, and then assign the price level to the
item in Maintenance > Menu > Items.
Price Change Pricing

Price Change Pricing temporarily changes the price for items, price levels, or Maintenance
promotions, for a specified time frame. For example, you may want to offer Menu
$1.00 off on all desserts ordered an hour before closing. You create the price
change in Maintenance > Menu > Price Changes, and then activate a ‘Set
Price Change’ event in Maintenance > System > Events. Price Change Pricing

is either ‘item price changes’ from items defined in Maintenance > Menu >
Items, ‘price level price changes’ from price levels defined in Maintenance >
Menu > Price Levels, or ‘promotion price changes’ from promotions defined
in Maintenance > Payments > Promotions.
Button Pricing
Button Pricing assigns a price to items using submenus, modifiers, or excep-
tion modifiers. You can assign a different price to an item at the button level
or use the ‘Item Pricing’ and ‘Price Level’ methods. You may want to do this
to control pricing through a central location. To set up a button price, select
Maintenance > Menu > Submenus, Maintenance > Menu > Modifiers, or
Maintenance > Menu > Exception Modifiers, and double-click the item you
want to price. A dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 5-2 displays:
Figure 5-2 Button Pricing Example
Choose ONE of the following methods for the item:
• Select ‘Price’ and type a price for the item. This overrides all ‘Item
Pricing’, ‘Price Changes’, and ‘Price Levels’ methods.
• Select ‘Use Item Price’ to use the ‘Item Pricing’ method for the item,
as defined in Item Maintenance, however, the price is subject to the
same hierarchy between the ‘Item Pricing’, ‘Price Level Pricing’, and
‘Price Change Pricing’ methods. If you have a ‘Price Level’ assigned

to the item in Item Maintenance, then the ‘Price Level’ is used. If you
have a ‘Set Price Change’ event, then the event overrides the ‘Price
Changes’ and ‘Item Pricing’ methods.
• Select ‘Price Level’ to use the ‘Price Level’ method for the item as
defined in Price Levels Maintenance and attached to the item in Item
Maintenance. When placed at the button level, the Price Level over-
rides both ‘Item Pricing’ and ‘Price Change Pricing’ methods.
Scanners and the PLU function do not recognize button prices. If

you use scanners or the PLU function, do not use the ‘Button Pric-
ing’ method.
Fixed Item Pricing

Fixed Item Pricing attaches a fixed price to an item no matter where the price
is placed. For example, you may price the ‘fish of the day’ depending on the
market value, but the fish item is priced differently in other pricing methods.
Rather than changing the price everywhere the item appears, use ‘Fixed Item
Pricing’ to globally change the price. You create a fixed item price in Mainte-
nance > Menu > Special Pricing > Fixed Item Pricing from items defined in
Maintenance > Menu > Items.
Quantity Item Pricing

Quantity Item Pricing associates an item to be sold in bulk or by the usage,
such as ounces, liters, and pounds. When you order an item with ‘Quantity
Item Pricing’, an additional screen appears for entering the amount so the sys-
tem can calculate the price. You create a quantity item price in Maintenance >
Menu > Special Pricing > Quantity Pricing from items defined in Mainte-
nance > Menu > Items. This method takes precedence over any other pricing
method.
Maintenance
Menu

The Menu System
Create menus using predefined submenus. You can define as many different
menus as necessary for different sections of the restaurant, different times of
the day, different days of the week, or for special events. The Aloha system
supports up to 999 different menus; a number well beyond what most restau-
rants would find necessary.
Submenus are groups of menu items that form a logical collection of similar
items, such as ‘Appetizers’, ‘Salads’, ‘Entrees’, or ‘Pasta’. They are con-
structed from elements contained in the Item file. This file contains the indi-
vidual menu items sold by the restaurant, as well as many of the component
parts, which are called modifiers and exception modifiers.
Modifiers, which are assigned to items, and exception modifiers, which are
assigned to submenus, are made up of items that modify other menu items in
the same way that lettuce modifies hamburgers. For example, if Hamburger
(menu item) is entered in the Item file, then an item for lettuce, onions, and
pickles (ingredient modifiers for a hamburger) and meat temperatures, such as
Rare, Medium, and Well Done (preparation modifiers) must also be created in
the Item file. Any item created as a modifier can also be used as an exception
modifier.
There are several methods you can use to build the menu system. The recom-
mended method is to build menus from the bottom up, beginning with tax
methods, then building the menu items, modifiers and exception modifiers.
Attach the items to submenus, and then assign the submenus to the menu(s).
Or you can reverse the process and build the menus from the top down.
Regardless of the method you choose to build the menus, the interdependen-
cies of database files must be remembered. Some files must be revisited in
order to complete the records, such as to add a modifier group to an item.
However, building menus from the bottom up reduces the amount of revisit-
ing required.

The diagram shown in Figure 5-3 represents building a menu system from the
bottom up and reflects the interdependencies between the database files:
Figure 5-3 Bottom to Top Menu Building Method
The following list indicates the steps required to build a menu from the bot-
tom up. The steps are listed in the order they should be done, not the order in
which they are discussed in this chapter.
1. Define all required tax methods. This is accomplished using Menu >
Taxes and Menu > Flex Taxes, Store Settings > International group >
Inclusive Taxes and GST. Every item must be assigned a tax method.
For items that are not taxed, create a ‘No Tax’ tax record in Menu >
Taxes and assign this tax to the item. (Refer to the Taxes section in Maintenance
this chapter for details on creating taxes.) Menu

2. Select Menu > Surcharges and define all surcharges, if applicable.
The Surcharge records are complete, and are not interdependent on
other database files. (Refer to the Surcharges section in this chapter
for details on creating surcharges.)
3. Select Menu > Items and enter all menu items, as well as items that
are used to modify the newly entered items. Assign the correct tax
method when entering each menu item. (Refer to the Items section in
this chapter for details on creating items.)
4. Select Menu > Categories and define all categories. Place the appro-
priate items in them. Each item must be in either a sales or retail cate-
gory. Items can be placed in an unlimited number of non-sales
categories. (Refer to the Categories section in this chapter for details
on creating categories.)
5. Select Menu > Modifiers and create the required modifier groups.
(Refer to the Modifiers section in this chapter for details on creating
modifiers.)
6. Select Menu > Exception Modifiers and create exception modifier
groups required by submenus. (Refer to the Exception Modifiers sec-
tion in this chapter for details on creating exception modifiers.)
7. Select Menu > Items again, and attach the appropriate modifier
groups to the corresponding items.
8. Select Menu > Submenus and define all necessary submenus. Place
the required items on them, and attach the appropriate exception mod-
ifiers to the corresponding submenus. (Refer to the Submenus section
in this chapter for details on creating submenus.)
9. Select Menu > Menus and define all necessary menus. Place the
desired submenus on them. (Refer to the Menus section in this chap-
ter for details on creating menus.)

Submenus and Their Relationship to Item
Availability
Item availability is enforced for any item attached to a submenu. This feature
prevents a server from selling an item that the restaurant does not have. When
an item's quantity is low, the manager can set the item's current quantity using
the Item Availability button. The quantity displays on the item's button in the
FOH, and as it is sold, the quantity is reduced. When the item is completely
depleted, the 'no' symbol displays on the button. When a server attempts to
order the item, a message displays letting the server know the item is not
available. This helps reduce the number of manager voids required because an
item is not available.
This feature is normally used to monitor menu items, and since menu items
are already attached to a submenu, it is easy to implement. However, if other
items such as modifiers need to be monitored, they must also be attached to a
submenu. You would not normally monitor item quantities for modifiers, but
the Item Availability function can be used to disable a modifier when it is no
longer available, if the modifier is attached to a submenu.
The Item Availability button is not available unless the ‘Item Avail-
ability’ check box is selected in the access level assigned to the
employee.
To set up Item Availability for modifiers, access Maintenance > Menu > Sub-
menus and create a new submenu. Include the modifiers in which you wish to
track item availability. Access Maintenance > Menu > Menus, create a modi-
fier menu, and add the Modifiers submenu to it. After the FOH is updated
with the new changes, employees with access can select the Financial screen,
touch the Item Availability button, and scroll through the menus using Next
Button to access the modifier menu and set item availability.
Maintenance
Menu
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Menu Maintenance Functions 5 – 11

Items
Menu items are the building blocks that form the base of the Aloha menu sys-
tem. Every item available from a restaurant must be included in the Items file
before it can be used by the system. These items can be menu items them-
selves, the components of those items, the temperature for meat, or anything
that would be written on a guest check or chit. The maximum number of items
that can be added is 100,000, however a limit is enforced in the Maintenance
> Store Settings > System group. Increasing the number of menu items to
30,000 uses more memory and should be used only when necessary.
Once items are created, they are grouped together to form submenus, modifier
groups, and exception modifier groups. The Items file also requires data from
other files in the menu system, including Maintenance > Menu > Taxes,
Maintenance > Menu > Surcharges, Maintenance > Menu > Modifiers, and
Maintenance > Menu > Categories in order to complete a record.
Select Maintenance > Menu > Items to display the Items function tab, as
Figure 5-4 Items Function Tab

Number — Holds a six-digit number that together with 'Long Name'
uniquely identifies each record. To create a new record, enter an unused num-
ber and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the Number
drop-down list, select the record to edit and press Enter.
The Items function tab contains the following subtabs, which are used to
define modifiers and price levels: Items, Modifiers, Price, Miscellaneous, and
Price, with Items used as the default subtab.
Item Subtab
The Item subtab defines general information for the item, such as names that
display on the FOH and in reports. Taxes are also defined for the item on this
subtab.
Short Name — Holds a short name for the item that is placed on item buttons
in submenus, modifier groups, or exception modifier groups. The data entered
here is centered on the button; therefore, length is an issue. This can be up to
15 positions, but usually anything over 11 can cause it to be truncated on both
ends making it too cryptic for servers to understand. A two-line button is cre-
ated by entering '\n' at the desired line break in the 'Short Name' text box. For
example, 'Hot\nTamale'. The '\n' takes up two of the 15 characters.
Capital letters used in the name text boxes take up more space than
lowercase letters.
Chit Name — Holds the name of the menu item that prints on the kitchen
chit. A chit is a printed stub the kitchen receives once an order is sent to the
kitchen. The kitchen chit may contain menu items as well as modifiers
depending upon how the order is entered in the system.
Long Name — Holds a description of the item that is printed on guest checks.
This is also used in conjunction with the item Number to create a unique ID
Maintenance
for the item.
Menu

Control Name — Used by restaurant chains to provide naming consistency
across all locations. It is a control feature commonly used in situations where
geographical or language differences mandate that an item have a different
'Short Name' at different locations, yet it is viewed as the same item by the
main office.
Priority — Determines the order in which the item displays on the chit. The
settings range form 01 to 99, with 01 the highest and 99 the lowest. An item
with a high priority prints ahead of an item with a lower priority.
Cost — Specifies the dollar amount required to produce the item. This is
optional and should not be confused with an item's price.
Default Weight — Determines the selection value of the item when used with
modifier linking. For example, the item green beans has a default weight of 1
but a salad has a default weight of 2. An entree has any combination of modi-
fiers equaling 2. In this case the salad would equal two vegetable selections.
Multiplier — Specifies the quantity sold for the item, with 1 being the
default. For example, the item Bud Lite 6 Pack would have a multiplier of 6
because 6 bottles are being sold.
Primary Tax Button
Click Primary Tax to access the Taxes function tab and create a new tax, if
necessary. Changing a tax changes the tax on all items assigned to that tax.
Primary Tax — Designates the tax record to apply to the item.
Primary Flex Tax Button
Click Primary Flex Tax to access the Flex Taxes function tab and create a new
flex tax, if necessary. Changing a tax changes the tax on all items assigned to
that tax.
Primary Flex Tax — Designates the flex tax record to apply to the item.

Secondary Tax Button
Click Secondary Tax to access the Taxes function tab and create a new tax, if
necessary. Changing a tax changes the tax on all items assigned to that tax.
Secondary Tax — Designates the secondary tax to apply to the item, if appli-
cable. Only tax records with 'Secondary' selected display in the drop-down
list.
Secondary Flex Tax Button
Click Secondary Flex Tax to access the Flex Taxes function tab and create a
new flex tax, if necessary. Changing a flex tax changes the flex tax on all
items assigned to that tax.
Secondary Flex Tax — Designates the secondary flex tax to apply to the
item, if applicable. Only flex tax records with 'Secondary' selected display in
the drop-down list.
Vendor Tax Button
Click Vendor Tax to access the Taxes function tab and create a new vendor
tax, if necessary. Changing a tax changes the tax on all items assigned to that
tax.
Vendor Tax — Designates the vendor tax to apply to the item, if applicable.
Only tax records with 'Vendor' selected display in the drop-down list.
Surcharge Button
Click Surcharge to access the Surcharges function tab and create a new sur-
charge, if necessary. Changing a surcharge changes the surcharge on all items
assigned to that surcharge.
Surcharge — Designates the surcharge tax to apply to the item, if applicable.

Maintenance
Print Button Menu

Click Print to access the Printer Groups function tab and create a new printer
group, if necessary. Changing a printer group changes the printer group on all
items assigned to it.
Print — Designates the printer group to which the item should print.
Video Button
Click Video to access the Video Groups function tab and create a new video
group, if necessary. Changing a video group changes the video group on all
Refer to the
Aloha
Remote Display System Video — Designates the video group in which the item should display, if
User’s Guide for more applicable. The drop-down list displays the short name description of the
information regarding the selected video group.
setup requirements for
Concept Button
Click Concept to access the Concept function tab and create a new concept, if
necessary. Changing a concept changes the concept on all items assigned to it.
ble.
Refer to the sec-
tion on Concepts
in Chapter 7, System Mainte- Concept — Designates the concept to which the item is associated, if applica-
nance Functions, for more ble.
information.
Member of Category: No Category Button
Click Member of Category to access the Categories function tab. Here you
can perform maintenance in the Categories function, including add new cate-
gories and change the category to which an item is assigned. Note that chang-
ing an items category affects all comps, promos, and reports assigned to the
item. Refer to Categories later in this chapter.
The Member of Category button displays the name of the sales or

retail category in which the selected item is assigned. For example,
if an item in the Food category is selected, the button displays the
word FOOD.

AutoMenu Inset
Priority — When using an AutoMenu, the number entered here determines

the order in which the item prints on the chit. The number 01 is the highest
priority and 99 is the lowest. An item assigned a 1 prints on the chit above an
item assigned a 99.
The Priority text box sets the printing priority on chits when the ‘Sort Items
by priority’ check box is selected on the Display Options subtab located in
Maintenance > Store Settings > Video.
Slave to — When the item is used for submenu linking, designates the item to
which it is a slave.
The ‘Slave To’ text box is available when ‘ENABLESUB-

MENUSLAVERY’ is set to TRUE in ALOHA.INI.
Modifiers Subtab
The Modifiers subtab establishes the modifier groups to attach to the item as
well as rules to apply to the item when it is used as a modifier. Select the Mod-
Maintenance
Menu

ifiers subtab, as shown in Figure 5-5, from the Items function tab to set spe-
cific settings for modifiers:
Figure 5-5 Modifiers Subtab
If Used as Modifier Inset
Apply Surcharge — Applies a surcharge to the item when it is used as a

modifier.
Combine Price with Base Item — Combines the price of the item when it is
used as a modifier with the modified item's price. Otherwise the price is listed
separately.

Highlight if Modifier — When the item is used as a modifier, it prints the
item in reverse type on the chit — white on black on monochrome printers,
and in red on color printers.
The ‘Red Items’ check box in the Chit Print subtab located in Main-
tenance > Store Settings > Printing group must be selected to acti-
vate this feature on color printers. The item prints normally if the
check box is selected and the item is not ordered as a modifier.
Print Independently — Prints the modifier on the chit in the same format as
a regular item.
Print when Held — Automatically prints an 'on hold' modifier on the chit
when ordered. For example, a salad that comes with a menu item can be sent
to the kitchen to be made even though the menu item has been placed on hold.
Modified By Inset
Modifier Groups Button
Click Modifier Group to access the Modifiers function tab and create a new
modifier group, if necessary. Changing a modifier group for an item changes
the modifier group to which it is assigned.
Refer to Modi-
fiers later in
Mod 1 through Mod 10 — Designates the modifier groups that should be this chapter for more infor-
attached to the item. Up to 10 modifier groups can be assigned to each item. mation.
Before modifiers can be assigned to an item, however, they must first be
defined in Maintenance > Menu > Modifiers.
Maintenance
Menu

Price Subtab
The Price subtab defines the price for the item. Select the Price subtab from
the Item function tab to edit or assign a price to an item, as shown in Figure 5-
6:
Figure 5-6 Price Subtab
Price Level Button
Click Price Level to access the Price Levels function tab and create a new
price level, if necessary. Changing a price level changes the price level for all
Price Level — Designates the Price Level to use for the item. Price Levels
enable a common price be assigned to items in a group.
Refer to the
Pricing Methods Price — Specifies the price assigned to the individual item. This price is the
and Pricing Hierarchy sec- lowest level in the pricing hierarchy.
tions at the beginning of this
chapter for more informa-
tion.

If Modifier Inset
Modify Base Price — If this item is a modifier, this check box enables the
base price of the item being modified to be increased by the percentage stipu-
lated in the 'Base%' text box. The base price is the price in effect at the time
the item is ordered, and this is determined by the system's pricing hierarchy.
Refer to the Pricing Hierarchy section at the beginning of this chapter.
Base% — Designates the percentage to use when modifying an item's base

price. The percentage is entered as a decimal, such as .5 for 50%. 100% is
entered as 1.00.
This function is useful in a bar environment where a mixed drink is modified,

such as when a customer orders a double shot. For example, an item called
Double can be set up with 'Modify Base Price' selected and a 'Base%' of 1.00
for 100%. Include this item in a modifier group and assign this modifier group
to the mixed drink item. When the mixed drink is ordered in the FOH and the
customer requests a double, select the drink and modify it using the Double
modifier. The price of the mixed drink is doubled on the guest check.
Quantity Pricing Button

Refer to the
Quantity Pric-
Click Quantity Pricing to access the Quantity Pricing function tab and create a ing, Pricing Methods and
quantity priced item. Pricing Hierarchy sections
in this chapter for more
information.
Maintenance
Menu

Miscellaneous Subtab
The Miscellaneous subtab defines alternate SKU numbers for the same item,
set video attributes, define open items, define gift cards, and more. Many set-
tings display only if other features are activated. Select the Miscellaneous
subtab, shown in Figure 5-7, from the Item function tab:
Figure 5-7 Miscellaneous Subtab
Misc Inset
Cash Card — Designates this item is used to sell a cash card in the FOH.
Refer to the
Aloha Accesso-
ries User’s Guide for more Revenue Item — Specifies the item is not included in net and gross sales. For
information regarding setup example, select this check box for such things as party deposits, amusement
requirements for cash cards. or slot machines, admissions, club dues, and more. You can not comp or
promo a revenue item.
Refer to the Gift Certificate — Designates this item is used to sell a gift certificate in the
Aloha Gift FOH. This check box appears only if you are using Aloha Gift Certificate
Certificate Manager User’s Manager.
Guide for more informa-
tion.
No Gratuity — Exempts the item from gratuity calculations.

Auto Display Recipe — Automatically displays the item's recipe when it is
selected in the FOH. Items with recipes are indicated by three red asterisks in
the top left corner of the item button.
Revenue Item — Specifies the item is not included in net and gross sales. For
example, select this check box for such things as party deposits, amusement
or slot machines, admissions, club dues, and more.
Gift Card — Specifies the item is set up as a gift card. This check box is only
Refer to the Aloha
available if gift cards are in use, and enables the ‘Activate Card’ and ‘Add Special Features
Value’ settings. User’s Guide for more infor-
mation on gift cards.
Activate Card — Activates the gift card upon approval.
Add Value — Activates the gift card upon approval with the ability to add
value to the card.
Video Inset
Do Not Show when Item — Prevents an item from displaying on the video
screens when the item is ordered as an item.
Do Not Show when Modifier — Prevents an item from displaying on the

video screens when the item is ordered as a modifier.
Show Modifier Independently — Displays the modifier on the video screen

in the same format as a menu item even though the item is ordered as a modi-
fier.
Delay Time — Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that an item takes to
prepare. The delay time is an indicator for the food preparer to have items
ready at a specific time. This is used when one item takes longer to prepare
than another.
Maintenance
Orders containing items with delay times are indicated on the remote
display system with inverted headings.
Menu
A delay time is specified for the item that takes the longest to prepare. This
time displays on the remote display system monitors to which any other items

on the order are sent. When the item with a specified delay time is bumped, a
countdown is initiated on the other remote display system monitors. A
delayed order cannot be bumped until the countdown for the item with the
delayed time begins. If more than one item on the order has a delay time spec-
ified, the longest delay time is used.
Example: A pizza takes 10 minutes to cook. A salad takes one minute to pre-
pare. Set the pizza to have a delay time of 10 minutes (600 seconds). When
the pizza is bumped, indicating start of preparation, the delay time of the pizza
item is indicated on the remote display system monitor where the salad dis-
plays. The delay time counts down to zero. The delay time indicates the time
the pizza will be ready and enables the food preparer to prepare the salad and
have it ready at the same time the pizza is ready.
Label Inset
Label ID — If the item requires a printed label when it is ordered, select the
corresponding Label ID from the drop-down list. Labels are defined in Main-
tenance > Hardware > Labels.
Item Weight Inset
Guest Count Weight — Establishes the weight value of the item when
counting guests by category. For example, you can set the guest count weight
of an item named "Fajitas for Two' so that it increases the guest count by two
when a customer orders it. This check box works in conjunction with the 'Use
Entrees for Guest Counts' check box and the 'Category' selected in Mainte-
nance > Store Settings > Order Entry group on the Guest Counts subtab. The
default guest count weight is one.
SKU Numbers Inset
The SKU text boxes store the item's SKU number(s). Additional entries allow
you to assign more than one SKU number to an item.
Open Item Inset
Ask for Description — Forces the FOH to prompt for a description when the
item is sold.

Ask for Price — Forces the FOH to prompt for the price when the item is
sold. When an open item requires a description and a price, the FOH prompts
for the description first. After it is entered, a prompt for the price displays.
Print Subtab
The Print subtab defines printing aspects of an item, such as check and chit
printing, and item justification. Select the Print subtab, shown in Figure 5-8,
from the Item function tab:
Figure 5-8 Print Subtab
Check Printing Inset
Print on Check — Prints the item on the guest check when used as a modi-
fier; otherwise, it prints only on the chit.
Maintenance
Menu

Chit Printing Inset
Never Print on Chit — Prevents the item from printing on the kitchen chits.
Highlight if Item — Prints an item in reverse type on the chit — white on

black on monochrome printers, and in red on color printers — when the item
is used as a modifier.
The ‘Red items’ check box in the Chit Print subtab located in Main-
tenance > Store Settings > Printing group must be selected to acti-
vate the ‘Highlight’ feature on color printers.
Consolidate 1st Modifier Group — Prints and consolidates modifiers based

on the first modifier group of the item. Use this setting in conjunction with
‘Consolidate Items with Different Modifiers’ in Maintenance > Store Settings
> Printing > Chit Appearance. This is for food items, such as steaks, which
commonly have prep temperature as the first modifier group. The kitchen can
then know how many steaks to prepare based on preparation time.
3 Ribeyes
2 MR
1 Soup
1 Salad
1 MW
Soup
Print in Bold — Prints the item in bold on the chit.
Justification — Select the printing justification on the guest check for the
item. Available options are left, centered, and right, with left being the default.
Print Recipe Frequency — Indicates the number of times the item must be
ordered before a copy of the recipe is printed. The recipe prints on a kitchen
chit or is shown on a remote display system monitor, according to the print
group or video group in which it is assigned. If the recipe should not print, a
'0' value is entered in this text box.

Recipe Button
The Recipe button, located on the bottom of the Item function tab, opens a
secondary dialog box that enables the recipe for the item to be entered/edited.
Recipes are displayed on FOH terminals or printed on kitchen chits only when
the Print Recipe text box has a value higher than 1. A Recipe button displays
in the FOH on the order entry screen when this feature is enabled.
To create a recipe for an item:
1. Click Edit, if necessary.

2. Click Recipe. The Edit Recipe dialog box displays, as shown in Fig-
ure 5-9:
Figure 5-9 Edit Recipe
3. Enter the following optional information to complete the recipe file:

Recipe Text — Enter or edit the text for the recipe in the recipe text
window. The recipe is stored in a .TXT format in the Recipe folder.
Recipe Bitmap — Assigns a bitmap to a recipe in addition to the text.
Store the bitmap files in the Recipe folder. The file naming conven-
tion is ITM(item number).BMP, where (item number) is substituted
with the number of the item in the Item file, with no leading zeros.
Recipe Movie — Assigns an audiovisual (.AVI) file to a recipe in Maintenance
Menu
addition to the text. Store .AVI files in the Recipe folder. The file
naming convention is ITM(item number).AVI, where (item number)
is substituted with the number of the item in the Item file.

4. Click OK to exit the Edit Recipe Item dialog box.
5. Click Save.

Categories
The Categories feature of the Aloha menu system combines like menu items
into groups that can be tracked for reporting purposes, to promote special
items on the menu, or to modify other parts of the menu system. Categories
are used extensively with Promotions, Comps, Order Modes, Labor Groups,
and Performance Measures. A maximum of 950 categories can be defined. Up
to 40 of those can be used for sales and 910 can be used for non-sales catego-
ries.
A category cannot be deleted if it is assigned to a promotion, comp,

order mode, or a performance measure.
Categories can be as simple or as complex as required, but there are several

rules governing the creation of new categories:
• Include every item in either a sales or a retail category.

• Items cannot be in more than one sales or retail category.
• Suggestive categories are useful, if used properly, but not required.
• Non-sales categories are useful, if used properly, but not required.
• An item may be in one sales, or one retail category, and none, one or
more non-sales or suggestive categories.
• Items not placed in a sales or retail category are automatically
assigned to the first sequential sales or retail category.
New categories can be as general or as specific as desired. In the simplest

form, sales categories could be created for Non-Alcoholic Beverages, Food,
Liquor, Wine, Beer, and Other. In a more detailed form, sales categories could
be created for Non-Alcoholic Beverages, Coffee/Tea, Appetizers, Soups/Sal-
ads, Entrees, Fish/Seafood, Sides, Desserts, Liquor, Import Beer, Domestic
Maintenance
Menu

Beer, Draft Beer, Red Wines, White Wines, and Other. The more specific the
sales category, the more detailed the reporting.
Select Maintenance > Menu > Categories to display the Categories function
tab, shown in Figure 5-10:
Figure 5-10 Categories Function Tab
Category — Holds a four-digit number that together with 'Description'

uniquely identifies each category record. To create a new record, enter an
unused number and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the
Category drop-down list, select the record to edit and press Enter.
Description — Enter a descriptive name to identify the category.
PMS Sales Cat — Used when a hotel property management system (PMS) is
used in conjunction with the Aloha POS system. The PMS Interface add-on
enables the Aloha POS system to communicate with the hotel's property man-
agement system. When this is the case, enter a category number (usually 1-4)
that corresponds to the four Aloha categories in the PMS system. PMS cate-

gories are usually set up on a hotel's property management system as follows:
1-Food, 2-Liquor, 3-Beer, and 4-Wine.
AR Sales Cat — Defines the Account Receivable (AR) sales category field in
the Aloha Back Office Accounts Receivable product to which the current cat-
egory reports.
Exclude from Tipshare Calculations—Excludes the category in any tip-

share calculations or tippable sales amounts.
Max Per Check — Limits the number of times you can add an item from this
Refer to Chapter
category to the check. Enter a number from 0 up to 999. If set to 999, there is 4, Labor Mainte-
no limit. When you exceed the defined amount of the same item on the check, nance Functions, for more
the system checks if the employee has a sufficient access level to add more of information on Access Levels.
the same item. If the employee does not have sufficient access, the Manager
Approval screen appears. If the manager has sufficient access, they can enter
their employee number in the Manager Approval screen to approve the addi-
tion of the item.
To approve the items over the limit, a manager must have ‘Override
Category Limits’ selected in their access level.
If an item is in more than one category, the most restrictive category deter-
mines the number of times you can add the item to the check. For example, if
you place Bud in a category that allows two items per check, and in another
category that allows five items per check, the system enforces the limit of two
items per check.
When using the Quantity function, or Quantity Item pricing with ‘Affects
Inventory’ selected, the system enforces the limit based on the quantity you
enter for the item. For example, if you enter Wings with a quantity of 20, but
the category to which you assign Wings has a ‘Max per Check’ of 10, the
manager approval screen displays.
When using Quantity Item pricing with ‘Affects Inventory’ cleared, the sys- Maintenance
tem enforces the limit based on the number of times you add the item to the Menu
check. If Wings are set up as in the previous example, the manager approval
screen displays on the 11th attempt to add Wings to check.

Category Type Inset
Sales — Groups related food and beverage items together for tracking and
sales analysis. The results are available immediately through manager func-
tion keys on order entry terminals. A maximum of 40 sales categories can be
created.
Retail — Groups related retail items, such as caps and shirts together for
tracking and sales analysis. These are separated and tracked differently from
food and beverage items. The results are available immediately through man-
ager function keys on order entry terminals.
Suggestive — Groups items so that they blink on order entry screens in order
to attract attention and encourage sales of these items. Suggestive categories
are not necessary for the system to function properly and should be used spar-
ingly.
Non-Sales — Used primarily by other features, such as Order Mode, Promo-

tions, Comps, or Performance Measures, as a qualifying parameter.
Category Selection Lists
The two selection lists in the dialog box are used to define categories. The list
on the left side of the screen contains those items that are presently assigned
to the selected category. The list on the right side of the screen contains the
items in the Items file.
To add an item to a category:
1. Select the desired item or items in the list on the right. You can also
double-click an item to move it to the opposing list box. To add more
than one item at a time, hold down Ctrl and use the mouse to select
multiple items in the list on the left.
2. Click Include. The item is copied to the list on the left indicating it is
included in the category.
To remove an item or items from a category:
1. Select the desired item or items in the list on the left. You can also
double-click an item to move it to the opposing list box. To add more

than one item at a time, hold down Ctrl and use the mouse to select
multiple items in the list on the right.
2. Click Remove. The item is copied to the list on the right indicating it
is removed from the category.
Maintenance
Menu

Modifiers
Modifiers are groups of items used to extend, alter, or further define menu
items. Modifier groups have a circular relationship to items in that they are
composed of items defined in the Items file, grouped into a modifier group,
and then assigned to an item. Modifiers convey information to the kitchen
when printers and remote display systems are in use. For example, lettuce,
onions, and pickles are added to the Items file, collected into a modifier group
called 'Extras', then assigned to the 'Hamburger' item.
When the 'Hamburger' item is added to a submenu, and a server selects it on

an order entry terminal, a modifier can be selected from the 'Extras' modifier
group. Using the features available in the Modifier Group function, you can
control whether the modifier group displays automatically when the item in
which it is attached is selected, or if the Modify button must be selected to dis-
play the modifier group. You can also control other attributes such as the min-
imum and maximum number of modifiers that are selected and the number of
free modifiers. This linked method of building menus permits unlimited con-
figuration options in the menu system.
Modifiers force cashiers to key through extra screens and slow down
a cashier. For example, in a cafeteria setting, the cashier does not
need to modify an item with extra tomatoes unless there is a charge
for extra tomatoes.
The items included in the modifier group must first be created in the Items
database. They can then be quickly and easily added to a modifier group.
There are four common types of modifiers:
• Ingredient — An ingredient or topping that can be added or omitted

per a customer's request. For example, onions on a hamburger, or sour

cream on nachos. These groups are hardly ever forced unless encour-
aged and stated on the menu.
• Side — A side that a customer has to choose to complete an entree or
a combo. For example, french fries, salad, or vegetables are side mod-
ifiers. These groups are usually forced with a Min 1, Max 1.
• Preparation — A way in which an item is prepared or cooked. For
example, a steak temperature. These groups are always forced with a
Min 1, Max 1.
• Quantity/Size — A size, portion, or an amount. For example, a
small, or a cup size for soup. These groups are always forced with a
Min 1, Max1.
Select Maintenance > Menu > Modifiers to display the Modifiers function tab,
Figure 5-11 Modifiers Function Tab

Maintenance
Modifier Group — Holds a four-digit number between 10,000 and 19,999 Menu
that together with 'Long Name' uniquely identifies each Modifier Group
record. To create a new record, enter an unused number and press Enter. To

edit an existing record, scroll through the Modifier Group drop-down list,
select the record to edit and press Enter.
Short Name —Enter a short descriptive name to identify the modifier group.
The short name displays on the FOH order entry screen.
Long Name — Enter a longer, more descriptive name to identify the modifier
group. Data in the Long Name text box is used in the reporting features built
into the Aloha POS system.
Min — Enter the minimum number of modifiers that can be selected when an
item is ordered. The value can be 0 (zero). A number greater than zero forces
the modifier selection screen to display, regardless if 'Screen Flow Required'
is selected. The server must select at least the 'min' number of items from the
modifier group. If 'Min' is not set, then 'Max' does not need to be set.
The ‘Min’, ‘Max’,
and ‘Free’ check
boxes use weights on items set Max — Enter the maximum number of modifiers that can be selected when
up in Maintenance > Menu > an item is ordered. If both 'Min' and 'Max' are 0 (zero), an unlimited number is
Items in the ‘Default Weight’ assumed.
check box. Refer to the Items
section earlier in this chapter
for more information. Free — Enter the number of items from the modifier group that can be
ordered at no charge. For example, if the value for 'Free' is set to 1, then the
first modifier item is at no charge.
Substitute Group — Select a previously defined modifier group from the

drop-down list that contains items that can be substituted for items listed in
this modifier group. It is not necessary to select a substitute group, but if
selected, the system places a substitute button on order entry terminals.
Screen Flow Required — Forces the order entry terminal to automatically

open the Modifier Group screen. Typically, the value in 'Min' would be
greater than 0 (zero), forcing the server to select at least one modifier from the
group.
Exempt Bartenders from Flow — Exempts bartender job codes from screen
flow for the selected modifier.
Submenu Index — Identifies a submenu from which the new slave submenu
is built. This is used in conjunction with Slave to Menu in.

Modifier Item Buttons
The Modifiers dialog box contains button positions that are used to add items
to the modifier group. Click the arrow button(s) to toggle between the button
positions if more items are required for the modifier group.
Modifier items display on order entry terminals in the order in which they are
placed on the Modifiers Group Maintenance dialog box, therefore, you should
consider the order in which servers typically select modifiers.
Refer to Per-
form Database
To perform maintenance, such as delete, cut, copy, and paste, right-click the Edits Using Right-Click in
mouse on a button containing a modifier item. To move a modifier, click and Chapter 1, Aloha Manager,
drag the button to a new position. for detailed instructions on
performing maintenance
using right-click.
To place a modifier item in the modifier group:
1. Double-click the desired button position. The Modifier Item dialog

box displays, as shown in Figure 5-12:
Maintenance
Figure 5-12 Modifier Item
2. Select the modifier item to place on the button from the Item drop- Menu
down list.

3. Enter the selection value to use when determining if the ‘Max’ num-
ber of modifiers have been selected, in the weight text box. For
example, if the 'Max' for a vegetable modifier group is set to 3, and a
salad with a weight of 2 is selected, only one more vegetable item
with a weight of 1 can be selected. The selection value is typically
one.
4. Select one of the following pricing options:
Price — Designates the button price should be used to price the item.
Enter the button price in the text box to the right.
Use Item Price — Designates the price of the item as entered in Item
Maintenance is used to price the item.
Price Level — Designates the price established in the assigned price

level should be used to price the item. Select the price level from the
drop-down list to the right.
5. Click OK. The modifier item displays on the modifier button.
To delete a modifier from a group:
1. Right-click the button containing the unwanted modifier.

2. Select Delete. The modifier is deleted from the modifier group.
To move a modifier to a different button position:
1. Place the cursor on the button and hold down the left mouse button.
2. Drag the modifier to a different location and release the left mouse
button.

Exception Modifiers
Exception modifiers are groups of items used to extend, alter, or further define
submenus, but contain items that are infrequently encountered as modifiers.
These items are ordered often enough to warrant their inclusion in the menu
system. Exception modifier groups are attached to submenus, and are
accessed in the FOH when an employee orders an item, touches the Modify
button, then touches the Special button. This eliminates the need to type in
special modifiers to items.
The items included in the exception modifier group must first be created in
the Items file. They can then be quickly and easily added to an exception
modifier group.
Select Maintenance > Menu > Exception Modifiers to display the Exception
Modifiers function tab, as shown in Figure 5-13:
Maintenance
Figure 5-13 Exception Modifiers Function Tab Menu
Exception Modifier Group — Holds a five-digit number between 20,000

and 29,999 that together with 'Short Name' uniquely identifies each Exception

Modifier record. To create a new record, enter an unused number and press
Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the Exception Modifier Group
Name — Enter a descriptive name that identifies the exception modifier.
Exception Modifier Item Buttons

The Exception Modifiers dialog box contains button positions that are used to
add items to the exception modifier group. Click the arrow button(s) to toggle
between the button positions if more items are required for the exception
modifier group.
Refer to Perform
Database Edits
Using Right-Click in Chapter The system can be defined to show as many as six pages of exception modifi-
1, Aloha Manager, for detailed ers. The system permits up to 20 exception modifier groups containing as
instructions on performing many as 108 items each.
maintenance using right-click.
Exception modifier items display on order entry terminals in the order in

which they are placed on the Exception Modifiers dialog box, therefore, you
should consider the order in which servers typically select exception modifi-
ers.
To place an exception modifier in a blank button position:
1. Double-click the desired button position. The Exception Modifier

Item dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 5-14:
Figure 5-14 Exception Modifier Item

2. Select the modifier item to place on the button from the Item drop-
down list.
3. Enter the button price for the item.
4. Click OK to save. The Exception Modifier function tab displays.
5. Click Save.
To delete an exception modifier:
1. Right-click the button containing the unwanted exception modifier.

2. Select Delete. The exception modifier is deleted from the group.
To move an exception modifier to a different button position:
2. Drag the exception modifier to a different location and release the
left mouse button.
Maintenance
Menu

Menu
The menu system enables you to create as many menus as needed. Together
with the default menus, the settings in the job code to which an employee is
assigned control the menu that displays when the employee clocks in. Assign
default menus to servers, bartenders, and cashiers on the More Options subtab
in Maintenance > Store Settings > Order Entry group.
Refer to Chapter
3, Store Settings,
for more information on To override a default menu for servers or bartenders, assign the menu to an
assigning default menus. event in Event Scheduler using the Set Server Menu, or Set Bar Menu event
types.
Menus are composed of submenus. Create all submenus and then attach the
submenus to the appropriate menus.
Select Maintenance > Menu > Menu to display the Menus function tab, as
Figure 5-15 Menu Function Tab

Menu ID — Holds a number between 1 and 999 that together with 'Short
Name' uniquely identifies each Menu record. To create a new record, enter an
Menu drop-down list, select the record to edit and press Enter.
Short Name — Denotes a short name that uniquely identifies the menu. This
is the name that shows on the FOH.
Long Name — Denotes a longer descriptive name that describes the menu.
This is the name used on the reporting features built into the Aloha POS sys-
tem.
The ‘Menu ID’, ‘Short Name’, and ‘Long Name’ text boxes are the
only text boxes in the Menus dialog box that are not dependent on
entries in other database files.
Reroutes Inset
Printer Groups — A printer group is assigned to each item in the Items file
and the Reroute Printer Groups setting is used to override this setting for the
defined menu only. This feature is useful for situations such as when the bar
printer group should be rerouted to a service bar for a dinner menu. Items nor-
mally sent to the bar printer group are sent to a service bar printer group while
the defined menu is active. On a bartender menu, the bar printer group might
reroute to 'None' since the bartender does not need chits for drinks that are
ordered. In this example, select the bar printer group in the Printer Group
'From' drop-down list, then move to the immediate right and select the service
bar printer group from the Printer Group 'To' drop-down list. When the menu
is inactive, the printer group rerouting is no longer in effect. Up to five printer
reroutes can be configured for each menu.
Tax Substitutions — A tax record is assigned to each item in the Items file
and the Reroute Tax Substitutions setting is used to override this setting for
the defined menu only. This feature is useful for situations such as when an
alcoholic beverage item is set up for the tax to be included in the price, but Maintenance
when the same drink is ordered from a restaurant menu, the tax should be Menu
excluded and added to the price. In this example, select the Liquor Inclusive
tax record in the Tax Substitution ‘From’ drop-down list, then move to the
immediate right and select the Liquor Exclusive tax record from the Tax Sub-

stitution ‘To’ drop-down list on the Server menu. When the menu is inactive,
the tax substitution rerouting is no longer in effect. Up to five tax substitution
reroutes can be configured for each menu.
Submenu Buttons
The Menu dialog box contains nine buttons that are used to add submenus to
the menu. Click the arrow buttons to toggle between the button positions if
more submenus are required for the menu.
Submenus display on the order entry terminals in the order in which they are
placed on the Menu dialog box; therefore, add submenus according to the
steps of service or most popular items.
Refer to Perform
Database Edits
Using Right-Click in Chapter To place a submenu on the menu:
1, Aloha Manager, for detailed
instructions on performing 1. Double-click the desired button position. The Submenu dialog box
maintenance using right-click.
Figure 5-16 Submenus Dialog Box
2. Select the submenu from the Submenu drop-down list.

3. Click OK. The submenu displays on the screen.
To delete a submenu from a menu:
1. Right-click the button containing the unwanted submenu.

2. Select Delete. The submenu is deleted from the menu.

To move a submenu to a different button position:
1. Place the cursor on the submenu and hold down the left mouse but-
ton.
2. Drag the submenu to a different location and release the left mouse
button.
Maintenance
Menu

Submenus
Submenus are groups of similar menu items that reflect logical subdivisions
of a restaurant's menu. Such things as 'Appetizers', 'Soups', 'Salads', and 'Bev-
erages' are typical submenu groups. Submenus are grouped together in a menu
record to create a complete working menu for the restaurant.
If you are using extended menu functions in Inventory Control, all

submenus are defined in Inventory Control. No maintenance is pos-
sible or required in TableService with regard to submenus
To assign a bitmap image to an item, create the bitmap and save it in the
\ALOHA\BMP directory. Name it ITMxxxx.BMP where xxxx is the number
assigned to the item, with no leading zeros. The bitmap image must not
exceed a width of 80 pixels and a height of 26 pixels for it to fin on a FOH
button.

Select Maintenance > Menu > Submenus to display the Submenus function
Figure 5-17 Submenus Function Tab
Submenu ID — Holds a three-digit number that in combination with Long

Name uniquely identifies the Submenu record. To enter a new submenu, enter
an unused number between 1 and 999 in the Submenu ID field and press
Enter. To edit an existing submenu, scroll through the Submenu ID drop-down
list, select the record to edit and press Enter.
A submenu cannot be deleted if it is assigned to a menu because it is

linked to other files.
Short Name — Enter a short name that uniquely identifies the submenu. The
text entered here should be abbreviated to fit on the FOH button. The data Maintenance
centered on the button; therefore, length is an issue. This can be up to 15 posi- Menu
tions, but usually anything over 11 can cause it to be truncated on both ends
making it too cryptic for servers to understand. A two-line button is created by

entering '\n' at the desired line break in the 'Short Name' text box. For exam-
ple, 'Steak &/nEntree'. The '\n' takes up two of the 15 characters.
Long Name — Enter a longer, more descriptive name to uniquely identify the
submenu. The is the name that displays on reports.
Exception Modifiers — Select a previously defined exception modifier

group from the drop-down list. Items contained in exception modifier groups
are those items that might be called for by a customer, but that are otherwise
seldom requested. .
When an exception modifier group is selected, the group is accessed

on order entry terminals by pressing the Special button located on
the Modifier screen
Allow AutoMenu Overwrite — Enables an AutoMenu that is scheduled as

an event in Event Scheduler to overwrite, or replace, the selected submenu.
Set up AutoMenus and assign them to submenus in Maintenance > Menu >
AutoMenu.
Sort and Consolidate Buttons
Sort ^ — Sorts the buttons to flow up and down in alphabetical order.
Sort < — Sorts the buttons to flow from left to right in alphabetical order.
Consolidate — Consolidates buttons and eliminates any blank buttons that

might fall between buttons with items.
Refer to Chapter
7, System Mainte-
nance Functions, for more Menu Item Buttons
information regarding Events
and Event Scheduler. The Submenus Maintenance dialog box, shown in Figure 5-18, contains blank
buttons that are used to form a logical group of menu items for a submenu.

For example, all soup items are placed on the Soups submenu, and are dis-
played for the server on the FOH when the Soups button is selected.
Figure 5-18 Submenu Buttons Matrix
Menu items display on order entry terminals in the order in which they are
Refer to the User
placed on the Submenu Maintenance dialog box, therefore, you should add Interface group in
the most popular items first. Chapter 3, Store Settings, to
change the number of rows
and columns on a submenu.
Maintenance
Menu

To place a menu item on the submenu:
1. Double-click the desired button position. The Submenu Item dialog

Figure 5-19 Submenu Item Dialog Box
2. Select the menu item to place on the button from the Item drop-
down list.
3. Select one of the following pricing options:
Price — Designates the button price should be used to price the item.
Enter the button price in the text box to the right.
Use Item Price — Designates the price of the item as entered in Item
Maintenance is used to price the item.
Price Level — Designates the price established in the assigned price

level should be used to price the item. Select the price level from the
drop-down list to the right.
4. Click OK. The menu item displays on the submenu button.

To delete an item from a submenu:
1. Right-click the button containing the unwanted item.

2. Select Delete. The item is deleted from the submenu.
To move an item to a different button position:
2. Drag the button to a different location and release the left mouse
button.
Maintenance
Menu

Taxes
The Aloha system can meet the needs of virtually any taxing jurisdiction.
Taxes can be calculated using a flat rate or tax breakpoints can be set up and
utilized in a tax table. You also have the ability to define taxes for use with
For informa-
tion on setting
items that require conditional taxation when purchased in a variety of circum-
up conditional taxes, refer stances. For example, it is possible to charge no tax on a soft drink when it is
to Flex Taxes later in this ordered individually, and charge tax on it when it is ordered with food. In
chapter. addition, you can identify a tax as a Goods and Services Tax (GST), which
taxes every item on a guest check unless it is defined as an exempt item. You
can define up to 999 taxes.
The information contained here regarding taxes is

intended solely as a guide for use with Aloha software.
Consult state and federal regulations regarding the col-
lecting and reporting of all taxes by your establishment.
Tax Subtab
Use the Tax subtab to establish such things as the name of the tax, the tax rate,
and type of tax. You also set the minimum amount to apply to a check before
a tax is applied, and whether the tax is a secondary or GST tax. Select Mainte-

nance > Menu > Taxes to display the Tax function tab, as shown in Figure 5-
20:
Figure 5-20 Taxes Subtab
Number — Holds a two-digit number that together with 'Description'

uniquely identifies each Tax ID record. To create a new record, enter an
Tax ID drop-down list, select the record to edit and press Enter.
Description — Displays a short descriptive name to identify the tax record.
Tax Rate — Designates the tax rate the system uses to calculate the tax
amount. The 'Tax Rate' is used to calculate taxes using a flat-rate multiplier. It
cannot be used for jurisdictions that require use of a tax table instead of calcu-
lations. The system calculates taxes for the defined record using the value
placed in this field if all elements in the 'Non-repeating Breakpoints' and
'Repeating Breakpoints' arrays are set to zero.
Minimum Amt — Designates the minimum sale amount required before a Maintenance
tax is applied. The tax is not applied until the guest check total is more than Menu
the amount entered here. This is used in certain tax jurisdictions, such as the
Canadian Province.

Secondary — Defines the tax method as a secondary tax that is used in con-
junction with another tax method. It is required for some types of menu items
in certain jurisdictions. The tax method is treated as a secondary tax. Second-
ary taxes must be exclusive.
GST — Defines the tax method as a Goods and Services tax (GST). Refer to
the section on GST Taxes in this chapter for more information on the GST.
AR Tax ID — Interfaces with the Aloha Accounts Receivable product. There

are eight tax rate text boxes located on the General tab in Accounts Receiv-
able. These are labeled 'POS Tax Rate 1' through 'POS Tax Rate 8'. Enter the
number, between 1 and 8, for the 'POS Tax Rate' text box that corresponds
with this tax record.
Smart Tax — Automates the task of changing items from an inclusive tax to
an exclusive tax only if another item(s) on the guest check is taxed exclu-
sively. The inclusive taxes involved must be configured to have exclusive tax
reassignments. Any item that is taxed inclusively remains so, unless another
item on the check is taxed exclusively. When this is the case, the inclusive tax
is replaced by the exclusive tax reassignment.
The ‘Use Smart Taxes’ check box must be enabled on the Taxes and
Surcharges subtab located in Maintenance > Store Settings > Finan-
cials group to activate this feature.
The ‘Smart Tax’ drop-down list is enabled only when 'Inclusive' is selected.
Only tax records with 'Exclusive' selected display in the drop-down list.
Tax Type Inset
Inclusive — Calculated as part of the menu price. Inclusive taxes are included
in the stated price of the menu item.
Exclusive — Added to the price of the item. Exclusive taxes are over and
above the stated price of the menu item.
Vendor — Indicates a special tax required in certain jurisdictions. This should

be set if the primary tax method is a vendor tax.

To set up a basic primary sales tax record:
1. Select Maintenance > Menu > Taxes. The Taxes function tab dis-
plays (Figure 5-20).
2. Enter an unused two-digit number and press Enter.
3. Type a short descrip ion of the type of tax record you are creating in
the Description text box.
4. Select the appropriate tax type.
5. Type the numeric value (in decimals) of the tax rate you will use for
this type of tax in the Tax Rate text box.
6. Enter the minimum sale amount required before a tax is applied in
the Minimum Amount text box. You may acquire this figure from
the tax tables you use to collect tax on sales at your establishment.
7. Select appropriate check boxes to identify Secondary or GST taxes.
If you select Secondary, the Exclusive box is automatically selected
by the system. If you select GST, proceed to additional instructions
for configuring inclusive and exclusive GST taxes later in this chap-
ter. If you need to set up breakpoints, refer to the next section on non-
repeating and repeating breakpoints.
Secondary taxes must be defined as exclusive taxes.
8. Click Save.
9. Exit the function to return to the main menu.
10. Select Maintenance > Menu > Items and select the new primary
tax rate for each item to which it will apply.
Repeating Subtab
Use the Repeating subtab for jurisdictions that use tables to calculate taxes
rather than a straight tax rate. Non-zero values placed in the tables override
the value set in 'Tax Rate'. If taxes are calculated using a tax rate, the values in
Maintenance
Menu

'Repeating Breakpoints' should be set to zero. Select Repeating to display the
Repeating subtab, as shown in Figure 5-21:
Figure 5-21 Repeating Subtab
Nonrepeating Subtab
Use the Nonrepeating subtab to establish irregular intervals. To set the non-
repeating breakpoints, enter whole number values into the boxes beginning
from the upper left and reading across the screen. The values entered repre-
sent one-cent intervals beginning at zero and counting up. The value in the
first box represents the number of one-cent intervals that have no tax. For
example, if the first box contains a 7, then sales from 0.00 to 0.06 cents have
no tax. The second box holds the number of one-cent intervals with .01-cent
tax applied: a 12 in the second box means that sales from 0.07 cents to 0.18
cents have a 0.01-cent tax applied. The third box holds the number of one-
cent intervals with 0.02-cents tax applied: a 12 in the third box means that
sales from 0.19 cents to 0.30 cents are subject to a 2-cent tax.

Select Nonrepeating to display the Nonrepeating subtab, as shown in Figure
5-22:
Figure 5-22 Nonrepeating Subtab
The system uses the values in 'Non-repeating Breakpoints' until it reaches a

zero value. It then uses the values in the 'Repeating Breakpoints' table. Values
are entered as in the 'Non-repeating Breakpoints' table; however, the calcula-
tions begin at the last value entered in 'Non-Repeating Breakpoints' rather
than at zero.
Sufficient breakpoint values should be entered in 'Repeating Breakpoints'

until a pattern is established. Tax methods are assigned to each item record,
and before calculating taxes for a guest check, the system calculates a total for
items assigned to the same tax methods and calculates the tax on the check for
each tax type. This ensures that items with different tax methods are taxed at
the proper rate, even when mixed together on a guest check.
To set up repeating and non-repeating tax tables:

Maintenance
1. Enter the correct Tax Rate in the appropriate box at the top of the Menu
Taxes function tab.
2. Go to the Non-Repeating Breakpoints section. Begin with the box
in the top left corner. Enter the first amount that will be taxed.

3. Place the first amount where tax will be applied in the first box of the
Non-Repeating Breakpoints section. (The first number listed in the
Amount of Sale column, Figure 5-23.) The first breakpoint is $0.10,
because that is the lowest amount where a sales tax will be charged.
The second breakpoint is determined by subtracting the lowest
amount from the highest amount within that tax range (14 - 10 = 4).
4. Enter the second breakpoint in the box to the right and continue
entries horizontally until you reach the end of the first row. Then
begin the second row in the far left corner and continue across in a
horizontal manner.
5. Once you establish the first two breakpoints, subtract the highest
amount in the previous tax range from the highest amount in the next
tax range (44 - 29 = 15).
6. Continue this formula until you reach the first 'repeating breakpoint'.

An example is displayed in the table shown in Figure 5-23:
Amount of Sale Tax Breakpoint
.10 .14 .01 10
.15 .29 .02 4
.30 .44 .03 15
.45 .59 .04 15
.60 .74 .05 15
.75 .88 .05 14
.89 1.03 .07 15
1.04 1.18 .08 15
1.19 1.33 .09 15
1.34 1.48 .10 15
1.49 1.62 .11 14
1.63 1.77 .12 15
1.78 1.92 .13 15
1.93 2.07 .14 15
2.08 2.22 .15 15
2.23 2.37 .16 15
2.38 2.51 .17 14
2.52 2.66 .18 15
2.67 2.81 .19 15
2.82 2.96 .20 15
2.97 3.11 .21 15
3.12 3.25 .22 14
3.26 3.40 .23 15
3.41 3.55 .24 15
3.56 3.70 .25 15
3.71 3.85 .26 15
3.86 4.09 .27 24
Maintenance
4.10 4.14 .28 5
4.15 4.29 .29 15 Menu
Figure 5-23 Tax Breakpoint Table

7. Once you establish the first repeating breakpoint, enter the numbers
in the bottom section of the Taxes function tab (Figure 5-20), Repeat-
ing Breakpoints. Figure 5-23 shows the first repeating breakpoint at
$4.10 - $4.14 (the 0.10 and 0.14 are the same as the first taxable
amounts).
If the sample table were a complete Tax Bracket Table, it would con-
tinue to $20.00, where the tax would be $1.35 (based on 6.75%).
GST Taxes
The Goods and Services Tax (GST) taxes every item on a guest check, unless
you have specifically exempted an item.

As with any tax created in Aloha, you must first set up a basic tax record in
Maintenance > Menu > Taxes (Figure 5-20) before you configure it as a GST
tax. Use the procedures outlined earlier in this chapter on how to set up a basic
primary sales tax record. Unlike primary taxes set up in Aloha, it is not neces-
sary to attach a GST tax to each item.

Select Maintenance > Store Settings > International group to access the GST
subtab, shown in Figure 5-24:
Figure 5-24 GST Subtab
GST Tax Button
Click GST Tax to access the Taxes function tab and add or edit an existing pri-
mary tax record. All taxes with ‘GST’ selected on the Taxes function tab dis-
play in the drop-down list.
GST Tax — Specifies the primary tax record to be defined as a GST tax.
Canadian GST taxes are unique to Canada and are best configured in
the flex tax module rather than the GST module.
On Comps — Enables you to apply the GST to the full price of a comp. If the Maintenance
GST is set as inclusive, the system selects this check box and disables it. If Menu
you change the GST tax to exclusive, the check box becomes enabled and it
remains selected, retaining a value of TRUE. You must clear the check box to
apply the GST tax to the reduced amount of the comps.

On Promos — Enables you to apply the GST to the full price of a promo. If
the GST is set as inclusive, the system selects this check box and disables it. If
you change the GST tax to exclusive, the check box becomes enabled and it
remains selected, retaining a value of TRUE. You must clear the check box to
apply the GST tax to the reduced amount of the promo.
Tax Invoice Threshold Inset

Refer to the
‘Print a Tax
Some jurisdictions require a printed invoice or receipt be provided to the cus-
Invoice’ section in this chap- tomer showing the amount of taxes involved in the transaction. The tax
ter for more information invoice threshold inset enables you to define the threshold amount that will
trigger the printing of the invoice.
Amount — Represents the dollar amount of the invoice threshold which

determines printing parameters for the tax invoice. This is a seven-digit num-
ber with a default value of zero. For example, if the threshold is set at $50.00,
then when a guest check totals $50.00 or more, a prompt displays enabling
text to be entered.This text prints on the guest check.
Exempt Items Inset
The exempt items inset enables you to identify a specific category for which
you want the items to be exempted from the GST tax.
Category Button
Click Category to access the Categories function tab to add or edit a category.
Changing a category changes all items assigned to it.
Category — Specifies the category in which to assign exempt GST tax status.
All existing categories display in the drop-down list. The default value is
None, which applies the GST to all items on the guest check.
GST Tax Text on Guest Check Inset
Text: — Enables you to define what prints on the GST line on the guest
check. The default text is GST Tax. This is a 20-character field.

GST Inclusive Taxes
If you define the GST tax as an inclusive tax, the tax is included in each item
price, hereafter referred to as the full item price. Item prices should be set up
in Item Maintenance with a price that includes tax as well as the value of the
item. The GST tax is applied to every item on the guest check.
The formula the system uses to calculate the GST inclusive rate is: (amount*
rate) / (1 + all percentage rates added together excluding the GST tax rate).
If the GST tax is set as inclusive, the primary taxes must be set as
inclusive also or the rates are ignored by the system.
To configure a GST inclusive tax:
3. Type a short description of the type of tax record you are creating in
7. Select the GST and Inclusive text boxes. Click Save and Exit to the
main menu.
8. Select Maintenance > Store Settings > International group. The
International subtab displays as the default subtab.
Maintenance
Menu

9. Select the Inclusive Taxes subtab. The Inclusive Taxes subtab dis-
plays, as shown in Figure 5-25:
Figure 5-25 Inclusive Taxes Subtab
10. To print detail for inclusive taxes, select Do Not Print Subtotal and
Tax on Check. Otherwise, only the subtotals and tax will print.
11. Select Use Inclusive Tax Breakout.
12. Enter text in the Pre Text, Tax Text, and Base Text text boxes. In the
example in Figure 5-26, text was entered as follows: Pre Text =
Inclusive Tax:, Tax Text = Amt:, and Base Text = Tax:. The entries

made here display on the guest check, as shown in the sample guest
check in Figure 5-26:
Item 250.00
Item 350.00
Item 400.00
Total 1000.00
Total Includes:
Additional Charge 87.47
Inclusive Tax:
1% Amt: 970.87 Tax: 8.75
GST Tax:
3% Amt: 1000.00 Tax 29.13
Figure 5-26 GST Guest Check with Use Inclusive Breakout
If the GST tax is inclusive and the Use Inclusive Tax Breakout is
cleared, the guest check appears as shown in Figure 5-27:
Item 250.00
Item 350.00
Item 400.00
Sub Total 1000.00
Total 1000.00
Total Includes:
Maintenance
Additional Charge: 87.47 Menu
GST Tax: 29.13
Figure 5-27 GST Guest Check with Use Inclusive Breakout Cleared

If the tax breakout is not desired at the bottom of the guest check, do
not fill in the three text boxes and select Do Not Print Tax Breakout
on Check.
13. Select the GST subtab (Figure 5-24).

14. Select the GST tax record created earlier from the Taxes drop-down
list.
15. Enter the dollar amount for the Tax Invoice Threshold in your juris-
diction.
16. Select an exempt item category for which there should not be a GST
tax collected, if applicable, from the Category drop-down list.
17. Enter the text to display on the guest check preceding the GST tax
amount in GST Tax Text on Guest Check.
18. Click Save.
Unlike a primary tax, a GST tax is not attached to an item. When a

tax is defined as a GST, it is no longer available on the tax drop-
A
down list in Item Maintenance.
Additional Charges
When you select ‘Use Additional Charge’ from Maintenance > Store Settings
> Financials > Add Charges, the system checks for an inclusive GST tax. If
one is used, the system selects and disables both the ‘On Comps’ and ‘On Pro-
mos’ text boxes and adds additional charges to the full item prices. In addi-
tion, the system disables the ‘Amount’ text box so a flat rate cannot be used
for the additional charge.

Auto Gratuity
The auto gratuity feature cannot be used with an inclusive GST tax
because auto gratuity is applied to the guest check only under certain
conditions. The system checks for an auto gratuity, and if found,
ignores it when calculating inclusive GST taxes.
Comps and Promos
Comps and promos are taxed at their full item prices when the GST inclusive
tax is applied.
A primary tax on comps or promos can be defined so that either your

establishment or your customer pays the tax. However, a GST tax is
always paid by the customer.
Secondary Taxes
Secondary taxes cannot be used with an inclusive tax because secondary taxes
are exclusive by nature and cannot be calculated by the inclusive tax formula.
The system checks for secondary taxes, and if found, ignores them when cal-
culating inclusive GST taxes.
Surcharges and Order Mode Charges
Surcharges and order mode charges cannot be used with an inclusive GST tax
because they are both applied on an item-by-item basis and cannot be calcu-
lated by the inclusive tax formula. The system checks for surcharges and
order mode charges, and if found, ignores them when calculating inclusive
GST taxes.
Verify Data
Maintenance
If you use a primary tax and an inclusive GST tax, select Utilities > Verify
Data to ensure: Menu

• You have set all primary taxes as inclusive. If you have not, you
receive a warning that ‘Item Name Tax ID # must be inclusive when
using inclusive GST.’
• The tax is not associated with any item. Errors are reported in Verify
Data.
• Additional charges are not configured with a flat rate charge. Errors
are reported in Verify Data.
GST Exclusive Taxes

If you define the GST tax as an exclusive tax, the tax is applied to the subtotal
of items, primary and secondary taxes, and all other charges. The GST tax is
applied to every item on the guest check.
The formula the system uses to calculate the GST exclusive rate is: (amount*
GST tax rate).
To configure a GST exclusive tax:
3. Type a short description of the type of tax record you are creating in
7. Select the GST and Exclusive text boxes. Click Save and Exit to the
main menu.
8. Select Maintenance > Store Settings > International group. The
International subtab displays as the default subtab (Figure 3-68).
9. Select the GST subtab (Figure 5-24).

10. Select the GST tax record created earlier from the Taxes drop-down
list.
11. Enter a dollar amount for the Tax Invoice Threshold.
12. Select an exempt item category for which there should not be a GST
tax collected, if applicable, from the Category drop-down list.
13. Enter the text to display on the guest check preceding the GST tax
amount in GST Tax Text on Guest Check.
14. Click Save.
A sample guest check for items with an exclusive GST tax is shown in Fig-
ure 5-28:
Item 250.00
Item 350.00
Item 400.00
Sub Total 1000.00
Tax 10.00
Additional Charge: 100.00
GST Tax: 33.30
Total 1143.30
Figure 5-28 GST Guest Check with Exclusive Tax Type
Tax Invoice
When you select a GST tax from the ‘GST tax’ drop-down list in the GST
subtab in Maintenance > Store Settings > International group, you enable the
Print Tax Invoice feature. A new button, Tax Invoice, automatically displays
on the FOH Tenders screen.
Some jurisdictions may require the establishment’s business ID number or

GST tax number print on the guest check and tax invoice. Set this up in Main- Maintenance
Menu

tenance > Store Settings > System group > Store Information, as shown in
Figure 5-29:
Figure 5-29 Business ID Number Setup
You must also select the ‘Print Business Number’ check box in Maintenance
> Store Settings > Printing group > Check Content 2, shown in Figure 5-30:
Figure 5-30 Print Business Number Flag

Print if Less Than Tax Threshold
When you touch the Tax Invoice button, the system compares the guest check
total to the amount set in the ‘Tax Invoice Threshold’ text box, located in
Store Settings > International group > Taxes.
If the guest check is less than the threshold amount, the guest check automati-
cally prints with the title “Tax Invoice” displayed at the top, as shown in Fig-
ure 5-31:
TAX INVOICE
CAFE de ROSALINDA
2700 Calle de Rio Azul
Tijuana, Chihuahua MEXICO
BUSINESS ID# 3459877
Figure 5-31 Sample Tax Invoice, Top Portion
Print if Greater Than Tax Threshold
If the guest check is equal to or greater than the amount entered in the ‘Tax
Invoice Threshold’ text box, a special message box displays prompting you
to: ‘Enter customer name and GST/business number or address of the recipi-
ent’, followed by ‘Cust Info:’. Type the name and GST ID or business ID
number or address of the recipient. You have 64 character spaces, or two lines
available for the recipient information. The text wraps from one line to the
next. A blank line separates your store information from the recipient infor-
mation.
Click Print to print a copy of the tax invoice. If the invoice is printed more Maintenance
than once, the text ‘Copy’ will print. Click Done to release the data in the spe- Menu
cial message box and return to the Close screen. Until you click Done, you
may reprint additional copies of the tax invoice. Reprints print the word
‘COPY’ immediately after ‘TAX INVOICE’ in the heading.

Flex Taxes
Flex taxes enable tax on items that require conditional taxation. This capabil-
ity permits tax configuration for a variety of circumstances. You can set up a
flex tax based on the condition that the tax will always be charged. You can
also set flex taxes based on the quantity of an item, the guest check subtotal,
or the particular category of an item. For example, it is possible to set the sys-
tem to charge no tax on a soft drink when it is ordered individually and charge
tax on the same soft drink when it is combined with other food items.
If you select any flex tax record as a secondary flex tax for an item in Item
Maintenance, you must also select ‘Use Secondary Taxes’ in Maintenance >
Store Settings > Financials > Taxes and Surcharges.
For a more thorough understanding of how to configure flex taxes, please

review the two examples contained later in this section.
Before flex taxes can be enabled, all applicable primary tax records
must be created in Maintenance > Menu > Taxes.

Select Maintenance > Menu > Flex Taxes to display the Flex Taxes function
Figure 5-32 Flex Tax Maintenance
Flex Tax ID — Holds a two-digit number that, together with 'Description',

uniquely identifies each Flex Tax record. To create a new record, enter an
Flex Tax ID drop-down list, select the record to edit and press Enter.
Description — Contains a descriptive name that identifies the flex tax record.
Flex Type — Defines the type of flex tax. The choices are:
• Always (0) — Applies to all items in the system.

• Quantity (1) — Applies to a specific quantity of items ordered.
• Subtotal (2) — Applies to a specific subtotal value of items ordered.
Maintenance
• Category (3) —Applies to a specific category of items ordered.
Menu

Tax ID — Determines the tax record, as established in Maintenance > Menu
> Taxes, used to calculate flex taxes on items. For example, if the ‘Always’
flex type is specified, the Tax ID specified here is applicable at all times.

Chaining Inset
The Chaining inset contains two text boxes in which you can specify one of
the other flex taxes, depending upon the conditions defined by the tax laws in
your area.
Flex Tax ID #1 — Specifies a flex tax that becomes active when the terms
specified in the Conditions inset are met. The flex tax specified in this field
applies only if the specified conditions succeed.
Flex Tax ID #2 — Specifies a flex tax that becomes active when the terms
specified in the Conditions inset are not met. The flex tax specified in this
field applies only if the specified conditions fail.
Conditions Inset
Is Item Quantity Less Than — Designates taxation by an item quantity

threshold below which tax will apply. When Quantity (1) is selected as the
flex type, this text box is enabled.
Is Check Subtotal Less Than — Designates taxation based on a check sub-

total threshold below which tax will apply. When Subtotal (2) is selected as
the flex type, this text box is enabled.
Do any items in this category appear on the check? — Designates taxation

based on an item category. When Category(3) is selected as the flex type, this

text box is enabled. Refer to the section immediately following on ‘Example
of Category Flex Tax’ for more information about this feature.
Category Button
Click Category to access the Categories function tab and add a new category
or edit an existing category. Changing a category changes all items to which it
is assigned.
Example of Flex Tax with Category and Always

Conditions
To set the system to charge no tax on a coke when it is ordered individually
and tax the same coke at 7% when it is combined with other food items, you
need to create two primary tax records and three flex tax records. Once all the
tax records are in place, associate just one of the flex tax records with the coke
item in Menu > Items.
The two primary tax records are created in Maintenance > Menu > Taxes
(Figure 5-20). Set up one primary tax record for Tax Coke with a tax rate of
7%, as shown in Figure 5-33:
Maintenance
Menu
Figure 5-33 Sample Tax Coke Record

Set up the second primary tax record for No Tax Coke with a 0% tax rate, as
Figure 5-34 Sample No Tax Coke Record
After you create the primary tax records, select Menu > Flex Taxes to set up
the three flex tax records required to complete the scenario:
• Create a Tax Coke record with Always selected as the ‘Flex Type’.
• Create a No Tax Coke record with Always selected as the ‘Flex
Type’.
• Create a Tax Coke with Food record with Category selected as the
‘Flex Type’, identifying Food as the item category, chaining to Tax
Coke record as ‘Flex Tax ID #1’ and the No Tax Coke record as ‘Flex
Tax ID #2’.
Associate the final flex tax record, ‘Tax Coke with Food’, with the
coke item in Menu > Items.
When you set up the final example, note that when you select Category as the
flex type, the ‘Tax ID’ text box becomes unavailable. The primary tax rates
accessed for this condition are those that are identified by ‘Flex Tax Type #1’
and ‘Flex Tax Type #2’.

The ‘Category’ flex tax type requires a selection from the ‘Category’ drop-
down list, allowing you to select the food category to identify in this scenario.
You want to charge tax on a coke when it is ordered with food, or when an
item from this category ‘...appear(s) on the check?’ as the help text on the
Flex Taxes function tab suggests.
The text boxes in the Chaining inset become available when a flex type other
than Always is selected, enabling you to specify the conditions to apply and
when. In this example, select the Tax Coke flex tax as ‘Flex Tax ID #1’ to
ensure when the category condition is met, or is successful, and food items are
sold with the coke, tax on the coke is charged. Select No Tax Coke as ‘Flex
Tax ID #2’ to ensure when the category condition is not met, or fails, no tax is
charged on the solo coke.
An example of the Tax Coke - Always flex tax record is shown in Figure 5-
35:
Figure 5-35 Sample Tax Coke - Always
Maintenance
Menu

An example of the No Tax Coke - Always flex tax record is shown in Figure
5-36:
Figure 5-36 Sample No Tax Coke - Always Flex Tax
An example of the Tax Coke with Food - with Category flex tax record is
Figure 5-37 Sample Tax Coke with Food - Category Flex Tax

Example of Canadian GST and Provincial Flex Tax
with Always, Quantity and Subtotal Conditions
The sample graphics in this section are based on an example involving the
interaction of the Canadian Provincial and Canadian GST taxes. These two
taxes work interdependently to tax food items, such as donuts, in accordance
with the quantity purchased and the subtotal of the guest check. For example,
if six donuts are purchased and if the guest check subtotal is less than $4.00,
only the Canadian GST tax may apply. If six donuts are purchased and the
guest check subtotal is $4.00 or more, the system can be set to apply both
Canadian GST and Canadian Provincial taxes. If more than six donuts are
purchased in this scenario, the system can be configured to suspend both
taxes.
To implement the taxation in this scenario, create four primary tax records and
five flex tax records. Once all the tax records are in place, associate just one of
the flex tax records with the ‘plain donut’ item in Menu > Items.
The following graphics illustrate the basic primary tax records required to
support the sample Canadian tax scenario, including the Canadian GST and
Canadian Provincial taxes.
Canadian GST taxes are unique to Canada and are best configured in
the flex tax module rather than the GST module. Therefore, the
‘GST’ check box is not selected in any of the examples that follow.
Maintenance
Menu

Primary tax records are created in Maintenance > Menu > Taxes. An example
of the primary Canadian GST tax is shown in Figure 5-38:
Figure 5-38 Sample Canadian GST Record
An example of the primary Canadian Provincial tax is shown in Figure 5-39:
Figure 5-39 Sample Canadian Provincial Tax Record

An example of a primary tax that includes a combination of both Canadian
GST and Canadian Provincial tax rates is shown in Figure 5-40:
Figure 5-40 Sample Combination of Canadian GST and Provincial Taxes
An example of a record that specifies no tax, or a tax rate of zero percent, is

Maintenance
Menu
Figure 5-41 Sample of No-Tax Record

Once you have created the primary tax records, create the following flex tax
records in the order in which they are listed:
• Create a No Tax record with Always selected as the ‘Flex Type’.

• Create a Canadian GST record with Always selected as the ‘Flex
Type’.
• Create a Canadian GST and Provincial record with Always selected
as the ‘Flex Type’.
• Create a Canadian GST record with Subtotal selected as the ‘Flex
Type’, chaining to ‘Flex Tax ID #1’ as Canadian GST- Always and
‘Flex Tax ID #2’ as Canadian GST & Provincial - Always.
• Create a Canadian GST with Quantity selected as the ‘Flex Type’,
chaining to ‘Flex Tax ID #1’ as the Canadian GST Subtotal type you
just created, and the No Tax - Always record as ‘Flex Tax ID #2’.
It is not possible to create Quantity, Subtotal, or Category

flex taxes if the Always flex taxes which they utilize do not
exist. For this reason, you must create flex taxes in the
proper order.
The following graphics illustrate the flex taxes required to configure the
Canadian tax scenario. (They are shown in the order in which they should be
created.)

An example of the No Tax - Always flex type tax is shown in Figure 5-42:
Figure 5-42 Sample No Tax - Always Flex Type
An example of the Canadian GST - Always flex type tax is shown in Figure 5-
43:
Maintenance
Menu
Figure 5-43 Sample Canadian GST - Always Flex Type

An example of the Canadian GST & Canadian Provincial - Always flex type
tax is shown in Figure 5-44:
Figure 5-44 Sample Canadian GST and Provincial - Always Flex Type
An example of the Canadian GST - Subtotal flex type tax is shown in Figure
5-45:
Figure 5-45 Sample Canadian GST - Subtotal Flex Type

An example of the Canadian GST - Quantity flex type tax is shown in Figure
5-46:
Figure 5-46 Sample Canadian GST - Quantity Flex Type
After creating all flex taxes that establish the Canadian GST and Provincial
tax scenario for donuts, you must associate the donuts item to the flex tax.
If an item taxes incorrectly once it has been correctly associated

with a flex tax, check the category of the item. If the item is not in
the category to which the taxes are set to apply, you may need to
change the category of the item.
Maintenance
Menu

Select Menu > Items. Select the donuts item from the ‘Number’ drop-down
list. Select Canadian GST - Subtotal from the ‘Flex Tax’ drop-down list, as
Figure 5-47 Associate Donut Item with Flex Tax

Surcharges
Surcharges are additional charges that occur when specific items are sold. It is
primarily used in Florida where each alcoholic drink sold has a surcharge
accessed to it. It is then up to the restaurant to decide whether they will explic-
itly charge the cost to the guest, or reduce it as a cost of business. If the restau-
rant is collecting the money from the guest, the charge shows up as a line item
on the guest check. If the restaurant is not collecting money from the guest,
the charge shows up as an expense and is deducted for the Net Sales calcula-
tion. When a surcharge is assessed on the item, the amount accumulates as a
collected surcharge or a not-collected surcharge.
Surcharges are different from regular charges in that a surcharge is based on

the quantity of the item sold instead of on the price of the item. Restaurants in
some jurisdictions require a method to recapture surcharges on certain menu
items. In many of these cases, the surcharges are actually additional flat-rate
taxes levied on alcoholic beverages on a volume basis. For example, a state
may have a surcharge of $13.50 per gallon on liquor. The Aloha system
allows restaurant owners to recapture such taxes through the Surcharge fea-
ture.
Exclusive surcharge taxes are combined with the tax on guest

checks, even though surcharges look to be applied after the tax is on
the check. Inclusive surcharge taxes are listed at the bottom of the
guest check
Maintenance
Menu

Select Maintenance > Menu > Surcharges to display the Surcharges function
Figure 5-48 Surcharges Function Tab
ID — Holds a four-digit number that together with 'Name' uniquely identifies

each Surcharge record. To create a new record, enter an unused number and
press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the ID drop-down list,
select the record to edit and press Enter.
Name — Enter a name that uniquely identifies the surcharge.
Tax ID Button
Click Tax ID to access the Taxes function tab and create new taxes, if neces-
sary. Changing tax information in the function tab changes the tax for all
items assigned to that tax.
Tax ID — Select a tax record, as defined in Maintenance > Menu > Taxes, to
apply to the surcharge from the drop-down list.

Calculate as Percentage — Calculates the surcharge as a percentage. When
selected, the Percentage text box is available. If not selected, the surcharge is
a fixed amount, which is entered in the 'Amount' text box.
Amount —Holds a decimal number representing the flat rate, in dollars and
cents, to apply to the price of items requiring a surcharge. In the case of a sur-
charge of $13.50 per gallon of liquor, the amount could be based on the appor-
tioned amount of liquor served in a single drink: one ounce of liquor would
require a surcharge of $10.55 cents to recapture the surcharge amount. This
surcharge could then be assigned to all appropriate liquor menu items requir-
ing a surcharge. 'Amount' is available when 'Calculate as Percentage' is not
selected.
Percentage — Enter a percentage of the item amount to use as a surcharge,

such as '7.5' for '7.5 percent'. Percentage is available when 'Calculate as Per-
centage' is checked.
Maintenance
Menu

Special Pricing
The Special Pricing submenu contains Fixed Item Pricing and Quantity Pric-
ing. These are just two of the pricing methods available in the system. How-
ever, these two methods are at the top of the hierarchy when the price for an
item is determined. Quantity Pricing and Fixed Item Pricing override all other
pricing methods, in that order.
Fixed Item Pricing

Fixed Item Pricing enables you to attach a specific price to an item. It is used
to override other item prices set in the system, except Quantity Pricing.
The AutoMenu and Slave to Submenu features require Fixed Item

Pricing to attach a price to an item.
Select Maintenance > Menu > Special Pricing > Fixed Item Pricing to display
the Fixed Item Pricing function tab, as shown in Figure 5-49:
Figure 5-49 Fixed Item Pricing Function Tab

The Fixed Item Pricing dialog box contains a list of items that have a fixed
price, if any. The command buttons enable you to add, edit, or delete items
with a fixed price.
To create a fixed item priced item:
1. Click Add. The Item Price dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 5-
50:
Figure 5-50 Item Price Dialog Box
2. Enter the item number assigned to the item in Maintenance > Menu
> Items.
3. Enter the fixed price to attach to the item.
4. Select ‘0 Price if Modifier’ if there is no charge for the item when it
is ordered as a modifier.
5. Click Save. The Fixed Item Pricing function tab displays.
6. Click Save.
Quantity Pricing
Quantity Pricing enables an item to be priced by quantity or weight, such as a
Maintenance
dozen hot wings or one pound of cole slaw. When the item is ordered, a
prompt displays on the FOH order entry terminal enabling entry of the quan-
Menu
tity or weight of the item. The total price of the product is then calculated

based on the quantity entered or the weight (less the tare weight, if applicable)
times the Unit Price established here in Quantity Pricing.
If the Scales add-on is being used, the weight measurement is auto-

matically brought forward to this field.
Select Maintenance > Menu > Special Pricing > Quantity Pricing to display
the Quantity Pricing function tab, as shown in Figure 5-51:
Figure 5-51 Quantity Pricing Function Tab
The command buttons enable you to add, edit, or delete items in Quantity
Pricing. To edit or delete an existing item, first select the item, and click Edit
or Delete.

To create a quantity item priced item:
1. Click Add. The Quantity Item Price dialog box displays, as shown in
Figure 5-52:
Figure 5-52 Quantity Item Price Dialog Box
2. Complete the following information:
Item # — Enter the item number assigned to the item in Maintenance

> Menu > Items.
Price per Unit — Designates the price of the item per unit. The price
depends on the unit of measure entered in the ‘Unit Name’ text box.
Unit Name — Enter a descriptive name for the unit of measure. For
example, if the ‘Unit Name’ is LB (pound), the ‘Price per Unit’ is the
price of the item per pound. If the ‘Unit Name’ is DZ, the ‘Price per
Unit’ is the price of the item per dozen.
Precision (# decimal points) — Designates up to five decimal points

that can be used by the FOH when the weight measurement is entered
(i.e., a Precision set at 2 enables 2.53 pounds to be entered, and a Pre-
cision set at 3 enables 2.537 pounds to be entered).
Tare ID — Identifies a pre-weighed container in which items are to

Maintenance
be weighed for sale. The weight of this container is deducted from t
Menu

he weight entered in the FOH. Select a ‘Tare ID’ from the drop-down
list.
A tare weight is not subtracted if the item weight is entered by the

Scales function. Refer to the Accessories manual for more informa-
tion on tare weights.
Affects Inventory — Indicates the item should be deleted from

inventory
3. Click Save. The Quantity Pricing dialog box displays to allow further
maintenance.
4. Click Done and exit the function.

Price Levels
The Price Levels pricing method enables a common price to be assigned to
items in a group. For example, all large soft drinks are the same price, regard-
less of the specific type. Create a price level called Large Soft Drinks and set
the common price in the price level. The price level to use can be designated
at the item level, the submenu level, and the modifier/exception modifier
level. When the price is changed in the price level, all items set to that price
level reflect the price change.
Refer to the Pric-
ing Methods and
Select Maintenance > Menu > Price Levels to display the Price Levels func- Pricing Hierarchy section at
tion tab, as shown in Figure 5-53: the beginning of this chapter
for more information on pric-
ing.
Figure 5-53 Price Levels Function Tab
Price Level — Holds an unused number between 1 and 9999 that together
with 'Description' uniquely identifies each Price Level. To create a new price Maintenance
level, enter an unused number and press Enter. To edit an existing price level, Menu
scroll through the Price Level drop-down list, select the record and press
Enter.

Description — Enter a descriptive name to identify the price level.
Price — Enter a price to be charged for each item in the group.

Price Changes
The Aloha system provides flexibility in establishing a price for an item. The
Price Change function further enhances this flexibility by enabling an item's
price to be temporarily changed for a specified time frame rather than manu-
ally accessing each item record, price level, or promotion and modifying the
price. A price change record can include a single selection or it can contain
multiple selections of each type, therefore, creating a 'batch' price change.
For example, a price change can be used to modify the price of a hamburger
promotion that is sold at a reduced price on a certain day of the week.
Do not press ‘Enter’. If this key is pressed, Edit mode is

exited and the list is not updated. An ‘x’ displays to the
left of each item or price level that has been selected.
A 'happy hour' price change can be activated to modify the price of the appe-
tizer menu items, and also include a change for the price level used for
imported beer. This is accomplished using the 'Set Price Change' and ' Disable
Price Change' events located in Maintenance > System > Events. Use the 'Set
Price Change' event to activate the price change.
If a Disable Price Change event is not specified for a Price Change,

the Price Change becomes inactive at EOD.
The Event Time and Type dialog box provides you the flexibility of activating
the event whenever you want. The 'Disable Price Change' event is used to
deactivate a price change that needs to end on the same business day in which
it was activated, but before the EOD.
Maintenance
Menu

Select Maintenance > Menu > Price Changes to display the Price Changes
Figure 5-54 Price Changes Function Tab
Price Change — Holds a four-digit number that together with 'Name'

uniquely identifies each Price Change. To create a new Price Change, enter an
Price Change drop-down list, select the record to edit and press Enter.
Name — Enter a name to identify the price change.
Start Date and End Date
When an event is fired, unless otherwise specified, it ends when the EOD pro-
cess runs. The 'Start Date' and 'End Date' text boxes work in conjunction with
the 'Set Price Change' event in Event Scheduler, and enable you to control the
date, or range of dates, in which a Set Price Change event is active. These
dates are used to fire up the event when the DOB occurs between the range of
dates specified in the Price Change record activated by the event.

Start Date — Establishes the first date in which the Price Change should be
in effect.
Do not leave the ‘Start Date’ or ‘End Date’ text boxes set at 00/00/
00. If the price change occurs daily for an extended length of time,
enter a date that occurs in the future.
End Date — Establishes the ending date for the price change.
Type Inset
Use these options to toggle the selection between items, price levels, and pro-
motions when making the price change selections. Only one option can be
selected at a time; however, a price change can contain price changes for a
combination of all three types, therefore, creating a 'batch'.
Items — Displays the items in the Item file in the selection list.
Price Levels — Displays all price levels defined in Maintenance > Menu >
Price Levels in the selection list (without prices).
Promotions — Displays all promotions defined in Maintenance > Menu >

Promotions in the selection list (without prices). If the promotion is defined as
a percentage, the Price text box accepts a percentage value.
• Quick Combos — Select a promotion defined as a quick combo to

activate the upsell text box.
• New Price Promotion — Displays all items defined in the New Price
Promotion record. Select an individual item record to set the a new
price change for the item.
Change Inset
Active — Activates the price override for the selection. However, the price
change does not take effect until the batch is activated using the Set Price Maintenance
Change event. Menu
Price — Designates the new price for the selection when the price change is
in effect. If the promotion is defined as a percentage, specify the percentage in

this text box. Percentages are entered as a number and two decimal places.
For example, a percentage of 10% is entered as 10.00.
To deactivate an item price change, clear the ‘Active’ check box and
click Set. If you do not click Set before saving, the price change will
still be active.
Upsell — Specifies an additional amount to charge if the customer requests an

upsell for a Quick Combo promotion. This text box is only active for the
Quick Combo promotion type.
Set Button
Click Set to accept the price level change entered in the ‘Price’ text box and
update the price in the selection list with the temporary price. Do not press
Enter before clicking Set. If you do, Edit mode is exited and the list is not
updated.
An 'x' displays to the left of each item, price level, or promotion in which
'Active' is selected.

AutoMenu
AutoMenus overwrite existing submenus and allow you to create a menu
without assigning items to buttons on a submenu. You can define up to 9999
AutoMenus. The AutoMenu function works in conjunction with the Event
Scheduler and provides a quick and simple way to implement daily menu
changes. For example, a restaurant has a late night menu at a reduced price.
The items sold on the regular priced menu during the operating hours of 10:00
a.m. to 10:00 p.m. are sold at a reduced rate during the hours of 10:00 p.m. to
2:00 a.m. An AutoMenu titled 'Late Night' with a limited number of reduced
items is set in Events to show up every night at 10:00 p.m.
Refer to Fixed
Item Pricing ear-
The items presented on an AutoMenu are sorted according to their priority, lier in this chapter for more
which is determined by the restaurant, then alphabetically by their 'Short information about pricing.
Name'. The items must be priced using the Fixed Item Pricing function. For
example, if Hot Wings, Chicken Strips, and Potato Skins are assigned a 'Prior-
ity' of 1, and Nachos and Mozz Stix are assigned a 'Priority' of 2, they display
on the AutoMenu as shown in Figure 5-55:
Maintenance
Figure 5-55 FOH AutoMenu
Menu

Select Maintenance > Menu > AutoMenu to display the AutoMenu function
Figure 5-56 AutoMenu Function Tab
AutoMenu — Holds a two-digit number that together with 'Name' uniquely

identifies each AutoMenu record. To create a new record, enter an unused
number and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the
AutoMenu drop-down list, select the record to edit and press Enter.
Description — Enter a descriptive name to uniquely identify the AutoMenu.
Category — Displays the items included in the category selected from the
drop-down list. Items can then be selected for inclusion on the AutoMenu
from this list.

To assign an item in the list to the AutoMenu
1. Double-click the item. The AutoMenu Options dialog box displays,

Figure 5-57 AutoMenu Options Dialog Box
2. Select Active to assign the item to the AutoMenu.

3. Enter the priority with 1 being the highest priority. You can assign
multiple items the same priority number. Items are sorted on the
AutoMenu according to the priority entered here, then alphabetically
by their 'Short Name'.
4. Click Save to save the changes and return to the AutoMenu function
tab.
Repeat this process for each item to be assigned to the AutoMenu. It may be
Refer to the
necessary to select another category from the ‘Category’ drop-down list to Categories sec-
select an item. When all items to be included are selected, click Save on the tion earlier in this chapter
AutoMenu Maintenance dialog box. for more information on
creating categories.
Submenus have the unique ability to change the number of columns and rows
to display more or less items on each of the two submenu pages. Since
AutoMenus overwrite submenus, the maximum number of items you can
place on an AutoMenu is the lesser of the following: (2 submenu pages x sub- Maintenance
menu rows x submenu columns) or 48. Menu

Payments
Maintenance
Functions
This chapter discusses creating and setting up payment tenders, pro-
motions, comps, gift certificates, house accounts, and foreign curren-
cies.
Tenders............................................................................................. 6-4
Promotions...................................................................................... 6-21
Promotion Types............................................................................. 6-30
Buy One Get One (BOGO) .......................................................... 6-30
Combo ......................................................................................... 6-32
Coupon ........................................................................................ 6-33
New Price .................................................................................... 6-36
Check Reduction ......................................................................... 6-37
Quick Combo ............................................................................... 6-39
Comps ............................................................................................ 6-42
House Accounts.............................................................................. 6-51
Gift Certificates ............................................................................... 6-53
Foreign Currencies ......................................................................... 6-56
Chapter
6
6 – 2 Payments Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3
Payments can be configured with unlimited payment options such as payment
Maintenance
Payments
methods, customized tenders, promotions, comps, gift certificates, house
accounts, and foreign currencies. In addition, automatic credit card authoriza-
tion, pre-authorization, and online approval are set up in Payments.
• Create and configure multiple types of tenders.

• Create and configure promotions.
• Create and configure comps.
• Create and configure gift certificates.
• Set up and manage house accounts.
• Set up and define foreign currencies.
To access payments, select Maintenance > Payments from the Aloha Manager
menu shown in Figure 6-1:
Figure 6-1 Payments Menu
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Payments Maintenance Functions 6–3

Tenders
The Tenders function enables you to define up to 999 payment methods for
use in the Aloha system. This function is used to define the characteristics of
each tender, and parameters for handling cash and credit card payments.
To assign a bitmap to a tender button, create the bitmap and save it in the
\ALOHA\BMP directory. Name the file TDRxxxx.BMP where xxxx is the
number assigned to the tender, without leading zeros.
The bitmap image must not exceed a width of 80 pixels and a

height of 26 pixels for it to fit on a FOH button.
Select Maintenance > Payments > Tenders to display the Tenders function
tabshown in Figure 6-2:
Figure 6-2 Tenders Tab
6–4 Payments Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Number — Holds a three-digit number that together with 'Name' uniquely
Maintenance
Payments
identifies the tender record. To create a new record, enter an unused number
and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the Number drop-
down list, select the record and press Enter.
The Tenders function tab provides the following subtabs: Tender, Type, Iden-
tification, Authorization, Back Office, and Reconciliation.
Tender Subtab
The Tender subtab enables you to determine FOH tender button placement
and set overpayments in the Overpayment inset. Select the Tender subtab
from the Tender Maintenance function tab, Figure 6-2, to edit and enter tender
information.
A cash tender with $0.00 default value displays the FOH cash screen for
entering an amount. If there are no cash tenders defined with a $0.00 value in
'Default Amt', one must be created. Label this tender 'Cash'.
Name — Enter a unique name to identify the record. There must be at least
one cash tender type defined without a default amount assigned.
Position — Determines the placement of the button for the defined tender
type on the order entry terminal screens.
First Available Button — Assigns the tender to the first button available on
the FOH terminal screen. This check box is helpful if Centralized Database
Management is in use. When a new tender is sent from the corporate office
and the store location makes it active, if 'First Available Position' is selected,
the system determines the button position to use for the new tender.

Position Button
You can assign each tender a button position. There are 192 available button
positions with 24 button positions displaying on each page. Click Position to
access the Button Position dialog box (Figure 6-3). Click Page Up/Page Down
to scroll for more button positions.
Figure 6-3 Tender Button Positions
Click the desired position in which to place the tender you are defining. But-
tons already assigned a position are shown as unavailable.
To change a button's position, select the tender and click Position. The
selected tender is available on the Button Position dialog box. Click the
desired position. Click OK to accept the placement and return to the Tenders
function tab.
Report as — Enables you to combine tenders together for reporting purposes.

This contains a drop-down list of previously defined tenders.
To report a tender as itself, save it, then access the tender and select
it from the ‘Report As’ drop-down list.
Printer — An extra copy of the closed check is printed on this printer. Select
a printer from the drop-down list.

Printer Button
Maintenance
Payments
Click Printer to access the Printer Group function tab. Here you can perform
maintenance in the Printer Group function, including add printers if the
printer is not already there.
Default Amt — Defines the amount to display on the button in the FOH. But-
tons for specific amounts can be created when the 'Cash' check box is
selected. For example, a cash tender type with a default amount of $20.00 can
be created. This saves one step when applying payments.
Active — Sets the defined tender type to active, placing the corresponding
tender button on the order entry terminals in the defined button position. Only
one tender type can occupy a button position at any one time.
Track — No longer used by the system.
Can Refund — Assigns refund ability to the tender. Non-cash tenders that
require this status must have this selection enabled. In the case of credit cards,
refunds are available without this setting if the ‘Authorize Using EDC’ setting
on the Authorization subtab is not enabled. If you are using EDC to authorize
and post credit card charges, you must enable the ‘Can Refund’ feature before
refunds can be made.
Affect Deposit — Indicates the tender affects the over/short calculation of

deposits. Select this check box for tenders such as cash and personal checks.
Clear the check box for tenders such as credit cards
Print Check on Close — Sets the tender type to automatically print a copy of
the guest check when the check is closed. If 'Print Check on Close' is applied
to the default tender 'Cash', it applies to all increments of defined cash tenders.
For example, $5.00, $10.00, and $20.00 tenders are all defined as cash tenders
on the Type subtab. Any guest check closed with these tenders, singly or in
combination, causes the guest check to print, if this setting is enabled, because
they are defined as cash tenders.

Open Drawer on Close — Automatically opens the cash drawer when the
check is closed. It should not be selected for tender types that do not need the
cash drawer opened. The ‘Allow Auto-Open on Zero Total Checks’ check box
in Maintenance > Store Settings > Security > Cash Drawers subtab overrides
any tender with this setting.
Print Signature Line — Prints a signature line on the guest check. This is a
useful option for house accounts.
Combine on Check — Combines like tenders on the guest check. For exam-
ple, a $20 tender type and a $10 tender type would print on the guest check as
$30. This is typically used only for cash.
Close Check Upon Payment — Automatically closes a check when the ten-
der is selected.
Do Not Verify Amount — Does not require the system to check the amount
on the tenders screen in the FOH.
Overpayment Inset
Allow Overpayment — Permits an amount greater than the guest check total
to be entered in the FOH when the guest check is closed, therefore, allowing
the customer to receive cash back. The excess amount can be limited to a per-
centage of the guest check or it can be a set dollar amount.
Limit by Percent — Defines the amount entered in 'Excess' as a percentage,

not a set dollar amount.
Excess — Used in conjunction with the 'Allow Overpayment' check box.

Enter a decimal percentage if 'Limit By Percent' is selected (.20 = 20%) or
enter a set dollar amount (10.00 = $10.00).
Manager Can Always Overpay — Prompts the manager to enter a password

to override the limit defined in 'Limit By Percent' and 'Excess'.
Provide Change — Calculates change for the customer for this tender type.
Change due is displayed on order entry terminals.

Tips Inset
Maintenance
Payments
Allow Tips — Tracks tips for the defined tender type. This is usually selected
for credit card tender types.
Maximum Tip % — Specifies the maximum allowable tip percentage as a

percentage of the total sale for the defined tender type.
The ‘Maximum Tip %’ is not enforced if set over 100 percent.
Tip Refund % — Recovers a percentage of credit card tips from employees

to cover the standard credit card processing fees.
Remove Tip Line if Auto Gratuity — Removes the tip line on the credit
card receipt if an automatic gratuity has been applied to the check.

Type Subtab
The Type subtab specifies the type of tender you are defining. Select the Type
subtab from the Tenders function tab (Figure 6-4) to select the type of tender
you wish to define.
Figure 6-4 Type Subtab
Four main tender types are available on the Type subtab, Cash, Check, Cash
Card, and House Accounts. Each tender type is exclusive to every other ten-
der type. You can select only one tender type per tender record. If you are
defining a tender type other than those listed, leave all type selections inactive
and configure the new tender record in the appropriate locations. Define credit
card tenders on the Type subtab in the Credit Cards inset. Define tenders
intended to transfer through the Customer Information Management Interface
on the Back Office subtab, in the Accounts Receivable inset.
Cash — Defines the tender record as a cash tender.
Check — Defines the tender record as a check. This selection may be used to
define personal checks or travelers checks.
Cash Card — Defines the tender as a cash card.

House Accounts — Defines the tender as a house account.
Maintenance
Payments
Debit Card — Defines the tender as a debit card.
Gift Card — Defines the tender as a gift card. Select the gift card and a host
Refer to the
processor from the drop-down list. Aloha Special
Features Guide for more
Credit Card — Defines the tender as a credit card. Select credit card and a information on gift cards.
processor from the drop-down list.
IVR Number — Holds the Integrated Voice Response (IVR) number to con-
tact the Stored Value Systems host. This is only used if you select Stored
Value Systems from the ‘Gift Card’ drop-down list.
Foreign Currency Inset
Foreign Currency ID — If using foreign currency, select the ID that corre-

sponds to the required tender from the drop-down list. Foreign Currencies are
defined in Maintenance > Payments > Foreign Currencies.
Foreign Currencies ID Button
Click Foreign Currencies ID to access the Foreign Currencies function tab.

Here you can perform maintenance in the Foreign Currency function, includ-
ing add new foreign currencies if the foreign currency you need is not already
there. Note that changing foreign currency information in the function tab
changes the foreign currency information for all tenders assigned to the for-
eign currency.
Voucher Printing Inset
Do Not Print Vouchers — Suppresses vouchers for non-cash tenders from

printing. Select this option when you do not need a signed voucher from the
guest when you use this tender, such as meal discount cards.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Payments Maintenance Functions 6 – 11

Options Inset
Use Magnetic Card Only — Prevents a server from manually entering a gift
card or credit card number when applying a payment. The system prompts for
a manager password when a server attempts to manually enter the number.
You can override this setting for certain employees and allow them
to enter the gift card number without manager approval by selecting
‘Manual Card #’ in the access level to which they are assigned. This
setting is located in Maintenance > Labor > Access Levels > Finan-
cials.
Expiration — Sets order entry terminals to automatically prompt for a credit

card or gift card expiration date.
Verify Expiration — Checks the credit card or gift card expiration date
against the system date to automatically verify the card has not expired.
Print Expiration — Prints the credit card or gift card expiration

date on the guest check.
Identification Subtab
The Identification subtab defines the ID requirements screen used by the
order entry terminals to identify credit cards and validate customer IDs. Select

the Identification subtab (Figure 6-5) from the Tender function tab to edit and
Maintenance
Payments
enter identification information.
Figure 6-5 Identification Subtab
Require Identification — Enables an Identification prompt on order entry

screens. Forces the employee to enter the ID information. The check cannot
be closed if the requirements specified in this tab are not met.
Prompt — Text that displays on the order entry terminal prompting for the ID
information, such as 'Card #'.
Minimum — Defines the minimum number of digits allowable for the

defined credit card.
Maximum — Defines the maximum number of digits allowable for the

defined credit card.
Prefix Checking Inset
Prefix 1 through Prefix 4 — Defines valid number prefixes for the credit
card tender type up to the first eight digits. These prefixes are used in the val-

idation process. It is not necessary to enter prefixes for predefined credit card
types.
Digits to Validate — Enter a number to define how many digits at the begin-
ning of a credit card number to validate. For example, many major credit
cards can be recognized by the first four digits. Therefore, the number 4 can
be entered in this field.
Numeric On — Enables only numeric data. Clear this check box to

enable the numbering system to permit characters of the alphabet.
Print on Check — The ID prints on the guest check.
Validate — Validates the number entered on the order entry terminals against
a user-defined list of IDs.
Valid — Indicates whether the user-defined IDs represent valid IDs or invalid
IDs.

Authorization Subtab
Maintenance
Payments
The Authorization subtab affects the credit card authorization and configures
authorization characteristics. Select the Authorization subtab (Figure 6-6)
from the Tenders function tab to set up credit card authorization.
Figure 6-6 Authorization Subtab
Require Authorization — Enables an authorization prompt on order entry

screens.
Prompt — Text that displays on order entry terminals prompting for the
authorization number, such as 'Authorization #'.
Maximum Length — Defines the maximum length of the authorization code

for the defined credit card. If the authorization number is greater than zero, a
message stating ‘Must enter auth code’ displays’. If the maximum length is
set to zero, the system accepts blank authorization codes.
Print on Check — Prints the authorization code on the guest check.

Authorize Using EDC — Specifies Aloha EDC is used for credit card pre-
authorization.
Allow PreAuth with EDC — Specifies Aloha EDC is used for credit card
pre-authorization.
Back Office Subtab

The Back Office subtab defines Property Management System (PMS), Gift
Certificates, and Aloha Accounts Receivable settings. Select the Back Office
subtab (Figure 6-7) from the Tenders function tab to define PMS, gift certifi-
cates, and accounts receivable.
Figure 6-7 Back Office Subtab
PMS Settings Inset

Refer to the Inter- The following fields and check boxes are used with the PMS Interface add-on.
facing PMS with
Aloha User’s Guide for more
information on PMS. PMS — Ensures this tender type posts to the property management system, if
a property management interface is being used, and PMS Interface is

installed. When this selection is enabled, the other PMS settings become
Maintenance
Payments
available.
PMS Tender ID — Determines where the tender amount is posted in PMS.
PMS Room # — Designates a default room number only if all charges to the
tender ID are posted to the same account.
Accounts Receivables Inset
The following fields and check boxes are used with the Aloha Accounts
Receivable software interface. Tenders that must pass their information to
BackOffice applications do not function unless this inset is active and config-
ured correctly.
Accounts Receivable — Causes the system to pass tender information to

BackOffice applications for processing outside the Aloha system. Enable this
check box if this tender is to be used with the Aloha Accounts Receivable
software interface, or other BackOffice applications. When this selection is
enabled, the other accounts receivable settings become available.
Verify Customer Data — Enables the order entry terminal to use the Back-
Office database to verify data when this tender type is used in the FOH.
Print Balance on Receipt — Prints the customer's balance (from Aloha

Accounts Receivable) on the receipt when this tender type is used in the FOH.
Print Reference on Receipt — Prints the reference information entered in

the FOH when the guest check was closed. This is determined by the Refer-
ence Entry text box in Accounts Receivable. Enter 0 to not display a FOH
prompt. Enter 1 to display a FOH prompt with an optional entry. Enter 2 to
display a FOH prompt with a required entry.
AR Field on Receipt — Enables you to select another field from the cus-
tomer's accounts receivable information for print on the FOH receipt. The
choices are 'None', 'Card Number', 'Phone Number', or 'Company Name'.

Gift Certificates Inset
The following check box is used with the Aloha Gift Certificate software
interface.
Refer to the
Aloha Gift
Certificate Manager User’s Gift Certificate — Designates this tender as a gift certificate used with Gift
Guide for more information Certificate Manager.
on gift certificates.
Delivery Inset
The following check box is used with Aloha Delivery Frequent Buyer.
Refer to the
Aloha Delivery/
Frequent Buyer User’s Guide Use Saved Credit Card — Enables the system to store credit card informa-
for more information. tion for customers in a delivery operation.
Reconciliation Subtab
The Reconciliation subtab sets up an over or under amount for tenders used in
the Payment Reconciliation function. If any of these are selected, the tender is
included in the Payment Reconciliation process. Select the Reconciliation

subtab (Figure 6-8) from the Tenders function tab to set up payment reconcili-
Maintenance
Payments
ation requirements.
Figure 6-8 Reconciliation Subtab
Variance Inset
Variance Amount Allowed — Defines the currency amount this tender can
differ when verifying amounts for reconciliation. The variance amount
applies to over and under the amount entered for reconciliation.
The system recognizes the variance amount from the first cash tender with
$0.00 defined in the 'Default Amt' text box. Variance settings for all other cash
tenders are not necessary and are invalid. If an amount is entered in 'Default
Amt' and 'Variance Amount Allowed', the variance amount is ignored and the
'Variance Amount Allowed' text box becomes unavailable after the tender is
saved.
Enter Details — Enter transaction detail when running Payment Reconcilia-

tion. For example, if the tender is defined as personal checks, each individual
check is entered.

Enter Totals — Total amount must be entered when running Payment Recon-
ciliation. For example, if a tender is defined as a Visa credit card, the total
amount of all Visa transactions, without itemizing, is entered. This is the
default selection.
If the ‘Cash’ check box is selected, ‘Enter Details’, ‘Enter Totals’,

and ‘Auto Fill’ are not accessible on the Type subtab. These options
are ONLY available for non-cash tenders.
Auto Fill — Populates all Payment Reconciliation fields without the

employee entering the amount. This scenario would be for operations that
only verify payments.

Promotions
Maintenance
Payments
Promotions is a comprehensive feature set that allows the configuration of a
wide array of promotions to fit every need. There are six different types of
promotions. Each one is defined in a separate secondary dialog box specific to
the type. These promotions are created in conjunction with the categories
defined in Maintenance > Menu > Categories.
Categories are the cornerstone in the promotions structure, and you must have
full understanding of them in order to get the most from the promotions fea-
tures. Promotions are defined in terms of categories, and depending on the
needs of the restaurant, it may be necessary to create special non-sales/non-
retail categories just for use in promotions. For example, a rib dinner normally
sells for $8.99, but using a coupon, a discount of $2.00 can be applied. Items
can only belong to one sales category, and if the rib dinner is already included
in a sales category, it is recommended that a non-sales category that includes
only the rib dinner be created. Select this category when setting up the promo-
tion, therefore, limiting the promotion to only the rib dinner.

Select Maintenance > Payments > Promotions to display the Promotions func-
tion tab, shown in Figure 6-9:
Figure 6-9 Promotions
Number — Holds a five-digit number that together with 'Name' uniquely

identifies each promotion record. To create a new record, enter an unused pro-
motion ID and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the ID
The Promotions function tab provides the following subtabs: Promotions,

Taxes, and Restrictions.
Promotions Subtab
The Promotions subtab enables you to define the dates of the promotion and
the type of the promotion. Individual promotion dialog boxes are accessed
from this subtab through the Type Specifics button. Select the Promotions
subtab from the Promotion Maintenance function tab to edit and enter infor-
mation.
Name — Enter a unique name to identify the record.

Type — Select one of six predefined promotion types from the drop-down
Maintenance
Payments
list. The six types of promotions are as follows:
• BOGO — (Buy one get one free) The customer buys an eligible
item and receives another item at a discount or free of charge.
• Combo — Combines menu items and assigns a special price.
• Coupon — Assigns coupon characteristics to a promotion and
defines a coupon.
• New Price — Assigns a special promotional price to a menu item
without affecting prices elsewhere in the Aloha menu system.
• Check Reduction — Permits a simple check reduction with
either percentage or dollar amount discounts.
• Quick Combo — Enables a combination of items to be grouped
together for a special price.
Type Specifics Button
Click Type Specifics to select a promotion type from the drop-down list. Each
type of promotion displays a dialog box specific to the selected type. For
example, if the BOGO promotion type is selected from the 'Type' drop-down
list, the BOGO promotion dialog box displays. For more information about
each of the promotion types available, refer to the Promotion Types section in
this chapter.
Start Date — Enter the day the promotion begins in the mm/dd/yyyy format.
It is not necessary to use the four-digit year; the last two digits are sufficient.
End Date — Enter the last valid day of the promotion in the mm/dd/yyyy for-
mat. It is not necessary to use the four-digit year; the last two digits are suffi-
cient.
Max Amount — Defines the maximum amount of discount allowable per

check.
Position — Determines the placement of the defined promotion type on the

order entry terminals.

Position Button
Click Position to access the Button Position dialog box (Figure 6-10). Here
you can assign the promotion a button position. There are 192 available but-
ton positions with 24 button positions displaying on each page. Click Page
Up/Page Down to scroll for more button positions.
Figure 6-10 Promotions Button Positions
Click the desired position in which to place the promotion you are defining.
Buttons already assigned a position are shown as unavailable.
To change a button's position, select the promotion and click Position. The
selected promotion is available on the Button Position dialog box. Click the
desired position. Click OK to accept the placement and return to the Promo-
tions function tab.
First Available Button — Assigns the promotion to the first button avail-
able. This check box is helpful if Centralized Database Management is in use.
When a new promotion is sent from the corporate office and the store location
makes it active, if 'First Available Position' is selected, the system determines
the button position to use for the new promotion.

Report as — Enables you to combine promotions together for reporting pur-
Maintenance
Payments
poses. This contains a drop-down list of previously defined promotions.
To report a promotion as itself, save it, then access the promotion

and select it from the ‘Report As’ drop-down list.
Active — Activates the promotion. Promotions can also be triggered by the

Event Scheduler, overriding the check box setting.
Print Check — Prints a copy of the guest check when this promotion is used.
Manager Needed — Requires a manager to apply the promotion.
Amount Tippable — Indicates the promo amount is included in the tip out
when calculating tips.
Apply Gratuity — Enables the system to apply a gratuity to the selected pro-
motion.
Bar Code Range Values
Using bar codes with your promotions, specifically printed coupons, assists
you with the lookup of the promotion, therefore, allowing you to apply the
promotion to the guest check very quickly. Use bar code range values to
establish a valid range of SKU numbers for the promotion. For example, you
can set up a range of coupons with the same restrictions and reductions to
apply to the check. The coupon must have a SKU number and bar code label
and the lowest and highest values must have the same number of digits. When
scanning promotions with a bar code reader, the system reads the SKU num-
ber in Maintenance > Menu > Items first, then the promotion SKU number.
Lowest Value — Establishes the lowest number in a range to support a bar

code scan for the promotion.

Highest Value — Establishes the highest number in a range to support a bar
code scan for the promotion.
To use bar code scanners, access Maintenance > Terminals > Reader
and select ‘Use Bar Code Scanner’ for the terminal with the scanner.
Taxes Subtab
The taxes subtab defines the tax applied to the promotion. Select the Taxes
subtab from the Promotion function tab to edit and define taxes on the promo-
tion, as shown in Figure 6-11:
Figure 6-11 Promotions Taxes Subtab
Guest Pays Tax — Requires the guest to pay the tax on the promotion. If not
selected, the restaurant pays the tax.
Surcharge Promo Amount — Applies a surcharge to the promotion amount.

Select this check box only if using surcharges. Surcharges are defined and
activated in Maintenance > Menu > Surcharges.

Primary Taxes Inset
Maintenance
Payments
Tax Applied before Promotion — Applies the appropriate tax to the full
amount of the promotion. The tax is calculated on the original item price
before applying the promo.
Tax Food Cost — Uses the percentage defined in the 'Food Cost' text box to
apply a tax amount on the food cost in the promotion.
Food Cost — Defines a tax percentage (entered as a decimal), to use to calcu-

late an approximate food cost when the 'Tax Food Cost' check box is selected.
Tax ID — Accepts a number corresponding to a tax method previously

defined in Maintenance > Menu > Taxes. Some jurisdictions require the res-
taurant to pay the tax on all promotions. Thus, one way to track promotion tax
amounts is to create a special tax method called Promotions/Comps in Main-
tenance > Menu > Taxes, then enter that tax ID in the Tax ID text box.
Tax ID Button
Click Tax ID to display the Taxes function tab. Here you can edit existing tax
records or create new ones if the one you need is not there.
Secondary Taxes Inset
Tax Applied before Promotion — Applies a secondary tax to the promotion

amount. The tax is calculated on the original item price before applying the
promo.
Vendor Tax Inset
VTax Promo Amount — Applies the vendor tax to the full amount of the
promotion.
VTax Food Cost — Uses the percentage defined in the 'Food Cost' text box
to apply a vendor tax amount on the food cost in the promotion.


Restrictions Subtab
The Restrictions subtab defines the limitations on the promotion, governs how
comp items are handled with the promotion, and how other promotions affect
it. Select the Restrictions subtab (Figure 6-12) from the Promotions function
tab to define the limitations on the promotion.
Figure 6-12 Promotions Restrictions Subtab
Promo Restrictions Inset
Promo Items Eligible — Eligible items already defined as promotions are

eligible for inclusion in the promotion being defined.
Allow Prior for Check — Allows multiple promotions on the same guest
check.
Allow Prior for Table — Allows multiple promotions for the same table.
Allow Subseq for Check — Allows subsequent promotions on the check to

be eligible for the defined promotion.

Allow Subseq for Table — Allows subsequent promotions for a table to be
Maintenance
Payments
eligible for the defined promotion.
Comp Restrictions Inset
Comp Items Eligible — Allows comp items to be eligible for the defined
promotion. If comp items are not permitted, this check box should not be
selected.
Allow Prior for Check — Allows multiple comps on the same guest check.
Allow Prior for Table — Allows multiple comps at the same table.
Allow Subseq for Check — Allows subsequent comps on the check.
Allow Subseq for Table — Allows subsequent comps for a table.
Max per Check — Defines the maximum allowable number of the defined
promotions permitted on each guest check. Attempts to apply more promo-
tions than the number specified in 'Max Per Check' result in a warning mes-
sage on the order entry terminal. This must be at least 1.
Max per Table — Defines the maximum allowable number of the defined
promotions permitted per table. Attempts to apply more promotions than the
number specified in 'Max Per Table' result in a warning message on the order
entry terminal. This must be at least 1. Should be the same as 'Max Per Check'
unless split checks are being used.

Promotion Types
The Promotions subtab defines the nature of each promotion. The promotion
itself is defined in a secondary dialog box that displays when you click Type
Specifics. Each secondary dialog box is specific for each of the different types
of promotions built into the Aloha system.
When setting up a promotion, do not include revenue items for dis-

counting. When you attempt to apply a promotion to a revenue item,
the FOH error message, ‘Comps and Promos cannot be applied to a
Revenue Item,’ displays.
Buy One Get One (BOGO)

The BOGO promotion type is a buy one get one of equal or lesser value,
either free or at a discounted price. Chargeable modifiers are included in the
calculated cost when determining the lower priced item. For example, buy
two large sandwiches at regular price, and receive a small sandwich at the dis-

counted price of $0.99. Cheese and bacon are the only charged modifiers
Maintenance
Payments
allowed in the discounted price, as shown in Figure 6-13:
Figure 6-13 BOGO Promotion
Required # — Specifies the required number of items that must be purchased

from the category specified in 'of BOGO Items' before the promotion can be
applied.
of BOGO Items — Specifies the category in which items must be purchased

for the promotion.
Allow Discount Items — Specifies the category from which a discounted

item may be selected.
BOGO Modifiers — Specify a category from which chargeable modifiers

are free when the BOGO is applied.
BOGO Pricing Method Inset
Free — Indicates the second item is sold at no price.
$ — Indicates the second item is sold at a discounted fixed price.

% — Indicates the second item is sold at a discounted fixed percentage of its
original price.
Apply to All Eligible Items on Check — Applies the promotion to all eligi-
ble items on the check. Disables 'Max Per Check' and 'Max Per Table'.
Auto Apply — The FOH automatically applies the BOGO to all eligible
items on the check. The Select items prompt does not display. This option dis-
ables 'Max Per Check' and 'Max Per Table'.
Combo
The COMBO promotion type screen (Figure 6-14) combines items from up to
10 categories and assigns a special reduced price to them.
Figure 6-14 Combo Promotion
For example, if the individual price for the sandwich category is $2.99, the
sides category $1.99, and the drink category is $1.29, the order total would be
$6.27. A combo could be created that allows the customer to order an item
from each of these categories for a special reduced price of $5.00. Upon clos-
ing the check, the server selects the Combo button, and the system automati-
cally verifies the presence of qualifying menu items on the guest check and
applies the combo price.

Combo Check Name — Enter the name of the combo to display on the guest
Maintenance
Payments
check.
Price — Sets the reduced special price of the combo.
Free Modifiers — Specify a category from which chargeable modifiers are

free when the combo is applied.
Category — Up to 10 categories can be included in the combo promotion.

Select a category from the drop-down list.
Min — Determines the minimum number of items that can be ordered from
the selected category.
Max — Determines the maximum number of items that can be ordered from
the selected category. There is no additional charge for the items over the min-
imum limit.
Coupon
The Coupon promotion type (Figure 6-15) enables a percentage or fixed dol-
lar coupon discount to be applied to a specific category. Restrictions may be
established, such as two items must be purchased from a specific category to
receive a discount, or the coupon can be applied to only one qualifying item
per guest check.
Figure 6-15 Coupon Promotion

Type of Discount Inset
Percentage — Specifies the coupon discount is a percentage.
Dollar Amount — Specifies the coupon discount is a fixed dollar amount.
Amount — Treats the value as a percentage for percentage coupons, and as a

dollar amount for dollar amount coupons. Percentages are entered as deci-
mals, such as .50 for 50%. 100% (free) is entered as 1.00. Specify the percent-
age or fixed dollar amount in the text box. A dollar amount entered here
establishes a maximum amount, to prevent the discount from exceeding a cer-
tain amount. For example, if a customer purchases two entrees, they may
receive a dessert free. However, if the amount specified is $3.00, the customer
must pay the difference if the price of the dessert is more than $3.00.
Application Inset
User selects each qualified item — Requires the person entering the cus-
tomer order to select the items that qualify for the promotion.
System selects all qualified items. — Causes the system to select items from
the order that qualify for the promotion.
Distribution Inset
Distribute discount across items — Distributes the discount across each

item that qualifies for the discount. The system prompts you to select qualify-
ing items. Only items specified in ‘Req’d Items’ display for selection. Two
items that qualify for a $1.00 discount would each be discounted by 50¢.
Apply discount to each item — Applies the discount to each item that quali-
fies for the discount. The system prompts you to select qualifying items. Only
items specified in ‘Req’d Items’ display for selection. Two items that qualify
for a $1.00 discount would each be discounted $1.00.
General Settings
Items Available — Select a category of eligible menu items for the discount.
Any category previously defined in Maintenance > Menu > Categories can be
selected.

COUPON Modifiers — Specify a category from which chargeable modifiers
Maintenance
Payments
are free when the coupon is applied.
Req'd Items —Specifies the category in which a purchase must be made in

order to qualify for the discount. The quantity that must be purchased is deter-
mined by the value entered in 'Minimum Items Req'd'.
Minimum Items Req'd — Used to set up promotions that require the pur-
chase of an item from a particular category to receive a discount on an item
from either another category or the same category. This text box specifies the
number of items that must be purchased from the 'Req'd Items' category.
Item Limit — When the 'Discount Off Selected Items Only' check box is
selected, this determines the maximum number of eligible items that can be
selected at any one time from the Select items prompt when applying the pro-
motion. If more items are selected than the number specified here, an error
message displays.
If Item Limit is set to zero, the FOH automatically applies the discount to all
eligible items on the check, therefore, the ‘Select items’ prompt does not dis-
play. If the number of eligible items on the guest check is less than the item
limit, the FOH automatically applies the coupon. If it is more, the items must
be chosen from the ‘Select items’ prompt.
If ‘Item Limit’ is set to zero or the number of eligible items on the

check is less than the item limit, the system automatically selects
the items for you when this combo is applied on the FOH terminal.
If the selection dialog should be displayed instead, enter an item
limit of 1, and enter more than one item on the check.
For example, the promotion states buy any entree for 10% off. If the guest
check has three entrees for $10.00 each, the discount is calculated based on
10% of $30.00 and a $3.00 discount is applied to the check.
If the promotion states buy one entree and get $2.00 off, and the guest check
has three entrees for $10.00 each, the discount is applied to each entree indi-
vidually, creating three entries on the guest check for $2.00 each. However, if
'Max Per Check' is set to 2, the discount can be applied to 2 entrees only for a
maximum discount of $4.00.

New Price
The New Price promotion (Figure 6-16) assigns a special promotional price to
menu items without affecting prices elsewhere in the system. For example, an
entree that normally sells for $12.50 can be purchased for $9.50 with the New
Price promotion. This type of promotion is different in that in sets the price
for the item as opposed to calculating a new price based on a percentage or
dollar amount discount. It is also different in that the item(s) eligible for dis-
count are specified instead of allowing the discount to be applied to any item
in a particular category.
Restrictions can be placed on the promotion. For example, the customer may
have to purchase two entrees to receive a dessert that normally sells for $5.50
at a discounted price of $4.00.
Figure 6-16 New Price Promotion
Minimum Required — Used in conjunction with 'Required Items' to set up

New Price promotions requiring the purchase of an item from a particular cat-
egory to receive a discounted price on the item(s) specified in 'Item'. This
check box specifies the number of items that must be purchased from the
'Required Items' category.

Maximum Allowed — Sets the number of promo types that can be applied
Maintenance
Payments
to the same guest check. For example, if this is set to 1, only the New Price
promotion can be applied to the guest check. No other promotion, such as buy
an entree, get a dessert free, can be applied to the same guest check.
Required Items — Specifies the category in which a purchase must be made

in order to qualify for the item discount. The quantity that must be purchased
is determined by the value entered in 'Minimum Required'.
Free Modifiers — Specify a category from which chargeable modifiers are

free when the New Price Promotion is applied.
Item — Select up to 10 individual menu items from the Items database file
for each New Price promotion.
New Price — Enter the price to use for the item when the promotion is
applied to a guest check.
Auto Apply — The FOH automatically applies the New Price promotion to
all eligible items on the check. The Select items prompt does not display. This
option disables 'Max Per Check' and 'Max Per Table'.
Check Reduction
The Check Reduction promotion permits a guest check to be discounted either
by a percentage or a dollar amount. Restrictions, such as a minimum amount
for the guest check, can be placed on the promotion. For example, the guest
check total must be at least $50.00 for the customer to receive a 10% discount.
The discount can also be restricted to items from a particular category, or it

can apply to all items on the guest check. An example of a check reduction
promo is shown in Figure 6-17:
Figure 6-17 Check Reduction Promotion
Check Minimum — Specifies the minimum amount for the guest check
before the Check Reduction promotion can be applied. If 'Qualify' is selected,
a 'Qualifying Items' category must be selected and 'Check Minimum' pertains
to the total value of the items ordered from that category. This total must be
greater than the amount specified in 'Check Minimum' before the promotion
can be applied to items purchased from the category specified in 'Items'.
Items — Specifies the category containing the items that are discounted when
the promotion is applied.
Qualify — Works in conjunction with the ‘Qualifying Items’ category and

the ‘Check Minimum’ text box to place a restriction on the promotion. If the
item total is less than the minimum amount, the promotion cannot be applied.
Qualifying Items — Works in conjunction with the ‘Qualify’ check box and
specifies the category to include or exclude when determining if the promo-
tion is valid.

Use the following table to achieve the desired results:
Maintenance
Payments
Qualify Qualifying Items Result
Selected Selected Category Compares the amount specified in ‘Check
Minimum’ to the total amount of all ordered
items in the ‘Qualifying Items’ category to
determine if you can apply the promotion.
Cleared Selected Category Compares the amount specified in 'Check Min-
imum' to the total amount of all ordered items
not in the 'Qualifying Items' category to deter-
mine if you can apply the promotion
Reduce by Inset
Percentage — Reduces the check by a percentage. Enter the percentage in

the 'Amount' text box.
Do not select ‘Percentage’ if the guest check should be reduced by

a fixed dollar amount.
Amount — Treats the value as a percentage for percentage coupons, and as a

dollar amount for fixed value coupons. Percentages are entered as decimals,
such as .50 for 50%. 100% (free) is entered as 1.00.
Quick Combo
The Quick Combo promotion type (Figure 6-18) requires a combination of
items to be grouped together for a special price. Up to ten items can be com-

bined. For instance, a burger, an order of fries, and a drink may be combined
and assigned a discounted price.
Figure 6-18 Quick Combo Promotion
Name — Enter a descriptive name for the promotion.
Price — Enter the price of the quick combo. This must be lower than the total
of each item included in the quick combo if it were priced separately.
Auto Apply if Possible? — The FOH automatically applies the Quick

Combo promotion to all eligible items on the check. The Select items prompt
does not display. This option disables 'Max Per Check' and 'Max Per Table'.
Group Delete? — Deletes the individual items from the check and only
shows the order as a combo.
Only Print Combo Name on Guest check? — Causes the system to print
the name of the combo on the guest check without summarizing the items
contained in the combo.
Consolidate Like Components? — Causes the system to list multiple

instances of items together on the guest check.

# Required Components (2 - 10) — Enter the required number of compo-
Maintenance
Payments
nents that must be purchased for the Quick Combo to take effect.
Select — Select the component and enter its requirements in the Component
Inset.
For example, select Component #2 and then define the information specific to
that component, such as the category from which the item can be selected or
the particular item(s), as well as the minimum and maximum purchase quanti-
ties, and whether the customer should be charged separately for the item.
Component Name — Enter a name to assign to the component, such as

Sandwich, Side, or Drink.
Component Info Inset
Category — Limits this component to an item from a specific category. If

this is selected, do not specify items in the Other Items inset.
Minimum — Specifies the minimum quantity of this component that must be

purchased.
Maximum — Specifies the maximum quantity of this component that can be

purchased. There is no additional charge for the items over the minimum
limit.
Price separately? — Charges the regular price for the item and shows it on
the guest check. If this is selected, 'Combine Price' becomes active.
Combine Price — If 'Price Separately' is selected, the item is charged at its

regular price but is combined with the promotion price instead of printing it
on a separate line.
Other Items Inset
Used to specify particular items in the combo as opposed to letting the cus-
tomer pick any item from a specific category. Up to 10 items can be selected.

Comps
Comps is an extensive feature that allows the definition and configuration of a
wide array of comps for use in the Aloha system. Comps are created using the
dialog boxes in conjunction with the categories defined in Maintenance >
Menu > Categories.
Categories are an important part of comps. A full understanding of categories

is important in order to get the most from the Comps feature. Comps are often
defined in terms of a category, and depending on the needs of the restaurant, it
may be necessary to create special non-sales/non-retail categories just for use
in comps.
When setting up a comp, do not include revenue items for discount-

ing. When you attempt to apply a comp to a revenue item, the FOH
error message, ‘Comps and Promos cannot be applied to a Revenue
Item,’ displays.

Select Maintenance > Payments > Comps to display the Comps function tab,
Maintenance
Payments
Figure 6-19 Comps Maintenance
Number — Holds a three-digit number that together with 'Name' identifies

each comp. To create a new comp, enter an unused number and press Enter.
To edit an existing record, scroll through the Number drop-down list, select
the comp to edit and press Enter.
The Comps function tab provides the following subtabs: Comps, Taxes, and
Restrictions.
Comps Subtab
The Comps subtab allows you to define the name, button position, and the
items eligible for comps. Select the Comps subtab from the Comp function
tab to edit or enter a comp.
Name — Enter a descriptive name to identify the comp.
Check — Descriptive name that prints on the guest check when the comp is
used.

Percent Off — Sets the percentage to be discounted when he comp is
applied. Type the percentage and press Enter. For example, to set this to 50%,
type 50 and press Enter. It is converted to decimals for you (50.0000). If the
comp is a dollar amount, set this to zero.
Maximum $ — Establishes a maximum dollar amount that can be dis-

counted. If 'Must Enter Amount' is not selected, the item(s) to comp must be
selected when the comp is applied. Neither the item total or the entered
amount can be more than the amount specified here. For example, if the comp
is defined as 100% but 'Maximum $' is set to $5.00, the customer is responsi-
ble for the balance if the item total is more than $5.00.
Dollar amount comps cannot be set as a fixed amount. Select ‘Must

Enter Amount’ and the FOH prompts for the amount when the
comp is applied.
Eligible Items — Select a category for the comp from the drop-down list.
The categories are created in Maintenance > Menu > Categories. This can be
any of the standard categories, such as Sales or Retail, or any Non-Sales/Non-
Retail Category created specifically for comp purposes.
Eligible Items Button
Click Eligible Items to access the Categories function tab. Here you can per-
form maintenance on existing categories, including add new categories if a
new category is needed.
Position — Determines the placement of the defined comp type on the order
entry terminal screens.
Position Button
Click Position to access the Comps Button Position dialog box (Figure 6-20).
Here you can assign the comp a button position. There are 192 available but-

ton positions with 24 button positions displaying on each page. Click Page
Maintenance
Payments
Up/Page Down to scroll for more button positions.
Figure 6-20 Comps Button Position
Click the desired position in which to place the comp you are defining. But-
tons already assigned a position are shown as unavailable.
To change a button's position, select the comp and click Position. The selected
comp is available on the Button Position dialog box. Click the desired posi-
tion. Click OK to accept the placement and return to the Comp function tab.
First Available — Assigns the comp to the first button available. This check
box is helpful if Centralized Database Management is in use. When a new
comp is sent from the corporate office and the store location makes it active, if
'First Available Position' is selected, the system determines the button position
to use for the new comp.
Report as — Enables you to combine comps together for reporting purposes.

This contains a drop-down list of previously defined comps.
To report a comp as itself, save it, then access the comp and select
it from the ‘Report as’ drop-down list.
Active — Makes the comp active. Comps can also be triggered by

the Event Scheduler. Refer to Events for more information on how
to schedule events.

Print Check — Prints a copy of the guest check when the check is closed.
Open Drawer — Enables the cash drawer to open when the comp is applied.
Manager Needed — Requires a manager to apply the comp.
Amount Tippable — Indicates the comp amount is included in the tip out
when calculating tips.
Apply Gratuity — Enables the system to apply a gratuity to the selected

comp.
Must Select Items — Requires menu items be explicitly selected to apply

the comp on order entry terminals.
Must Enter Unit — Prompts for a unit number at the order entry terminals.
This is useful for multi-store operations which accept employee comps from
other locations.
Must Enter Name — Prompts for a name at the order entry terminal. This is
often used to track who is receiving employee comps.
Use Mag Card Only — Requires an employee receiving a comp to use his or
her mag card instead of entering the number manually. You must select ‘Must
Use Name’ to enable this setting.
Must Enter Amount — Prompts for the comp amount at the order entry ter-
minal. Used for non-percentage comps.
The system does not allow you to save a comp unless a rate is
entered, or ‘Must Enter Amount’ or ‘Must Enter Percent’ is
selected.
Must Enter Percent — Used to set up a comp where the FOH prompts for a
percentage to enter instead of the comp being a fixed percent.

Taxes Subtab
Maintenance
Payments
The taxes subtab defines the Primary Taxes, Secondary Taxes, and Vendor
Taxes. These tax types and amounts must first be defined in Maintenance >
Menu > Taxes, and applied to the menu items in Maintenance > Menu > Items
contained in the target category for the comp. Select the Taxes subtab from
the Comp function tab to edit and define the taxes on a compshown in Figure
6-21:
Figure 6-21 Taxes Subtab
Guest Pays Tax — Requires the guest to pay the tax on the comp. If not
selected, the restaurant pays the tax.
Surcharge Comp Amount — Applies a surcharge to the comp amount.

Select this check box only if using surcharges. Surcharges are defined and
activated in Maintenance > Menu > Surcharges.
Primary Taxes Inset
Tax Comp Amount — Applies the appropriate tax to the full amount of the
comp.

Tax Food Cost — Uses the percentage defined in the 'Food Cost' text box to
apply a tax amount on the food cost in the comp.

Tax ID — Accepts a number corresponding to a tax method previously

defined in Maintenance > Menu > Taxes. Some jurisdictions require the res-
taurant to pay the tax on all comps. Thus, one way to track comp tax amounts
is to create a special tax method called Promotions/Comps, then enter that tax
ID in the Tax ID text box.
Tax ID Button
Click Tax ID to display the Taxes function tab. Here you can edit existing
taxes or create new taxing records, as required.
Secondary Taxes Inset
Tax Comp Amount — Applies a secondary tax to the amount of the comp.
Vendor Tax Inset
Tax Comp Amount — Applies the vendor tax to the full amount of the
comp.
Tax Food Cost — Uses the percentage defined in the Food Cost text box to
apply a vendor tax amount to a calculated food cost only.

late an approximate food cost when the 'VTax Food Cost' check box is
selected.

Restrictions Subtab
Maintenance
Payments
The Restrictions subtab defines the limitations on the comp. Select the
Restrictions subtab (Figure 6-22) from the Comps function tab to define the
limitations.
Figure 6-22 Comp Restrictions
Promo Restrictions Inset
Promo Items Eligible — Eligible items already defined as promotions are

eligible for inclusion in the promotion being defined.
Allow Prior for Check — Allows multiple promotions on the same guest
check.
Allow Prior for Table — Allows multiple promotions for same table.
Allow Subseq for Check — Allows subsequent promotions on the check to

be eligible for the defined promotion.

Allow Subseq for Table — Allows subsequent promotions for a table to be
eligible for the defined promotion.
Comp Restrictions Inset
Comp Items Eligible — Allows comp items to be eligible for the defined
promotion.
Allow Prior for Check — Allows multiple comps on the same guest check.
Allow Prior for Table — Allows multiple comps at the same table.
Allow Subseq for Check — Allows subsequent comps on the check for the
defined promotion.
Allow Subseq for Table — Allows subsequent comps for a table for the
defined promotion.
Max per Check — Defines the maximum allowable number of the defined
promotions permitted on each guest check. Attempts to apply more promo-
tions than the number specified in 'Max Per Check' result in a warning mes-
sage on the order entry terminal. This must be at least 1.
Max per Table — Defines the maximum allowable number of the defined
promotions permitted per table. Attempts to apply more promotions than the
number specified in 'Max Per Table' result in a warning message on the order
entry terminal. This must be at least 1. Should be the same as 'Max Per Check'
unless split checks are being used.

House Accounts
Maintenance
Payments
The Aloha system enables the definition of house accounts and treats them as
accounts receivable within the system, when coupled with a correctly defined
house account tender type in Maintenance > Payments > Tenders.
Select Maintenance > Payments > House Accounts to display the House
Account function tabshown in Figure 6-23:
Figure 6-23 House Accounts
Account # — Holds a five-digit number that together with 'Name' uniquely

identifies each house account. To create a new record, enter an unused
account ID and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the
Account # drop-down list and select the record to edit.
Account Name — Enter a name to uniquely identify the account number.
Inactive — Deactivates the account.
When a house account payment is tendered on the FOH, the system asks for
the account. The account number entered must match either the account num-
ber or account name of a valid house account or the payment is rejected.

Name and Address Insets
The House Account function tab contains insets for entering standard name
and address information, with an additional text box for a telephone number.
Unlike most other database files within the Aloha system, the House Account
file does not depend on other files within the system, thus there are no drop-
down selection lists in the dialog box.
Type information into the text boxes in the insets in accordance with the poli-
cies of your company. Click Save when finished.

Gift Certificates
Maintenance
Payments
The Basic Gift Certificates feature is internal to the Aloha system, and is a
very simple method in which you can offer gift certificates at your restaurant.
Basic Gift Certificates require you to use the Gift Certificates function to set
up your gift certificate items. The items created here are appended to the bot-
tom of the Items file used by the Item Maintenance function. You establish the
characteristics of the gift certificate, and set up links between other database
files in the Aloha menu system. The Aloha system reserves item ID numbers
between 30200 to 30299 for Basic Gift Certificate items, and you must use
these numbers when setting up the gift certificate items.
Refer to the Aloha
Gift Certificate
The system does not display the ‘Gift Certificates’ selection on the Manager User’s Guide for
information on how to set up
Payments menu, if ‘Enable Back Office Gift Certificates’ is enabled gift certificates for use with
in Maintenance > Store Settings > Gift Certificate. this product. Refer to the
Aloha Special Features Guides
for information on how to set
Select Maintenance > Payments > Gift Certificates to display the Gift Certifi- up gift cards.
cates function tab, as shown in Figure 6-24:
Figure 6-24 Gift Certificates

ID — Holds a five-digit number that together with 'Name' uniquely identifies
each gift certificate record. To create a new record, enter an unused number
and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the ID drop-down
list, select the record to edit and press Enter. The system requires the ID num-
bers range from 30200 to 30299.
Basic Gift Certificates requires certain numbers be used when set-

ting up the item. In fact, if you try to use a number between in 30200
and 30299 in Item Maintenance, you receive an error stating these
numbers are reserved for Basic Gift Certificates. When using Aloha
Gift Certificate Manager, there are no restrictions for item number
ranges, and you use Item Maintenance, not Gift Certificates to set up
your gift certificate items.
Name — Enter a descriptive name for the gift certificate.
Category — Sets the sales category to be associated with the current gift cer-
tificate.
Active — Designates whether the defined gift certificate record is an active

record available for sale.
Tracking — Enables the tracking of gift certificates created by the defined

record.
Assign Amount — Automatically assigns the value, if any, entered in the

'Amount' text box as the face value of the gift certificate. If not selected, the
face amount is entered from an order entry terminal.
Amount — The face amount of each certificate contained in the defined

record, and is used if the 'Assign Amount' check box is selected.
Tax ID — Specifies the Tax ID to use on the gift certificate.
VTax ID — Specifies the vendor tax to use on the gift certificate.
Tax 2 ID — Specifies an alternate Tax ID to use on the gift certificate.

Valid Ranges — Contains the numeric range of valid gift certificates. Several
Maintenance
Payments
ranges may be defined at one time.

Foreign Currencies
The Foreign Currencies function is used to set up foreign currencies as a
method of payment at a restaurant location. Using this feature, when the FOH
presses the corresponding tender button for the foreign currency, the exchange
rate is converted and displayed on screen. Using the numeric keypad, the
server enters the amount received from the customer and presses OK. The
amount is converted to the local currency equivalent. The name of the foreign
currency, its exchange rate, the amount tendered, and the corresponding
amount in local currency displays on the guest check. If the amount entered
does not equal the amount of the check, the change amount or balance due
amount also displays (in local currency).
Select Maintenance > Labor > Foreign Currencies to display the Foreign Cur-
rency function tabshown in Figure 6-25:
Figure 6-25 Foreign Currency

Foreign payment displays on guest checks, pole displays, and other peripheral
Maintenance
Payments
devices that display foreign payment, as follows:
Name Exchange Rate Foreign Amount Local Equivalent

Pound 1.65 £ 8.00 $4.85
Currency ID — Holds a five-digit number that together with 'Name'

uniquely identifies each foreign currency record. To create a new record, enter
an unused number and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through
the Currency ID field drop-down list, select the record to edit and press Enter.
Name — Enter a descriptive name to match the Currency ID field.
Symbol — Represents the symbol that displays on the FOH when the corre-
sponding tender is selected. Sometimes it is necessary to cut and paste the
symbol from another application such as the Character Map located in Win-
dows.
Decimal Places — Designates the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point. Although two is the standard for North America, many nations require
three digits to the right of the decimal.
Decimal Separator — Separates whole values from fractional values. If cus-

tom dictates that the separator is a comma, enter a comma in this field.
Thousands Separator — Accepts the customary character that is used to

separate numbers in thousands. North American custom is to use a comma as
the thousands separator, however, European custom is to use a period. Refer
to Maintenance > Payments > Tenders for information on setting up tender
types and tender buttons for foreign currencies.
Display in Balance Due Section — Forces the foreign currency to always be

displayed along with the local currency on the Balance Due screen in the
FOH.
Display in Change Due Section — Displays the foreign currency along with
the local currency on the Change Due screen in the FOH. If the 'Display in
Change Due Section' check box is not selected for a particular currency, that
currency still displays change due when it has a payment on a guest check.

Positive Format — Select the format used to display currency in positive
numbers. For example, using the format '00 $1.1', all currency with a value of
one or greater displays as a positive number, followed by a decimal (or deci-
mals).
Negative Format — Selects the format used to display currency in negative

numbers. For example, using the format '01- $1.1', all currency with a value
less than zero displays as a negative number, followed by a decimal (or deci-
mals).
Exchange Rate Inset
Exchange Rate — Determines the multiplier used to convert between the

local currency and the foreign currency (Exchange Rate) and should be moni-
tored regularly. It is very important to understand the direction of the currency
exchange when entering the rate in this box because the inverse of that rate is
the exchange in the opposite direction.
To ensure the correct 'direction', ask yourself which currency has a greater
value, then use this logic: If the foreign currency has a higher value than the
local currency, then the exchange rate must be greater than 1.00. If the foreign
currency has a lower value than the local currency, then the exchange rate
must be less than 1.00.
Update Now — Immediately updates the FOH with information for existing
currencies. However, new currencies are not updated in the FOH until exiting
the Maintenance program and performing a real time update, or during a Sys-
tem Refresh.
Prefix — Specifies the characters to precede the exchange rate on checks.
Suffix — Specifies the characters to follow the exchange rate on checks.
Payment Display Inset
Prefix — Specifies the characters to precede a payment on checks.
Suffix — Specifies the characters to follow a payment on checks.

System Maintenance
Functions
This chapter discusses the features available in the Aloha system that
relate to adding and creating events, order modes, revenue centers,
and tables, and defining void reasons, no sale reasons and petty cash
accounts.
Events............................................................................................... 7-5
Button Functions............................................................................ 7-6
Add New Events ............................................................................ 7-7
Required Fields............................................................................... 7-40
Order Modes................................................................................... 7-41
Order Entry Queues........................................................................ 7-50
Revenue Centers............................................................................ 7-51
Day Parts ........................................................................................ 7-57
Concepts......................................................................................... 7-59
Tables ............................................................................................. 7-61
Void Reasons ................................................................................. 7-63
No Sale Reasons............................................................................ 7-66
Petty Accounts................................................................................ 7-68
Customizing Your FOH Screens..................................................... 7-70
Working with Tables Screen (Floor Plan) .................................... 7-70
Floor Plan Features ..................................................................... 7-72
Order Entry Screen...................................................................... 7-82
Panel Editor Tools ....................................................................... 7-83
Panels.......................................................................................... 7-89
Single Buttons............................................................................ 7-108
Group Buttons............................................................................ 7-119
Button Functions........................................................................ 7-133
Screen Editor ............................................................................. 7-153
Surveys......................................................................................... 7-157
Chapter
7
7 – 2 System Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3
The features available on the System menu provide considerable control over
the configuration of the restaurant. Many functions relevant to the order pro-
cess, the organization of the business day, and the grouping of income sources
for report purposes are available on the System menu. You can define petty
accounts and reasons for voided sales and no-sale activities using commands
on the System menu, as well as develop a Floor Plan screen for your restau-
rant using the Panel Editor and Screen Editor commands.
Select Maintenance > System to access the System menu options, as shown in
Maintenance
Figure 7-1:
System
Figure 7-1 System Menu
• Add and configure Events, a powerful tool used to automatically acti-

vate menus, reroute printers, activate messages on order entry termi-
nals, activate comps and promos, and many other activities necessary
for a restaurant operation.
• Define required fields for data entry, such as for Employee mainte-
nance.
• Define required order modes, such as To Go, Dine In, etc.
• Define order entry queues.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 System Maintenance Functions 7–3

• Define the different revenue centers in the restaurant so that income
from the different areas can be summarized.
• Define day parts, which are used to divide the day into time blocks.
Day parts help to organize business data for reporting.
• Define concepts for multi-level organizations.
• Create tables and associate them with a revenue center.
• Establish void reasons that are used to define why an item is voided,
and whether or not the void affects inventory.
• Establish no sale reasons that are trapped in an audit report each time
a cash drawer is opened without the entry of a sale.
• Create petty cash accounts for tracking petty cash transactions.
• Create a customized Floor Plan screen using Panel Editor and Screen
Editor.
• Set up the Customer Survey feature which prints a code number, a
telephone number for the customer to call, and information about par-
ticipation in the survey.
7–4 System Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Events
Adding and configuring Events provides a powerful tool that permits the
automation of many of the event scheduling procedures that are normal for
restaurant operations. Configure Events to automatically activate menus,
reroute printers and remote display systems, activate messages, restrict order
modes by job codes, or many other activities that are set as 'Active' in the
database file record.
Maintenance
System
Select Maintenance > System > Events to display the System Events function
Figure 7-2 System Event Maintenance Function Tab

These events display in reverse order of their hierarchical relationship to the
system. Each item on the list overrides all similar items above it in the list. For
example, if two events are on the list that relate to price changes, the system
encounters the first one as it reads the list and makes it the active event. The
system reads the remainder of the list and finds the second event. If the second
event affects the same items, but differs with regard to scheduling from the
first event, the system makes the second event active when the scheduled time
is due for the second event.
It is also important to note that the system will not permit you to add a pair of
events in reverse order with regard to scheduling. For example, you may want
to add one event that sets the price of an item at all times, and another event
that sets the price differently for just a few hours during the day. If you add the
event scheduling the price for just a few hours, and then add the event that
establishes the price as it will be at all times, the two events display on the
event list in time order rather than the order in which they were added. This
apparent reversal of order is due to the hierarchy established by the scheduled
times for the two events.
Button Functions
You can add, edit, and delete events using button functions located on the side
of the function tab.
Add Event Button
Click Add to add a new event. It opens the Event Time and Type secondary
dialog box. After you select an event type and click OK, a secondary dialog
box opens that is specific to the type of event selected (except for EOD). In
most cases, the new dialog box prompts for data specific to the event type (see
Programmed Event Types). To add the event, click OK. To cancel the addi-
tion, click Cancel.
Edit Time Button
Click Edit Time to change the time of an event. It opens the Event Time and
Type secondary dialog box.

Edit Event Button
Click Edit Event to change the event. It opens a secondary dialog box specific
to each type of event in the system.
Delete Button
Click Delete to delete an event.
Done Button
Maintenance
System
Click Done to save all changes and close the Events subtab. Select after add-
ing a new event or editing an existing event.
Add New Events

Select Add Event in the Events function tab to open the Set Event Time &
Type dialog box, shown in Figure 7-3:
Figure 7-3 Set Event Time & Type
Event Type — Specifies the type of event. There are approximately 40 event
types available in the drop-down list. These are described in detail in the Pro-
grammed Event Types section in this chapter.

Time — Specifies the start time for the event. Enter the time in hours and
minutes using a 36-hour clock. When using a 36-hour clock, the date of busi-
ness is extended by 12 hours so that events are accounted for during the same
date of business. For example, assume the date of business is 01/01/98. After
midnight, the date of business remains 01/01/98, but the system date becomes
01/02/98. The date of business remains 01/01/98 until the End-of-Day proce-
dure runs, which is typically 4:00 a.m. the following day. To ensure the day's
information is posted to the corresponding date of business (01/01/98), the
EOD Event is set to run at 28:00 (Figure 7-3). A time after midnight is speci-
fied by adding 24 to the hour, therefore, 28:00 is the equivalent of 4:00 a.m.
the following day. When the EOD has completed successfully, the date of
business is changed and once again coincides with the system date.
The date is recognized by the FOH. If the FOH date and time is not
in sync with the BOH, events do not fire correctly.
There are four selections available in this dialog box that are exclusive to each
other; only one selection is permitted for a given event. These selections dis-
play in reverse order of their hierarchical relationship to the system. Each item
on the list overrides all items above it in the list.
Daily — Sets the event to happen every day at the specified time.
Weekly — Activates the Weekly drop-down list containing the days of the
week. Weekly events override daily events.
Monthly — Activates the Month text box, which accepts the day of the
month in which the event should be activated. Monthly events override
weekly and daily events.
Special — Enter the date in MM/DD/YY format. Special events override all
other timed events.
Other daily events can override a previous daily event. For example, on Mon-
day through Saturday, breakfast is fired at 8 A.M., lunch at 11 A.M., and din-
ner at 4 P.M.

Daily Events
1. 8 A.M.Breakfast
2. 11 A.M. Lunch
3. 4 P.M. Dinner
On Sunday, there is a brunch from 8 A.M. to 3:59 P.M. A weekly event needs
to be fired to override the weekly events, however, the daily event will still
fire on time because of the hierarchy. Select a weekly brunch event for Sun-
Maintenance
day, and schedule the event for the same time specified as the daily menu
System
change. Schedule another event to override the firing of the regular daily
event at 11 A.M.
Daily Sunday Brunch
1. 8 A.M. Brunch
2. 11 A.M. Brunch
3. 4 P.M. Dinner
If the second event was not added, the 8:00 A.M. Brunch event would fire, but
revert back to the daily 11:00 Lunch event. In the example given, the Brunch
event runs up to 3:59 P.M., then the regular Dinner event fires as usual.
When events fire for their scheduled time, they end when the End-of-Day
occurs and a new business day starts, thus reverting back to normal opera-
tions. If scheduled for daily, the event fires at the same time every day. If a
time is not specified for an event, the event is active at all times. If the event
activates a feature, another event can be scheduled to disable the feature.
Programmed Event Types

Event Types found in the System Event Maintenance subtab are defined as
part of the Aloha system and are not created by the user. The Event definitions
currently provided are:

(1) Set Server Menu
The Set Server Menu assigns a specific menu to employees assigned to a job
code with 'Order Entry' selected. Use this event to activate Happy Hour
menus, dinner menus, and more. Add the event, then define a time during
which the menu will apply. If no time is specified, the menu selected here will
be in effect at all times. Set Server Menu does not override the Set Menu
Group or Set Menu by Terminal/Job Code event types. The dialog box shown
in Figure 7-4 displays:
Figure 7-4 Set Server Menu
Menu — Select the menu to activate, as defined in Maintenance > Menu >
Menus.
(2) Set Bar Menu
The Set Bar Menu assigns a specific menu to employees assigned to a job
code with 'Bartender' selected. Use this event to activate Happy Hour menus.
Add the event, then define a time during which the menu will apply. If no time
is specified, the menu selected here will be in effect at all times. The dialog
box shown in Figure 7-5 displays:
Figure 7-5 Set Bar Menu

Menu — Select the menu to activate, as defined in Maintenance > Menu >
Menus.
(3) Set Tip Share
The Set Tip Share event modifies tip sharing, as activated on the Employee
Settings subtab located in Maintenance > Store Settings > Labor. The dialog
box prompts for a job group ID, a tip share percentage, and a day part, as
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-6 Set Tip Share
Job Group ID — Enter the Job Group ID as defined in Maintenance > Labor
> Job Codes.
Tip Share % — Enter the Tip Share to activate at the specified time. The per-
centage specified here overrides these settings. Job Group ID refers to the
Group text box as defined in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes.
Day Part — Select the day part, as defined in Maintenance > System > Day
Parts.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 System Maintenance Functions 7 – 11

(4) Activate Order Mode
The Activate Order Mode event activates and disables a specific order mode.
Use this event for times when an order mode is not available at a certain time
such as the dining area, and add an additional event to re-activate the order
mode. To disable an order mode, add the event and DO NOT select the
'Active' check box. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-7 displays:
Figure 7-7 Activate Order Modes
Order Mode — Specifies the Order Mode to activate or disable, as defined in

Maintenance > System > Order Modes.
Active — Activates the order mode when selected, or disables when cleared.
(5) Reroute Printer
The Reroute Printer event reroutes a printer to another printer. Use this event
for such things as moving item printing to another printer when a station is
closed down. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-8 displays:
Figure 7-8 Reroute Printer

From and To Printer — Select the printer rerouting from and the target
printer, as defined in Maintenance > Hardware > Printers.
(6) Reroute Printer Group
The Reroute Printer Group event reroutes a specific printer group to another
printer group. Use this event for such things as moving item printing normally
printed from one printer group, to another printer group when a station is
closed down.The dialog box shown in Figure 7-9 displays:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-9 Reroute Printer Group
From and To Printer Group — Select the printer group rerouting from and
the target printer group, as defined in Maintenance > Hardware > Printer
Groups.

(7) Set Menu Group
The Set Menu Group event assigns a specific menu to a job group. An addi-
tional dialog box prompts for a job group and a menu. The dialog box, shown
Figure 7-10 Set Menu Group
Job Group ID — Specifies the Job Group ID, as defined in the ‘Group ID’
text box in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes.
Menu — Specifies the menu to activate, as defined in Maintenance > Menu >
Menus. Add the event, then define a time during which the menu will apply. If
a time is not specified, the menu selected here will be in effect at all times.
(8) End of Day
The End of Day event schedules the End-of-Day procedure. Use this event to
start a new business day at a particular time. The time should be defined dur-
ing a slow time of operation, such as during the time when the establishment
is closed. The event is added to the schedule in the Event Time & Type dialog
box (Figure 7-3).
The Aloha system runs on a 36-hour clock. For example, to run End-
of-Day at 4 a.m., the event time needs to be set to 28:00.

(9) Reroute Tables
The Reroute Tables event reroutes printing by tables. The dialog box shown in
Figure 7-11 displays:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-11 Reroute Printing by Table
From and To Table — Select the table rerouting from to the target location,
as defined in Maintenance > System > Tables.
From and To Print Group — Select the corresponding printer group rerout-
ing from and the target location, as defined in Maintenance > Hardware >
Printer Groups.

(10) Reroute Print by Terminal
The Reroute Print by Terminal event reroutes printing for a specific terminal.
The dialog box shown in Figure 7-12 displays:
Figure 7-12 Reroute Print by Terminal
Terminal — Select the terminal associated with the printer group.
From and To Print Group — Select the printer group rerouted from and the
target printer group, as defined in Maintenance > Hardware > Printer Groups.

(11) Set Left Message
The Set Left Message event activates a message to display on the left side of
the log on screen of order entry terminals. Use this event to activate special
messages, such as holiday greetings, new specials, and more. The dialog box
shown in Figure 7-13 displays:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-13 Activate Left Message
ID — Specifies the message, as defined in Maintenance > Messages > Main

Screen, to display on the left side.
Message — Displays the message selected from the ID drop-down list. This
message cannot be edited in Events.

(12) Set Right Message
The Set Right Message event activates a message to display on the right side
of the log on screen of order entry terminals. Use this event to activate special
messages, such as holiday greetings, new specials, and more. The dialog box
Figure 7-14 Activate Right Message
ID — Specifies the message, as defined in Maintenance > Messages > Main

Screen, to display on the right side.

(13) Activate Promo
The Activate Promo event activates and disables a specific promotion. Use
this event when a promotion is not available at a certain time such as a Friday
night meal, and add an additional event to re-activate the promotion. To dis-
able a promotion, add the event and DO NOT select the 'Active' check box.
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-15 Activate Promo
Promo — Select the promo, as defined in Maintenance > Payments > Promo-
tions.
Button Pos — Enter the button position for the promo.
Active — Activates the promo when selected, or disables when cleared.

(14) Activate Comp
The Activate Comp event activates and disables a specific comp. Use this
event when a comp is not available at a certain time, and add an additional
event to re-activate the comp. To disable a comp, add the event and DO NOT
select the 'Active' check box. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-16 displays:
Figure 7-16 Activate Comp
Comp — Select the comp, as defined in Maintenance > Payments > Comps.
Button Pos — Enter the button position for the comp.
Active — Activates the comp when selected, or disables when cleared.

(15) Set Submenu Item
The Set Submenu Item event adds a menu item to an existing submenu for a
specific event only. Use this event for such things as access to items which are
available only on certain days of the week. The dialog box, shown in Figure
7-17 displays:
Refer to Chap-
ter 5, Menu
Maintenance Functions, for
more information about
Maintenance
button placement.
System
Figure 7-17 Set Submenu Item
Submenu — Specifies the submenu, as defined in Maintenance > Menu >

Submenus.
Position — Enter the button position for the item on the submenu. The button
position accepts values between 0 and 21. Set the item to display on an unused
button for best results.
Item to Set — Specifies the item, as defined in Maintenance > Menu > Items,
associated with the submenu.
Item Price — Enter the price of the item.

(16) Set Guest Check Message
The Set Guest Check Message event activates a guest check message. The
dialog box, shown in Figure 7-18 displays:
Figure 7-18 Set Guest Check Message
ID — Select the message, as defined in Maintenance > Messages > Main

Screen, to display on the guest check.
Message — Displays the message selected from the ‘ID’ drop-down list. This

(17) Set Modifier Item
The Set Modifier Item event adds an item to a modifier group. Use this event
for such things as displaying a modifier that is not available at certain times.
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-19 Set Modifier Group
Mod Group — Select the modifier group containing the item, as defined in
Maintenance > Menu > Modifiers.
Item to Set — Select the item to activate, as defined in Maintenance > Menu
> Items.
Position — Enter the button position for the modifier on the modifier group.
Price — Enter the price of the modifier.
Weight — Enter the selection weight of the modifier item.

(18) Set Cashier Menu
The Set Cashier Menu event assigns a menu to employees assigned to a job
code with 'Cashier' selected. Add the event, then define a time during which
the menu will apply. If no time is specified, the selected menu will be in effect
at all times. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-20 displays:
Figure 7-20 Set Cashier Menu
Menu — Specifies the menu, as defined in Maintenance > Menu > Menus.
(19) Reroute Video
The Reroute Video event activates rerouting for a video. The dialog box
Figure 7-21 Reroute Video
From and To Video — Select the remote display system routed from and the
target remote display system, as defined in Maintenance > Hardware > Video
Monitors.

(20) Reroute Video Group
The Reroute Video Group event activates rerouting for a video group. The
dialog box shown in Figure 7-22 displays:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-22 Reroute Video Group
From and To Video Group — Select the video group rerouted from and the
target video group, as defined in Maintenance > Hardware > Video Groups.
(21) Reroute Video by Table
The Reroute Video by Table event activates rerouting for a videos by table.
Figure 7-23 Reroute Video by Table
From and To Table — Select the table range for the rerouting, as defined in
Maintenance > System > Tables.

From and To Video Group — Select the video group rerouted from and the
(22) Reroute Video by Terminal
The Reroute Video by Terminal event activates rerouting videos by terminal.

Figure 7-24 Reroute Video by Terminal
Terminal — Select the terminal associated with the video group, as defined
in Maintenance > Hardware > Terminals.
From and To Video Groups — Select the video group rerouted from and the

(23) Set AutoMenu
The Set AutoMenu event schedules an AutoMenu to overwrite existing sub-

menus at the time specified. It is useful for environments that require daily
menu changes. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-25 displays:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-25 Set AutoMenu
AutoMenu — Specifies the AutoMenu, as defined in Maintenance > Menu >

AutoMenu
Submenu — Select the submenu, as defined in Maintenance > Menu > Sub-
menus.
(25) Set Price Change
The Set Price Change event schedules temporary price changes. The dialog
box shown in Figure 7-26 displays:
Figure 7-26 Set Price Change
Price Change — Select the price change, as defined in Maintenance > Menu
> Price Changes.

(26) Activate Tender
The Activate Tender event activates and disables a specific tender type. Use
this event for times such as when gift certificates are only accepted during the
evening hours, the tender can be activated at 5:00 p.m. each day. Add another
event to disable the tender. To disable a tender, add the event and DO NOT
select the 'Active' check box. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-27 displays:
Figure 7-27 Activate Tender
Tender — Select the tender, as defined in Maintenance > Payments > Tender.
Button Pos — Enter the button position for the tender.
Active — Activates the tender when selected, or disables when cleared.

(27) Set Pole Message
The Set Pole Message event activates messages which the ‘Display on Pole’
check box is not selected. It is possible to have an active message display at
the same time as a message that is activated using this event type. The mes-
sages alternate on the pole display. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-28 dis-
plays:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-28 Set Pole Message
ID — Select the message set up for pole display, as defined in Maintenance >
Messages > Main Screen.

(28) Disable Void Reason
The Disable Void Reason event disables a void reason. The dialog box shown
Figure 7-29 Disable Void Reason
Void — Select the void reason, as defined in Maintenance > System > Void
Reasons.
(29) Disable Table Range
The Disable Table Range event deactivates a specified range of tables for a
defined period of time. Use this event when a certain area of the restaurant is
closed. This feature prevents a server from entering an order for a table in the
closed area. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-30 displays:
Figure 7-30 Disable Table Range
From and Thru — Select the starting and ending range of tables, as defined
in Maintenance > System > Tables.

(30) Disable Price Change
The Disable Price Change event schedules a temporary suspension of a price

change. Use this event for times such as when a happy hour price that begins
at 6 p.m. and that would otherwise end at EOD can be set to end at 8 p.m. The
dialog box shown in Figure 7-31 displays:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-31 Disable Price Change
Price Change — Select the price change, as defined in Maintenance > Menu
> Price Change.

(31) Set Gst Check Footer Msg by Term
The Set Guest Check Footer Message by Terminal event sends a guest check
message on a per-terminal basis. When set, this event prints any messages
defined in Maintenance > Messages > Main Screen along with messages
already defined in Maintenance > Messages > Guest Check. The dialog box in
Figure 7-32 Set Check Footer Message
Terminal — Specifies the terminal associated with the message, as defined in

Maintenance > Hardware > Terminals.
ID — Select the message, as defined in Maintenance > Messages > Main

Screen.

(32) Set Menu By Term/Jobcode
The Set Menu by Terminal and Job Code sets a specific menu for a particular
terminal and job code. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-33 displays:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-33 Set Menu by Terminal and Job Code
Terminal — Specifies the terminal, as defined in Maintenance > Hardware >

Terminals.
Job Code — Select the job code, as defined in Maintenance > Labor > Job
Codes.
Menu — Select the menu, as defined in Maintenance > Menu > Menus.
(33) Reroute Tax
The Reroute Tax event reroutes one tax to another. The dialog box shown in
Figure 7-34 Reroute Tax

From and To Tax — Select the tax rerouted from and the target tax, as
defined in Maintenance > Menu > Taxes.
This event supports the Centralized Database Management (CDM) feature in

that it enables the corporate data manager to assign a generic tax id to items,
no matter which tax record the specific store uses. When CDM is used, the
corporate data manager is able to set up events which are specific to a store.
Since taxes vary by area, a Reroute Tax event can then be set to reroute the
generic tax id to the correct tax for the area. 'From Tax' is used to specify the
generic tax id and 'To Tax' specifies the correct tax id for the area.
To use this feature, the corporate data manager creates the following standard
tax records:
• Default Food
• Default Liquor
• Default Beer
• Default Wine
• Default Retail
• Default Inclusive Food
• Default Inclusive Liquor
• Default Inclusive Beer
• Default Inclusive Wine
• Default Inclusive Retail
• Default Secondary Food
• Default Secondary Liquor
• Default Secondary Beer
• Default Secondary Wine
• Default Secondary Retail

These are suggested names. The corporate data manager can use any name
desired to represent the standard tax records. It is suggested, however, that
each tax record have a self-documenting name, so that selection from a list
that contains only the Tax Name and Number is not an issue. Tax records 16 -
20 should be reserved for special taxes, such as the tax on the To Go order
modes, etc. These special taxes may not be used now, but it is nice to set aside
the first tax Ids as the 'default' taxes so you can easily differentiate between
default taxes and the actual tax records used in the store.
Maintenance
The default tax records are not actually used in the store, so their correspond-
System
ing rate can be set to a default rate, such as the rate most commonly used
(10% or 11%).
Along with the default tax records, all tax records needed to support the orga-
nization must be created in the corporate tax file.
When creating items, the corporate data manager assigns the appropriate
default tax, therefore, enabling items to be distributed to all stores, regardless
of their tax specification.
The corporate data manager then creates tax-rate specific event for each tax
record. The event specifies the default tax record, such as Defaulted (1) in
'From Tax'. 'To Tax' is used to specify the correct tax record, such as 8% Food,
which might be tax ID 25 in the Tax file. For ease of use, it is strongly sug-
gested that the corporate data manager adopt the naming convention above for
the default tax records, and “#% Tax Type” as the actual store tax records (i.e.,
use 8.25%Retail for an 8.25% retail tax).

(34) Restrict Order Mode by Job Code
The Restrict Order Mode by Job Code event restricts an order mode to a spe-
cific job code. The restriction may apply at all times or only during times
specified in conjunction with the event. When a job code is restricted to a spe-
cific order mode, an employee assigned to the specified job code will not see
other order modes when logged into the system. The dialog box shown in
Figure 7-35 Restrict Order Mode
Job Code — Specifies the job code, as defined in Maintenance > Labor > Job
Codes.
Order Mode — Select the order mode, as defined in Maintenance > System
> Order Modes.
Order Mode Button Position — Select the button position number for the
order mode.

(35) Activate Store Specific Item
The Activate Store Specific Item event activates a store specific item config-
ured with a preceding tilde (~) symbol in the short name of the item. This
event is commonly used in a Centralized Data Management (CDM) environ-
ment where the central site sends items to select stores to be activated at cer-
tain times. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-36 displays:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-36 Activate Store Specific Item
Item to Activate — Select the inactive item configured with the tilde (~)
symbol in the short name, as defined in Maintenance > Menu > Items.
Item Name — Specify the new name of the item to be implemented at the
store.
(37) Reroute Secondary Taxes by Revenue Center
The Reroute Secondary Taxes by Revenue Center event reroutes taxes con-
trolled by revenue centers. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-37 displays:
Figure 7-37 Reroute Secondary Taxes by Revenue Center

Revenue Center — Select the revenue center associated with the tax, as
defined in Maintenance > System > Revenue Centers.
From and To Secondary Tax — Select the tax rerouted from and the target
tax, as defined in Maintenance > Menu > Taxes.
(38) Reroute Display Board
The Reroute Display Board event reroutes item information from one display
board to appear on another display board. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-
38 displays:
Figure 7-38 Reroute Display Boards
Display Board — Indicates the display board to reroute, as defined in Main-

tenance > Hardware > Display Boards.
Display from Terminal — Indicates the new terminal from which the orders
will display.

(39) Set Order Screen Panel
The Set Order Screen Panel event activates and deactivates the Action Item
area replacement panel, defined in Maintenance > System > Floor Plan >
Panel Editor. The dialog box shown in Figure 7-39 displays:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-39 Set Order Screen Panel
Job Code — Specifies the job code to receive the panel, as defined in Main-
tenance > Labor > Job Codes.
Panel — Specifies the panel to activate or deactivate, as defined in Mainte-

nance > System > Floor Plan > Panel Editor.

Required Fields
Use the Required Fields function to require the BOH user to enter certain
information into the system. You define which information you want to
require. For example, if you want all BOH users to remember to enter tele-
phone number information for all employees, include ‘Telephone’ as a
required field. The available list of fields display in tab order of the function.
Select Maintenance > System > Required Fields to display the Required
Fields function tab, as shown in Figure 7-40:
Figure 7-40 Required Fields Function Tab
Currently, you can only require fields from the subtabs in Maintenance >
Labor > Employees. ‘Social Security’ and ‘Last Name’ display in the
‘Included’ list box, as they are always required. You can not make them
optional. When a field becomes required the text box highlights in yellow.
Select the fields to be required entries in the ‘Available’ list box and click > to
move them to the ‘Included’ list box. Select the fields in the ‘Included’ list
box and click < to move it back to the ‘Available’ list box, therefore, they are
not required entries.

Order Modes
Order modes govern the behavior of menu items when they are ordered on
order entry terminals. The Order Modes function tab is used to define the dif-
ferent ways customer orders are received within the restaurant.
The order modes are represented by a series of four order mode buttons on the
order entry terminal screen. The buttons themselves, as well as their resulting
Maintenance
actions, are determined by the selections made in the Order Mode Mainte-
System
nance function tab.
When the system is normally configured, only four order modes can be active
at any one time. The order mode can also be activated in Maintenance > Sys-
tem > Events. If more than four order modes are set as active, the Aloha sys-
tem will select the first order modes listed and associate them with the buttons
on the item order screen. For this reason, the order in which the order modes
are created is very important.
If five order modes are needed in the restaurant, it is possible to associate the
Hold button on the order entry terminal with an order mode. Define and make
active five order modes, then select Maintenance > Store Settings to display
the Store Settings function tab. Select Order Entry from the Group drop-down
list, then select the Options subtab. In the Replace Hold Button with Mode
inset, select the desired order mode from the ‘Order Mode’ drop-down list.

Select Maintenance > System > Order Modes to display the Order Modes
Figure 7-41 Order Modes Function Tab
Mode Number — Holds a three-digit ID number that together with 'Descrip-

tion' uniquely identifies each Order Mode record. To create a new record,
enter an unused number and press Enter. Order modes appear in sequential
order in the FOH, therefore, the order of creation is important. To edit an
existing record, scroll through the Mode Number drop-down list, select the
record to edit and press Enter.
The Order Modes function tab provides the following subtabs which are used
to maintain Order Mode records: Order mode, Order Mode Info, and Delivery
Info.

Order Mode Subtab
The Order Mode subtab enables you to establish and define the order modes
as they appear on the order entry terminal screen. Typical order modes include
Dine In, To Go, Appetizers, and Express. Up to 999 order modes can be
defined, but only four can be active at any one time because of space limita-
tions on order entry terminal screens. Activate modes by using one of the pro-
grammed events in Maintenance > System > Events, or by selecting the
‘Active’ check box on the Order Modes subtab.
Maintenance
System
Description — Enter a descriptive name for the order mode. Enter a new
description or edit an existing description as needed.
Indicator — Specifies special characters that are used to mark items when
ordered at order entry terminals. These special characters, such as '->', help
make it clear to the server that an item has been ordered in a given mode.
Header — Specifies a character string to print on the chit at the beginning of

the items sent in that order mode. This string can be simple, such as 'To Go',
or descriptive, such as 'The Following Items To Go' for a to go order mode.
Trailer — Specifies a character string to print on the chit at the end of the
items sent in that order mode. This string can be simple, such as 'To Go', or
descriptive, such as 'The Above Items To Go' for a 'to go' order mode.
Printer Group Button
Click Printer Group to access the Printer Groups function tab and create new
printer groups, if necessary. Changing printer group records affects all printers
assigned to that printer group and all records that make reference to that
group.
Printer Group — Sets the routing for items ordered in the defined order
mode. The selection in the Order Mode function tab overrides all other printer
routing in the Aloha menu system. This selection must be active only in those
cases where specific routing is needed for the defined order mode, such as a
special printer for To Go orders. If no special routing requirements exist for
the defined order mode, this selection should be set to None.

Tax ID Button
Click Tax ID to access the Taxes function tab and create new taxes, if neces-
sary. Changing a tax record affects all items assigned to that tax and all
records that make reference to it.
Tax ID — Overrides all other tax methods in the Aloha menu system and is
used if there are specific requirements for the defined order mode. If there are
no special tax requirements for the defined order mode, this selection should
be set to None.
Click Revenue Center to access the Revenue Centers function tab and create
new revenue centers, if necessary. Changing a revenue center affects all items
assigned to that revenue center and all records that make reference to it.
Revenue Center — Allows the assignment of a specific order mode to a rev-

enue center for income reporting purposes. If no special need exists for report-
ing income by revenue center in the defined order mode, this selection should
be set to None.
Active — Sets the defined order mode to Active, placing a corresponding

mode button on the order entry terminals.
All Items — Sends all unordered items on the guest check to the kitchen
when the order mode button is touched. Otherwise, the employee must high-
light the items on the check and touch the order mode button.
Tippable Sales — Used to include items sold in the defined mode as tippable
sales. This check box should not be selected for order modes not subject to
tipping.
Refer to Chap- Include in Interval Total — Includes sales ordered with this order mode in
ter 3, Store Set-
tings, for more information
the current interval of the Interval report. Activate the Interval report in Store
on the Interval report. Settings. This is used for cafeteria environments using TableService.

Order Mode Info Subtab
The Order Mode Info subtab provides you with more features to refine the
configuration of the defined order mode. Define category inclusion, fixed
charges and non-taxable situations on this subtab. Select the Order Mode Info
subtab from the Order Modes function tab, as shown in Figure 7-42:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-42 Order Modes Info Subtab
Service Charge Inset
Service Charge — Enables the use of a surcharge applied to the order mode
and activates the options available in the Service Charge inset.
Charge Line Text — Specifies the text for an additional line to print on the
guest check.
Fixed — Designates the service charge is a fixed monetary value. If selected,

the amount entered in the adjacent text box is added to the guest check when
this order mode is applied. For example, if there is a $2.00 charge for 'To Go'
items, select ‘Fixed’, then enter 2.00 in the adjacent text box.

Percentage — Designated the service charge is treated as a percentage rate. If
selected, the percentage rate entered in the text box to the right is used to cal-
culate a percentage of the guest check total. The amount is added to the guest
check when this order mode is applied. For example, if there is a 10 percent
up-charge for 'To Go' items, select ‘Percentage’, then enter 0.10 in the adja-
cent text box.
Round to Nickel — Rounds the order mode charges, if any, to the nearest
nickel. For example, if a ‘To Go’ charge is $1.98, it is rounded to $2.00.
Tax Button
Click Tax to access the Taxes function tab and create new taxes, if necessary.
Changing a tax changes all order modes assigned to that tax.
Tax — Select the tax method, if any, to apply to the service charge.
Include Inset
Include — Used to include or exclude items from an order mode. When

selected, the Category drop-down list is activated. It is used in conjunction
with the ‘All Items’ check box, located on the Order Modes subtab, to config-
ure the items eligible for the defined order mode. Only those items selected in
‘Category’ are eligible to be ordered. If this check box is not selected, and
‘All Items’ is not selected, the items selected in ‘Category’ are excluded from
the defined order mode. An item category, most often a non-sales/non-retail
category, can be included or excluded from the defined order mode.
The relationship between categories and order modes can be exploited to

extend the power of the Aloha menu system. For example, in the 'To Go' order
mode, all items except alcoholic beverages are eligible to be sold. To exclude
alcoholic beverages from the 'To Go' mode, create a Non-Sales/Non-Retail
category in Maintenance > Menu > Categories called 'Alcohol' and include all
alcoholic beverage items in the Items file. That category is selected in the Cat-
egory list, and both the Include and All Items check boxes are turned off. The
effect is to exclude all items in the Alcohol category from the 'To Go' order
mode.

Category Button
Click Category to access the Categories function tab and create a new cate-
gory, if necessary.
Category — Select the category to be included or excluded from the order

mode from the drop-down list.
Non Taxable Except Inset
Maintenance
System
Non Taxable Except — Used to treat the selected order mode as nontaxable,
with the exception of the category selected in the ‘Category’ drop-down list
associated with this check box. When selected, the ‘Category’ drop-down list
is activated.
Category Button
Click Category to access the Categories function tab and create a new cate-
gory, if necessary.
Category — Select the exception category that is to be taxed for the defined
order mode from the drop-down list.
Printer Inset
Voucher Printer Button
Click Voucher Printer to access the Printers function tab and create a new
printer. A printer must physically exist and be connected to an order entry ter-
minal before you can create it.
Voucher Printer — Used to print vouchers on an expediter printer. This fea-

ture provides retailers who need to print guest-check information from an
expediter printer. For example, restaurant delivery checks can print from a
kitchen expediter printer to give drivers easy access to guest checks. The
Aloha system finds the first item on a check with order-mode override and
prints credit card vouchers on the expediter printer. Select a printer from the
drop-down list.

Expediter Printer Button
Click Expediter Printer to access the Printers function tab and create a new
printer, if necessary. A printer must physically exist and be connected to an
order entry terminal before you can create it.
Expediter Printer — Reroutes the global expediter printer to another printer.

The global expediter printer must be set up before using the order mode expe-
diter printer. Set up the global expediter printer in Maintenance > Hardware >
Printers. Select an expediter printer from the drop-down list.
Expediter printers can print bar codes on guest checks if the printer is a ther-
mal printer. Select Maintenance > Store Settings to activate the bar code print
feature. Select Printing from the Group drop-down list, then select the Chit
Style subtab to activate the bar code feature.
Print Bar Code on Expediter — Prints the bar code number on the expe-
diter’s chit.
Additional Charges Inset
Exclude Additional Charges — Indicates additional charges are not

Refer to Chap-
ter 3, Store Set-
included when items are ordered in this order mode. The following scenarios
tings, in the Financial > Add illustrate this functionality:
Charges subtab, for more
information about additional • If all items on the guest check are rung up under an order mode that
charges.
excludes the additional charge, it is not applied to the guest check.
• If the guest check includes items rung up under two or more order
modes and one allows an additional charge that is set up as a percent-
age, the percentage applies only to the order mode set with the addi-
tional charge.
• If the guest check includes items rung up under two or more order
modes and one order mode is set with a flat fee additional charge, the
entire amount of the flat fee is applied to the guest check.

Delivery Info Subtab
The Delivery Info subtab enables you to establish the way a delivery ticket
prints. This subtab will only be present if Delivery/Frequent Buyer is
installed. Delivery/Frequent Buyer is part of the Customer Management Solu-
tions package. Delivery/Frequent Buyer is a program used to track customer
sales history. It also provides the ability to set up different programs to reward
and encourage guests to buy more frequently with the use of coupons and
bonus plans. Please refer to the Delivery/Frequent Buyer User’s Guide for
Maintenance
details on how to configure the delivery program.
System

Order Entry Queues
Order Entry Queues organize and route incoming orders and the information
generated by the item order process. This feature is only used for delivery.
Select Maintenance > System > Order Entry Queues to display the Order
Entry Queue function tab, as shown in Figure 7-43:
Figure 7-43 Order Entry Queue Function Tab
Queue ID — Holds a two-digit number that together with the ‘Name’

uniquely identifies each order entry queue.
Name — Enter a descriptive name for the queue.

Revenue Centers
Revenue Centers summarize income from different sections in the restaurant,
such as the bar, a patio dining area, a main dining area, or a take-out service.
These income sources are reported as revenue centers on the various financial
reports available through the Aloha system.
Select Maintenance > System > Revenue Centers to display the Revenue Cen-
Maintenance
ters function tab, as shown in Figure 7-44:
System
Figure 7-44 Revenue Centers Function Tab
Code — Holds a three-digit number that together with 'Name' uniquely iden-
tifies each revenue center. To create a new record, enter an unused number
and press Enter. To edit an existing record, select it from the ‘Code’ drop-
down list, and press Enter.

Options Subtab
The Options subtab enables you to establish and define gratuity settings, tip
control, use of tab names, and how often to print the receipt.
Name — Determines the name for the revenue center. Naming conventions
are entirely up to the user. However, it is suggested the name be descriptive or
reflect revenue center functions.
Gratuity Inset
Min Gratuity — Used to specify a minimum gratuity for a guest check. Min-
imum gratuities are attached to revenue centers (in this case, the Bar). When
someone rings up a check, the gratuity will be the minimum until a defined
percentage is greater than the auto gratuity amount. This percentage is defined
in Maintenance > Store Settings. Scroll through the Group drop-down list and
select Financials. Select the Automatic Gratuity subtab to set the minimum
gratuity value. Select the Use Automatic Gratuity check box and define the
amount of the gratuity in the Default % text box.
Force Automatic Gratuity — Automatically applies the gratuity to guest

checks from this revenue center. When selected, the ‘%’ and ‘$’ text boxes are
accessible.
% — Specifies the gratuity or service charge percentage to apply for the reve-
nue center, such as 15%. If this is left blank, the percentage in the ‘Default %’
text box in Maintenance > Store Settings > Financials is used.
$ — Specifies the gratuity or service charge amount to apply for the revenue
center, such as $2.00 for a room service fee. If this is left blank, the amount in
the ‘Default $’ text box in Maintenance > Store Settings > Financials is used.
Gratuity Text — Designates the descriptive text to print on the guest check
for an automatic gratuity. This accommodates different text descriptions
defined for separate revenue centers. If left blank, ‘Gratuity’ prints on the
check.

Disable Tips — Disables tip tracking for the selected revenue center only.
This selection overrides the ‘Tips’ selection found under Maintenance > Pay-
ments > Tenders.
Use Numeric Tab Names — Allows only numeric tab names to be used for
the defined revenue centers. Alphanumeric tab names can be used if this
selection is not active.
Print Receipt on Close Check — Used to determine how often to print a
Maintenance
receipt when a check is tendered on a terminal linked to the specific revenue
System
center. Three selections are available:
• Never — Prevents receipts from printing when a check is closed on a

terminal linked to the specific revenue center.
• Always — Forces a receipt to always print when closing a check on a
terminal linked to the specific revenue center.
• Default — Disables the Print Receipt option and reverts to the default
settings in the Tender functions to dictate whether or not a receipt
prints.
PMS Options Subtab

The PMS Options subtab provides you with printing features to refine the
configuration of the revenue center when interfaced with a Property Manage-

ment System (PMS). The voucher and expediter printers are also definable on
this subtab. Select the PMS Options subtab, as shown in Figure 7-45:
Figure 7-45 PMS Options Subtab
PMS Inset
When 'Print Signature Line' in Maintenance > Payments > Tenders on the
Type subtab is selected, a '+Tip' line prints on the check by default.
Tip Line Text — Replaces the standard text on the tip line defined in the
'Print Signature Line'.
Room Line Text — Replaces the standard text on the room line defined in
the 'Print Signature Line'.
Guest Count Tracking Subtab

The Guest Count Tracking subtab enables you to define how guests are
counted by revenue center, instead of globally in the Maintenance > Store Set-
tings > Order Entry function tab.

Select Guest Count Tracking, as shown in Figure 7-46:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-46 Guest Count Tracking Subtab
Use Pivot Seating — Configures the Order Entry screen for ordering by
numbered seating assignments at each table. This setting applies only to the
specific revenue center, but is overridden by the ‘Pivot Seating’ check box in
Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes and Maintenance > Store Settings > Order
Entry.
Pivot Seating Requires a Guest Count — Requires employees to enter the

number of guest per table, if pivot seating is in use for this revenue center.
Auto Increment Pivot Seat on Category ID — Determines the category in

which to base seat increments. This feature adds a seat to the check every time
an item from the defined category is ordered.

Use Entrees for Guest Counts Inset
Use Entrees for Guest Counts — Determines the guest count using the cate-
gory selected in the ‘Category’ drop-down list. Most times a category is set up
with all entrees indicating a guest count. Each time an item from the selected
category is ordered, one customer is added to the guest check count.
Category Button
Click Category to access the Categories function tab and create new catego-
ries, if necessary.
Category — Specifies the category to use for entree counting, if guests are
counted by entree.
Bartender Must Enter a Guest Count — Enables bartenders to enter the

number of guests, if desired. Bartenders use the ‘#Guest’ button on the FOH
to override the default value.

Day Parts
The Day Parts function tab defines specific blocks of time used to divide the
parts of the day. These time blocks organize business data for reporting pur-
poses and enable other Aloha features that rely on defined day parts, such as
event scheduling, surveys and tip sharing.
Select Maintenance > System > Day Parts to display the Day Parts function
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-47 Day Parts Function Tab
Day Part # — Holds a two-digit number that together with 'Description'

uniquely identifies each day part. Up to 99 day parts can be defined. To create
a new record, enter an unused number and press Enter. To edit an existing
record, select it from the ‘Day Part #’ drop-down list, and press Enter.
Description — Determines the name of the day part. The name should be
descriptive of the day part for ease of reference.

Start Time — Determines the start time for the day part. Enter the time using
a 24-hour clock format. Hours are entered on the left, minutes on the right. A
time after midnight (00:00) is specified by adding 24 to the hour. For exam-
ple, 28:00 is 4:00 a.m. the next day.

Concepts
Concepts are an increasingly common convention in the corporate-to-store
hierarchy where a master database is used to conform to multi-branding oper-
ations. For example, a master database which corporate maintains may
include menus and items for all supporting operations, such as an ice cream
parlor, donut shop, and more, but are only used in their respective store. This
provides top-level reporting capabilities per store in the Sales report and PMix
Maintenance
report. The PMix report displays two columns for quantity count and percent-
System
age sold for each concept.
When concepts are defined, they are assigned to individual items in Mainte-
nance > Menu > Items for proper distribution. For example, an item pepper-
oni, is sold only at one concept, therefore, that concept is attached to the item,
pepperoni. 100% of sales for that item is reported to the concept.
If items are configured to be shared throughout stores, such as beverages, a

common distribution must be determined to distribute sales to the proper con-
cept. The concept, ‘None’ should be attached to all common items in the mas-
ter database. Common items, however, is not a recommended technique and
should only be administered on an existing master database. For new data-
bases, it is recommended to assign individual items per concept.

Select Maintenance > System > Concepts to display the Concepts function
Figure 7-48 Concepts Function Tab
Number — Holds the ID number for the concept.
Description — Determines the name of the concept. The name should

describe the concept for ease of reference.
Common Distribution % — Determines the percentage of transaction data

for common items. The total of all defined concepts must equal 100%. If the
total distribution of all concepts does not equal 100%, the system recalculates
the percentages, as necessary. The sales for common items are distributed
between the concepts for reporting purposes.

Tables
Up to 400 tables can be created, and each table can be assigned to a revenue
center using the Tables function tab. Table records cannot be created until the
appropriate revenue centers exist. Create revenue centers in Maintenance >
System > Revenue Centers. Tables are also used in the Floor Plan feature.
Select Maintenance > System > Tables to display the Table Maintenance
Maintenance
screen, as shown in Figure 7-49:
System
Figure 7-49 Tables Function Tab
Table Number — Holds a four-digit number that together with 'Description'

uniquely identifies each table. To create a new record, enter an unused number
and press Enter. To edit an existing record, select it from the ‘Table Number’
drop-down list, and press Enter.
Description — Designates the name of the table. The name should describe
the location of the table in the restaurant.

Click Revenue Center to access the Revenue Center function tab and create
new revenue centers, if needed. Creative use of revenue centers can help you
to make the most of service employees.
Revenue Center — Determines the revenue center to which sales for the
table are reported.
Style — Defines square or round table design, with square selected as the
default.This feature is only beneficial to the Floor Plan Interface.
Number of Seats — Determines the number of seats allowed at the table.

This feature is only beneficial to the Floor Plan Interface.

Void Reasons
The Void Reasons function tab enables you to maintain a database file that is
useful for auditing and reporting purposes in tracking the types and character-
istics of voids recorded by the system. Voids can be marked as affecting or not
affecting inventory.
If an employee is assigned to a job code with ‘Allow to void own
Maintenance
items’ selected, Void Reasons do not display on the screen and no
System
password is requested. The Void Report will show ‘Void Reason
UNKNOWN’.
When an employee attempts to delete an item that has been sent to the kitchen
from a guest check, a reason for the void must be selected. If the employee is
assigned to an access level with 'Void Items' selected, they can enter their
password at the 'Enter manager password' prompt, select a reason for the void,
and complete the transaction. If they are not, a manager is required to com-
plete the transaction. If the employee is assigned to a job code with 'Allow to
void own items' selected, no password message or void reasons will display.
Refer to Chap-
ter 4, Labor
more information on
Access Levels.

Select Maintenance > System > Void Reasons to display the Void Reason
Maintenance screen, as shown in Figure 7-50:
Figure 7-50 Void Reason Function Tab
ID — Holds an unused two-digit number that together with 'Description'

uniquely identifies each void reason. To create a new record, enter an unused
ID and press Enter. To edit an existing record, select it from the ‘ID’ drop-
down list, and press Enter.
Description — Designates the name of the void reason. The name should be
descriptive of the reason for the void, for ease of reference.
Affects Inventory — Used to characterize each void reason type according

to its affect on inventory. Void reasons that affect inventory add the item back
into inventory and allow the item to be sold again. Void reasons that do not
affect inventory do not change the inventory count or item availability.

The system also provides the ability to set a time limit on voids. After the
specified time interval expires, the system no longer accepts a void for a given
order. Select Maintenance > Store Settings to display the Store Settings func-
tion tab. Select Security from the ‘Group’ drop-down list. Select the Restric-
tions subtab for access to the setting, as shown in Figure 7-51:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-51 Security Restrictions
In the Time Allowed to Void Entries inset, select 'Restrict Void Items' and
specify a time interval in minutes.

No Sale Reasons
The No Sale Reasons function tab provides the ability to define or change No
Sale Reasons. When a cash drawer is opened or other actions take place that
can potentially impact the interpretation of the daily sales and business
reports, it is often useful to have that action accompanied by a No Sale Reason
message in the daily reports.
If an employee is assigned to an access level with 'No Sale' selected, the Open
Drawer button is available, otherwise it does not display on the FOH terminal.
When this button is selected without first entering a sale, a reason for the no
sale must be selected.
Select Maintenance > System > No Sale Reasons to display the No Sale Rea-
sons function tab, shown in Figure 7-52:
Figure 7-52 No Sale Reason Function Tab

ID — Holds a two-digit number that together with 'Description' uniquely
identifies the record. Up to 10 no sale reasons may be entered. To create a new
record, enter an unused number and press Enter. To edit an existing record,
select it from the ‘ID’ drop-down list, and press Enter.
Description — Designates the name of the no sale reason. The name should
be descriptive of the reason, for ease of reference.
Maintenance
System

Petty Accounts
The Petty Accounts function tab provides the ability to define a tracking sys-
tem for petty cash transactions. There are two types of accounts, Cash In
accounts for petty cash 'Paid Ins,' and Cash Out accounts for petty cash 'Paid
Outs.' The system permits up to 20 petty cash accounts.
Select Maintenance > System > Petty Accounts to display the Petty Accounts
function tab, shown in Figure 7-53:
Figure 7-53 Petty Accounts Function Tab
ID — Holds a five-digit ID number that together with 'Name' uniquely identi-

fies each petty cash account record. To create a new record, enter an unused
number and press Enter. To edit an existing record, select it from the ‘ID’
Name — Designates the name of the petty cash account.

Tender — Applies to cash out accounts only. Only non-cash tenders are dis-
played for selection. If a cash out account has a non-cash tender attached, the
cash out does not show on the regular Paid Out section on the Server Check-
out. This amount displays in the non-cash transactions section in the audit sec-
tion of the checkout report.
Affects Deposit — Used to note whether activity in the defined account

affects bank deposits. If money is simply being moved to or from the safe, the
deposit is not affected. If the money is paid to a vendor, the deposit is affected.
Maintenance
When using the Tip Out functionality and creating a petty cash account, make
System
sure 'Affects Deposit' is not selected.
Cash Accounts Inset
Cash In Account — Used to mark the account as an account that receives

cash payments.
Cash Out Account — Used to mark the account as an account that disburses
cash payments.

Customizing Your FOH Screens
Customize your FOH screens using Panel Editor and Screen Editor to replace
and alter the hard-coded screens within the system. You can change the look
of the screens using bitmaps, and add or limit functionality based on what but-
tons you place on the screen. You can customize the following screens:
Working with Tables screen (Floor Plan) — You can replace the
FOH Working with Tables screen with the Floor Plan Interface (FPI)
feature.
Order Entry screen — You can replace the Action Item area in the
lower right row of the Order Entry screen with a customized panel, on
which you can add and remove buttons. Refer to the Order Entry
Screen section in this chapter for more information.
Working with Tables Screen (Floor Plan)

The Floor Plan Interface (FPI) feature replaces the Working with Tables
screen and integrates panels and buttons created in Panel Editor and Screen
Editor. With your imagination and Panel Editor tools, you can create a func-
tional floor plan which represents your store. Access to the Floor Plan screen
is controlled by job code or terminal. The Floor Plan feature is NOT designed
for table management where other employees, such as hosts and bussers,
receive notifications and monitor tables to continue with their duties. It is

user-definable and you control the behavior. An elaborate Floor Plan screen is
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-54 Elaborate Floor Plan Example (Table Owner View)
Your Floor Plan screen can be very elaborate, or it can be very basic and func-
tional, as shown in Figure 7-55:
Figure 7-55 Basic Floor Plan Example

Floor Plan Features
The Floor Plan screen replaces the FOH Working with Tables screen shown in
Figure 7-56:
Figure 7-56 FOH Working with Tables Screen
The major features of the Floor Plan Interface are:
• Start Tables Faster and Easier — Enables you to start a new table
faster and with less keystrokes.
• Multiple View Modes — Enables you to view the status of tables,
such as ownership, time opened, and check number.
• Drill Down into Separate Sections — Enables you to view individ-
ual sections of the Floor Plan screen.
• Combine and Separate Tables — Enables you to pull together and
detach tables.
• Design with Bitmaps and Colors — Enables you to add bitmaps and
colors for a custom design. You can make your Floor Plan screen as
elaborate or as simple as you want.

Start Tables Faster and Easier
Touch a table on the Floor Plan screen to start it. The Enter Guest Count
screen displays for the selected table and prompts for the number of guests, as
shown in Figure 7-57, after table 103 is touched.
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-57 FOH Enter Guest Count Screen
This involves less key strokes than when you use the Working with Tables
screen. Before the Floor Plan Interface, you had to select New and then enter
a table number.
Multiple View Modes
Select different table status views on the Floor Plan screen with the View
Mode button function, depending on the number of view defined. These
options are not available unless the Floor Plan screen is enabled. The avail-
able view modes are:

Standard View Mode — Displays tables with table numbers in the center, as
Figure 7-58 Standard View Mode
View Time Open — Displays tables with table numbers and the time when
the check is opened, as shown in Figure 7-59. Use this view to assist in table
turnover and determine when guests are expected to leave and a table
becomes available.
Figure 7-59 View Time Open Mode

View Owner — Displays tables with the table number and the employee who
opened the table, as shown in Figure 7-60. Use this view to show the available
tables.
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-60 View Owner Mode
View Time Since Last Item Ordered — Displays tables with the table num-
ber and the time when the last item was ordered per table, as shown in Figure
7-61. Use this view to assist in table turnover and determine when the next
table is expected to become open. Each time an item is added to the check,
such as dessert, the counter starts over for the table.
Figure 7-61 View Time Since Last Item Ordered Mode

View Check Number — Displays the table number and the current check
number, as shown in Figure 7-62. Use this view for such things as matching
tables with check numbers and find lost checks.
Figure 7-62 View Check Number Mode
Table indicators placed on the table help determine the status of individual
tables, as shown in Figure 7-63.
Figure 7-63 Table Status Indicators

Arrow Right — Indicates the table is being transferred to another employee
using the Transfer Tables feature.
Arrow Left — Indicates the table is being transferred from another employee
using the Transfer Tables feature.
Locked — Indicates the table is locked and cannot be accessed by the

employee who is logged in.
Maintenance
Pending Transfer — Indicates the table is in the process of being transferred
System
using the Transfer Tables feature, but has not been accepted by the transferee.
Flashing — Indicates the table has an item on hold using the Hold feature
(not shown).
In addition, the following preset colors display, indicating the ownership of

the table:
White — Indicates the table is available and accessible by any employee.
Green — Indicates the table is currently open and accessible by the employee
who is logged in.
Purple — Indicates the table is opened by another employee and cannot be

accessed by the employee who is logged in.
Drill Down into Separate Sections
Create a main floor for the entire restaurant, as well as panels for individual
sections, such as a bar area, patio, section 1, banquet area, and more. These
are accomplished with the use of chaining buttons, such as the button with the
magnifying glass, shown in Figure 7-54.
You can also limit the employee to work with only their section. This is done
by creating a panel for the section and assigning it to a particular job code or
terminal.

Combine and Separate Tables
Combine and separate tables with the Combine Table and Detach Table button
functions. The combined tables assume the number of the lowest numbered
table. When you touch these buttons, all other functions on the Floor Plan
screen are unavailable until the operation is complete, with the exception of
Exit.
To combine tables:
1. Touch the Combine Tables function button. All other function but-
tons except Exit, become disabled.
2. Touch the tables you want to combine, indicated with frames when
selected, as shown in Figure 7-64:
Figure 7-64 Select Tables (Combine Tables Function)

3. Touch Combine Tables again. The tables assumes the lowest number
of the selected tables and the color green, which indicates the
employee logged in owns the tables, shown in Figure 7-65:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-65 Completed Combine Tables Function
To detach tables:
1. Touch the Detach Tables function button. All other function buttons
except Exit become disabled.
2. Touch the tables you want to detach, as shown in Figure 7-66:
Figure 7-66 Select Tables (Detach Tables Function)

3. Touch Detach Tables again. The tables revert to the original table
number and the empty tables assumes the color white, which indi-
cates the table can be opened by any employee, as shown in Figure 7-
67:
Figure 7-67 Completed Detach Tables Function
Design with Bitmaps and Colors
Design the Floor Plan screen with installed bitmaps, or add necessary bitmaps
to the \Aloha\Bmp directory to customize the restaurant. The example in Fig-
ure 7-54, displays an elaborate design with a tiled wood floor pattern, trees,
and other bitmaps not included with the Aloha install CD.
You can place bitmaps in the \BMP directory or in subdirectories for each
screen resolution within the \BMP directory. The subdirectories for each
screen resolution are labeled using an ‘x_y’ format, where x is the screen
width in pixels, and y is the screen height in pixels. For example, you would
label the directory for the 640x480 screen resolution as \BMP\640_480, the
800X600 screen resolution as \BMP\800_600, and so on.

Place bitmaps common to all screen resolutions in the \BMP directory and bit-
maps for a specific resolution in a separate directory. When you open Panel
Editor, you are required to select the screen resolution of the panels for which
you are editing, so when you assign a bitmap to a button, screen or panel, the
bitmap drop-down list only displays bitmaps in the \BMP directory for the
selected screen resolution. For example, if you select a screen resolution of
800x600 when opening Panel Editor, then bitmaps in the \BMP directory and
\BMP\800x600 directory are available in the drop-down list. This is less com-
plicated than trying to select bitmaps from a list of bitmaps for different
Maintenance
screen resolutions.
System
Label bitmaps by their intended screen resolution for easier viewing and con-
figuration. Panel Editor truncates numeric characters at the end of the bitmap
file names when you view them from the drop-down lists.
For example, if you have a different version of FLOOR.BMP for each screen
resolution, label them FLOOR640.BMP, FLOOR800.BMP, and
FLOOR1024.BMP, and place each file in the corresponding screen resolu-
tion’s subdirectory. When you view the bitmaps from the drop-down list, you
only see FLOOR. Panel Editor selects the correct FLOOR.BMP based on the
screen resolution you selected when you opened Panel Editor, and properly
records the correct file name in the database.
The following are examples of file names and how they display in Panel Edi-
tor:
File Name Display Name

FLOOR.BMP FLOOR
FLOOR640.BMP FLOOR
640FLOOR.BMP At least two alphabetic characters are required
before the numeric characters.
F640480.BMP At least two alphabetic characters are required
before the numeric characters.
FL640480.BMP FL
FLOOR640XXX.BMP FLOOR

Order Entry Screen
Use Panel Editor to provide a replacement panel for the Action Item area,
located in the lower right row of the FOH Order Entry screen. You can add
any number of buttons at any size, and place them in this area, as shown in
Figure 7-68, however you can not move the panel to another location on the
screen.
Figure 7-68 Order Entry Screen with Customized Action Item Area
Without customizing, the Action Item area contains the Delete, Modify, Hold,
Quantity, Recipe, Item Lookup, Print Receipt, Reprint Check, and Repeat but-
tons. You can also have an optional fifth order mode in place of the Hold but-
ton. Some of these buttons are standard and available at all times, and some
depend on the configuration of the BOH.
You can also place buttons in this area, but have them disabled by job code.
For example, you can add the ‘Get Check’ button to the Action Item area, but
clear the ‘Get Check’ check box in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes. The
button would be visible but inactive.

Replacing the Action Item area with a customized panel is controlled by the
‘Set Order Screen Panel’ event, as explained in Events, located in Chapter 7,
System Maintenance Functions. When the event occurs, all employees
clocked in under that job code receive the customized portion of the Order
Entry screen.
Panel Editor Tools

Use Panel Editor to create or modify the panels that make up the FOH Floor
Maintenance
Plan screen and alter the FOH Order Entry screen for Aloha TableService.
System
Use this graphical tool to define panels, to position panels on the screen and
buttons on the panels, and to assign actions to buttons. You determine the look
and behavior of these screens by the choices you make when creating and
placing panels on the screen.
We discuss the following tools, which are explained in detail:
• Desktop Size Settings

• Workspace, Toolbar, and Commands Menu
• Panel Editor Grid
• Coordinates Dialog Box
Desktop Size Settings

The Select Desktop Size dialog box displays each time you access Panel Edi-
tor and sets the screen resolution. The resolution should be the same as the
resolution used on the FOH terminals. The resolutions available are deter-
mined by the system in use. This is more apparent when large bitmaps may be
specific to a resolution. For instance, a hamburger bitmap in 640x480 mode
would display as too small for a 800x600 screen.

To set the desktop size:
1. Select Maintenance > System > Floor Plan > Panel Editor to
access Panel Editor. The Select Desktop Size dialog box displays to
adjust and set the resolution of the screen, as shown in Figure 7-69:
Figure 7-69 Select Desktop Size Dialog Box
2. Select the appropriate resolution from the drop-down list.
If you are using a custom resolution for such things as a handheld

device, an additional option appears in the drop-down list. To use a
custom resolution, set the Alohapexres and Alohapeyres variables to
the desired resolution in your environment variables.
3. Select Set as Default to set the resolution to be used each time Panel
Editor is accessed.
4. Click OK.

Workspace, Toolbar, and Commands Menu
After setting the desktop size, the workspace displays with the toolbar, as
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-70 Panel Editor Workspace, Toolbar and Commands Menu

The workspace is the white area used to design your panels and screens. The
toolbar provides access to the Commands menu, the help files, and enables
you to exit Panel Editor. Use Coordinates to move and resize panels.
The toolbar and Coordinates dialog box display in the same loca-
tion as when you last exited Panel Editor. Drag them off to the right
to clear the workspace for ease of design.
Click CMDS on the toolbar to display the Commands menu. The menu pro-
vides a list of commands, sectioned off by panel and button commands. The
Buttons option provides an additional submenu. Create, open, edit, copy, save,
and delete panels using the panel commands. Define headings, backgrounds,
and text appearance on all panels using panel commands and button com-
mands.
Depending on where it is performed, right-clicking the mouse on

either the workspace, panel, or button displays a shortened version
of the toolbar and serves as an editing shortcut throughout the Panel
Editor process.
To open the commands menu:
1. Click CMDS on the toolbar. The Commands menu displays.

2. Select an option from the menu.
Panel Editor Grid

The Panel Editor workspace uses a grid to align panels and buttons. The
Options command enables you to change the default number of pixels to use
at a time when you increase or decrease a coordinate in the Coordinates dialog
box. We recommend increments of five, such as five or ten pixels. All panels
and buttons snap to the grid settings for easy alignment and editing. This fea-
ture is an optional setting.

To define and display the Panel Editor grid:
1. Select Options from the toolbar. The Panel Editor Settings dialog box
shown in Figure 7-71 displays: :
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-71 Panel Editor Settings Dialog Box
2. Enter the grid spacing for the Panel Editor workspace, with 1 being
the default, in the Grid Setting text box. For example, enter 5 to
move panels five pixels at a time.
3. Select Show Grid and click OK to display the Panel Editor grid
based on the settings in the ‘Grid Setting’ text box, as shown in Fig-
ure 7-72, or clear the check box and click OK to display the work-
space without a grid (Figure 7-70).
Figure 7-72 Panel Editor Grid

Coordinates Dialog Box
The Show Coordinates command provides a tool to move and size panels with
precision based on the grid setting defined in the Panel Editor Settings dialog
box.
If you select ‘Mark as Template’ or ‘Fixed Position’ in the Panel dia-

log box, the Show Coordinates command is not available.
The Show Coordinates option, shown in Figure 7-73, displays when you
access Panel Editor, or select Show Coordinates from the Commands menu:
Figure 7-73 Coordinates Dialog Box
The Coordinates functions are only available when working with the
floor plan interface. The Order Screen panel is not designed to be
moved.
To move a panel using the Coordinates tool:
1. Adjust the x coordinate using the scroll bar to move the panel to the
left or right. Adjust it higher to move right and lower to move left.
2. Adjust the y coordinate using the scroll bar to move the panel up or
down. Adjust it higher to move up and lower to move down.
To resize a panel using the Coordinates tool:
1. Adjust the cx coordinate using the scroll bar to reshape the right side
of the panel. The higher the number, the wider the panel becomes.
2. Adjust the cy coordinate using the scroll bar, to reshape the bottom
side of the panel. The higher the number, the taller the panel becomes.

You can also move and resize panels using the mouse and keyboard. The fol-
lowing procedures depict how to move and resize panels without the Coordi-
nates tool:
To move a panel manually with the mouse:
1. Click the left mouse button at the top border of the panel.
2. Hold and drag the panel to the desired location.
3. Release the left mouse button.
Maintenance
System
To move a panel manually with the keyboard:
1. Click the left mouse button at the top border of the panel.
2. Press the Up, Down, Left, and Right arrow keys until the panel is at
the desired location.
To resize a panel manually with the mouse:
1. Place the cursor on any side of the panel until a double-sided arrow
displays.
2. Click the left mouse button.
3. Hold and drag the panel border until the panel is at the desired size.
Panels
Panels are defined in Panel Editor and hold buttons that contain tables, chains,
functions, and more.
The first two panel commands provide an additional submenu enabling you to
select a type of panel to define, or to filter the type of panel with which you
wish to work.
There are two types of panels in Panel Editor:
Button Functions Panel — Holds button functions, such as menu items,

manager functions, order modes, bitmaps, etc. It offers various options to con-
struct computer-based Floor Plan screens that are comprehensive, flexible,
and modifiable. You can define as many different Floor Plan screens and pan-

els, as necessary for different sections of the establishment. You can also
assign a different Floor Plan screen to each job code.
Order Screen Panel — Enables you to replace and add buttons to the Action
Item section of the Order Entry screen. You can also include a chain button
function to chain to other order screen panels in the same position.
You can have more than one of each of the above panel types on the home
screen. All panel types are explained later in this chapter.
All panel types must have a name in the ‘Panel Name’ text box. If the panel
name is left blank, the panel is automatically assigned a sequential number in
order of panel creation. Naming conventions are often put in place when nam-
ing panels to avoid confusion when accessing panels. The panel name dis-
plays in numerous dialog boxes with limited text space. It is recommended to
abbreviate as much as possible and to make the name descriptive of the func-
tion it performs. When dealing with multiple concepts that use different pan-
els, always enter a preceding indicator or prefix, such as DT for Drive Thru,
or MGR for Manager. This technique groups panels together when displayed
inside selection dialog boxes.
All panel types have a title in the ‘Panel Title’ text box that displays at the top
in a system generated portion of the panel.
The color of the text is defined by the panel’s properties. The color of the title
bar and panel border displays according to the system’s Microsoft Windows®
color settings. One technique is to leave the ‘Panel Title’ text box blank. An
unassigned button is then created for a title heading. Refer to the Unassigned
button function later in this chapter.
All panels and buttons snap and fit flush to the grid settings defined in the
Panel Editor Settings dialog box. This eases the aligning and editing of panel
construction.

Create a New Panel
You must create a panel before it can be placed on the Panel Editor work-
space. Once created, you can perform any of the other panel commands.
There is an option to create a new panel for each panel type, as shown in Fig-
ure 7-74:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-74 Create New Panel
Button Functions Panel

Use the Button Functions option to create your floor plan which replaces the
Working with Tables screen. Plan the layout before you begin creating the
floor plan. Adding new panels in the future may seem like a simple step, but
could require major adjusting and resizing to other panels on the screen. If
necessary, sketch the design on paper before beginning. We recommend a

three-panel design, which includes a Main Floor panel, Functions panel, and a
Chain panel, as shown in Figure 7-75:
Figure 7-75 Three-Panel Design
The Main Floor panel contains the tables, and any other bitmaps you want to
include, such as walls, and trees. Use the Functions panel to provide access to
functions such as viewing the time a table was opened, combining or detach-
ing tables, or to provide access to the Working with Tables screen. Use the
Chain panel to drill down into separate sections of the restaurant
You must first create a panel and place it on the workspace before you can
perform any of the other panel commands. To create a new panel, select Cre-

ate New Panel > Button Functions from the Commands menu. The Edit Panel
- Button Function dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 7-76:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-76 Edit Panel - Button Function
Name — Designates a unique name according to the function it performs.

Approximately 30 alpha and/or numeric characters can be entered. Two pan-
els can not have the same name. The text, 'Unnamed Panel' is the default panel
name.
Title Inset
Title Text — Designates the text used as the title of the panel. Add text to the
title of the panel, if desired. The width of the panel should be considered when
selecting a title. The text entered here displays on a system generated portion
at the top of the panel. The background color of the system generated portion
displays according to the Windows display configuration. If ‘Title Text’ is left
blank, the panel displays without a system title bar.

Title Color Button
Click Title Color to display the Color dialog box and select a color for the
panel heading, only if you enter title text.
To add or change the text color of the panel title:
1. Click Title Color. The Color dialog box displays, as shown in Figure
7-77:
Figure 7-77 Color Dialog Box
2. Select a color for the text and click OK. You are returned to the Edit
Panel dialog box.
Title Font Button
Click Title Font to display the Font dialog box and define the font attributes of
the panel heading, only if you enter title text.

To add or change the text font of the panel title:
1. Click Title Font. The Font dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 7-
78:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-78 Font Dialog Box
2. Select a font, font style, and size and click OK. You are returned to
the Edit Panel dialog box.
Mark as Template — Protects the panel as a template and automatically

selects the 'Fixed Position' and 'Fixed Button Layout' check boxes. The panel
is locked in a fixed location on the workspace, and the corresponding buttons
cannot be edited. This also disables some commands on the Commands menu.
Panels that are ‘marked as a template’ display in brackets in the Existing Pan-
els dialog box.
We recommend you select 'Mark as Template' on all completed pan-

els to prevent accidental changes to the panel. Do not select this
option until the panel is complete.
Fixed Position — Locks the panel in a fixed position on the screen, therefore,
you can not accidentally move it to another part of the screen.
Fixed Button Layout — Locks the button layout in a fixed position on the
panel itself. You can not accidentally move buttons to another position on the
panel, or add or delete them.

Seats Inset
Seats and the seat width can display on tables, if desired. This option is only
beneficial if the panel contains tables. The seats are more defined on the FOH
for larger table buttons, such as the drill down sections of the Floor Plan
screen.
Show Seats on Table Buttons — Displays seats on tables when placed on a

panel, as shown in the left example of Figure 7-79, compared to the right
example:
Figure 7-79 Panel with and without Seats Examples
Seat Width — Defines the width of the chairs for the tables in pixels. The
lower the number of pixels, the more defined the chairs display. The width
should be set higher for a drill down section and lower for the main floor
view.
Background Inset
Add color to the background of the panel, if desired. In addition, the back-
ground can display as transparent for a distinctive 3-D effect. System gener-
ated borders on panels are also optional.

No Border — Displays the panel with no borders. This also disables all
options in the Title Text inset. The right panel example, shown in Figure 7-80,
displays without a border:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-80 Panels with and without a Border
Transparent — Displays the background of the panel as the same color or

bitmap of the screen in which the panel resides, creating a 3-D effect.
This effect is useful when a color is defined or when bitmaps are attached to
the screen in Maintenance > System > Floor Plan > Screen Editor. The panel
displays as transparent, as shown in the left example of Figure 7-81.
Figure 7-81 Panel Background with and without Transparency

Color Button
Click Color to display the Color dialog box and define the background color
of the panel.
To add or change the color of the panel background:
1. Click Color. The Color dialog box displays (Figure 7-77).

2. Select a color for the background and click OK. You are returned to
Bitmap Inset
Add bitmaps to the background of the panel, if desired.
Bitmap — Displays a list of all defined bitmaps held in the ALOHA\BMP

directory. The bitmap displays as the background of the panel. To display your
own custom bitmaps, such as a company logo, create graphic files, saved as a
bitmap, and place them in this directory. Once you select a bitmap, other
options in the Bitmap inset become available.
Tile — Displays the bitmap in a tiled pattern as the background of the panel,
as shown in the left example of Figure 7-82:
Figure 7-82 Panel Examples with Tiled Bitmap

Transparent — Enables the background color of a bitmap to display as the
same color as the panel in which it resides. For example, if a bitmap image of
an arrow against a yellow background is placed on a panel with a black back-
ground, the yellow background of the bitmap displays as black to match the
color of the panel, as shown in Figure 7-83:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-83 Panel Bitmap Examples
Justify Inset
The justification setting determines how the bitmap is displayed on the panel.
Select Left, Center, or Right to horizontally align the bitmap on the panel.
Select Top, Center, or Bottom to vertically align the bitmap on a panel. Center
is selected as the default for both of these.
To select a bitmap and define the justification on the background of the

panel:
1. Double-click the desired panel, or right-click and select Edit Panel.

The Edit Panel dialog box displays for the corresponding panel.
2. Select an available bitmap from the drop-down list.
3. Select Left, Center, or Right for the horizontal justification of the
bitmap.

4. Select Top, Center, or Bottom for the vertical justification of the bit-
map.
5. Click OK.
After you create your Button Functions panel and set your panel properties,
add buttons to the panel from the list of button functions. Refer to the Single
Button Commands section and Group Button Commands section later in the
chapter.
Order Screen Panel

Use the Order Screen option to customize the Action Item panel on the Order
Entry screen. To create a new Order Screen panel, select Create New Panel >
Order Screen from the Commands menu. The Edit Panel - Order Screen dia-
log box displays, as shown in Figure 7-84:
Figure 7-84 Edit Panel - Order Screen Dialog Box
Name — Designates a unique name for the panel.

Mark as Template — Protects the panel as a template and automatically
selects the 'Fixed Position' and 'Fixed Button Layout' check boxes. The panel
is locked in a fixed location on the workspace, and you can not edit the corre-
sponding buttons. This also disables some commands on the Commands
menu. Panel names that are marked as a template display in brackets in the
Existing Panels dialog box.
We recommend you select 'Mark as Template' on all completed pan-

els to prevent accidental changes to the panel. Do not select this
Maintenance
option until the panel is complete.
System
Fixed Position — Locks the panel in a fixed position on the screen, therefore,
you can not accidentally move it to another part of the screen. This is disabled
for all Order Screen panels.
Fixed Button Layout — Locks the button layout in a fixed position on the
panel itself. You can not accidentally move buttons to another position on the
panel, or add or delete them.
Background Inset
Add colors to the background of the panel, if desired. In addition, the back-
ground can display as transparent for a distinctive 3-D effect.
No Border — Displays the panel with no borders. This is disabled for all
Order Screen panels.

bitmap of the screen in which the panel resides, creating a 3-D effect.
the screen in Maintenance > Menu > Screen Editor.
Color Button
Click Color to display the Color dialog box and define the background color
of the panel.

To add or change the color of the panel background:

Bitmap Inset
Add bitmaps to the background of the panel, if desired. All bitmaps are stored
in the ALOHAQS/BMP directory. You can utilize the bitmaps located in the
installation CD, or create your own. All graphics must be in bitmap format,
and placed in the correct directory.
Bitmap — Displays the bitmap as the background of the panel. To display

your own custom bitmaps, such as a company logo, create graphic files, saved
as a bitmap, and place them in this directory. Once you select a bitmap, other
options in the Bitmap inset become available.
Tile — Displays the bitmap as the background of the panel, in a tiled pattern.
Transparent — Enables the background color of the bitmap to display as the

same color as the panel in which it resides.
Justify Inset
The justification setting determines how the bitmap is displayed on the panel.
Select Left, Center, or Right to horizontally align the bitmap on the panel.
Select Top, Center, or Bottom to vertically align the bitmap on a panel. Center
is selected as the default for both of these.
To select a bitmap and define the justification on the background of the

panel:
1. Double-click the desired panel, or right-click and select Edit Panel.

The Edit Panel dialog box displays for the corresponding panel.
2. Select an available bitmap from the Bitmap drop-down list.
bitmap.

map.
5. Click OK.
After you create your Order Screen panel and set your panel properties, add
buttons to the panel from the list of button functions. Refer to the Single But-
ton Commands section and Group Button Commands section later in the
chapter.
Maintenance
Other Panel Commands
System
Once you create and save a panel, you can open, edit, copy, close, and delete
it. When more than one panel is open, you can save and close all of them at
once.
Open Existing Panel

Open existing panels to display them on the workspace. Use this command
when you want to view and open panels. There is an option for each panel
type.

To open an existing panel:
1. Select Open Existing Panel, and select Button Functions or Order

Screen from the Commands menu. The Panel dialog box displays, as
Figure 7-85 Panel Dialog Box
2. Select a panel from the list and click OK, or double-click the desired
panel. The panel displays on the workspace.
Edit Panel
Use this command when you want to change the properties of the panel, such
as name, appearance, template settings, and more. You must display the panel
on the workspace before you can edited it. There is an option for each panel
type.
To edit an existing panel:
1. Select Edit Existing Panel, and select Button Functions or Order

Screen from the Commands menu.

If there are active or displayed panels in the workspace, the Edit Panel
dialog box displays a prompt asking if you want to edit the last active
panel for the selected panel type, as shown in Figure 7-86:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-86 Edit Panel Dialog Box
Click Yes to edit the panel or click No to display the Panel dialog box.
If there are no active or displayed panels on the workspace, the panel
selection list displays. The Panel dialog box displays a list of existing
panels from which to choose (Figure 7-85).
2. Select the panel and click OK, or double-click the desired panel. The
panel displays on the workspace.
You can also double-click an active panel to open the Edit Panel
dialog box and change the settings.
Copy Panel
Use the Copy Panel command to create a duplicate panel. The copied panel
inherits all properties, such as name, appearance, template settings, text and
color selections, size and location, and all button functions, and more. The
copied panel is placed exactly on top of the original panel. Two panels cannot
contain the same name.
To copy a panel:
1. Select Copy Panel, and select Button Functions or Order Screen

from the Commands menu. If there are active or displayed panels in
the workspace, the Panel dialog box displays a list of existing panels
from which to choose (Figure 7-85).

2. Select the panel and click OK, or double-click the desired panel. The
Edit Panel dialog box displays for the copied panel. The text ‘Copy of
nnn’ where ‘n’ is the name of the original panel, displays in the
‘Name’ text box.
3. Enter a descriptive name for the new panel and click OK. The new
panel displays in the exact location as the original.
We recommend you use the Copy Panel command to create second-

ary panels that overlay other panels. This ensures the correct place-
ment of panels so that blank spaces do not display on the FOH.
Close Panel
Close panels to remove them from the workspace. This panel command closes
the last active panel, if applicable. If there are no active or displayed panels on
the workspace, this command is not available. If the workspace has more than
one panel displayed, or if none of the panels are active, the Panel dialog box
displays with a list of open panels.
To close a panel:
1. Select Close Panel from the Commands menu. If unsaved changes

were made, a dialog box prompts to save the changes.
2. Click Yes to save the changes, or click No to close the panel without
saving.
Delete Panel
Delete panels to remove them from the Aloha system. This panel command
deletes the last active panel, if applicable. If there are no active or displayed
panels on the workspace, or if the panel is marked as a template, this com-
mand is not available. If the workspace has more than one panel displayed, or
if none of the panels are active, the Panel dialog box displays with a list of
open panels.

To delete a panel:
1. Select Delete Panel from the Commands menu. The Delete Panel
dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 7-87:
Maintenance
Figure 7-87 Delete Panel Dialog Box
System
2. Click Yes to delete the panel, or click No to cancel the procedure.
Save All Panels

To save all displayed panels at the same time, select Save All Panels from the
Commands menu. Use this panel command when you want to save multiple
panels which have unsaved changes.
Close All Panels

To close all displayed panels at the same time, select Close All Panels from
the Commands menu. A prompt displays asking if you want to save any
changes made to the panels.

Single Buttons
When you create a panel, place buttons on the panel after clearing the 'Mark
as Template' and 'Fixed Button Layout' check boxes. You can move, rear-
range, and resize buttons in several different ways. Your panels can contain a
variety of functions to meet the requirements of a food environment in order
to ring, close and modify orders. Buttons are always formed with four right
angles in a square or rectangular shape.
For your floor plan, tables, chains, functions, scenery, view modes, and more,
are represented with buttons. The appearance of a button determines how
'user-friendly' the FOH performs and how pleasing it is to the eye. Color
schemes are encouraged for organization and identifying the site.
If the panel to contain the buttons is not displayed, select Open Existing Panel
> Button Functions from the Commands menu. The Panel dialog box dis-
plays. Select the panel and click OK.
Create a New Button

To add a new button, select New Button from the Commands menu, or hold
down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the panel in a box pat-

tern. As the button is formed, release the left mouse button. The Edit Button
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-88 Edit Button Dialog Box
Function — Defines the function of the button. The function assigned to a

button determines the behavior of the button and how the FOH operates.
Every button must have an assigned function and every new button has a
default Unassigned function. When you select a function, some require addi-
tional information on the right side of the dialog box. The Text, Background,
and Bitmap properties may be disabled as well.
Text Inset
Text — Defines the text to display on the button. To display text on multiple
lines, insert \n without spaces, for line breaks.
Color Button
Click Color to display the Color dialog box and set the color of the button
text.

To set the color of the button text:

2. Select a color for the text and click OK. You are returned to the Edit
Button dialog box.
Font Button
Click Font to display the Font dialog box and set the font attributes of the but-
ton text.
To set the font attributes of the button text:
1. Click Font. The Font dialog box displays (Figure 7-78).

2. Select a font, font style, and size for the button text and click OK.
You are returned to the Edit Button dialog box.
Text Justify Inset
The justification determines how the text is displayed on the button. Select
Left, Center, or Right to horizontally align the text on the button. Select Top,
Center, or Bottom to vertically align the text on a button. Center is selected as
the default for both of them.
To define the justification of button text:
1. Double-click the desired button, or right-click and select Edit But-

ton. The Edit Button dialog box displays for the corresponding but-
ton.
text.
3. Select Top, Center, or Bottom for the vertical justification of the
text.
4. Click OK.
Background Inset
You can add colors to the button background, if desired. In addition, the back-
ground can display as transparent for a distinctive 3-D effect. You can also
select a color to display on the button when it is selected in the FOH.

Color Button
Click Color to display the Color dialog box and set the background color of
the button.
To add or change the color of the button background:
1. Click Color in the Background inset. The Color dialog box displays
(Figure 7-77).
Maintenance
2. Select a color for the button background and click OK. You are
System
returned to the Edit Button dialog box.

bitmap of the panel in which the button resides, creating a 3-D effect.
the panel. The button background displays as transparent, as shown in the left
example of Figure 7-89.
Figure 7-89 Background with or without Transparency Examples
Highlight Button
Click Highlight to display the Color dialog box and define the highlight color
of the button. This is the background color to which the button changes when
it is selected in the FOH.

To add or change the highlight color of the button background:
1. Click Highlight. The Color dialog box displays, as shown in Figure

7-90:
the Edit Button dialog box.
Bitmap Inset
Add bitmaps to the background of the button, if desired. To display your own
custom bitmaps, such as a company logo, create the graphic files, save them
as bitmaps, and place them in the ALOHA\BMP directory. Once you select a
bitmap, other options in the Bitmap inset become available.

Tile — Displays the bitmap in a tiled pattern for the button background, as
shown in the left example of Figure 7-91:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-91 Panel Examples with and without Tiled Bitmap
Transparent — Enables the background color of a bitmap to display as the

same color as the panel in which it resides. For example, if a bitmap image of
an arrow against a yellow background is placed on a panel with a black back-
ground, the yellow background of the bitmap displays as black to match the
color of the panel, as shown in Figure 7-92:
Figure 7-92 Panel Bitmap Examples

Display Text — Displays text over the bitmap. When cleared, this option
overrides all text properties and only displays the assigned bitmap.
On — Displays a bitmap on the button. All bitmaps in the ALOHA\BMP

directory are available for selection. If cleared, no bitmap displays and other
bitmap options are unavailable.
Up — Displays a bitmap when you select the button and is commonly used
for bill denominations which are computer enhanced with a ‘depressed’ look.
All bitmaps in the ALOHA\BMP directory are available for selection. You
must use a graphics program to create a bitmap with a ‘depressed’ look. An
example is shown on the left side in Figure 7-93:
Down — Displays a bitmap when you release the button and is commonly
used with the ‘Up’ check box for bill denominations. All bitmaps in the
ALOHA\BMP directory are available for selection. An example is shown on
right side in Figure 7-93:
Figure 7-93 Up and Down Examples of a Ten Dollar Bill
Bitmap Justify Options
The justification settings determine how the bitmap is displayed on the button.
Select Left, Center, or Right to horizontally align the bitmap on the button.
Select Top, Center, or Bottom to vertically align the bitmap on the button.
Center is selected as the default for both of these.
To define the justification of a bitmap on the background of the button:

bitmap.
map.
4. Click OK.

Preview Inset
The Preview window displays with a replica of the button’s appearance before
it is saved.
Hint Line
The Hint line is available for helpful tips for each button function.
Maintenance
Select OK to add the button to the panel. Refer to the rest of this section for
System
further information regarding the properties of buttons
Single Button Commands

Once you create a button, you can edit, move, resize, copy, and delete it.
When you save the panel in which the button resides, all properties of the but-
ton are saved. Use the Coordinates tool where applicable.
Edit Button
Use the Edit Button dialog box to edit the properties of a button, such as text,
color, justification, and more. Click the desired button to make it active. If you
do not select a button first, the Edit Button dialog box displays for the last
active button.
To edit a button:
1. Select Edit Button from the Commands menu or double-click the

button. The Edit Button dialog box displays.

2. Make the necessary changes to the properties of the button and
click OK.
Move and Resize Button

Move a single button to place it in a different location on the panel. Use this
command to make button placement flush against other buttons on the panel.
Click the desired button to make it active.
To move a button using the Coordinates tool:
1. Adjust the x coordinate using the scroll bar to move the button to the
left or right. Adjust it higher to move right and lower to move left.
2. Adjust the y coordinate using the scroll bar to move the button up or
down. Adjust it higher to move up and lower to move down.
To resize a button using the Coordinates tool:
1. Adjust the cx coordinate using the scroll bar to reshape the right side
of the button. The higher the number, the wider the button becomes.
2. Adjust the cy coordinate using the scroll bar, to reshape the bottom
side of the button. The higher the number, the taller the button
becomes.
You can also move and resize buttons using the mouse and keyboard. The fol-
lowing procedures depict how to move and resize buttons without the Coordi-
nates tool:
To move a button manually with the mouse:
1. Click the left mouse button at the top of the button.

2. Hold and drag the button to the desired location.

To move a button manually with the keyboard:
1. Click the left mouse button at the top of the button.

2. Press the Up, Down, Left, and Right arrow keys until the button is
at the desired location.
To resize a button manually with the mouse:
1. Place the cursor on any side of the button border until a double-
Maintenance
sided arrow displays.
System
2. Click the left mouse button.
3. Hold and drag the button until the button is at the desired size.
Copy Button
Copy a single button to replicate buttons with identical properties, such as
text, color, button function, and more. Click the desired button to make it
active.
To copy a button:
1. Right-click the desired button. The right-click menu displays.

2. Select Copy.
3. Right-click on an empty space on the panel. The right-click menu
displays.
4. Select Paste. The new button displays on the panel.
Delete Button
Delete a single button to remove it from the Aloha system.
To delete a button:
1. Select the button to remove.

2. Select Delete Button from the Commands menu. A confirmation
prompt displays asking if you want to delete the button, as shown in
Figure 7-94 Delete Button Dialog Box
3. Click OK.

Group Buttons
Use Panel Editor to define and place groups of buttons on panels. If the panel
to contain the buttons is not displayed, select Open Existing Panel > Button
Functions from the Commands menu. The Panel dialog box displays. Select
the panel and click OK.
Create a Group of Buttons
Maintenance
To create a group of buttons on a panel, select Buttons > Layout Panel Buttons
System
from the Commands menu. The Layout Panel Buttons dialog box displays, as
Figure 7-95 Layout Panel Buttons Dialog Box
A basic grid showing the layout of the buttons displays in the Preview win-
dow. The grid reflects the numeric values entered in the text boxes to the left
of the window. If any are left blank, the system automatically generates
default amounts to complete the button layout in a logical manner.
Number of Buttons — Designates the number of buttons to place on the

panel. If you are unsure of the number of desired buttons, we recommend you
select a low number. Once a number is selected and saved, the number cannot

be edited for a lower number. The system remembers the previous number
and displays the following error message, as shown in Figure 7-96:
Figure 7-96 Layout Panel Button Error
You can place a total of 50 buttons on a panel.
Rows — Specifies the number of horizontal rows to place on the panel.
Columns — Specifies the number of vertical columns to place on the panel.
Horizontal Spacing — Specifies the number of pixels to use to separate the

buttons horizontally.
Vertical Spacing — Specifies the number of pixels to use to separate the but-
tons vertically.
Button Width — Specifies the number of pixels to use for the width of all
buttons on the panel.
Button Height — Specifies the number of pixels to use for the height of all
buttons on the panel.
Click OK to display the button layout design centered in the middle of the
panel. All buttons default to the Unassigned button function.

If any buttons are outside the panel in the Preview window when you click
OK, an error message displays, as shown in Figure 7-97:
Maintenance
Figure 7-97 Layout Panel Buttons Error
System
Click OK to adjust the numeric values of your settings.
The Layout Panel Buttons command is only one method to fill a

panel with buttons. Once proficient, most users copy and paste
already assigned buttons onto the panel to retain the properties
of the button and reassign a function.
Group Button Commands

Use the rubberbanding technique to select the group of buttons to edit, format,
or delete. To use this technique, hold down the shift key, and click the left
mouse button on the panel outside of the buttons. Drag the arrow that displays
across the desired buttons. A broken line selection guide (rubberband) dis-
plays as a tool to make the button selection, as shown in Figure 7-98:
Figure 7-98 Rubberbanding Buttons

The width and height of the rubberband changes as it is dragged across the
buttons. Release the left mouse button and the button submenu displays a list
of 'group' button commands, as shown in Figure 7-99:
Figure 7-99 Right Click Rubberband Commands
Select a command from the button submenu. The buttons adjust according to
the selected command.
To use the rubberbanding feature, you must clear the 'Mark as Tem-
plate' and 'Fixed Button Layout' check boxes for the panel you are
editing.

Move a Group of Buttons on a Panel
To move a group of buttons on a panel, select the buttons using the 'rubber-
banding' technique. The button submenu displays. DO NOT select from the
button submenu. Click one of the selected buttons, move the selection to the
desired location, then release the left mouse button, as shown in Figure 7-100:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-100 Move a Group of Buttons on a Panel
Size Horizontal: Shrink to Smallest

To resize a group of buttons to the width of the thinnest button, select the but-
tons using the 'rubberbanding' technique. The button submenu displays. Select
SIZE Horizontal: Shrink to Smallest. The selected buttons horizontally resize
based on the width of the thinnest button, as shown in Figure 7-101:
Figure 7-101 Size Horizontal: Shrink to Smallest

Size Horizontal: Grow to Largest
To resize a group of buttons to the width of the widest button, select the but-
SIZE Horizontal: Grow to Largest. The selected buttons resize based on the
width of the widest button, as shown in Figure 7-102:
Figure 7-102 Size Horizontal: Grow to Largest
Size Vertical: Shrink to Smallest

To resize a group of buttons to the height of the shortest button, select the but-
SIZE Vertical: Shrink to Smallest. The selected buttons resize based on the
height of the shortest button, as shown in Figure 7-103:
Figure 7-103 Size Vertical: Shrink to Smallest

Size Vertical: Grow to Largest
To resize a group of buttons to the height of the tallest button, select the but-
SIZE Vertical: Grow to Largest. The selected buttons resize based on the
height of the tallest button, as shown in Figure 7-104:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-104 Size Vertical: Grow to Largest
Align Left Sides

To align the left sides of a group of buttons, select the buttons using the 'rub-
berbanding' technique. The button submenu displays. Select Align Left Sides.
The selected buttons align with the far left button, as shown in Figure 7-105:.
Figure 7-105 Align Left Sides

Align Right Sides
To align the right sides of a group of buttons, select the buttons using the 'rub-
berbanding' technique. The button submenu displays. Select Align Right
Sides. The selected buttons align with the far right button, as shown in Figure
7-106:
Figure 7-106 Align Right Sides
Space Evenly Side to Side

To place an even amount of space between a group of horizontal buttons,
select the buttons using the 'rubberbanding' technique. The button submenu
displays. Select Space Evenly Side to Side. The selected buttons space evenly
in a horizontal row based on the outermost button, as shown in Figure 7-107:
Figure 7-107 Space Evenly Side to Side

Align Tops
To align the tops of a group of buttons, select the buttons using the 'rubber-
banding' technique. The button submenu displays. Select Align Tops. The
selected buttons align with the topmost button, as shown in Figure 7-108:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-108 Align Tops
Align Bottoms
To align the bottoms of a group of buttons, select the buttons using the 'rub-
berbanding' technique. The button submenu displays. Select Align Bottoms.
The selected buttons align with the bottommost button, as shown in Figure 7-
109:
Figure 7-109 Align Bottoms

Space Evenly Up and Down
To place an even amount of space between a group of vertical buttons, select
the buttons using the 'rubberbanding' technique. The button submenu dis-
plays. Select Space Evenly Up and Down. The selected buttons space evenly
in a vertical row based on the outermost button, as shown in Figure 7-110:
Figure 7-110 Space Evenly Up and Down
Format a Group of Buttons

To format a group of buttons or copy the attributes of the first created button
within a selection, select the buttons using the 'rubberbanding' technique. The

button submenu displays. Select Format Buttons. The Format Buttons dialog
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-111 Format Buttons Dialog Box
Text Inset
Text — Applies the button text to all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons. Select the check
box to apply the button text of the first created button in the rubberband or
enter the text in the text box.
Color — Designates the text color for all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons. Select the
check box to apply the same text color to all selected buttons in the rubber-
band.
Color Button
Click Color to display the Color dialog box and set the color of the button
text.
Font — Applies the button font to all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons. Select the
check box to apply the same button font of the first created button in the ‘rub-
berbanded’ buttons.

Font Button
Click Font to display the Font dialog box and set the font attributes for all but-
tons.
Text Justify Inset
The justification setting determines how the text is displayed on the button.
Select Left, Center, or Right to horizontally align the text on the button. Select
Top, Center, or Bottom to vertically align the text on a button. Center is
selected as the default for both of these.
To select and define the justification of button text on a group of buttons:
1. Select a group of buttons using the ‘rubberbanding’ technique and

select Format Buttons. The Format Buttons dialog box displays for
the corresponding button.
2. Select Justify.
text.
4. Select Top, Center, or Bottom for the vertical justification of the
text.
5. Click OK.
Background Inset
Color — Designates the background color for all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons.

Select the check box to apply the same background color to all selected but-
tons in the rubberband.
Color Button
Click Color to display the Color dialog box and set the background color of
all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons.
Transparent — Enables the background of all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons to be

the same color as the background color of the panel in which it resides.
Highlight — Designates the highlight color for all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons to

display when you select the FOH button.

Highlight Button
Click Highlight to display the Color dialog box and set the color of all ‘rub-
berbanded’ buttons when you select it on the FOH.
Bitmap Inset
To assign a bitmap to a button, place a bitmap in the \ALOHA\BMP directory.

The following options are available:
Maintenance
System
Tile — Displays the bitmap as tiled on all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons.
Transparent — Enables the background of the bitmap to be the same color as

the background of the panel it resides on all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons.
Display Text — Displays text over the bitmap on all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons.
When cleared, this option overrides all text properties and only displays the
assigned bitmap.
On — Assigns a bitmap, if available, to display on all ‘rubberbanded’ but-

tons. This option displays the bitmap on the button. If cleared, no bitmap dis-
plays and other bitmap options are unavailable.
Up — Assigns a bitmap, if available, to display on all ‘rubberbanded’ buttons

when you select the button in the FOH.
Down — Assigns a bitmap, if available, to display on all ‘rubberbanded’ but-

tons when you select the button in the FOH.
Bitmap Justify Inset
Select the horizontal and vertical justification for the bitmap to display on all
‘rubberbanded’ buttons, with Center as the default selection for both direc-
tions.

To select a bitmap and define the justification on the background of a
group of buttons:
1. Select a group of buttons using the ‘rubberbanding’ technique and

select Format Buttons. The Format Buttons dialog box displays for
the corresponding panel.
bitmap.
map.
5. Click OK.
Preview of First Button Inset
The Preview window displays with a replica of the first created button
selected in the rubberband, before it is saved.
Select OK to format the buttons on the panel. Refer to the rest of this chapter
for further information regarding the properties of buttons.
Delete Button
This command displays on the Button submenu when you right click a panel
to perform maintenance.
To delete a group of existing buttons:
1. Select the buttons using the 'rubberbanding' technique. The button

submenu displays.
2. Select Delete Button. A confirmation message displays.
3. Click OK to delete the button, or click Cancel to end the procedure.

Button Functions
The Edit Button dialog box (Figure 7-88), defines the function performed by
the button and its properties. The function determines the behavior of the but-
ton and how the FOH operates, regardless of any text, bitmap, and color selec-
tions. When you select a function, the button text assumes the name of the
function. Every new button has an Unassigned function as default. Select a
function and click OK.
Maintenance
To add a button to a panel:
System
1. With the necessary panel selected as active, select New Button from
the Commands menu. The Edit Button dialog box displays.
2. Select the button function. A prompt asking if you want to change
this button’s function displays.
3. Click Yes to continue, or No to cancel the procedure.
4. Enter a unique name as the Text, or accept the default description.
5. Complete the available button attributes on the left side of the Edit
Button dialog box, such as color, font, and more.
6. Click OK. The button displays on the panel.
This is the basic procedure for adding a function to a button. Some functions
provide additional options on the right side of the Edit Button dialog box.
When additional options are available, a procedure specific to the function is
provided immediately following the function description. This procedure
assumes the necessary panel is active, you have selected New Button from the
Commands menu, and you have completed the button attributes on the left
side of the screen using the information provided earlier in this section.
The Function drop-down list displays only the button functions

applicable for the corresponding panel type. For example, when cre-
ating an Order Screen panel, you can not add a ‘Table’ button func-
tion to the panel. Likewise, you can not add a ‘Modify’ function to a
Button Function panel.
The following lists each button function and its purpose:

* Denotes functions which require additional information or offer
additional features on the Edit Button dialog box. These are
explained in detail with the corresponding button.
Adjust Payments
Enables adjustments to the tender information for a guest check that has been
closed. The check must be recalled and displayed on the screen before the
adjustment can be made.
Adjust Tips
Enables adjustments to tip information for a guest check that has been closed.
This is typically used for guest checks paid with a credit card. You must recall
the check and display it on the screen before the adjustment can be made.
Automation Script *
Enables the system to call or start a VB script from the FOH. This function
calls a one script file with an extension of .vbs and the files should be kept in
a new \ALOHA\SCRIPTS directory. The \SCRIPTS directory must reside on
the FOH terminals and be synchronized with the other updated directories
from the fileserver.

To add an automation script button:
1. Select Automation Script from the Function drop-down list. An

additional option displays, as shown in Figure 7-112:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-112 Automation Script Button Function
2. Enter a unique name as the Text, or accept the default description of

Automation Script.
3. Enter the command line for the automation script in the Script file to
be run text box.
4. Click OK.
Bitmap
Assigns a bitmap to a button and is not used for order entry. Any bitmap found
or added to the \ALOHA\BMP directory is available. Common graphics are
trees, podiums, and bar area.
Break
Opens the FOH Clock-Out screen enabling the employee to select a paid or
unpaid break.

Chain *
Opens another panel or collection of panels. The Chain function can also be
used as a Back button to return you to a previous panel or to access other
home screens by selecting multiple panels.
To add a chain button:
1. Select Chain from the Function drop-down list. Additional options

display, as shown in Figure 7-113:
Figure 7-113 Chain Button Function
2. Enter a unique name that is descriptive of the panel to which you are
chaining, such as Section One, or Bar.
3. Click Add. The Panel dialog box displays with a list of existing pan-
els.
4. Select the panel you wish to open when this button is selected in the
FOH, such as Section One, and click OK. The Edit Button dialog box
returns with a replica of the panel displayed in the ‘Screen View’ box.
The panel title and name displays in the ‘Panels in Chains’ list box.
Remember, when you work with multiple panels, any panel that is
partially or fully covered in the ‘Screen View’ box does not display
on the FOH.
5. Click OK.

To delete a panel in a chain function:
1. Select the unwanted panel in the Panels in Chain list box.

2. Click Delete.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to delete multiple panels in this chain command
until all the panels you want to remove are deleted.
4. Click OK.
Checkout
Maintenance
System
Opens the “Are you sure you want to check out?” screen, enabling you to run
the checkout process.
Clock Out
Clocks the employee out. An order entry employee that has not checked out,
cannot clock out.
Combine Tables
Enables the employee to combine two or more tables.
Delete
Behaves differently in the FOH, depending on the context in which it is used.

If you select nothing on the guest check, the last unordered item on the check
is deleted. If you select an unordered item on the check, only that item is
deleted. If one of these scenarios affects an ordered item, it becomes a void,
prompting for a void reason.
Delivery TableService
Activates the delivery screens if using Aloha Delivery/Frequent Buyer.
Detach Tables
Enables the employee to detach tables that have been combined.

Exit
Logs the employee out of the system and returns to the logon screen.
Get Check
Opens the FOH Enter Check Number screen, enabling the employee to get an
open check for tendering.
Hold
Enables you to place the last entered or selected unordered item on hold, and
Refer to the Delay
Send feature in
to define settings for the Delay Send feature.
the TableService Special Fea-
tures Guide for more informa- To add a hold button:
tion.
1. Select Hold from the Function drop-down list. Additional options
Figure 7-114 Hold Button Function
2. Select ONE of the following options:

To disable the delay send feature and enable the Hold button to per-
form as normal, select Manual Release from Hold. This disables all
other options on the dialog box. Skip to Step 10.
To activate the Delay Send feature, select Automatic Release from
Hold. This enables the remaining options on the dialog box.
3. Select the intervals to use for increasing or decreasing the hold time
in the FOH. Select ‘1 minute’, or from the five-minute intervals run-
ning from five to 60.
Maintenance
4. Select ONE of the following options:
System
Select Use Hold Time as Default to automatically release the items
based on the current time plus the number of minutes you select in
‘Hold Time’. You are not able to change the hold time in the FOH
when you use this setting.
Select Use Hold Time in Increments to increase or decrease the hold
time in the FOH based on the interval you select in ‘Hold Time’;
however, you cannot exceed the number of minutes you define in the
‘Limit to ___ Minutes’ check box.
5. If you select ‘Use Hold Time in Increments’, type the maximum num-
ber of minutes to place an item on hold in the Limit to __ Minutes
check box. The maximum number you can enter is 480 minutes (eight
hours), with 60 minutes as the default selection.
6. Select an order mode from the Automatic Release Order Mode
drop-down list to commit all held items to a specific order mode
when they are released from hold. If you select ‘Select 00’, you can
choose an order mode for the item in the FOH.
7. Complete the rest of the properties of the button using the Preview
screen as a guide.
8. Click OK to add the button to the panel.
Item Lookup
Invokes an item look up screen used for searching through all items whether
they are defined on a panel or not. When the employee touches the Item
Lookup button, a list of items and a keypad display. As the employee enters
the item number or description, the list displays only items that match the
characters the employee has entered. The employee can keep entering charac-

ters or choose an item from the list. After choosing an item, the item number,
item description, and price display.
Modify
Opens the FOH Modify screen for the selected menu item on the order. If no
modifiers are attached to the selected menu item, the screen displays with no
modifiers to select.
Open Drawer
Opens the cash drawer.
Order Type *
Specifies the order mode for the current order defined in Maintenance > Menu
> Order Modes. You can assign a default order mode to an order queue in
Maintenance > System > Order Queues. Assigning this eliminates the need to
select the same order type for every transaction.

To add an order type button:
1. Select Order Type from the Function drop-down list. An additional

option displays, as shown in Figure 7-115:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-115 Order Type Button Function
2. Select an order mode to designates the order type to assign to the

button.
3. Click OK.
PMS Check
Enables the employee to start a check with a PMS room inquiry. This function
is only available if PMS is in use and the ‘Start Check on PMS’ option is
selected for the job code in Maintenance > Labor > Job Codes.
PMS Inquire
Enables inquiries about a guest's status to determine information such as

whether the guest is registered at the hotel and has the authority to charge
orders to his or her room. Used with the PMS Interface add-on.
Print Receipt
Prints a receipt for the current order.

Quantity
Applies a multiplier to a selected item or the last item ordered according to the
number you enter in the FOH.
Query Gift Card Balance
Enables you to connect with the gift card host and query the remaining bal-
Refer to the
Aloha
ance of a gift card.
TableService Special Fea-
tures Guide for more infor- Recipe
mation on gift cards.
Opens the FOH Recipe screen and enables you to view and print available
recipes for items.
Refund
Enables the 'refund mode' so you can apply a refund to a guest check. The
refund mode orders items in negative entries on a new check. A Close Check
function button usually has to be selected to close the check and revert back to
positive entries. A refund is performed by opening and ringing up the selected
refunded items on a separate check. The entries and subtotal display in nega-
tive amounts. Tenders do not read negative amounts so a close check must be
performed.
Repeat
Repeats the selected item(s) on the order.
Reprint Check
Prints the check.
Reroute Display Board *
Opens the Display Board Routing screen and enables the employee to alter
display board routing.

To add a reroute display board button:
1. Select Reroute Display Board from the Function drop-down list.

Additional options display, as shown in Figure 7-116:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-116 Reroute Display Board Function Button
2. Select Define Reroute to allow you to preset a display board routing

destination.
3. Select the display board to reroute from the drop-down list, exclud-
ing PCD 101s.
4. Select the terminal from which the display board displays, from the
drop-down list.
5. Select Route Current Order Only to route only the order currently
in use, if desired. When the order is complete, the routing returns to
the pre-defined terminal. For example, terminal 1 has permanent con-
trol, and terminal 2 invokes temporary control. When terminal 2 com-
pletes the order, terminal 1 will regain control. If terminal 1 had an
order on it, that order is immediately displayed to the board.
6. Select an order mode from the Default Order Mode drop-down list
to set the default order mode for all orders coming from the terminal.
If you select a preset order mode for a specific item, the item follows
the selected order mode, as normal.
7. Click OK.

Run Application *
Enables the use of another application located on the file server. Common
applications are Calculator, Microsoft Word®, and Microsoft Excel®.
To add a run application button:
1. Select Run Application from the Function drop-down list. Addi-

tional options display, as shown in Figure 7-117:
Figure 7-117 Run Application Button Function
2. Enter a unique name as the Text, or accept the default description of

Run Application.
3. Enter the path of the application in the Enter the application name
and path text box.
4. If desired, select Pass Parameters to pass any parameters that might
be defined in the command line of the application.
5. If desired, select Continue Script Immediately to bypass any error
messages the Run Application function might encounter. Use this set-
ting if the system takes too long to locate the external application and
holds up the FOH.
6. Click OK.

Sales Summary
Displays the FOH Sales Summary report.
Script *
Enables the use of multiple button functions scripted together in one button
selection. The following example depicts how to create a script function con-
sisting of ‘check out’ and clock out’. Some functions require other required
Maintenance
information or selections. Refer to the individual function button for more
System
information.
To add a script button:
1. Select Script from the Function drop-down list. Additional informa-

tion displays, as shown in Figure 7-118:
Figure 7-118 Script Button Function

2. Click Edit. The Edit Script dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 7-
119:
Figure 7-119 Edit Script Dialog Box
3. If necessary, select Continue Script on Error or Cancel to enable

the script to continue if the selected function fails or asks for a confir-
mation.
4. Click Add. The Selected Function dialog box displays with a list of
available functions.
5. Select Checkout and click OK. Checkout is added as a function to
the Functions in Script list box.
6. Click Add again. The Function dialog box displays.
7. Select Clockout and click OK. Clockout is added as a function to the
‘Functions in Script’ list box.
8. Click OK. The Edit Button dialog box displays with the completed
script in the Function and Parameters list box.
Function — Displays the functions to perform, in order, for the

script. This order must follow a logical procedure in order to perform
correctly. For example, a checkout cannot be performed, if the clock-
out function is defined before the checkout function.
Parameters — Displays in parenthesis after the function in the

Functions in Script list box. The digit(s) before the comma designate
the ID number for the record, as defined in its respective function, if

applicable. The digit(s) after the comma designate additional selec-
tions made in the Edit Script dialog box for the selected function.
9. Click OK.
Special Functions
Displays the FOH Special Functions screen.
Table *
Maintenance
System
Tables play an intricate part of the Floor Plan screen. If the number of seats
Refer to Mainte-
and type of table was not specified when tables were initially defined in Main- nance > System
tenance > System > Tables, these properties must be defined to interact with > Tables earlier in this chap-
the Floor Plan Interface. ter for more information on
defining tables.
To add a Table button:
1. Select Table from the Function drop-down list. Additional options

Figure 7-120 Table Button Function
2. Select the table, as defined in Maintenance > System > Tables, from
the Table Number drop-down list.

3. Verify the Revenue Center, Style, and Number of Seats selections
associated with the table are correct. If they are not correct, click
Cancel and return to Maintenance > System > Tables to correct the
properties of the table.
4. Enter the number of degrees in the Orientation text box using the
scroll bar, to adjust the angle of the table.
We recommend not defining seats on the main floor panel, which

shows the entire floor plan, but rather define seats only on the drill-
down section panels.
5. Click Define Seats. The Define Seats dialog box displays, as shown
in Figure 7-121:
Figure 7-121 Define Seats Dialog Box
6. Verify the Number of Seats Defined and Seat Width for the Panel
associated with the table are correct. If ‘Number of Seats’ is not cor-
rect, click Cancel and return to Maintenance > System > Tables to
correct the number. If the ‘Seat Width for the Panel’ is not correct,
return to the Edit Panel dialog box for the Main Floor panel.

7. Select between Chair, Bench, Booth, or None on each of the four
sides of the table.
The seats and their position are based on the number of seats
defined. When one side of the table has ‘None’ selected, an extra
seating position, or chair, is added to another side of the table.
8. If pivot seating is in use, select a starting position in one of the eight

circular options. The pivot seating position displays in blue. If pivot
Maintenance
seating is not in use, select No Pivot Seat.
System
9. Click OK. You are returned to the Edit Button dialog box.
10. Click OK. The table is placed on the panel.
11. Repeat steps 1 through 10, until all tables are assigned with the cor-
rect table number and properties.
Transfer Tables
Enables an employee to transfer a table to themself or to another employee.
Unassigned
Designates there is no function assigned to this button. This is the default but-
ton function when the Edit Button dialog box displays for new buttons.
View Mode *
Enables separate viewing options for tables. A button must be created for each
mode.

To add a View Mode button:
1. Select View Mode from the Function drop-down list. Additional

options display, as shown in Figure 7-122:
Figure 7-122 View Mode Button Function
2. Enter a unique name that is descriptive of the view you are setting up,
such as View Check Number.
3. Select one of the following view mode options from the ‘View Mode
Toggle’ inset.
Standard View Mode — Displays tables with no text.
View TIme Open — Displays the number of hours and minutes the
table has been open.
View Owner — Displays the name of the employee who started the
table and is responsible for the sales.
View Time Since Last Item Ordered — Displays the time the last
item was ordered.

View Check Number — Displays the check number for the table.
4. Click OK. The button displays on the panel.

5. Repeat steps 1 through 5 until a button is created for each of the
available view modes.
Wall *
Displays a definable wall on the floor plan and is not used for order entry.
Maintenance
To add a Wall button:
System
1. Select Wall from the Function drop-down list. Additional options
Figure 7-123 Wall Button Function
2. Select either horizontal, vertical, square, circle, right diagonal, left

diagonal, top arch, bottom arch, left arch, or right arch, from the
‘Style’ drop-down list.
3. Select the curvature to define rounded edges and breaking points of
the wall. Curvature is available for each style except horizontal, verti-
cal, square, or circle styles.
For left or right diagonal styles, enter a curvature from -100 to 100.
The default is 0.

For top, bottom, left, or right arches enter a curvature from 0 to 100.
The default is 100.
4. Select either round or square to define the corners of the wall.
5. Select the thickness of the wall. The default is 4.
6. Click Wall Color to define the color of the wall object. The Color
7. Select a color and click OK. You are returned to the Edit Button dia-
log box.
8. Click OK.
Working with Tables
Displays the Working with Tables screen.

Screen Editor
Once you complete the creation of the panels and buttons, use Screen Editor
to combine panels and save them as a complete screen. You then assign the
screen to a specific job code, enabling employee access to the screen. You can
Refer to Chapter
define as many screens as necessary, but each job code can have only one 4, Labor Mainte-
screen assigned to it. Employees assigned to job codes with ‘Use Floor Plan’ nance Functions, for more
selected are able to use the Floor Plan screen to work with tables, and other information on Job Codes.
functions available on the panels.
Maintenance
System
Select Maintenance > System > Floor Plan > Screen Editor to display the
Screen Editor function tab, as shown in Figure 7-125:
Figure 7-125 Screen Editor Function Tab
Screen — Holds a two-digit number that together with the ‘Name’ uniquely
identifies the floor plan screen. To create a new screen, enter an unused num-
ber and press Enter. To edit an existing screen, scroll through the drop-down
list, select the screen to edit, and press Enter.
Name — Identifies the Floor Plan screen.

Remember Screen on Exit — Remembers the last screen accessed to dis-
play upon log in. For example, the full floor plan displays upon log in. How-
ever you may drill down to a particular section of the restaurant and then exit
the system. Select this check box to ‘remember’ the last screen that was dis-
played when you exited. The next time you log in, you return to the same
screen. If you do not select this check box, the full floor plan displays upon
log in, and you have to select the drilldown section each time.
Panel Type and Include on Screen View Lists — The ‘Panel Type’ and
‘Included in Screen’ selection lists are used to define the panels to display on
the screen. The ‘Panel Type’ list contains a list of the available panels as
defined in Maintenance > System > Floor Plan > Panel Editor. The ‘Included
in Screen’ list contains the panels currently selected to display on the screen.
To include a panel in the screen:
1. Select the panel in the Panel Type list box.

To add more than one panel at a time, hold down Shift to select con-
secutive panels, or Ctrl to select non-consecutive panels, and use
the mouse to select multiple panels.
2. Click >. The panel is moved to the ‘Included in Screen’ list box.
To remove a panel from the screen:
1. Select the panel in the Included in Screen list box.

To add more than one panel at a time, hold down Shift to select con-
secutive panels, or Ctrl to select non-consecutive panels, and use
the mouse to select multiple panels.
2. Click <. The panel is moved to the ‘Panel Type’ list box.
Background Color Button
Click the Background Color button to display the color palette used to define
the background color of the screen.

Screen Bitmap Inset
Screen Bitmap — Select the bitmap to display as the background of the

screen.
Tile — Displays the background bitmap in a tile pattern.
Transparent — Displays the background bitmap as transparent.
Maintenance
Test Button
System
Click Test to display the complete screen as it will appear in the FOH. To exit
the Test screen, click the right mouse button and select End Test.
Panel Editor Button
Click the Panel Editor button to display the Panel Editor workspace and tool-
bar.
Show and Test the Floor Plan

After you define panels as a screen, select the Show Panels for Screen com-
mand in Panel Editor to view it. A dialog box displays with a list of available
Floor Plan screens defined in Maintenance > System > Floor Plan > Screen
Editor. Double-click the screen to display, or select the screen and click OK.
Panel Editor also provides a limited testing tool for viewing the properties of
buttons and chaining links between panel relationships. Screens, panels and
buttons cannot be edited in the Test Screen mode.
Select Test Screen from the Commands menu to test a Floor Plan screen. A
dialog box displays with a list of the available Floor Plans. To exit the Test

Screen mode, select Exit again to display a list of options, shown in Figure 7-
126:
Figure 7-126 Test Screen Dialog Box
Select Restart Test Screen to run the test again, or End Test Screen to clear the
screen.

Surveys
The Customer Survey feature gives managers the functionality to do selective
customer call-in surveys via guest check. It is available for an additional cost
and requires a new security-key code.
The Survey function does not become active automatically upon obtaining the
license for it. You must first define a survey and then set it as the active sur-
Maintenance
vey, per the information provided in this part of the chapter. After defining an
System
active survey, you must next activate the Survey function itself. Select Main-
tenance > Store Settings, then select Survey from the Group drop-down list.
Select the Use Survey check box to activate the Survey function.
This functionality prints a custom banner and message on guest checks. The
banner prints on the check directly below the check-header information and
above the items. The message prints immediately after the check items and
before the first subtotal line.
Select Maintenance > System > Surveys to display the Surveys Function tab,
as shown in Figure 7-127::
Figure 7-127 Surveys Function Tab

ID — Holds a five-digit number that together with 'Description' uniquely
identifies each Survey record. To create a new record, enter an unused number
and press Enter. To edit an existing record, select it from the ‘Description’
The Surveys function tab provides the following subtabs which are used to
maintain survey records: Settings, Banner, Message 1, Message 2, and Mes-
sage 3.
Settings Subtab
The Settings subtab enables you to define the main parameters of the survey
process. You can use this subtab to determine the dates and day parts in which
the survey occurs, define the type of code, if any, that will be assigned to each
survey participant, and determine the frequency at which the survey prints on
guest checks during each day part selected.
Description — Designates a descriptive name for the Survey record.
Start Date — Specifies the date the Survey is to begin.
End Date — Specifies the date the Survey is to end.
Active — Used to make the defined survey active. It is important to note that
this check box will not cause the survey to actually take place. To make the
survey function itself active, select Maintenance > Store Settings, then select
Survey from the ‘Group’ drop-down list. Select the ‘Survey’ check box to
activate the Survey function.
Include Bartender? — Routes the survey to terminals in use by employees

assigned to a job code with 'Bartender' selected.
Include Cocktail? — Routes the survey to terminals in use by employees

assigned to a job code with 'Cashier' and 'Bartender' not selected, but with
'Sees Tabs' selected.
Code Output Inset
No Code — Prevents the printing of a code number on the guest check.

10 Digit — Prints a 10-digit code on the guest check.
Due to the non-unique nature of the 10-digit survey code, the possi-
bility of fraud exists in the restaurant survey. The 15-digit survey
code is recommended wherever possible.
The 10-digit code does not contain a reference to the check number. For this
reason, the system may generate duplicate numbers.
Maintenance
15 Digit — Prints a unique 15-digit code on the guest check.
System
Day Part, Frequency Setup Inset
Day Part — Uses to determine the day part(s) for which the survey will
occur. Select one to four day parts from the four ‘Day Part’ drop-down lists.
Frequency — Used to determine the frequency in which the survey will

print. Use these four ‘Frequency’ text boxes to enter the interval. For exam-
ple, if 5 is entered for the 'Breakfast' day part, the survey will print on every
fifth check during that day part.
Banner Subtab
The Banner subtab enables you to enter the banner message that is to print on
the guest check. Select the Banner subtab to define the message that intro-

duces the customer survey. The Survey Maintenance screen displays, as
Figure 7-128 Banner Subtab
Banner 1 to Banner 10 — Designates the text that is printed on the guest

check to introduce the customer survey. Enter the message starting in ‘Banner
1’ and continuing in sequence until it is entered.

Message 1 through Message 3 Subtabs
The three Message subtabs provide the means to enter questions and state-
ments that define and shape the customer survey. Select the Message subtabs
to enter the body of the survey, as shown in Figure 7-129:
Maintenance
System
Figure 7-129 Message Subtabs
Message 1 to Message 40 — Used to enter questions, statements, and any

information necessary to define and shape the survey as desired. These text
boxes are arranged on three subtabs. Use the spaces on the Message 1 subtab
in sequence before expanding to the Message 2 or Message 3 subtabs.
Special Characters — Used to generate a call-in date and the survey code.
These characters, placed on a line by themselves, finalize each survey when it
prints:
• @ — Prints a date 72 hours after the date the survey is printed.

• ^ — Prints the 10- or 15-digit code specified on the Settings subtab.

Hardware
Maintenance
Functions
This chapter discusses the setup and configuration of hardware that is
typically attached to the Aloha system, such as terminals, cash draw-
ers, printers, and video devices.
Terminals .......................................................................................... 8-5

Thumb Scanner Setup Requirements ......................................... 8-17
Pen Reader Setup Requirements................................................ 8-20
Cash Drawers ................................................................................. 8-22
Printers ........................................................................................... 8-26
Printer Configuration.................................................................... 8-32
Printer Groups ................................................................................ 8-34
Labels ............................................................................................. 8-36
Video Groups.................................................................................. 8-40
Video Queues ................................................................................. 8-41
Video Devices................................................................................. 8-42
Video Keypads................................................................................ 8-43
Display Boards................................................................................ 8-44
Accessories .................................................................................... 8-48
Cash Cards.................................................................................. 8-48
Drink Dispensers ......................................................................... 8-48
Scales and Tares......................................................................... 8-48
Chapter
8
8 – 2 Hardware Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3
The Hardware configuration features available in the Aloha system provide
significant flexibility as well as extensive capabilities.
Select Maintenance > Hardware to display the Hardware menu, shown in Fig-
ure 8-1:
Maintenance
Hardware
Figure 8-1 Hardware Menu
In the context of an operating restaurant, several types of hardware are typi-

cally attached to the system server and the order entry terminals. This hard-
ware provides communication between the manager and the employees,
between the restaurant and the customer, and between the restaurant and
credit card companies.
Some of the hardware will be output devices, such as video displays and print-
ers. Other devices will be bi-directional, such as cash card readers.
• Define and configure terminals and associated reader and display

devices.
• Set up and define cash drawers.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Hardware Maintenance Functions 8–3

• Set up and define printers.
• Define printer groups.
• Define labels.
• Define video groups.
• Set up and define display boards.
8–4 Hardware Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Terminals
Each Aloha system installation is licensed for a specific number of order entry
terminals, each of which serves as a 'node' or station on the Aloha network.
Additional nodes are permitted beyond the licensed number of order entry ter-
minals, but the additional nodes cannot be defined as or used as order entry
terminals. For example, a large system licensed for ten order entry terminals
might define an additional network node for a file server. The file server
would function normally on the network, but could not be used as an order
entry terminal, and thus, would not exceed the network license limitations.
Similarly, additional non-order entry terminals might be added to the network
to drive shared peripheral devices.
Peripheral devices, such as printers, pole displays, bar code readers, cash
drawers, mag card readers, and monitors are physically attached to these
nodes to become part of the network. Some of these devices, such as printers
and monitors (display only), are defined in their own database files and are
Maintenance
Hardware
assigned to a network node while others, such as pole displays, are defined
within a terminal record.
Printers and monitors, although attached to a specific network node, are

devices shared across the network. Pole displays, also attached to a specific
network node, are not shared devices and are available only to the assigned
terminal. Thus, an order entry terminal can have access to a printer in the
kitchen, but not to a cash drawer at the bar.
The Terminal function tab allows the user to define and configure each termi-
nal on the Aloha network in terms of its type, its physical characteristics, and
the attached peripherals.

Select Maintenance > Hardware > Terminals to display the Terminals function
tab, shown in Figure 8-2:
Figure 8-2 Terminals, General Subtab
The Terminals function tab contains three subtabs, General, Readers, and
Other. Settings that define the terminal itself and its output are located on the
General subtab. Settings that define input equipment attached to the terminal
are located on the Readers subtab. Settings that relate to pole display, or other
output devices are located on the Other subtab.
Term ID — Holds a three-digit number that together with 'Name' uniquely

identifies each terminal record. To create a new record, enter an unused num-
ber and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the Term ID
drop-down list, select the record to edit and press Enter. Select a Default
Printer, Voucher Printer, Revenue Center, and Terminal Type from the drop-
down lists as you define a new terminal.

As you create new terminal records, it is important to note that Revenue Cen-
ter is a required setting. If no revenue center is assigned, the system displays a
warning that the reports may not balance, but will allow you to continue. For
correct income reporting in the restaurant, it is recommended that a revenue
center is selected for the terminal.
As many terminals as there are nodes on the network can be defined as long as
the number of terminals defined as order entry terminals does not exceed the
number provided under the Aloha license agreement. Terminals are desig-
nated as order entry terminals using the Order Entry Terminal check box on
the General subtab.
General Subtab
Settings on the General subtab enable you to define the terminal itself, and to
define its print output. You can also establish the input screen available to the
terminal.
Maintenance
Hardware
Name — Enter a name for the terminal. Terminal naming conventions are
entirely up to the user. However, it is suggested that the terminal name be
descriptive or reflect the physical location, such as Kitchen, Bar, or Dining 1.
This can assist when a terminal fails by reporting a specific location in the
error message, and is useful when troubleshooting the network.
Printers Inset
This inset enables you to define and direct the output of the terminal to print-
ers in the restaurant, according to your needs. This capability provides the
flexibility to print kitchen orders, labels for take-out orders, credit-card
receipts, and guest checks, on different printers in different locations within
the restaurant.
Default Printer — Specifies a previously defined printer that may or may not
be physically attached to the terminal. This should be the printer that is nor-
mally used for local printing by the defined terminal. Local printing includes
guest checks, printed reports, and messages. The actual physical connections
between a terminal and a printer are set up in Maintenance > Hardware >
Printers. To select a printer, scroll through the drop-down list and choose a
previously defined printer.

Default Printer Button
Click Default Printer to access the Printers function tab. Here you can perform
maintenance in the printers function, including add new records if the printer
you need is not there.
Voucher Printer — Designates the printer for EDC vouchers for credit cards.
This also requires a previously defined printer that may or may not be physi-
cally attached to the terminal defined in the terminal record. To select a
voucher printer, scroll through the drop-down list and select a previously
defined printer designated for EDC vouchers.
Voucher Printer Button
Click Voucher Printer to access the Printers function tab. Here you can per-
form maintenance in the printers function, including add new records if the
printer you need is not there.
Label Printer — Specifies a previously defined printer that may or may not
be attached to the terminal, for the purpose of printing labels that are to
accompany take-out orders. To select a printer, scroll through the drop-down
list and choose a previously defined printer.
Label Printer Button
Click Label Printer to access the Printers function tab. Here you can perform
maintenance in the printers function, including add new records if the printer
you need is not there.
Label Type — Specifies a previously defined label type. If a label printer is

specified, you must also specify a label type.
Label Type Button
Click Label Type to access the Labels function tab. Here you can define a
label for the printer, and the contents of the label.

Revenue Center — Attaches the terminal to a previously defined revenue
center. Guest checks are assigned to a revenue center by the table on which
they are opened. If the check is a tab or there is no revenue center for the
table, then the revenue center for the terminal is used.
Click Revenue Center to access the Revenue Centers function tab. Here you
can perform maintenance in the Revenue Center function, including add new
records if the revenue center you need is not there.
Store — Associates a terminal with a particular store in systems using Super-

Site. This function is active only when SuperSite is installed.
Refer to the
SuperSite
Store Button User’s Guide for more infor-
mation.
Click Store to access the Stores function tab. This button is not functional in
systems not using SuperSite.
Maintenance
Hardware
Terminal Type Inset
The settings in this inset define the type of terminal in the terminal record.
Select the type of terminal from the drop-down list. If the type of terminal you
are using does not display in the drop-down list, contact Technical Support for
help with selecting an appropriate terminal type from the list.
Order Entry Terminal — Designates the defined terminal as an order entry

terminal. The number of terminals is not restricted by the Aloha system
license. However the number of order entry terminals is limited to the number
permitted under the license agreement for the restaurant.
Interface Terminal — Designates the selected terminal as an interface termi-

nal. The license agreement for the restaurant must include a specific number
of order-entry terminals. When the selected terminal is designated as an inter-
face terminal, an order-entry terminal must be defined as its output terminal.

Interface Server — Defines the file server as an order entry terminal as well,
to run the Aloha FOH application without a user interface. The FOH applica-
tion then functions to receive order information from other order entry
devices, such as hand-held input devices, and distributes that information to
other devices, such as printers, display screens, and cashier terminals. The file
server, when used in this manner, performs FOH functions without the need
for an order entry terminal license.
Interface Host — Designates an order-entry terminal to receive the output of

an interface terminal.
Screens Inset
This inset enables you to define a specific screen to display on the selected
terminal.
TS Screen — Specifies a previously created screen that is to display on the

selected terminal. Select the desired screen from the drop-down list. Screens
defined in TableService are intended to work with the Floor Plan feature.

TS Screen Button
Refer to Chapter
5, Menu Mainte-
Click TS Screen to display the Screen Editor function tab, as shown in Figure
8-3: information about how to use
the Screen Editor feature.
Refer to Chapter 7, System
more information about the
Floor Plan feature.
Maintenance
Hardware
Figure 8-3 Screen Editor
EDC Info — Used when a processor has been configured with multiple
indexes in EDC. The terminal must be assigned to a particular processor
index. For example, if there is a CES, CES2, and CES3 processor defined in
EDC, and this terminal needs to be assigned to the CES2 processor, enter
INDEX=2 in the ‘EDC Info’ text box. If there is only one processor index for
the processor, no entry is required in this text box. All configuration of EDC
takes place outside the Aloha system.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Hardware Maintenance Functions 8 – 11

Readers Subtab
Settings on the Readers subtab enable you to define any of several input
devices that are used to identify customers or employees, and to interface with
their credit card companies, as appropriate. Select the Readers subtab to dis-
play these settings, shown in Figure 8-4:
Figure 8-4 Terminals, Readers Subtab
Magnetic Stripe Reader Inset
Use Mag Stripe Reader — Indicates a magnetic stripe reader is physically

attached to the defined terminal. If a magnetic stripe reader is not used, this
setting should be cleared.
Type — Defines the comparable type of magnetic stripe reader attached to the
terminal. Select the type of magnetic stripe reader from the drop-down list.

OPOS — If an OPOS MSR is selected as the MSR type, the OPOS text box
becomes available. This must contain the name of the OPOS MSR driver file
as it appears in the Registry Editor (Note: The driver files must be installed
first). For example, the OPOS name for a Panasonic MSR would be JS-
9000MSR. To determine this, access a DOS command line, type REGEDIT
and press Enter. The Registry Editor displays. Click the + sign to the left of
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE. Continue to click the + sign to the left of
SOFTWARE, OLEforRetail, ServiceOPOS, and MSR. The installed drivers
display under MSR. Determine the name of the driver file to be used and enter
it into the 'OPOS' text box.
Track Two Only — Indicates when the magnetic stripe reader uses track
two.
Bar Code Reader Inset
Use Bar Code Reader — Indicates a bar code reader is physically attached
to the defined terminal. If a bar code reader is not used, this setting should be
Maintenance
Hardware
cleared.
Port — Specifies the port where the bar code reader is attached to the termi-
nal. Select the port from the drop-down list. The system uses the reader port
setting when the 'Use Bar Code Reader' check box is selected.
Type — Defines the type of bar code reader attached to the terminal. Select
the type of bar code reader from the drop-down list.
Pen Reader Inset
The settings in this inset enable you to activate pen readers for use with the
system. After setting up each terminal, as appropriate, to use a pen reader, you
must also enable managers to assign pen readers to individual employees.
This setting is located in Maintenance > Labor > Access Levels on

the Employees subtab (Figure 8-7).

Refer to the Pen Reader Setup Requirements section in this chapter for more
information about how to use this type of equipment with the Aloha system,
and about how the system searches for a match to a pen inserted into the
reader.
Use Pen Reader — Enables pen readers in the system.
Port — Defines the port to be used by the pen reader.
Thumb Scanner Inset
The settings in this inset enable you to activate and define a thumb scanner for
use with the system. The Aloha system makes use of biometrics technology,
so no actual thumb prints are stored in the system. A pattern of ‘landmarks’ is
used when comparing an individual against the database.
The Aloha system uses the identification process, rather than verification.
Identification as a process is potentially faster, in that it is a one-step process.
The system reads the scanned image, the thumb, then proceeds through the
previously defined levels in the system to determine the owner of the print.
Verification is a two-step process, in which the person seeking access to the
system clocks or logs in, then presents his or her thumb for verification of
identity against patterns stored in the database.
Refer to the Thumb Scanner Setup Requirements section in this chapter for
more information about how to use this type of equipment with the Aloha sys-
tem, and about how the system searches for a match to a thumb print.
Use Thumb Scanner — Enables thumb scanners in the system.
Type — Select the type of thumb scanner from the drop-down list. Currently,
Veridicom is the only type of thumb scanner supported by the Aloha system,
although support for other types of equipment may be added later.

Other Subtab
Settings on the Other subtab enable you to define and configure any of several
output devices that are used to communicate with, or to supply change to the
customer. Select the Other subtab to display these settings, shown in Figure 8-
5:
Maintenance
Hardware
Figure 8-5 Terminals, Other Subtab
Pole Display Inset
Use Pole Display — Indicates a pole display is physically attached to the

defined terminal. Select the type of pole display from the drop-down list. If a
pole display is not used, this setting should be cleared.
Type — Defines the standard types of pole displays supported by the Aloha
system. Select the pole display type from the drop-down list. This list includes
the following: PD220XL, CompuAdd, IBM4695 ANOP A, Mintronix 2x20
LCD Display, and OPOS Line Display.

Port — Specifies the port where the pole display is connected to the terminal.
Select the port from the drop-down list. The system uses the pole port setting
when the 'Use Pole Display' check box is activated.
OPOS — If an OPOS Line Display is selected for the pole type, the OPOS
text box becomes available. This text box must contain the name of the OPOS
driver file as it appears in the Registry Editor (Note: The driver files must be
installed first.) For example, the OPOS name for a Panasonic Pole Display
would be JS-9000LD. To determine the OPOS name, access a DOS command
line, type REGEDIT and press Enter. The Registry Editor displays. Click the
+ sign to the left of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE. Continue to click the + sign
to the left of SOFTWARE, OLEforRetail, ServiceOPOS, and LineDisplay.
The installed drivers display under LineDisplay. Determine the name of the
driver file to be used and enter it into the 'OPOS' text box.
Coin Changer Inset
Type — Defines the comparable type of coin changer attached to the termi-
nal. Select the type of coin changer from the drop-down list.
Port — Specifies the port where the coin changer is connected. Select the
port from the drop-down list.
Aloha Spy Server Inset
The Aloha system has the capability of interfacing with the TVS security sys-
tem. The TVS environment must be set up on the file server before the inter-
face parameters are specified here.
The TVS security system must be enabled in Store Settings. Select

Maintenance > Store Settings, then select Security from the Group
drop-down list. Select ‘Use Aloha Spy’ on the POS Security subtab.
Port — Enter the TCP port value, using the same value that was established
for the TVS security system on the file server.
IP — Enter the IP address or the name of the computer being used as the file
server.

Thumb Scanner Setup Requirements
After setting up each terminal, as appropriate, to use a thumb scanner, you
must also complete the steps outlined below to activate this capability in your
system. You must define which employees must use the thumb scanner for log
in or clock in purposes. You must also select the managers access level and
enable thumb print enrollment capability.
Employee Setup
Each employee required to use the thumb print scanner must be designated as
such in Employee Maintenance. Select Maintenance > Labor > Employees to
display the Employees function tab, as shown in Figure 8-6:
Maintenance
Hardware
Figure 8-6 Employees, Thumb Scanner Setting
On the Employee subtab, to make use of the thumb scanner mandatory, enable
one or both of the settings that relate to the thumb scanner.
Must use Thumb Scanner - Clock In — Requires the selected employee to

use the thumb scanner to clock in. The employee clocks out in conjunction
with check out and other policies.

Must use Thumb Scanner - Log In/JIT — Requires the selected employee
to use the thumb scanner to log in to the Aloha system each time. If the
employee touches ‘Exit’ to let another person use the terminal, or to perform
other tasks, the thumb scanner must be used to return to active use of the ter-
minal.
These settings are mutually exclusive with regard to the ‘Must Use Mag
Cards’ setting. You can use one or both of the thumb scanner settings, or you
can enable the mag card setting, but you cannot use both types of equipment
at the same time.
Access Levels
In addition to enabling the hardware and defining which employees must use
thumb scanners, at least one manager must be given access to enroll new
thumb print images in the system. This permission setting is located in Main-
tenance > Labor > Access Levels, as shown in Figure 8-7:
Figure 8-7 Access Levels, Enroll Thumb Prints

Managers with ‘Enroll Thumb Prints’ enabled may add thumb prints
to the system from an FOH terminal by touching the Enroll Thumb
Prints button. However, if a thumb scanner device is not connected
to the terminal, the button does not display.
To give a manager the ability to enroll thumb prints:
1. Select the access level to which the manager is assigned.

3. Select ‘Enroll Thumb Prints’.
4. Click Save.
After all settings are in place, you must select Utilities > Refresh Data to
transfer the new information to the FOH terminals. After the data refresh is
complete, the manager may enroll thumb prints, and employees may clock in
for work, or log in to the Aloha system using the thumb scanner.
Maintenance
When an employee uses the thumb scanner, the system proceeds in accor-
Hardware
dance with a hierarchy of employee categories, to minimize the amount of
time the system spends looking through employee records. Using the identifi-
cation technique, the system begins its search at the top of the hierarchy, and
moves to successive levels until it locates the employee who is using the
thumb scanner.
The system uses the following search hierarchy when identifying employ-
ees:
1. The system searches first for employees who are clocked in, have
used this specific terminal for the current day, and have server or bar-
tender job codes.
2. The system next searches for employees who are clocked in, begin-
ning with those with server or bartender job codes, then for employ-
ees with any other job codes.
3. The system finally searches through all employees who are not
clocked in.
4. The system takes no action if no match is found for the thumb print.

Pen Reader Setup Requirements
The pen reader feature enables the use of an electronic ‘pen’, styled much like
a typical ball-point pen, for employee identification for purposes of clock-in
and log-in access to the Aloha system. After setting up each terminal, as
appropriate, to use a pen reader, you must give managers permission to enroll
pen IDs in the system and assign them to individual employees.
Access Levels
To enable pen identification enrollment capability, select Maintenance >

Labor > Access Labels to display the Access Levels function tab, then select
the Employees subtab to gain access to the ‘Assign Pen ID’s’ setting, as
Figure 8-8 Access Levels, Assign Pen IDs

To give a manager the ability to assign pen IDs:
1. Select the access level to which the manager is assigned.

3. Select ‘Assign Pen ID’s’.
4. Click Save.
A button is added to the manager’s System screen for the purpose of assigning
pen IDs. When a manager touches the button, the system checks the access
level granted to the individual manager. If this function is enabled in his or her
profile, the pen ID assignment process begins.
After all settings are in place, you must select Utilities > Refresh Data to
transfer the new information to the FOH terminals. After the data refresh is
complete, the manager may assign pen IDs, and employees may clock in for
work, or log in to the Aloha system using the identification pens to which they
are assigned.
Maintenance
Hardware

Cash Drawers
Due to hardware considerations, cash drawers are attached to printers or to
computer terminals. When the system accesses a cash drawer, it sends a signal
to the assigned cash drawer in one of two ways:
• When the cash drawer is connected to the printer designated for the
order entry terminal, the printer signals the drawer after receiving the
initial signal from the terminal.
• When the cash drawer is connected directly to the order entry termi-
nal, the terminal signals the drawer.
Select Maintenance > Hardware > Cash Drawers to display the Cash Drawers
Figure 8-9 Cash Drawers
Drawer ID — Holds a three-digit number that together with 'Description'

uniquely identifies each Cash Drawer record. To create a new record, enter an
Drawer ID drop-down list, select the record to edit and press Enter.

Description — Enter a descriptive name for the Cash Drawer record. Naming
conventions are entirely up to the user. However, it is suggested that the name
be descriptive or reflect the location of the cash drawer.
Drawer Type — Defines the drawer type that is attached to the system. The
list contains the names of cash drawer types that currently work with the
Aloha system.
Serial Interface Inset
Compulsory Method — Activated only when Serial 223 32000 is selected as

the Drawer Type. Select one of the following options:
CTS — Clear to Send is pin 8 for a 9-pin serial port, and pin 5 for a 25-pin
serial port.
If using CTS or RI and a drawer is not attached to the selected port,
Maintenance
or if the drawer does not support this method, the system will not
Hardware
allow cashiers to input an order or make a no sale.
RI — Ring Indicator is pin 9 for a 9-pin serial port, and pin 22 for a 25-pin
serial port.
Printer Interface Inset
Printer — Specifies the printer to which the cash drawer is connected. This
selection is only active when a printer interface cash drawer type is selected.
Drawer Number — Determines the connection order number of the cash

drawer device. The value for the first drawer connected is 1, and the value for
the second is 2. Only two drawers can be connected to any one printer. This
selection is only active when a printer interface cash drawer type is selected.
Other Interfaces Inset
Terminal — Defines the terminal number to which the cash drawer is con-
nected. This selection is only active when a non-printer interface cash drawer
type is selected.

Port — Specifies the serial port corresponding to the physical connection of
the cash drawer. This selection is only active when a non-printer interface
cash drawer type is selected.
OPOS — If OPOS Cash Drawer is selected as the Drawer Type, the 'OPOS'
cash drawer driver file as it appears in the Registry Editor. (Note: The driver
files must be installed first.) For example, the OPOS name for a Panasonic
cash drawer could be either JD-9000CD1 or JD-9000CD2. To determine this,
access a DOS command line, type REGEDIT and press Enter. The Registry
Editor displays. Click the + sign to the left of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE.
Continue to click the + sign to the left of SOFTWARE, OLEforRetail, Servi-
ceOPOS, and CashDrawer. The installed drivers display under CashDrawer.
Determine the name of the driver file to be used and enter it into the 'OPOS'
text box.
Public Cash Drawer Setting
This setting makes it possible for the manager to designate the drawer as a
‘public’ cash drawer using the Make Public button located in the ‘Assign
Drawer’ function. When designated as a ‘public’ drawer, this cash drawer is
available to employees clocked in under a job code with ‘Sees Tabs’ selected.
An employee cannot be specifically assigned to a public cash drawer.
Public cash drawers are often desirable in fast-paced environments in which

quick and accurate service are more important than strict cash accountability.
When a public cash drawer is established, cash accountability becomes part of
the financial profile of the revenue center. A bar is a good example of an envi-
ronment in which public cash drawers could be an asset to the business.
To have access to a public cash drawer, an employee:
• Must be logged in to the Aloha system in a job code with ‘Sees Tabs’
selected.
• Must not be specifically assigned to a single cash drawer or a discrete
group of cash drawers.

To change access from a non-public cash drawer to a public cash drawer,
an employee must:
1. Complete a checkout of the current cash drawer.

2. Clock out of the system.
3. Clock back in to the system in a job code with ‘Sees Tabs’ active.
Public cash drawers can be limited to a specific revenue center for retention of
fund accountability within that revenue center. The revenue center of the cash
drawer is defined by the revenue center assignment of the terminal to which it
is attached. Select Maintenance > Store Settings > Security to display the
Security group in the Store Settings function tab. Select the Cash Drawer sub-
tab for access to this setting, as shown in Figure 8-10:
Maintenance
Hardware
Figure 8-10 Limit Public Cash Drawers by Revenue Center

Printers
The Printers function tab is used to define the physical connections between
terminals and printing devices. Each printer must be connected to a terminal
and should have an assigned backup printer to use in the event of hardware
failure. After printers are defined, they are grouped together logically in
Maintenance > Hardware > Printer Groups for use by other components of the
Aloha system.
Select Maintenance > Hardware > Printers to display the Printers function tab,
Figure 8-11 Printers, Setup Subtab

identifies each printer record. To create a new record, enter an unused number
and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the Number drop-
down list, select the record to edit and press Enter.
The Printers function tab provides the following subtabs which are used to
maintain printer records: Setup, and Options.

Setup Subtab
The Setup subtab enables you to configure the printer to take maximum
advantages of the features and flexibility built into the printer. Select the
Setup subtab from the Printers function tab (Figure 8-11) to configure a new
printer or to modify the configuration of an existing printer.
Name — Enter a descriptive name for the printer. Printer naming conventions
are set by the user. However, it is suggested that the printer name be descrip-
tive or reflect its physical location, such as Kitchen, Pantry, Bar, or Dining.
Terminal — Reflects the physical connection between the printer and termi-
nal. Select the terminal to which the printer is connected from the drop-down
list.
Port — Specifies the serial and RT Card ports where the defined printer is
connected. This setting must reflect the hardware configuration.
Maintenance
Hardware
Backup — Defines a substitute printer for the defined printer in the event of
hardware failure. When the defined printer fails, the system reroutes output to
the backup printer after the time interval in the 'Reroute Timeout' text box.
Type — Contains a list of the typical printers encountered in an Aloha system

environment. Select the printer type from the drop-down list.
For all slip printers, define the ‘Prefix Lines’ and ‘Lines Per Sheet’
in Store Settings > Printing Group > Check Style. Otherwise only
one line at a time prints and feeds the paper until it runs out.
OPOS Name — If an OPOS Printer is selected as the printer type, the 'OPOS'
printer driver file as it appears in the Registry Editor (Note: The driver files
must be installed first). To determine this, access a DOS command line, type
REGEDIT and press Enter. The Registry Editor displays. Click the + sign to
the left of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE. Continue to click the + sign to the
left of SOFTWARE, OLEforRetail, ServiceOPOS, and MSR. The installed
drivers display under MSR. Determine the name of the driver file to be used
and enter it into the 'OPOS' text box.

Windows Printer Name — Anything that can print in the FOH can also be
printed to a printer that has been set up in the Microsoft® Windows® operating
system. The Windows Printer must be selected as the printer type from the
'Type' drop-down list, thus activating the 'Windows Printer Name' text box.
This text box is used to link an Aloha printer definition to a Windows printer
definition. It is very important that the printer name input in this field match
the printer name assigned in Windows under Start > Settings > Printers. For
Windows 95 (all printers) and Windows NT® (local printers), the printer name
should be entered here as entered under Printers in Windows. For example: If
the Windows printer is called HP LaserJet Plus, then the 'Windows Printer
Name' text box must contain HP LaserJet Plus. On Windows NT systems
(network printers), the printer name includes the server name. In this case, the
'Windows Printer Name' text box must contain the path. For example, if the
printer name on an NT system is HP LaserJet Plus on Server01, the text box
should say \\Server01\HP LaserJet Plus. (Note: The Windows Printer Name
feature works only if the printer drivers for the Windows printer are installed
on the FOH terminal.)
Settings — Activated only when 'Windows Printer Name' is selected. Dis-

plays a secondary dialog box that permits margin, column, and font settings to
be defined. Press Tab to move from one setting to the next. Make all desired
changes, then click Save to save the changes. A Select Font dialog box is also
available when using a Windows printer. The Select Font dialog box permits
the font, font style, and font size to be defined. To make changes, scroll
through the selection lists and highlight the desired font, font style, and font
size. When finished, click OK.
Send Non-Checks to — Establishes the printer to which non-check print jobs

are to be sent. Print jobs of this nature would include reports generated from
an order entry terminal. Generally used with slip printing, but not required.
Any printer can send non-checks to another printer.
Preloaded Logo — Takes advantage of preloaded logos stored in non-vola-

tile RAM (NVRAM) in certain models of printers. This check box is available
only when a printer containing preloaded logos is selected from the Type
drop-down list. To determine the logo to use, consult the literature received
with the printer or consult the printer manufacturer.

Code Page — Used to associate the printer to a set of character codes for
another language on Epson printers. We currently support the Euro (prints the
Euro monetary symbol) and Cyrillic (Russian) character sets.
The Code Page text box specifies the character set for the printer, but
you must also specify the character set for the terminal. To specify
the character set for the terminal, select Start > Settings > Control
Panel and double-click Regional Options. Select the language set-
ting for the system.
Use the following table to determine the settings for the corresponding lan-
guage:
Supported Code Page Printer Setting Terminal Setting

Euro 858 Western Europe and U.S.
(default)
Cyrillic (Russian) 866 Cyrillic
Maintenance
Hardware
Options Subtab
The Options subtab provides configuration settings that relate more to the res-
taurant environment, such as transfer and timeout functions. Select the
Options subtab from the Printers function tab to complete the configuration of

a new printer or to modify the configuration of an existing printer, as shown in
Figure 8-12:
Figure 8-12 Printers, Options Subtab
In Kitchen — Items routed to a printer group containing a printer that has 'In
Kitchen' selected also print at the expediter printer. Specify the expediter

printer in the Printing group of Maintenance > Store Settings, shown in Figure
8-13:
Maintenance
Hardware
Figure 8-13 Enable Expedite Printer
Using this method, only orders that are 'split' to multiple printer groups print
to the expediter printer for quality control. Note: This method eliminates the
need to include the expediter printer in printer groups.
Reroute Timeout — Defines the amount of time, in seconds, that the system
will wait before rerouting the print job from the defined printer to the Backup
printer, as defined on the Setup subtab.
Beeps — Sets the number of audible signals emitted by the printer each time
a chit is printed. This feature is only available on some printer models. Some
printers use an annunciator connected to the cash drawer port on the printer to
create the beep sounds. Consult the manufacturer of your printer for more
information.
In all cases, the beeps are activated by the same signal that opens a cash
drawer. If a cash drawer is attached to the printer, verify that this setting is '0'
to prevent the cash drawer from opening each time a chit is printed.

# Guest Checks — Defines the number of guest checks to print.
Chit Printing Inset
The settings in this inset enable you to define the contents of the chit, as to
what to include or to exclude. These settings provide considerable flexibility
in designing a chit that contains information necessary for your business, but
excludes unnecessary information.
Print item prices — Causes the system to print item prices on the chit.
Print order total — Causes the system to print the order total on the chit.
Print terminal name — Causes the system to print on the chit, the name by
which the order terminal is identified in the system.
Never print delivery/carryout information — Prevents the system from

printing delivery or carryout information on the chit.
Never print seat information — Prevents the system from printing seat
information on the chit.
Always sort by seat number — Enables the system to sort chit information
by seat number, when seat numbering is in use.
*******Seat 1******
Steak
Salad
*******Seat 2******
Fish
Salad
Printer Configuration
Certain interactions take place between the Aloha system and computer oper-
ating systems, such as Microsoft Windows NT® and Windows® 95 and Win-
dows® 98, with regard to printers. It is very important to make allowances for
these interactions before setting a defined printer as active.

Windows NT
Parallel printers are not supported on order entry terminals with Windows NT
installed as their operating system. If the printer runs out of paper or is off
line, it will lock up the FOH system. Serial printers are recommended for
order entry terminals using Windows NT.
Windows 95 and Windows 98

When a printer is attached to a serial port on an order entry terminal using
Windows 95 or Windows 98, FIFO must be turned off if this printer is to
receive output correctly from the Aloha system. Failure to do this results in
erratic printing behavior, where characters are dropped.
To turn off FIFO:
1. Open the Control Panel function on your computer.
Maintenance
2. Double-click System.
Hardware
3. Select the Device Manager tab.
4. Click the '+' next to Ports to reveal the specific ports.
5. Select the specific port that needs to be changed.
6. Click Properties.
7. Select the Port Settings tab.
8. Click Advanced.
9. Make sure the Use FIFO Buffers check box is not active.
10. After making changes, click OK as many times as necessary to close
the System Properties dialog box.
11. Reboot the computer before attempting to print.

Printer Groups
The Printer Groups feature allows printers to be combined into logical groups
after they are defined in Maintenance > Hardware > Printers. Most compo-
nents of the Aloha system use printer groups instead of individual printers to
give added flexibility to the system.
Printer Groups are a powerful feature of the Aloha system. The user can han-
dle virtually any printing situation by routing items to a dedicated Printer
Group, which can then be rerouted without affecting other items.
Creating printer groups has less to do with physical printer layout and more to
do with the logical organization of printers in the restaurant setting. While
printers can be considered a hardware issue, printer groups are operational
issues. For example, if an order prints to multiple printers in the kitchen, the
entire order can be sent to an 'expediter' printer for quality control before it is
received by the customer. This is accomplished by including the 'expediter'
printer in each printer group. For this reason, well-considered printer group
planning can take significant advantage of the efficiencies built into the Aloha
system.

Select Maintenance > Hardware > Printer Groups to display the Printer
Groups function tab, shown in Figure 8-14:
Maintenance
Hardware
Figure 8-14 Printer Groups
Group ID — Holds a three-digit number that together with 'Name' uniquely

identifies each printer group. To create a new record, enter an unused number
and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the Group ID drop-
Name — Enter a descriptive name for the printer group. Printer group naming
conventions are entirely up to the user. However, it is suggested that the name
be descriptive or reflect printer group tasks.
Printers — Select one or more of the previously defined printers to assign to

the printer group from the drop-down lists. Each printer group can have up to
five assigned printers.
Printers Button
Click Printers to open the Printers function tab, if a new printer must be
defined.

Labels
An important feature of any take-out or delivery restaurant is the ability to
know what is in a container without opening it. To use this feature in the
Aloha system, at least one label must be defined, and the label ID added to
items that require a printed label.
Select Maintenance > Hardware > Labels to display the Labels function tab,
Figure 8-15 Labels
Label ID — Holds a two-digit number that together with 'Label Name'

uniquely identifies each label. To create a new record, enter an unused number
and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through the Label ID drop-
Label Name — Holds a descriptive name for the label record.

Printer Group ID — Defines the locations where the label will print.
Printer Group ID Button
Click Printer Group ID to display the Printer Groups function tab. Here you
can perform maintenance in the printer group function, including add new
records if the printer group you need is not there.
Text Size — Defines the default text size printed on the label. Text sizes of
small, medium, and large are available on the drop-down list. Select the text
size that best suits your needs.
Print Area Inset
The settings available in this inset enable you to specify the size label you are
using, and the margin to be reserved on the label.
Label Width — Defines the width of the label. This information is provided
Maintenance
by the label manufacturer.
Hardware
Label Height — Defines the height of the label. This information is provided
by the label manufacturer.
Margin — Defines the desired width of the label margins. Information about
margin limits is provided by the label manufacturer.
Label Type Inset
The settings available in this inset enable you to specify the type of label to
print.
Item — Prints a label that contains information about the item in the intended
container. If ‘Print Barcode?’ is selected in the Print Options inset, the label
prints with a barcode that, when scanned, returns information about the item.
The system only prints labels for items assigned to a specific label. If more
than one item is included in the container, a label prints for each item in the
order. Item information on the label is then used to ring up the item, but no
guest check information is conveyed by the label.

Guest Check — Prints a label that contains guest check information about
the item or items in the intended container. If ‘Print Barcode?’ is selected in
the Print Options inset, the label prints with a barcode that, when scanned,
returns information that is used with the Get Check function to pull up the
customer’s check. The check can then be closed if the guest is in the store, or
it can be transferred to a driver for delivery. If ‘Guest Check’ is selected, it is
not possible to assign the label to a menu item. If the selected label is subse-
quently changed to ‘Guest Check’, prior label assignments to menu items
involving the label become invalid.
Print Options Inset
The settings in this inset enable you to specify the contents of the label.
Print Barcode? — Enables barcode printing on the label. When scanned, the
barcode causes the system to display information about the item or the full
guest check, depending upon the setting in the Label Type inset.
Print Item Price? — Prints an item price on the label. This selection is
unavailable if a label type of Guest Check is selected.
Print Name? — Prints a customer name on the label.
Print Address? — Prints a customer address on the label.
Filter by Order Mode Inset
Settings in this inset enable you to specify the order modes that cause labels to
print.
Print Label for ALL Order Modes? — Prints a label for all order modes. If
this check box is selected, the order mode drop-down lists are not available.
Order Modes — Causes a label to print for any order mode specified in these
drop-down lists. When the ‘Print Label for ALL Order Modes’ selection is not
selected, the system looks at the order mode selections to determine the order
modes which require a label.

Order Mode #1 through #4 Buttons
Click any of the Order Mode buttons to display the Order Modes function tab.
Here you can perform maintenance in the printer order mode function, includ-
ing add new records if the order mode you need is not there.
After defining the label, items requiring a label need to be edited to include
the ‘Label ID’ to print when the item is ordered. Select Maintenance > Menu
> Item to add the ‘Label ID’ to items requiring printed labels. Select the item,
then select the Miscellaneous subtab. Make the label active in the Label inset
by selecting the appropriate ‘Label ID’ from the drop-down list.
Maintenance
Hardware

Video Groups
Video groups are useful for routing video signals to display devices located in
specific areas of the restaurant as a group. Select Hardware > Video Groups to
display the Video Groups function tab, shown in Figure 8-16:
Figure 8-16 Video Groups

identifies each video group record. To create a new record, enter an unused
number and press Enter. To edit an existing record, select the record from the
‘Number’ drop-down list and press Enter.
Name — Holds a descriptive name for the video group.
Videos — Select up to five video display devices to which the video signal
may be routed.

Video Queues Refer to the
Interfacing RDS
The Video Queues feature enables you to sort orders and send them to differ- with Aloha User’s Guide for
ent preparation queues depending upon their source and the type of order. The capabilities of this feature.
following capabilities are among the features included in Video Queues:
• Multiple video queues are allowed.

• Input from video keypads is supported.
• Display orders on split screens.
• Random or directed order bumping.
• Load balancing queues are supported, by number of items or orders.
• Bumping between video groups is supported.
Video Queues is part of the Video add-on to the Aloha system.
Maintenance
Hardware

Refer to the Inter-
Video Devices
facing RDS with
Aloha User’s Guide for more Video devices provide excellent ways of making your employees more pro-
information about the capabili-
ties of this feature.
ductive by facilitating the quick, accurate filling and delivering of orders with
rapid, clear communication within the restaurant.
This capability is available to you by purchasing a license for Video, an add-

on to the Aloha system. This package gives you instant access to adding and
configuring Video display devices to make your operations more flexible to
you, and more attractive to the customer.
Some of the features of Video are as follows:
• Menu item routing.

• Expedited order processing.
• Order recall.
• Random or directed order bumping.

Video Keypads Refer to the
Interfacing RDS
Video Keypads are supported in conjunction with split-screen operation. With with Aloha User’s Guide for
video keypads installed on your system, you can easily visualize the status of capabilities of this feature.
orders in different parts of the restaurant, and quickly bump them from one
queue to another to speed up the process of order preparation.
This capability is available to you by purchasing a license for Video, an add-

on to the Aloha system. This package gives you enhanced order handling
capabilities, to make your operations more flexible and efficient, and more
attractive to the customer.
Maintenance
Hardware

Display Boards
A display board is a physical stand from which the guest places their order. It
is commonly used in drive thru environments and provides a visual indication
of the guest’s order, including any modifications to the order, and the total
purchase. The board shows what is being ordered and allows the guest to
catch any errors before the order is sent to the kitchen.
The Aloha system supports Texas Digital Order Confirmation boards. Other
confirmation board companies interface with Aloha by emulating the Texas
Digital format. The system also supports the Everbrite board using a Texas
Digital interface. Everbrite allows pop up graphics to display based on what is
ordered. Rather than the Aloha system writing directly to the display board,
the message is sent to Everbrite to acquire the appropriate images to display.
Refer to the Everbrite LCD/OCS Communication Protocol documentation.
Most display boards show a continually scrolling greeting message. When an

employee begins taking an order, the Aloha FOH determines if a display is
currently active. If so, it writes to the display when an item is rung up. Items
removed from the order are also removed from the display board. This
enables the customer to see exactly what the kitchen thinks was ordered, pro-
viding them the opportunity to stop the order process if something appears to
be incorrect.
The number of lines showing on the display board at one time depends upon
the capabilities of the installed hardware. If the order has more lines to display
than the capacity of the display board, only the most recent lines show up on
the display board, up to the maximum number supported by the display board.
Most of the time, messages written to the display board are generated from the
connected terminal, however, it is common to have two terminals operating
during peak times, where one terminal captures the order, and the other termi-
nal captures the payment. Then when business slows, one terminal is often
shut down and the remaining terminal captures both the order and receives the
payment.
To provide the ability to manually reroute the destination of orders to another

display board from the FOH, add a Reroute Display Board button function to

a FOH panel, as explained in Customizing Your FOH Screens, located in
Chapter 7, System Maintenance Functions.
To allow the system to activate a reroute at a certain time, create a Reroute

Display Board event, as explained in Events, located in Chapter 7, System
Maintenance Functions.
Select Maintenance > Hardware > Display Boards to open the Display Boards
Maintenance
Hardware
Figure 8-17 Display Boards
Display ID — Holds a two-digit number that uniquely identifies the Display

Board. To create a new record, enter an unused number and press Enter. To
edit an existing record, scroll through the ‘Display ID’ drop-down list, select
the record to edit and press Enter.
Connected To Inset
Terminal ID — Indicates the terminal to which the display board is attached.

Port — Indicates the port on the terminal to which the display board is physi-
cally attached. When active, the display board signal routes to the specified
port.
Displays Orders From
Terminal ID — Indicates the terminal that is sending orders to this display

board.
Greeting Message — Enter the desired greeting message for the display
board. This text box accepts up to 100 characters, but the message truncates at
the end of the message board line. Verify the length of the message visually
before using it. The greeting message displays on the display board until the
first menu item is ordered.
Display Type — Specifies the appropriate display board type. Select None to
disable the display board.
Is Display Active? — Activates the display board, and routes the display sig-
nal to the board.
Display Graphics? — Enables the use of graphics on the display board.
Display Prices? — Displays the item price on the display board.
Hide Zero Tax — Suppresses the display of tax information when the value
is zero.
Font — Defines the desired font for the display board.
Num Columns — Establishes the number of display units arranged in col-

umns as installed in the display board. This number should be between zero
and 255 and is available from the manufacturer.
Num Rows — Establishes the number of display units arranged in rows as

installed in the display board. This number should be between zero and 255
and is available from the manufacturer.

Scrolling Messages Inset
Num messages to Scroll — Specifies the number of scrolling messages to

use. Acceptable values are numbers from zero to three. If the number is zero,
no scrolling messages are active and no scrolling message text boxes are
available. If the number is three, all three scrolling message text boxes are
available.
Scroll message #1 — Holds the first scrolling message. This text box accepts
up to 100 characters, but the message truncates at the end of the message
board line. Verify the length of the message visually before using it.
Scroll message #2 — Holds the second scrolling message. This text box
accepts up to 100 characters, but the message truncates at the end of the mes-
sage board line. Verify the length of the message visually before using it.
Scroll message #3 — Holds the third scrolling message. This text box
accepts up to 100 characters, but the message truncates at the end of the mes-
Maintenance
Hardware
sage board line. Verify the length of the message visually before using it.
Delay Time Inset
Change Due — Specifies the number of seconds the amount of change that is
to be returned to the customer lingers on the display board before being
cleared by the system.
Amount Tendered — Specifies the number of seconds the amount of money

received from the customer lingers on the display board before being cleared
by the system.

More detailed
Accessories
information about
these features is available in With Accessories, an add-on to the Aloha system, you instantly gain access to
the Aloha Accessories User’s
Guide.
the tools needed to effectively communicate with cash card devices, drink dis-
pensers, and scales.
Cash Cards
Provides customers more choices in convenient payment methods.
Drink Dispensers
Assures that every liquor drink poured is accounted for accurately, and elimi-
nates the potential for an employee to over pour a drink, or forget to ring up a
drink.
Scales and Tares

Allows weight measurements from a scale to be brought forward to the FOH.
The total price of the product is then calculated based on the weight (less the
tare weight) times the unit price.

Message Maintenance
Functions
This chapter discusses the features available on the Messages menu.
These are used to generate messages for communication with individ-
ual employees, the restaurant staff, or the guests.
Main Screen...................................................................................... 9-5

Guest Check ..................................................................................... 9-7
Clock In Information.......................................................................... 9-9
Server Messages............................................................................ 9-11
Chapter
9
9 – 2 Message Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3
The selections available in the Messages menu allow the creation of different
types of messages. These messages are displayed on hardware devices, such
as order entry terminals and display poles. Messages on guest checks can also
be set from the Messages menu. Optimal use of the Messages feature permits
the restaurant to target communications to specific areas of the restaurant,
promote sales and special offerings, encourage employees in their daily tasks,
and add a personal touch to otherwise impersonal machines.
You can use preprogrammed events available in the Aloha POS system to
make messages display or print in desired locations. Select Maintenance >
System > Events to schedule events as needed.
Refer to Chap-
ter 7, System
Select Maintenance > Messages to display the Messages menu, as shown in Maintenance Functions, for
Figure 9-1: information on setting
Events.
Maintenance
Message
Figure 9-1 Messages Menu
• Create messages to greet customers.

• Create messages to print on guest checks.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Message Maintenance Functions 9–3

• Cause messages to display on a pole or screen device.
• Create messages for all employees to view when they clock in.
• Create messages for servers to view during their shift.
9–4 Message Maintenance Functions Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Main Screen
Main Screen Messages display on the main order entry terminal screen. If a
pole display is attached to the terminal and is active, the message also displays
there. Main screen messages are active by default or by selection. Select
Maintenance > System > Events to specify messages for display. Select the
following events, as appropriate to your objectives:
• (11) Set Left Message

• (12) Set Right Message
It is not necessary to select events to display messages on the main screen. If

no events are selected, the first defined message displays on the left side of the
order entry terminal log-in screen and the second defined message displays on
the right side of the screen.
Select Maintenance > Messages > Main Screen to display the Main Screen
Maintenance
Message
Figure 9-2 Main Screen

ID — Holds a three-digit number that together with the entry in the first mes-
sage text box uniquely identifies each record. To create a new record, enter an
unused ID number and press Enter. To edit an existing record, scroll through
the ID drop-down list, select the record and press Enter.
Message — Holds the message that displays on the main screen of the order
entry terminal or pole display. The entry in the first line serves as the identifi-
cation name for the message. The additional lines are used for entering the
message as it displays on the main screen or pole display.
Display on Pole — Causes the message to display on a pole display, if one is

attached to the FOH terminal. The main screen messages continue to display
on the order entry terminal, as before.
Refer to Pro-
grammed Event
Types in Chapter 7, System Other important points to consider when formulating a main screen message
Maintenance Functions, for are as follows:
more information on display-
ing messages on a pole dis-
play.
• Only eight lines are available for message text.
• Each line is limited to 20 characters.
• If one of the Cool interfaces is being used, the message is limited to a
total of 120 characters. The 120 characters can be arranged in any
manner on the eight available lines.
• The first and second messages are automatically displayed on the
FOH terminal. If any other message must be displayed, that message
must be set as an event. This results in the display of multiple mes-
sages.
• When creating a message for pole display, leave a blank line between
the lines of text so the message scrolls across the screen with a paus-
ing effect. The message will be easier for the customer to view.
The Main Screen Message is always on display, but unlike some other mes-
sages in the system, it cannot be targeted to different areas of the restaurant or
to different job codes.

Guest Check
The Guest Check message feature permits customizing the information to be
printed on the guest check and credit card vouchers. This feature enables the
restaurant manager to communicate with the guest by printing messages on
the guest check and by varying that message at different times and in different
places in the restaurant. The first guest check message defined in the system
becomes the default message if no preprogrammed events are active. You can
manipulate guest check messages or make them active by scheduling them as
specific preprogrammed events in Maintenance > System > Events.
Refer to Pro-
grammed Event
Messages activated by events override the default message. Select one or both Types in Chapter 7, System
of the following events: Maintenance Functions, for
more information on prepro-
grammed events and guest
• (16) Set Guest Check Message check messages.
• (31) Set Guest Check Footer Message by Terminal
Select Maintenance > Messages > Guest Check to display the Guest Check
function tab, as shown in Figure 9-3::
Maintenance
Message
Figure 9-3 Guest Check

ID — Holds a five-digit number that together with 'Name' uniquely identifies
each record. To create a new record, enter an unused number and press Enter.
To edit an existing record, scroll through the ID drop-down list, select the
record to edit and press Enter. The text entered in the 'Name' text box does not
appear on the guest check.
Title — Holds text that is printed at the top of the guest check. Two lines are
available, although it is not necessary to use both lines. The text in the 'Title'
text boxes is printed on the guest check exactly as typed.
Message — Holds text that is printed at the bottom of the guest check, and is
used to communicate directly with the guest. It is used for sales messages and
promotions, seasonal greetings, upcoming events, or any other desired mes-
sage. The lines center automatically as the message prints on the guest check.

Clock In Information
The Clock In Information message feature allows the creation of special mes-
sages that target individual employees or specific job codes. These messages
are displayed on order entry terminals when employees clock in. The mes-
sages do not print.
Select Maintenance > Messages > Clock In Information to display the Clock
In Information function tab, as shown in Figure 9-4:
Maintenance
Message
Figure 9-4 Clock In Information
ID — Holds a five-digit number that uniquely identifies each record. To cre-

ate a new record, enter an unused ID and press Enter. To edit an existing
record, scroll through the ID drop-down list, select the record to edit and press
Enter.
Employee — Used to select an individual employee as the target of the mes-

sage. If an individual employee is selected from the list, the message displays
on the order entry terminal when the person clocks in.

Job Code — Used to select a job code as the target of the message. If a job
code is selected from the list, the message displays on the order entry terminal
when an employee who is assigned to that job code clocks in.
Text — Holds the message that displays on the order entry terminal. Each line
accepts up to 30 characters.

Server Messages
The Server Messages feature is particularly useful to help management com-
municate directly and continuously with servers to promote specials or other
selected menu items. Server Messages can be targeted to all order entry termi-
nals, bartenders, job codes, or individual employees. These messages print
when the employee clocks in. The messages appear on the clock-in chits,
which are available at the printer defined for and attached to the clock-in ter-
minal. The messages do not display on order entry terminal screens if directed
to a specific employee.
Select Maintenance > Messages > Server Messages to display the Server
Messages function tab, as shown in Figure 9-5:
Maintenance
Message
Figure 9-5 Server Messages
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Message Maintenance Functions 9 – 11

ID — Holds a five-digit number that uniquely identifies each record. To cre-
ate a new record, enter an unused ID and press Enter. To edit an existing
record, scroll through the ID drop-down list, select the record and press Enter.
Employee — Used to select an individual employee as the target of the mes-

sage. If one employee is selected, the message is directed only to that
employee. If the message should be directed to more than one employee,
select None.
Bartender — Directs the message to employees assigned to a job code with

'Bartender' selected.
Order Entry — Directs the message to all employees assigned to a job code
with 'Order entry' selected.
‘Order Entry’ directs the message to all employees with this feature
selected in their job code, including Bartenders.
Job Codes — Sends the message to as many as five separate job codes.
Select the job codes from the drop-down lists containing the job codes defined
in Maintenance > Labor. If a message is to be directed to specific job codes
only, the 'Bartender' and 'Order Entry' selections must be set as inactive.
Text — Holds the text for display on order entry terminals as employees
clock in. The message is displayed exactly as it is typed in the 'Text' text
boxes.
Bullets — Holds up to ten lines of text for specials that display on order entry
terminals as employees clock in.

Utilities
This chapter discusses the Aloha system features that deal with data
verification, controlling the Front-of-House, database upgrade, han-
dling data, and the End-of-Day functions.
Refresh Data................................................................................... 10-5

Preferences .................................................................................... 10-7
Verify Data ...................................................................................... 10-9
View Debugging File..................................................................... 10-11
Create Diagnostic Files................................................................. 10-13
Start/Stop Front-of-House............................................................. 10-15
Force End-of-Day ......................................................................... 10-18
Database Upgrade........................................................................ 10-20
Grind Status.................................................................................. 10-22
Regrind Subdirectories ................................................................. 10-23
Fileserver Recovery...................................................................... 10-26
Chapter
10
10 – 2 Utilities Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3
The Utilities menu launches the Aloha foreground and background programs
essential to normal daily business activities.
Select Utilities from the menu bar. The Utilities Main Menu displays, as
Figure 10-1 Utilities Main Menu
Programs that run in the foreground, such as End-of-Day and Refresh Data,
take control of the system and temporarily close down FOH order entry termi-
nals. Conversely, background processes run without affecting FOH opera-
tions, and are transparent to the user.
The daily activities on FOH order entry terminals, such as sales, cash receipts,
cash disbursements, and the recording of labor activities, normally generate
and collect raw data. Most of the activities provided in the Utilities menu
involve organizing that raw data into usable form. Collecting and organizing
data is a key concept in the operation of Aloha TableService, and thus the pro-
grams launched from the Utilities menu are essential to the management of Utilities
restaurant operations.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Utilities 10 – 3

• Make database changes, such as price or menu changes, take effect in

the FOH.
• Set sort preferences for database files alphabetically or by ID number.
• Check the database for errors that could stop the FOH from operating.
• View debugging files, which contain information about problems and
errors.
• Create diagnostic files containing additional information about prob-
lems and errors.
• Start and stop the FOH.
• Force the EOD process to take place.
• Perform a database upgrade.

Refresh Data
This feature is used to forcibly update the database and configuration files that
have been modified. System changes do not normally take effect until the
End-of-Day (EOD). The normal EOD process handles data updates automati-
cally and safely, and is the best course of action in most cases. In some cases,
however, it may be necessary to update the database files in the middle of the
day. When necessary, use the Refresh Data feature only between meal peri-
ods.
Select Refresh Data from the Utilities menu to replace the current data files. A
warning is received before Refresh Data executes, as shown in Figure 10-2:
Figure 10-2 Refresh Data Confirmation
Click OK. Refresh Data copies the database and configuration files from the
\NEWDATA subdirectory to the \DATA subdirectory. This process stops the
FOH during the procedure, but the transaction log is not affected. After
refreshing the data, the FOH restarts automatically, using the information in
the updated files.
Refresh Data should be run only after running Verify Data from the
Utilities menu. Correct all problems and errors revealed by Verify
Data before resuming operations.
Utilities

Run Refresh Data only when minor changes have been made to the data.
Never run Refresh Data while the system is in use if substantial changes have
been made in the data files. For example, if employees or menu items have
been added, unpredictable behavior in the FOH may result if Refresh Data is
selected while the system is in use. If employees or menu items have been
deleted, the system may be incapable of running.

Preferences
This feature allows you to change the sort order of records in the Items,
Menus, Modifiers, Exception Modifiers, Submenus, and Employees files.
Records can be sorted alphabetically or by ID number, according to need.
This feature is very helpful when performing maintenance on large database
files. It is not necessary to run Verify or Refresh Data when changing the sort
order of a file.
Select Utilities > Preferences to display the Preferences function tab, as

Figure 10-3 Preferences
Each file is listed in the Sort Options inset, and three methods of filtering the
employee file are available on a drop-down list in the Filter Options inset.
Select the desired options in these two insets, then click OK to save the
change. The next time the file is accessed, the information will be sorted and Utilities
filtered according to the selected method.

Sort Options Inset
This inset contains a list of items that can be sorted alphabetically or by ID

number. The items are arranged in a column, and the sort options are arranged
in two columns. Select the desired sort method for each item.
Filter Options Inset
This inset contains a drop-down list from which you can select a method for
selecting employees for listing.
Employee — Select All, Active, or Terminated from the drop-down list.

Verify Data
Verify Data is used to initiate a processing routine that tests the validity of the
data, and modifications to the files. When complete, this routine creates a text
file named VERIFY.TXT in the \ALOHA\TMP subdirectory on the file
server. The system automatically opens VERIFY.TXT using Windows Note-
pad.
Select Utilities > Verify Data to open VERIFY.TXT, as shown in Figure 10-4:
Figure 10-4 Verify Text
The file can also be viewed at other times using Windows Notepad or other
Windows word processing programs. If the file is too large for Notepad, an
error message displays asking if you want to open the file using Windows
WordPad. Permit Windows to open the file with WordPad, but do not convert
the file to another format when closing it.
Utilities

The file itself contains a report of all errors, omissions, and data integrity
problems in the database files. The errors listed can range in severity from
minor data integrity errors that result in unexpected results, to fatal errors that
can cause the system to halt.
One of the most common errors exposed in Verify Data is that an item number
is not in a sales or retail category. This error, if not corrected, might lead to
inaccurate sales reporting. Another typical data integrity error is when an item
has no tax ID. Correcting all data integrity errors helps to ensure that no fatal
errors occur.
Run Verify Data each time modifications are made to the database files, and
before running Refresh Data as part of the End-of-Day routine or manually.
Perform the following steps for the most reliable results:
1. Make changes to the database files as required.

2. Run Verify Data. VERIFY.TXT opens using Notepad.
3. Print VERIFY.TXT from Notepad.
4. Correct any errors, as listed in VERIFY.TXT, to the database files.
5. Run Verify Data again.
Repeat this process until Verify Data produces a VERIFY.TXT file that does
not contain errors.
Once the data is successfully verified and no errors remain in VERIFY.TXT,

two procedures are available to make the new data available to the FOH:
• Allow the End-of-Day process to automatically update the files. This

method is strongly recommended for safety of data and for the mini-
mum amount of disruption in the day's business.
• Select Utilities > Refresh Data from the menu bar to immediately
send all modifications, additions, and deletions to the FOH.
It is important to note that the second process stops the FOH before updating
the data, then reboots all FOH terminals when the update process is complete.

View Debugging File
View Debugging File is used to view files containing information about errors
or unusual conditions experienced while running or attempting to run the
Aloha system. All debugging files are plain text files containing system-gen-
erated messages detailing errors experienced by the Aloha system during
operation. If parts of the system are not set up properly and an attempt is made
to run the software, the system stores information about the subsequent error
conditions in one of these files. The base name of debugging files is ‘Debout’.
There are several types of files, each one containing messages and informa-
tion generated by the system as the Aloha system operates. Each file type,
designated by a specific file extension, contains information about a specific
part of system operation, categorized by the file name extension.
Select Utilities > View Debugging File to display the View Debugging File
Figure 10-5 View Debugging File Utilities
Select the desired file from the list box and click View to display the contents
of the file in Notepad, or click Cancel to close the function tab.

Debout files display in Windows Notepad when selected for viewing. Infor-
mation in these files is entered from the top to the bottom, with the most
recent information at the bottom. Press Ctrl+End to move immediately to the
end of a file. An example of the entries at the bottom of a debout file is shown
in Figure 10-6:
Figure 10-6 Example Debout File
At the start of each line entry, the system inserts the date and time the entry
was created to make analysis of the file easier.
To track each time a mag stripe was used, set the variable
DEBUGMSR in Aloha.ini to TRUE. The entry for each swipe
appears in the debout for the terminal.

Create Diagnostic Files
During normal operation of the Aloha system, the program interacts with the
operating system to create debout files, and to make entries in those files to
record events as they happen in the system. These files are seldom needed, so
the information recorded in them is periodically replaced. However, when
problems occur, the information in these files may be invaluable in identifying
the causes. Occasionally, it is necessary to obtain more information than the
set of files normally available through the View Debugging File feature.
When more information is needed, the Create Diagnostic Files feature is

invaluable in diagnosing problems experienced in the system. Select Utilities
> Create Diagnostic Files to display the Create Diagnostic Files function tab,
Figure 10-7 Create Diagnostic Files
This function tab provides information about data that is available for conver- Utilities
sion to diagnostic files, and the operating system of the host computer.

Dated Subdirectories — Lists all dated subdirectories available for use in
generating diagnostic files.
EDC Subdirectories — Lists all subdirectories on the system relevant to

EDC functions, if you are using EDC on the host system.
OS Version — Displays the operating system name, type, and revision level.
Generate Button
Click Generate to create diagnostic files. Select all relevant items available in
the list boxes to generate files containing information about those items.When
you click Generate, the inset above the buttons displays as a progress bar. This
process can take several minutes, depending upon the size of the database.
Cancel Button
Click Cancel to discard any selections made and to close the Create Diagnos-
tic Files function tab.
After the diagnostic files have been created, return to View Debugging File.
You will notice several additional debout files available for view and analysis.
However, the true function of the Create Diagnostic Files feature is to create a
new subdirectory named DIAG, directly beneath the \ALOHAQS directory.
The new DIAG directory contains the following:
• Compressed copies of all dated subdirectories selected during the

diagnostic file creation process.
• A compressed copy of the \ALOHA\DATA directory.
• A compressed file containing information about the configuration of
the EDC program.
• A compressed file containing the contents of the \ALOHA\TMP
directory at the time of diagnostic file creation.
• Text files containing information about the computer, the environ-
ment defined in the computer, and the Aloha program.
This information is used to capture the state of a system immediately after

experiencing difficulties for easy diagnosis and correction.

Start/Stop Front-of-House
Start Front-of-House and Stop Front-of-House are used to manually start up
or shut down the FOH order entry terminals. These selections are typically
used during maintenance or troubleshooting activities.
Stop Front-of-House — Shuts down the FOH manually. This selection is

unavailable after FOH has been stopped. The system displays a message ask-
ing if you are sure you want to stop the Front-of-House, as shown in Figure
10-8:
Figure 10-8 Stop FOH Confirmation
Click OK to stop the FOH. The system displays a message informing you that
the FOH has been stopped, as shown in Figure 10-9:
Figure 10-9 FOH Stopped Notification
Utilities

Start Front-of-House — Starts the FOH manually. This selection is unavail-
able while the FOH is active in the system or while the FOH is actually run-
ning. The system displays a message asking if you want to start the Front-of-
House, shown in Figure 10-10:
Figure 10-10 Start FOH Confirmation
Click OK to start the FOH. The system displays a message informing you the
FOH has been started, shown in Figure 10-11:
Figure 10-11 Started FOH Notification
The FOH terminals may require rebooting at this point.
The STOP file itself has no useful contents. Starting and stopping
the FOH depends on the absence or presence of this file.

The Stop Front-of-House command places a STOP marker file in the
\ALOHA\TMP subdirectory. The Start Front-of-House command removes the
STOP marker file. If the FOH fails to start, determine if the Start Front-of-
House command is available on the Utilities menu, and if it is, select it to
restore the system to operation.
Utilities

Force End-of-Day
The End-of-Day (EOD) process is a foreground procedure that closes out the
day's business activity and resets the system for business activity on the new
day. Typically, the EOD routine is scheduled to occur at a specified time each
day, usually late at night after the restaurant has closed.
When allowed to run at the scheduled time, the EOD procedure is activated by
and run on the master terminal. For this reason, the master terminal must be
running for EOD to begin processing. All activities, such as closing checks
and clocking out, should be completed prior to the EOD process.
At the specified time, the EOD procedure stops the FOH on all other order
entry terminals on the network, closes open sales to cash, clocks out any
remaining employees, and begins the EOD routine. The EOD events, in their
order of execution, are:
1. An EOD indicator file is created in the \DATA subdirectory of the

ALOHA directory tree. This stops all order entry terminal activity
except the master terminal.
2. All open sales are closed to cash, and remaining employees are
clocked out.
3. A subdirectory named in the format \YYYYMMDD for the current
date of business is created in the \ALOHA directory tree.
4. The transaction log and all system configuration files for the current
day are copied from the \DATA subdirectory to the newly created
dated subdirectory. If the copy is successful, the log files (*.LOG) are
deleted from the \DATA subdirectory.
5. The current Date-of-Business is updated with the new Date-of-Busi-
ness. The Date-of-Business displays in the System group located in
Maintenance > Store Settings.
6. Database and configuration files in the \NEWDATA subdirectory are
copied over the existing database and configuration files in the
\DATA subdirectory. This updates the files with any additions and
modifications made during the day.
7. If the process is successful, the system places a file named DONE30
in the dated subdirectory, signifying the EOD procedure completed
successfully.
8. The EOD indicator file in the \DATA subdirectory is deleted, thus
permitting the order entry terminals on the network to restart.

If the '24-Hour Operation' check box is active, steps are omitted from the
EOD process, thus shortening it. For example, all open sales remain open and
carry over to the new business day. Employees working when the EOD occurs
are clocked out and clocked back in by the system, but they are not checked
out. This process allows 24-hour restaurants to continue business without
interruption, although the Front-of-House is temporarily suspended for
approximately one minute.
The ‘24-Hour Operation’ check box is on the End-of-Day subtab

located in Maintenance > Store Settings > System group.
Force End-of-Day is normally selected only after encountering a problem in

the normal EOD process. Although not recommended, the EOD may be run at
any unscheduled time, either with the Force End-of-Day selection from the
Utilities menu or from the manager screen on order entry terminals. Since the
Date-of-Business increments each time EOD is activated, it is not wise to run
the EOD process more than once each day. Except in special circumstances at
the request of the Aloha dealer or technical support representative, it is
strongly suggested that EOD be permitted to run automatically as scheduled.
Select Utilities > Force End of Day to run the EOD procedure. The system
displays a message asking if you are certain you want to run Force End-of-
Day, shown in Figure 10-12:
Figure 10-12 Force End of Day

Utilities
The EOD procedure normally takes no longer than a few minutes to complete.
If it takes longer, and terminals display 'Waiting For End-of-Day To Com-
plete' for an extended period of time, read the debugging file first for informa-
tion as to why the process may have stopped.

Database Upgrade
This feature enables the user to upgrade the restaurant database. When the res-
taurant makes numerous, major changes to the database, or if a corporate
office wants to send a new database to each of its restaurants, this feature
makes it easy to replace the old database with the new one.
Select Utilities > Database Upgrade to display the Database Upgrade dialog
box, shown in Figure 10-13:
Figure 10-13 Database Upgrade
DBF Files Only — Upgrades the database files only.
Relational Database Only — Upgrades the relational database files only.
Create RDB — Creates the relational database during the upgrade.
Attended - Displays Screen Messages — Displays progress messages on the

screen as the upgrade proceeds.
Debug - Messages to Debout.txt — Sends progress messages to the

DEBOUT.TXT file.

Iberdir — Designates the path to the directory containing the Aloha program.
Enter the complete path to the directory, including the drive letter.
Input — Designates the path to the directory containing the new database
files to be used in the upgrade. Enter the complete path to the directory,
including the drive letter.
Output — Designates the path to the directory into which the new database
files are to be installed. Enter the complete path to the directory, including the
drive letter.
Enterprise Ids — Creates Enterprise IDs for individual sites during the data-
base upgrade. This selection would be appropriate for creating an Enterprise
ID for an individual restaurant.
Central Site Ids — Creates Enterprise IDs for central sites during the data-
base upgrade. This selection would be appropriate for creating an Enterprise
ID for a facility serving as a central site for a group of restaurants.
Assign Security Levels — Assigns security levels to employees during the

database upgrade.
Force Upgrade — Bypasses version checking during the database upgrade.
Configuration Data Only — Upgrades the configuration data only.
Do Not Copy DBF Files — Performs the upgrade without copying identical
database files.
Force Security — Forces security conversion to proceed, even if data errors

occur.
Upgrade DBF Index Files — Upgrades only the .CDX (index) files.
Every selection is active and selectable independently except for Upgrade

DBF Index Files. All other selections become unavailable and are cleared
when Upgrade DBF Index Files is selected. The only exceptions are the two Utilities
Messages selections. The text boxes containing information about directory
locations also remain unaffected.

Grind Status
The Grind Status function is available when you are using the SuperSite add-
on or a relational database (RDB). Information provided in this section
applies only to installations using RDB. The Aloha system supports both SQL
Server and Access. If you are using the SuperSite, please consult the Super-
Site User’s Guide for more information.

Regrind Subdirectories
The Regrind Subdirectories function enables you to regrind dated subdirecto-
ries. You can also schedule this function to run within a time frame. The
Regrind function makes a request to the Grind Manager program to gather all
dated subdirectories, gathers them together in a list, and returns this list to the
Regrind function.
Select Utilities > Regrind Subdirectories. The Regrind Subdirectories func-

tion tab displays, as shown in Figure 10-14:
Figure 10-14 Regrind Subdirectories Function Tab
The store name and terminal number column displays ‘NA’ in a non-Super-
Site environment. The DOB column displays the date-of-business for the
dated subdirectory found on the file server. The Date Grinded column dis-
plays when the grind of the subdirectory occurred. The Grind Version column
displays the version of the Grind program when it was last grinded; however, Utilities
the version does not affect regrinding of dated subdirectories if you use a
newer Grind version. The Status column states ‘Marked’ when you select a
subdirectory for regrinding.

Time Restriction restricts the time the Regrind function runs. The Active On/
Off option determines if the Regrind function is running in the Grind Manager
program. If ‘Active’ is turned off, the Regrind function does not run. Changes
made to Time Restriction and Num Grinds do not take place until you restart
Grind Manager.
The Aloha system uses a ‘3 and Out’ rule for regrinding. If a subdirectory
encounters more than three errors, the regrind stops with the existence of the
NOREGRIND file in the dated subdirectory. The subdirectory displays a sta-
tus of ‘NoRegrind’. When you mark the subdirectory to regrind, the Regrind
program removes the NOREGRIND file from the subdirectory and attempts
another regrind.
To regrind a dated subdirectory:
1. Select the dated subdirectory. You can select more than one dated
subdirectory.
2. Click Active.
3. Click Mark to Grind. ‘Marked’ is placed in the ‘Status’ text box for
the selected dated subdirectory.
If you do not want to regrind a particular subdirectory, click Unmark
to Regrind. You may do this if the regrinding is a timed event.
4. Select Restrict Time to place a time frame to regrind the subdirecto-
ries, if necessary. If you do not select this check box all the dated sub-
directories marked to regrind, will regrind as soon as you launch the
function.
5. Enter the Start and End times using a 24-hour clock if you select
Restrict Time. This determines the time frame for the regrind process
to run. If a dated subdirectory is regrinding when the End-of-Day
occurs, the regrind process continues until it is complete.
6. Set the number of grinds in the ‘Num Grinds’ text box to determine
the number of dated subdirectories to regrind at any one time. For
non-SuperSite locations, set ‘Num Grinds’ to one.
7. Click Done. A confirmation message displays.
8. Click OK to regrind and exit the Regrind Subdirectories function.

Settings for the Regrind function are stored in the SQL.INI file under the
Regrind section. The settings include:
RESTRICTTIME=TRUE
STARTTIME=2300
ENDTIME=0600
ACTIVE=TRUE
NUMREGRINDERS=1
Utilities

Fileserver Recovery
The Fileserver Recovery option is part of the Aloha system's redundancy
function. The BOH computer normally serves as the file server. If an interrup-
tion in power occurs, the system returns to operation in redundant mode. The
file server and the FOH terminals restart normally when power is restored, but
one of the FOH terminals assumes the function of the file server. When you
select the Fileserver Recovery option, the BOH computer locates the FOH
computer that has been performing as the file server, copies the new file infor-
mation, and directs all FOH computers to use the BOH computer as the file
server again.

Aloha Glossary
BOGO (Buy One Get One) — A type of promotion in which the customer
purchases one item at the regular price and receives another of the same item
free
BOH (Back-of-House) — The file server from which Aloha Manager is

launched. This file server also stores the dated subdirectories created during
the EOD process.
Checkout — Checkout is a process that generates a printed listing of sales,

payments, comps, promos, cash due, and so on, for a specific employee. A
checkout is performed at the end of the employee’s shift in preparation for
turning in money due the restaurant prior to the employee clocking out. This
is only required of employees who handle money.
Chit — A printed version of the customer’s order. It prints or displays on

remote printers or video monitors which are typically located in the bar and/or
kitchen area. This aids the kitchen personnel and bartender in preparation of
the order.
Clockout chit — A printed receipt showing the date and time an employee
clocked out, and the employee’s name, job code, and unpaid break times.
Comps — A method in which items on a guest check are discounted (given

away as complimentary) by a dollar amount or a percentage. Typically used
for frequent diner incentives, employee meals, or to appease an upset cus-
tomer.
Cool interface — One of three color themes available for the FOH (Front-
of-House), including: Marble, Fabric, Blue Stone, and Wave. These are in
addition to the default interface.
DATA subdirectory — The \DATA subdirectory contains the working data

for the FOH terminals of the restaurant, and is a subdirectory of the \ALOHA
directory.
Dated subdirectory — The directory or file folder created by the EOD (End
of Day) process that contains all of the sales data and all other data for that
DOB (Date of Business). These dated subdirectories are stored on the BOH
file server.
Day Parts — Day Parts are defined to divide the day into parts for reporting
purposes, such as Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner, Happy Hour, and so on. The
Event Scheduler triggers period changes using only a start time, with the sub-
sequent period start time serving as the end time for the previous period.
DBF — Database files. These files have a .DBF extension.
Debout (Debugging Output) files — Debugging output files are created by

and used by the Aloha POS system for system troubleshooting. A separate
debout file is created for each terminal on the network including the BOH file
server. Debouts are also created for the EOD (End-of-Day) process, EDC
(Electronic Draft Capture) for credit card processing, the grind process, and
so on.
DOB — Date-of-Business.
DONE30 — Marker file created by the EOD (End-of-Day) process to indi-

cate the EOD completed successfully.
EDC (Electronic Draft Capture) — EDC is the technology used in the pro-
cessing of credit card, debit card, and gift card transactions as payment for
goods and/or services.
2 Aloha Glossary Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

EGI (Enhanced Graphic Interface) — EGI enables you to use gradient,
shadowing, and texture enhancements on the buttons on the FOH. If the com-
puter running the interface has High Color (16 bits or greater), and has 64 MB
of RAM or greater, the feature is automatically enabled. If the system does not
meet these requirements, the regular default screen appears.
Environment variables — Environment variables are strings consisting of

environment information, such as a drive, path, or file name, associated with a
symbolic name that can be used by operating systems, including: Windows95,
Windows98, and Windows NT. The defined environment variables are read
and set by the system when it boots up. (Examples: path to the Aloha POS
software, number of terminals on network, whether the terminal is capable of
serving as master terminal or server.)
EOD (End-of-Day) — The EOD (End-of-Day) process is a simple proce-

dure that closes out the sales for a given DOB (Date-of-Business) and starts
the new DOB with a fresh TRANS.LOG (transaction log) file and fresh
PRT#.LOG (printer log) files. The EOD process is typically scheduled to
occur as an automatic process every day at a certain time during a non-peak
period; however, the EOD may be run manually from either the FOH (Front-
of-House) or BOH (Back-of-House).
Event — Many common restaurant procedures for standard operations can

be automated using the Event Scheduler. The Event Scheduler can be config-
ured to automatically activate menus, reroute printers, change meal periods,
change order entry modes, automate the EOD process, or any other activity
that has an Active option switch as part of the database file record.
File server — The file server is the BOH computer which launches the
Aloha Manager program.
FOH (Front-of-House) — FOH is the interface accessed by servers, bartend-

ers, managers, cashiers, and other restaurant personnel to clock in/out, ring
transactions, close checks, perform checkouts, and so on. FOH also refers to
the hardware used at the FOH workstations.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Aloha Glossary 3

GNDDBF30.XXX — Marker file created by CTL (Control) to indicate that
the grind process for a given DOB completed successfully.
Grind — The grinder (GRIND.EXE) is a BOH executable program which

reads the TRANS.LOG (transaction log) for a given DOB and creates a series
of DBF files which contain all relevant information for that DOB. This pro-
gram insulates other system components from the need to understand the
encrypted, proprietary transaction log. The grinder is typically invoked auto-
matically by the Control program approximately 30 seconds following a suc-
cessfully completed EOD process. If the grinder is successful, it creates a
marker file, GNDDBF30.XXX, and places it in the dated subdirectory created
during the EOD process.
House accounts — The House Account feature is available for use as an

accounts receivable module within the Aloha POS system, when combined
with a correctly defined house account tender.
Iber (IBER.EXE or IBERQS.EXE) — -IBER.EXE and IBERQS.EXE are

the executable program files that launch the FOH interface for TableService
and QuickService, respectively.
IBERCFG.BAT — IBERCFG.BAT is a batch file which contains all of the

Aloha POS environment variables. We recommend calling this batch file from
within the AUTOEXEC.BAT batch file so that the environment variables are
read and set when the system boots up.
Item Lookup — The Item Lookup function allows the price of an item to be
located using its name or SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) number as defined in
Item maintenance. The Item Lookup function was created to be used in a
retail environment; however, it is not necessarily limited to retail items only.
Mag Card Reader or Mag Stripe Reader — A Mag Card Reader is a

device that reads and interprets the magnetic stripe encoded on a credit card,
debit card, Smart Card, or other card used by an employee to log on to the
Aloha POS system.

Master terminal v — The master terminal acts as a sort of arbitrator among
the terminals on the network, and manages some important network commu-
nication tasks. The master terminal is responsible for running the EOD pro-
cess.
Mastercapable — Mastercapable is an environment variable which stipu-

lates whether a terminal is capable of taking over as the master terminal in the
event that the true master terminal is down or cannot be located by other ter-
minals on the network.
NEWDATA Directory — The NEWDATA directory is the subdirectory of

the \ALOHA directory which contains data that has been changed or modified
(in the Maintenance module), but is not currently being used by the FOH at
the restaurant.
Pivot Seating — Pivot seating enables you to place orders by seating position
of the table to ensure correct tray set up and delivery of food. Restaurants
employing this method have a point of reference as the first seating position to
start orders, such as the seat facing the bar or the front door.
PLU (Price Look Up) — The PLU (Price Look Up) function allows the
price of an item to be located using its PLU number as defined in Item mainte-
nance.
PMS (Property Management System) — The industry standard interface

for hotels to manage the various functions of a hotel. The Aloha POS system
interfaces with the following PMS systems: Generic Micros 4700, Encore,
RDP, Springer Miller, HIS, CSS, and Fidelio.
POS — Point-of-Sale
Printer groups — Printer groups allow individual printers to be combined

into logical groups, once the individual printers have been defined in Mainte-
nance. This allows routing of items to individual or multiple remote printers
for chit printing. Printer groups can contain between zero and five individual
printers, and are attached to the item at the item level in Item maintenance.

Printer logs v — All printing for the current DOB is stored in printer log files
called PRT#.LOG, with the # being a variable corresponding to the record ID
for each printer as defined in Maintenance. These log files are located in the
DATA subdirectory of \ALOHA, and function similarly to the TRANS.LOG,
containing all printing that has been sent to a given printer on the current day,
as well as indicators as to the data which has printed successfully.
Promos (Promotions) — Promotions allow special pricing specific to the

promotion being offered. Promotions might be defined for discounts, specials,
coupons, and combo meals; and might be seasonal or always available. Six
predefined promotion types are offered: BOGO, Combo, Coupon, New Price,
Check Reduction, and Quick Combo.
Punch — A punch refers to the clock in and out times of an employee, hence
the term, ‘punching the clock’.
Receipt printer — A receipt printer is a printer physically located in the cus-

tomer area of a restaurant, and is used to print guest checks and credit card
vouchers.
Redundancy — Redundancy architecture is designed to retain maximum

system functionality in the event of common hardware failures. There are
three types of failures: BOH file server down, master terminal down, and
complete network failure (hub failure). Redundancy provides a system of
fault tolerance that allows the restaurant to continue functioning regardless of
the type of failure experienced.
Refresh — Refresh is a process which copies all system configuration files

from the \NEWDATA subdirectory of \ALOHA to the \DATA subdirectory of
\ALOHA. Changes made to the database are made within Maintenance
(\NEWDATA directory). The changes do not take effect on the FOH until a
refresh occurs (FOH reads the files in the \DATA directory).
Remote printer — A remote printer is a printer physically located in the bar

or food preparation area of a restaurant, and is used to print kitchen chits.

Revenue center — Revenue centers are defined and used for reporting pur-
poses. Typically, revenue centers correspond with the areas of the restaurant,
such as: Dining Room, Bar, Patio, Cigar Lounge, Banquets, and Room Ser-
vice (hotel).
Server banking — Server banking refers to a restaurant environment

whereby the customers pay the server, rather than paying a cashier.
Servercapable — Servercapable is an Aloha environment variable which

stipulates whether a terminal is capable of taking over as the file server in the
event that the true file server is down or cannot be located by other terminals
on the network.
SKU — Stock Keeping Unit
TableService — Aloha TableService is Aloha Technologies’ premier prod-

uct offering and is designed for restaurant environments where customers are
waited on by an actual server.
Tender — Valid types of payment that a restaurant accepts as payment for

goods and services. These include cash, credit cards, house accounts, and so
on.
Time Slice — A time slice indicates an employee’s shift using the basic labor
scheduler program within Aloha Manager. The left end represents the clock in
time and the right end represents the clock out time for the shift.
TRANS.LOG — The TRANS.LOG (transaction log) is a file stored in the

\DATA subdirectory of \ALOHA. It contains all activity and transactions for
the current DOB. The log stores all FOH activity that occurs during the cur-
rent DOB in this secure, proprietary encrypted format. New data is appended
to the log. It is impossible to lose checks with this system, since every change
to the system is reflected in the log. The log also provides a natural audit trail
for monitoring potential misuse of the system by employees.

Winhook — The Winhook feature is used to launch a custom batch file fol-
lowing the EOD process. Custom batch files allow the automation of certain
routines that are outside the system but address Aloha data files, such as com-
pressing, or zipping, data files and copying them to another drive.

Networking Glossary
10Base2 — 10 Mbps Baseband Ethernet specification using RG-58 thinnet

50-ohm thin coaxial cable with BNC T Connector. (Limit 185 meters.)
10Base5 — 10 Mbps Baseband Ethernet specification using Thicknet DIX/

AUI 50-ohm Baseband coaxial cable. (Limit 500 meters.)
10BaseF — 10 Mbps Baseband Ethernet specification for the 10BaseFB,

10BaseFL, and 10BaseFP standards for Ethernet over fiber-optic cabling.
10BaseFB — 10 Mbps Baseband Ethernet specification using fiber optic

cabling. Provides a synchronous signaling backbone that allows additional
segments and repeaters to be connected to the network. (Limit 2000 meters.)
10BaseFL — 10 Mbps Baseband Ethernet specification using fiber optic

cabling. It is designed to replace the FOIRL specification. (Limit 2000 meters,
1000 meters w/FOIRL.)
10BaseFP — 10 Mbps Fiber-passive Baseband Ethernet specification fiber

optic cabling. Used to organize computers into a star topology without the use
of repeaters. (Limit 500 meters.)
10BaseT — A variant of Ethernet which allows stations to be attached via

twisted pair cable. 10 Mbps Baseband Category 3, 4, or 5 UTP cable RJ-45.
One pair for transmitting data and the other for receiving data. (Limit 100
meters.)
10Broad36 — 10 Mbps Broadband Ethernet specification using Broadband

coaxial cable. (Limit 3600 meters).
100BaseFX — 100 Mbps Baseband Fast Ethernet specification using two
strands of multimode fiber optic cabling per link. (Limit 400 meters).
100BaseT — 100 Mbps Baseband Fast Ethernet specification using Cate-

gory 5 UTP cable RJ-45 connectors. The 100BaseT link pulses, which are
sent when there is no traffic, contain more information than those used in
10BaseT.
100BaseT4 — 100 Mbps Baseband Fast Ethernet specification using four

pairs of Category 3, 4, or 5 UTP wiring. (Limit 100 meters).
100BaseTX — 100 Mbps Baseband Fast Ethernet specification using two

pairs of either UTP or STP wiring. The first pair is used to receive data; the
second is used to transmit data. (Limit 100 meters).
100BaseX — 100 Mbps Baseband Fast Ethernet specification for the

100BaseFX and 100BaseTX standards for Fast Ethernet over fiber optic
cabling.
100VG-AnyLAN — 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet and Token Ring media tech-
nology (developed by Hewlett-Packard). It uses four pairs of Category 3, 4 or
5 UTP cabling. This high speed technology can be made to operate on exist-
ing 10BaseT.
ANSI — American National Standards Institute. The United States govern-

ment body responsible for approving US standards in many areas, including
computers and communications. ANSI is a member of ISO. ANSI sells ANSI
and ISO (international) standards.
APDU — Application Protocol Data. A packet of data exchanged between

two application programs across a network. This is the highest level view of
communication in the OSI seven layer model and a single packet exchanged
at this level may actually be transmitted as several packets at a lower layer as
well as having extra information (headers) added for routing, and so on.
2 Networking Glossary Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

ARP — Address Resolution Protocol. A method for finding a host’s Ethernet
address from its Internet address. The sender broadcasts an ARP packet con-
taining the Internet address of another host and waits for it (or some other
host) to send back its Ethernet address. Each host maintains a cache of address
translations to reduce delay and loading. ARP allows the Internet address to
be independent of the Ethernet address but it only works if all hosts support it.
ATM — Asynchronous transfer mode – fixed packets – Broadband. Speeds

up to 622 Kbps – used mainly for ISP backbones because of cost. 53 byte cells
instead of packets. – Packet switching protocol. A method for the dynamic
allocation of bandwidth using a fixed-size packet (called a cell).
ATS — Asynchronous Terminal Server
ALOHA — A system of contention resolution devised at The University of

Hawaii. Packets are broadcast when ready, the sender listens to see if they col-
lide and if so retransmits after a random time. Slotted ALOHA constrains
packets to start at the beginning of a time slot. Basic ALOHA is appropriate to
long propagation time nets (such as, satellite). For shorter propagation times,
carrier sense protocols are possible.
Address mask — A bit mask used to identify which bits in an IP address

correspond to the network address and subnet portions of the address. This
mask is often referred to as the subnet mask because the network portion of
the address can be determined by the class inherent in an IP address. The
address mask has ones in positions corresponding to the network and subnet
numbers and zeros in the host number positions.
Aloha — A Hawaiian greeting. Also the world’s best POS software.
Analog — A description of a continuously variable signal or a circuit or

device designed to handle such signals. The opposite is discrete or digital.
Analog circuits are much harder to design and analyze than digital ones
because the designer must take into account effects such as the gain, linearity
and power handling of components, the resistance, capacitance and induc-
tance of PCB tracks, wires and connectors, interference between signals,
power supply stability and more.
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Networking Glossary 3

A digital circuit design, especially for high switching speeds, must also take
these factors into account if it is to work reliably, but they are usually less crit-
ical because most digital components will function correctly within a range of
parameters whereas such variations will corrupt the outputs of an analog cir-
cuit.
Application Layer — The top layer of the OSI seven layer model. This layer
handles issues like network transparency, resource allocation and problem
partitioning. The application layer is concerned with the user’s view of the
network (such as formatting electronic mail messages). The presentation layer
provides the application layer with a familiar local representation of data
independent of the format used on the network.
Asynchronous Transmission — Transmission in which time intervals

between transmitted characters may be of unequal length. Transmission is
controlled by start and stop bits. Data stream passed in one direction. Most
common.
Attenuation — The degrading of a signal as it travels farther from its origi-

nation.
BDC — Backup Domain Controller. A computer that receives a copy of the

domain’s security policy and database and authenticates network logins. (It
provides a backup in case the PDC becomes unavailable. It is not required but
is recommended to be a backup to the PDC.)
Bandwidth — The amount of data that can be sent through a given commu-
nications circuit per second.
Baseband — A transmission medium through which digital signals are sent

without frequency shifting. In general, only one communication channel is
available at any given time. Ethernet is an example of a baseband network.

Binary — 1. Base two. A number representation consisting of zeros and ones
used by practically all computers because of its ease of implementation using
digital electronics and Boolean algebra. 2. Any file format for digital data
encoded as a sequence of bits but not consisting of a sequence of printable
characters (text). The term is often used for executable machine code. Of
course all digital data, including characters, is actually binary data (unless it
uses some (rare) system with more than two discrete levels) but the distinction
between binary and text is well established.
Bit — (b) binary digit. The unit of information; the amount of information
obtained by asking a yes-or-no question; a computational quantity that can
take on one of two values, such as true and false or 0 and 1; the smallest unit
of storage - sufficient to hold one bit. A bit is said to be set if its value is true
or 1, and reset or clear if its value is false or 0. One speaks of setting and
clearing bits. To toggle or invert a bit is to change it, either from 0 to 1 or from
1 to 0.
Bitwise — A bitwise operator treats its operands as a vector of bits rather

than a single number. Boolean bitwise operators combine bit N of each oper-
and using a Boolean function (NOT, AND, OR, XOR) to produce bit N of the
result. For example, a bitwise AND operator (& in C) would evaluate 13 & 9
as (binary) 1101 & 1001 - 1001 - 9, whereas, the logical AND, (C &&) would
evaluate 13 && 9 as TRUE && TRUE - TRUE - 1.
In some languages, such as Acorn’s BASIC V, the same operators are used for
both bitwise and logical operations. This usually works except when applying
NOT to a value x which is neither 0 (false) nor -1 (true), in which case both x
and (NOT x) will be nonzero and thus treated as TRUE. Other operations at
the bit level, which are not normally described as ‘bitwise,’ include shift and
rotate.
Boolean — The type of an expression with two possible values, true and
false. Also, a variable of Boolean type or a function with Boolean arguments
or result. The most common Boolean functions are AND, OR and NOT.
Bit mask — A pattern of binary values which is combined with some value
using bitwise AND with the result that bits in the value in positions where the
mask is zero are also set to zero.

Bridge — A device which forwards traffic between network segments based
on data link layer information. These segments would have a common net-
work layer address.
Broadband — A transmission medium capable of supporting a wide range

of frequencies, typically from audio up to video frequencies. It can carry mul-
tiple signals by dividing the total capacity of the medium into multiple, inde-
pendent bandwidth channels, where each channel operates only on a specific
range of frequencies.
Broadcast — A transmission to multiple, unspecified recipients. On Ether-

net, a broadcast packet is a special type of multicast packet which all nodes on
the network are always willing to receive.
Broadcast storm — A broadcast on a network that causes multiple hosts to

respond by broadcasting themselves, causing the storm to grow exponentially
in severity.
Bus Topology — Bus consists of a single linear cable called a trunk. Data is
sent to all computers on the trunk. Computers listen and accept only messaged
addressed to them. Bus is a passive topology. Performance degrades as more
computers are added to the bus. Signal bounce is eliminated by a terminator at
each end of the bus. Barrel connectors can be used to lengthen cable. Repeat-
ers can be used to regenerate signals.
Byte — A unit of information, often 1 character, made up of 8 bits.
CAT 1 — Voice only
CAT 2 — 4 Mbps
CAT 3 — 10 Mbps
CAT 4 — 16 Mbps
CAT 5 — 100 Mbps

CRC — Cyclic Redundancy Check or Cyclic Redundancy Code. A number
derived from, and stored or transmitted with, a block of data in order to detect
corruption. By recalculating the CRC and comparing it to the value originally
transmitted, the receiver can detect some types of transmission errors.
CSMA/CD — Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detect. The low

level network arbitration protocol used on Ethernet. Nodes wait for quiet on
the net before starting to transmit and listen while they are transmitting. If two
nodes transmit at once the data gets corrupted. The nodes detect this and con-
tinue to transmit for a certain length of time to ensure that all nodes detect the
collision. The transmitting nodes then wait for a random time before attempt-
ing to transmit again thus minimizing the chance of another collision. The
ability to detect collision during transmission reduces the amount of band-
width wasted on collisions compared with simple Aloha broadcasting.
CSMA/CA — Collision Avoidance; Announces intention to send data

(Appletalk).
CTS — Clear to Send
Checksum — A computed value that depends on the contents of a block of

data and which is transmitted or stored along with the data in order to detect
corruption of the data. The receiving system recomputes the checksum based
upon the received data and compares this value with the one sent with the
data. If the two values are the same, the receiver has some confidence that the
data was received correctly. The checksum may be 8 bits (modulo 256 sum),
16, 32, or some other size. It is computed by summing the bytes or words of
the data block ignoring overflow. The checksum may be negated so that the
total of the data words plus the checksum is zero. Internet packets use a 32-bit
checksum.
Circuit switching v — A communications paradigm in which a dedicated

communication path is established between the sender and receiver along
which all packets travel. The telephone system is an example of a circuit
switched network. Also called connection-oriented. Contrast connectionless,
packet switching.
Collision — When two hosts transmit on a network at once causing their

packets to collide and corrupt each other.

Collision detection — A class of methods for sharing a data transmission
medium in which hosts transmit as soon as they have data to send and then
check to see whether their transmission has suffered a collision with another
host’s. If a collision is detected then the data must be resent. The resending
algorithm should try to minimize the chance that two hosts’ data will repeat-
edly collide. For example, the CSMA/CD protocol used on Ethernet specifies
that they should then wait for a random time before retransmitting.
Combination Networks — Combines the features of both peer-to-peer and

Server based networks, Users can share resources among themselves as well
as access server-based resources.
Connection — The data communication method in which communication

occurs between hosts with no previous setup. Packets sent between two hosts
may take different routes. UDP is a connectionless protocol. Also called
packet switching. Contrast circuit switching, connection-oriented.
Connection-oriented — (Or connection-based, stream-oriented). A type of

transport layer data communication service that allows a host to send data in a
continuous stream to another host. The transport service will guarantee that all
data will be delivered to the other end in the same order as sent and without
duplication. Communication proceeds through three well-defined phases:
connection establishment, data transfer, connection release. The most com-
mon example is Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).
Connectionless Protocol — The data communication method in which com-

munication occurs between hosts with no previous setup. Packets sent
between two hosts may take different routes. Also called packet switching.
Contrast circuit switching, connection-oriented.
Constant mapping — Some TCP software constructs the destination Ether-

net Address from the top 24 bits of the Ethernet address followed by the low
24 bits of the (class A) destination Internet address. For this scheme the top 24
bits of the Ethernet address must be the same on all hosts on the net. Contrast
ARP.

Contention slot — (Or contention period). Minimum time a host must trans-
mit for before it can be sure that no other host’s packet has collided with its
transmission. If the maximum propagation delay from one host to any other is
T, then a host that starts to transmit at time t0 may collide with a host that
starts just before t0 + T. The first host will not detect the collision until time t0
+ 2T.
Cross-over. See Null Modem.
Cross-pinning. See Null Modem.
Crosstalk — Signal overflow from one wire to another adjacent wire.
DB9 — The standard 9-pin D-shell connector used for RS-232 serial com-
munication.
DB25 — The standard 25-pin D-shell connector used for RS-232 serial com-
munication.
DCE — Data Communications Equipment
DHCP — Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol that provides a

means to dynamically allocate IP addresses to computers on a local area net-
work. The system administrator assigns a range of IP addresses to DHCP and
each client computer on the LAN has its TCP/IP software configured to
request an IP address from the DHCP server. The request and grant process
uses a lease concept with a controllable time period.
DNS — Domain Name Services - A general-purpose distributed, replicated,

data query service chiefly used on Internet for translating hostnames into
Internet addresses. Also, the style of hostname used on the Internet, though
such a name is properly called a fully qualified domain name. DNS can be
configured to use a sequence of name servers, based on the domains in the
name being looked for, until a match is found.
DSR — Data Set Ready
DSU — Digital Service Unit
DTE — Data Terminal Equipment.

DTR — Data Terminal Ready
DVM — Digital VoltMeter) – Uses voltage, tests for continuity or short.
Datagram — A self-contained, independent entity of data carrying sufficient

information to be routed from the source to the destination computer without
reliance on earlier exchanges between this source and destination computer
and the transporting network.
Data Link Layer — The third lowest layer in the OSI seven layer model.
The network layer determines routing of packets of data from sender to
receiver via the data link layer and is used by the transport layer. The most
common network layer protocol is IP.
Deferral — Waiting for quiet on the Ethernet.
Digital — A description of data that is stored or transmitted as a sequence of

discrete symbols from a finite set, most commonly this means binary data rep-
resented using electronic or electromagnetic signals. The opposite is analog.
Domain — On the Internet, ‘domain’ is most commonly used to refer to a

group of computers whose hostnames share a common suffix, the domain
name. The last component of this is the top-level domain.
Domain address — The name of a host on the Internet belonging to the hier-
archy of Internet domains.
Dot notation — Berkeley UNIX notation for Internet addresses. An Internet

address in dot notation consists of one to four numbers in hexadecimal (lead-
ing 0x), octal (leading 0) or decimal. It represents a 32-bit address. Each lead-
ing number represents eight bits of the address (high byte first) and the last
number represents the rest. Such as address 0x25.32.0xab represents
0x252000ab. By far the most common form is four decimal numbers, such as
146.169.22.42. Many commands will accept an address in dot notation in
place of a hostname.
Dynamic Router — Automatically track routes. Routers talk to routers and

add them to the tables.

Dynamic Routing — Routing that adjusts automatically to network topol-
ogy or traffic changes.
Ethernet — A local area network. IEEE 802.3, recognized as the industry

standard. Data is broken into packets that are transmitted using the CSMA/CD
algorithm until they arrive at the destination without colliding with any other.
The first contention slot after a transmission is reserved for an acknowledge
packet. A node is either transmitting or receiving at any instant. The band-
width is about 10 Mbps.
Disk-Ethernet-Disk transfer rate with TCP/IP is typically 30 kilobyte per sec-

ond. Version 2 specifies that collision detect of the transceiver must be acti-
vated during the inter-packet gap and that when transmission finishes the
differential transmit lines are driven to 0V (half step). It also specifies some
network management functions such as reporting collisions, retries and defer-
rals. Ethernet cables are classified as XbaseY, such as 10base5 , where X is
the data rate in Mbps, ‘base’ means baseband (as opposed to radio frequency)
and Y is the category of cabling. The original cable was 10base5 (full-spec),
others are 10Base2 (thinnet) and 10BaseT (twisted-pair) which is now very
common. 100baseT (Fast Ethernet) is also increasingly common.
Ethernet Address — Or MAC address. The physical address identifying an

individual Ethernet controller board. An Ethernet address is a 48-bit number
aabbccddeeff where a-f are hexadecimal digits. The first 24 bits, aabbcc, iden-
tify the manufacturer of the controller. The Ethernet address is hard-wired on
some controllers, stored in a ROM on some, and others allow it to be changed
from software. It is usually written as six hexadecimal numbers, such as
08:00:20:03:72:DC.
FDDI — Fiber Distributed Data Interface. 100Mbps Used mainly for MAN
technology - works in a double ring. Like Token-Ring, only many frames can
go on the token, not just one.
FQDN — Fully Qualified Domain Name. The full name of a system, consist-
ing of its local hostname and its domain name. For example, ‘venera’ is a
hostname and ‘venera.isi.edu’ is Fully Qualified Domain Name. An FQDN
should be sufficient to determine a unique Internet address for any host on the
Internet.

The same naming scheme is also used for some hosts which are not on the
Internet, but share the same name-space for electronic mail addressing. A host
that does not have a FQDN (which is not ‘domainist’) must be addressed
using a bang path. All Internet computers and most UUCP sites can now
resolve FQDNs, thanks to a large amount of behind-the-scenes magic and PD
software written since 1980 or so.
Fast Ethernet — A version of Ethernet developed in the 1990s that can

carry 100 Mbps compared with standard Ethernet 10 Mbps. It requires
upgraded network cards and hubs. The relevant standards are 100baseT,
100BaseFX and 100BaseVG.
Fiber Optic Cable — Cable constructed of pure glass using light beams to
transmit large amounts of data. Resistant to interference. Speeds of between
100Mbps - 200,000Mbps.
File server — Hardware and software that together provide file-handling and
storage functions for multiple users on a local area network. Storing files on a
file server saves having multiple copies stored on individual computers, thus
economizing on disk space and also makes administrating and updating the
files easier.
Flow control — The collection of techniques used in serial communications

to stop the sender sending data until the receiver can accept it. This may be
either software flow control or hardware flow control. The receiver typically
has a fixed size buffer into which received data is written as soon as it is
received. When the amount of buffered data exceeds a ‘high water mark,’ the
receiver will signal to the transmitter to stop transmitting until the process
reading the data has read sufficient data from the buffer that it has reached its
‘low water mark,’ at which point the receiver signals to the transmitter to
resume transmission.
Fragment — A piece of a packet. When a router is forwarding an IP packet

to a network that has a maximum packet size smaller than the packet size, it is
forced to break up that packet into multiple fragments. These fragments will
be reassembled by the IP layer at the destination host.
Fragmentation — The IP process in which a packet is broken into smaller

pieces, fragments, to fit the requirements of a physical network over which
the packet must pass. The inverse is reassembly.

Frame Relay — Point-to-point system. Uses PVC; fast-packet, variable-
length digital; digital leased lines. Provides bandwidth as needed. Packet-
switching protocol.
Gateway — Works at all layers. Gateways change format of the data to make
it conform to the application program at the receiving end. Strips packet and
rebuilds with new protocol info, that is, PC connectivity to mainframe. Gate-
way strips PC packet and rebuilds it in mainframe form. Proxy server is gate-
way to the Internet.
Hexadecimal — Or ‘hex.’ Base 16. A number representation using the digits

0-9, with their usual meaning, plus the letters A-F (or a-f) to represent hexa-
decimal digits with values of (decimal) 10 to 15. The right-most digit counts
ones, the next counts multiples of 16, then 16^2 - 256, and so on.
Hop — One direct host-to-host connection forming part of the route between
two hosts in a routed network such as the Internet. Some protocols place an
upper limit on the hop count in order to detect routing loops.
Host — A computer connected to a network. The term node includes devices

such as routers and printers which would not normally be called hosts.
Host number — The host part of an Internet address. The rest is the network
number.
Hostname — The unique name by which a computer is known on a network,

used to identify it in electronic mail, Usenet news, or other forms of electronic
information interchange.
HOSTS — File that contains mappings between DNS host names and their
IP addresses.
IEEE — Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. The world’s largest

technical professional society, based in the USA. Founded in 1884 by a hand-
ful of practitioners of the new electrical engineering discipline, today’s Insti-
tute has more than 320,000 members who participate in its activities in 147
countries.

The IEEE sponsors technical conferences, symposia and local meetings
worldwide, publishes nearly 25% of the world’s technical papers in electrical,
electronics and computer engineering and computer science, provides educa-
tional programs for its members and promotes standardization. Areas covered
include aerospace, computers and communications, biomedical technology,
electric power and consumer electronics. To learn more go to: http://grou-
per.ieee.org/groups/802/802info.html.
IP — Internet Protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite
widely used on Ethernet networks, defined in STD 5, RFC 791. IP is a con-
nectionless, best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet routing,
fragmentation and reassembly through the data link layer.
IP address — See Internet Address.
IPX/SPX — Novell. Similar to NetBEUI, only routable.
IRQ — Interrupt Request. The following is a list of common IRQ settings:
• 2 (9) EGA/VGA
• 3 Available (or COM2,COM4)
• 4 COM 1, COM 3
• 5 Available (unless LPT2 or sound card)
• 6 Floppy Disk Controller
• 7 Parallel port (LPT1)
• 8 Real-time clock
• 10 Available
• 11 Available
• 12 Mouse (PS/2)
• 13 Math Coprocessor
• 14 Hard-disk controller
• 15 Available
ISDN — Integrated services digital network; 128 bits per second - 2B+D - 2
64Kbps B channels & 1 16Kbps D channel. Voice, data, images; signaling and
link management.

ISO — A voluntary, nontreaty organization founded in 1946, responsible for
creating international standards in many areas, including computers and com-
munications. ISO produced the OSI seven-layer model for network architec-
ture. Its members are the national standards organizations of 89 countries,
including the American National Standards Institute. The term ISO is not
actually an acronym for anything. It is a pun on the Greek prefix iso-, mean-
ing ‘same.’ Some ISO documents say ISO is not an acronym even though it is
an anagram of the initials of the organization’s name.
Internet address — IP address, TCP/IP address. The 32-bit host address

defined by the Internet Protocol in STD 5, RFC 791. It is usually represented
in dotted decimal notation. A host’s Internet address is sometimes related to
its Ethernet address. The Internet address is usually expressed in dot notation,
such as 128.121.4.5. The address can be split into a network number (or net-
work address) and a host number unique to each host on the network and
sometimes also a subnet address. The way the address is split depends on its
class, A, B or C as determined by the high address bits:
Class A - high bit 0, 7-bit network number, 24-bit host number n1.a.a.a 0 <-
n1 <- 127
Class B - high 2 bits 10, 14-bit network number, 16-bit host number n1.n2.a.a
128 <- n1 <- 191
Class C - high 3 bits 110, 21-bit network number, 8-bit host number
n1.n2.n3.a 192 <- n1 <- 223
The Internet address must be translated into an Ethernet address by either

ARP or constant mapping. The term is sometimes used incorrectly to refer to
a host’s fully qualified domain name.
Internetworking — The interconnection of two or more networks, usually

local area networks so that data can pass between hosts on the different net-
works as though they were one network. This requires some kind of router or
gateway.

Inter-packet gap — A time delay between successive data packets man-
dated by the network standard for protocol reasons. In Ethernet, the medium
has to be ‘silent’ (that is, no data transfer) for a few microseconds before a
node can consider the network idle and start to transmit. This is necessary for
fairness reasons. The delay time, which approximately equals the signal prop-
agation time on the cable, allows the “silence” to reach the far end so that all
nodes consider the net idle.
Jitter — Instability in a signal wave; caused by signal interference or an

unbalanced FDDI ring or Token Ring.
LAN — Local Area Network. A data communications network which is geo-

graphically limited (typically to a 1 km radius) allowing easy interconnection
of computers within adjacent buildings. Ethernet and FDDI are examples of
standard LANs. Because the network is known to cover only a small area,
optimizations can be made in the network signal protocols that permit data
rates up to 100 Mbps.
Lana — The NetBIOS LANA (LAN Adapter) number identifies the trans-
port driver, network interface card (NIC) driver, and adapter that will be used
to send and receive NetBIOS packets. Each transport driver (protocol), net-
work interface card driver, and adapter will use a different lana number.
LLC — Logical Link Control. The lower sublayer of the data link layer. The
interface between a node’s Logical Link Control and the network’s physical
layer. The MAC differs for various physical media.
LMHOSTS — File that contains mappings between NetBIOS computer

names and their IP addresses.
Latency — 1. The time it takes for a packet to cross a network connection,

from sender to receiver. 2. The period of time that a frame is held by a net-
work device before it is forwarded. Two of the most important parameters of a
communications channel are its latency and its bandwidth.
MAC — The lower sublayer of the data link layer. The interface between a
node’s Logical Link Control and the network’s physical layer. The MAC dif-
fers for various physical media.

MAN — Metropolitan Area Network. A data network intended to serve an
area the size of a large city. Such networks are being implemented by innova-
tive techniques, such as running optical fiber through subway tunnels.
Mbps — Megabits per second. Millions of bits per second. A unit of infor-
mation transfer rate. For example, Ethernet can carry 10 Mbps.
Mesh — Commonly used in WAN configurations. Routers are connected to

multiple links for redundancy and to give the ability to determine the quickest
route to a destination.
Mnemonic — A shortened version of a command word, such as TXD for

Transmit Data.
Multiplexer — Mux. Combines several separate data channels for transmis-

sion over a single line.
NDIS — Used to bind multiple protocols to a network adapter.
NIC — Network Interface Card. An adapter circuit board installed in a com-

puter to provide a physical connection to a network.
NRZ — Non-Return to Zero
NWLINK — Microsoft version of IPX/SPX.
NetBEUI — NetBIOS Extended User Interface. The network transport pro-

tocol used by all of Microsoft’s network systems and IBM’s LAN Server
based systems. NetBEUI is often confused with NetBIOS. NetBIOS is the
applications programming interface and NetBEUI is the transport protocol.
NetBIOS — An application programming interface (API) which activates

network operations on IBM PC compatibles running under MS-DOS. It is a
set of network commands that the application program issues in order to
transmit and receive data to another host on the network. The commands are
interpreted by a network control program or network operating system that is
NetBIOS compatible.

Name resolution — The process of mapping a name to its corresponding
address. The Domain Name System is the system that does name resolution
on the Internet.
Netmask — A 32-bit bit mask which shows how an Internet address is to be

divided into network, subnet and host parts. The netmask has 1s in the bit
positions in the 32-bit address which are to be used for the network and subnet
parts, and zeros for the host part. The mask should contain at least the stan-
dard network portion (as determined by the address’s class), and the subnet
field should be contiguous with the network portion.
Network — Hardware and software data communication systems. The OSI

seven layer model attempts to provide a way of partitioning any computer net-
work into independent modules from the lowest (physical) layer to the highest
(application) layer. Many different specifications exist at each of these layers.
Networks are often also classified according to their geographical extent:
local area network (LAN), metropolitan area network (MAN), wide area net-
work (WAN) and also according to the protocols used.
Network Address — The network portion of an IP address. For a class A

network, the network address is the first byte of the IP address. For a class B
network, the network address is the first two bytes of the IP address. For a
class C network, the network address is the first three bytes of the IP address.
In each case, the remainder is the host address. In the Internet, assigned net-
work addresses are globally unique.
Network card — See NIC.
Network Layer — The third lowest layer in the OSI seven layer model. The
network layer determines routing of packets of data from sender to receiver
via the data link layer and is used by the transport layer. The most common
network layer protocol is IP.
Network Transparency — A feature of an operating system or other service

which lets the user access a remote resource through a network without hav-
ing to know if the resource is remote or local.
Node — An addressable device attached to a computer network. More often

called a host.

Null Modem — A cable, especially an RS-232 cable, for connecting serial
ports on two computers directly, rather than via modems. Since, according to
the specification, both computers should transmit on pin three of their RS-232
connectors and receive on pin two, a null modem cable needs to connect one
computer’s pin two to the other’s pin three and vice versa. It also needs to
have male connectors at both ends (again, according to the specification).
OSI — Open Systems Interconnection model. A model of network architec-

ture and a suite of protocols (a protocol stack) to implement it, developed by
ISO in 1978 as a framework for international standards in heterogeneous
computer network architecture. The OSI architecture is split between seven
layers, from lowest to highest: 1 physical layer, 2 data link layer, 3 network
layer, 4 transport layer, 5 session layer, 6 presentation layer, 7 application
layer.
OSPF — Open shortest path first (routing algorithm)
Optical fiber — A plastic or glass (silicon dioxide) fiber no thicker than a

human hair used to transmit information using infrared or even visible light as
the carrier (usually a laser). The light beam is an electromagnetic signal with a
frequency in the range of 10^14 to 10^15 Hertz. Optical fiber is less suscepti-
ble to external noise than other transmission media, and is cheaper to make
than copper wire, but it is much more difficult to connect. Optical fibers are
difficult to tamper with (to monitor or inject data in the middle of a connec-
tion), making them appropriate for secure communications. The light beams
do not escape from the medium because the material used provides total inter-
nal reflection.
AT&T Bell Laboratories in the United States managed to send information at

a rate of 420 Mbps, over 161.5 km through an optical fiber cable. In Japan,
445.Mbps was achieved over a shorter distance. At this rate, the entire text of
the Encyclopedia Britannica could be transmitted in one second. Currently,
AT&T is working on a world network to support high volume data transmis-
sion, international computer networking, electronic mail and voice communi-
cations. (A single fiber can transmit 200 million telephone conversations
simultaneously.)
PCMCIA — Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
PDC — Primary Domain Controller. Logins, permissions, scripts, securities.

PVC — Permanent virtual circuit
Packet — The unit of data sent across a network. Packet is a generic term
used to describe a unit of data at any layer of the OSI protocol stack, but it is
most correctly used to describe application layer data units
Packet Switching — A communications paradigm in which packets (mes-

sages or fragments of messages) are individually routed between nodes, with
no previously established communication path. Packets are routed to their
destination through the most expedient route (as determined by some routing
algorithm). Not all packets travelling between the same two hosts, even those
from a single message, will necessarily follow the same route. The destination
computer reassembles the packets into their appropriate sequence. Packet
switching is used to optimize the use of the bandwidth available in a network
and to minimize the latency.
Peer — A unit of communications hardware or software that is on the same

protocol layer of a network as another. A common way of viewing a commu-
nications link is as two protocol stacks, which are actually connected only at
the very lowest (physical) layer, but can be regarded as being connected at
each higher layer by virtue of the services provided by the lower layers. Peer-
to-peer communication refers to these real or virtual connections between cor-
responding systems in each layer.
Peer-to-Peer Networks — No dedicated server or hierarchy, also called a

workgroup. Usually ten or fewer workstations. Users act as their own admin-
istrator and security. Computers are in same general area. Limited growth.
Parallel — Transmission mode that sends a number of bits concurrently over

separate wires.
Path — The list of directories the command interpreter searches for executa-
bles. It is stored as part of the environment in the operating system.
Physical addressing — The low level addressing scheme used on Ethernet.

The 48-bit destination Ethernet address in a packet is compared with the
receiving node’s Ethernet address.

Physical Layer — The lowest layer in the OSI seven layer model. It con-
cerns electrical and mechanical connections and MAC. It is used by the data
link layer. Example physical layer protocols are CSMA/CD, token ring and
bus.
Presentation Layer — The second highest layer (layer 6) in the OSI seven
layer model. Performs functions such as text compression, code or format
conversion to try to smooth out differences between hosts. Allows incompati-
ble processes in the application layer to communicate via the session layer.
Protocol — A set of formal rules describing how to transmit data, especially

across a network. Low level protocols define the electrical and physical stan-
dards to be observed, bit- and byte-ordering and the transmission and error
detection and correction of the bit stream. High level protocols deal with the
data formatting, including the syntax of messages, the terminal to computer
dialogue, character sets, sequencing of messages and so on.
Protocol stack — A layered set of protocols which work together to provide

a set of network functions. Each intermediate protocol layer uses the layer
below it to provide a service to the layer above. The OSI seven layer model is
an attempt to provide a standard framework within which to describe protocol
stacks.
Protocol Layer — The software and/or hardware environment of two or

more communications devices or computers in which a particular network
protocol operates. A network connection may be thought of as a set of more or
less independent protocols, each in a different layer or level. The lowest layer
governs direct host-to-host communication between the hardware at different
hosts; the highest consists of user application programs. Each layer uses the
layer beneath it and provides a service for the layer above.
Each networking component hardware or software on one host uses protocol

appropriate to its layer to communicate with the corresponding component
(its peer) on another host. Such layered protocols are sometimes known as
peer-to-peer protocols. The advantages of layered protocols is that the meth-
ods of passing information from one layer to another are specified clearly as
part of the protocol suite, and changes within a protocol layer are prevented
from affecting the other layers. This greatly simplifies the task of designing
and maintaining communication systems. Examples of layered protocols are
TCP/IP’s five layer protocol stack and the OSI seven layer model.

Protocol Analyzer — Sniffer. Monitors and logs network activities and pro-
vides guidelines for optimizing.
RD — Receive Data
RI — Ring Indicator
RIP — Routing information protocol. Uses distance-vector algorithms to

determine routes.
RJ11 — Modular Telephone Jack Standard-11. A six conductor modular jack

that is typically wired for four conductors. One line with the two center, red
and green, conductors being tip and ring.
RJ14 — Modular Telephone Jack Standard-14. Consists of two phone lines.

One of the lines is the RJ11 line (the red and green conductors in the center).
The second line is the second set of conductors, black and yellow, on the out-
side.
RJ45 — Modular Telephone Jack Standard-45. The eight-pin connector used

for data transmission over standard telephone wire.
RJ48C — Modular telephone Jack Standard-48C. An eight-position keyed

plug with four wires, two for transmit, two for receive. Commonly used in T1
transmission.
RS232 — EIA Recommended Standard-232. Standards specifying electrical

and mechanical characteristics for interfaces between computer devices.
RS449 — EIA DB37 and DB9 interlace for DTE and DCE data interchange.
RTS — Request to Send
Reassembly — Joining back together a previously fragmented IP packet

before it is passed to the transport layer. See also Fragmentation.
Redirector — All Microsoft products come with a redirector that takes a

request from the computer and looks to see if it is local or sends to network.

Registry — A central database, where all hardware details, software settings
and user preferences are stored.
Reliable communication — Communication where messages are guaran-

teed to reach their destination complete and uncorrupted and in the order they
were sent. This reliability can be built on top of an unreliable protocol by add-
ing sequencing information and some kind of checksum or cyclic redundancy
check to each message or packet. If the communication fails, the sender will
be notified. Transmission Control Protocol is a reliable protocol used on
Ethernet.
Repeater — A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message

traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the
segment and received by all others. This is normally because the segment is a
single continuous conductor, though it may include repeaters. Since all nodes
share the physical medium, collision detection or some other protocol is
required to determine whether a message was transmitted without interference
from other nodes. The receiving node inspects the destination address of a
packet to tell if it was (one of) the intended recipient(s). Communication
between nodes on different segments is via one or more routers.
Ring Topology — Computers are connected on a single circle of cable. Each

computer acts as a repeater. Failure of one computer can affect the entire net-
work. Token passing is used in Token Ring networks. The token is passed
from one computer to the next, only the computer with the token can transmit.
The receiving computer strips the data from the token and sends the token
back to the sending computer with an acknowledgment. After verification, the
token is regenerated.
Router — A device which forwards packets between networks. The for-

warding decision is based on network layer information and routing tables,
often constructed by routing protocols.
Routing — The process, performed by a router, of selecting the correct inter-

face and next hop for a packet being forwarded
SMDS — Switched multi-megabit data service. Up to 34 Mbps. Same fixed-

length, cell-relay technology as ATM.

SONET — Synchronous Optical Network. Fiber-optic cabling. 1 Gig per
second.
SQL — Structured Query Language. Used by most databases to manipulate

data.
STP — Shielded Twisted Pair. Twisted pair wiring, carries signal 100 meters.
Has foil or braided jacket around wiring to help reduce crosstalk and to pre-
vent electromagnetic interference.
SVC — Switched virtual circuit
Segment — A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message

traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the
segment and received by all others. This is normally because the segment is a
single continuous conductor, though it may include repeaters. Since all nodes
share the physical medium, collision detection or some other protocol is
required to determine whether a message was transmitted without interference
from other nodes. The receiving node inspects the destination address of a
packet to tell if it was (one of) the intended recipient(s). Communication
between nodes on different segments is via one or more routers.
Serial (Port) — A connector on a computer to which you can attach a serial

line connected to peripherals which communicate using a serial (bit-stream)
protocol. The most common type of serial port is a 25-pin D-type connector
carrying RS-232 signals. Smaller connectors (e.g. 9-pin D-type) carrying a
subset of RS-232 are often used on personal computers. The serial port is
usually connected to an integrated circuit called a UART which handles the
conversion between serial and parallel data.
Server — A computer that provides some service for other computers con-
nected to it via a network.
Server Based Networks — Ten or more users. Employs specialized servers.

File and Print, Application, Mail, Fax, Communications (gateways), Central
administration, Greater security, Centralized backup, Data Redundancy. Sup-
ports many users.

Session — A lasting connection between a user (or user agent) and a peer,
typically a server, usually involving the exchange of many packets between
the user’s computer and the server. A session is typically implemented as a
layer in a network protocol (such as Telnet or FTP).
Session Layer — The third highest protocol layer (layer 5) in the OSI seven-
layer model. The session layer uses the transport layer to establish a connec-
tion between processes on different hosts. It handles security and creation of
the session. It is used by the presentation layer.
Share-level security — Used in Microsoft® Windows® 95 to share

resources. A password is needed to access the resource.
Sniffer — A network monitoring tool that can capture data packets and
decode them to show protocol data.
Star Bus Topology — Several star topologies linked with a linear bus.
Star Ring Topology — Star hubs are connected using ring topology as
opposed to a linear bus or a central hub.
Star Topology — Computers are connected by cable segments to a central-

ized hub. Signal travels through the hub to all other computers. Requires more
cable. If hub goes down, entire network goes down. If a computer goes down,
the network functions normally.
Static Router — Administrator manually sets up and configures routing

table.
Subnet — A portion of a network, which may be a physically independent

network segment, that shares a network address with other portions of the net-
work and is distinguished by a subnet number. A subnet is to a network what a
network is to an internet.
Subnet Address — The subnet portion of an IP address. In a subnetted net-

work, the host portion of an IP address is split into a subnet portion and a host
portion using an address mask (the subnet mask).
Subnet mask — See Address Mask.

Synchronous Transmission — Transmission in which data bits are sent at a
fixed rate, with transmitter and receiver synchronized. Data going in both
directions; expensive.
T1 — 1.544 Mbps. Point-to-point, full-duplex transmission. Voice, data and

video.
T3 — 45 Mbps. Point-to-point, full-duplex transmission. Voice, data and

video.
TCP — Transmission Control Protocol. The most common transport layer

protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet. It was developed by DARPA. TCP
is built on top of Internet Protocol (IP) and is nearly always seen in the combi-
nation TCP/IP (TCP over IP). It adds reliable communication, flow-control,
multiplexing and connection-oriented communication. It provides full-duplex,
process-to-process connections.
TCP/IP — Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The de facto

standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD UNIX. TCP/IP was
developed by DARPA for internetworking and encompasses both network
layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at
specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire DoD proto-
col suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TD — Transmit Data
TDR — Time Domain Reflectometer. Sends pulses down cable. Looks for
shorts or opens. Can give you area of problem.
TERMSTR — Pronounced “term-stir”. An environment setting used to

override the default naming convention for terminals that must be used on all
Aloha terminals and file servers. For example, if TERMSTR is set to TERM,
then terminals must be named TERM1, TERM2, etc. Etymology: derived
from old Cuban slang term for a traumatized hamster.
Thinnet — 10Base2. 185 meters (607 feet); 10 Mbps; BNC Connector (bar-
rel connector, terminator); RG58 cable. 5-4-3 rule (5 segments with 4 repeat-
ers but only 3 segments can have computers.)

Thicknet — Also known as Standard Ethernet (10base5). 500 meters
(1640 feet); 10 Mbps; AUI (attachment unit interface) connector, transceivers,
transceiver cables (connect to thin).
Top-level domain — The last and most significant component of an Internet

fully qualified domain name, the part after the last “ . ”. For example, host
wombat.doc.ic.ac.uk is in top-level domain uk (for United Kingdom).
Topology — Refers to the configuration of the physical media of a network.
Transport Layer — Host-host layer. The middle layer in the OSI seven-
layer model. The transport layer determines how to use the network layer to
provide a virtual error-free, point to point connection so that host A can send
messages to host B and they will arrive uncorrupted and in the correct order. It
establishes and dissolves connections between hosts. It is used by the session
layer. An example transport layer protocol is Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP).
Transport Protocol — Ensures error-free transmission.
Twisted Pair — Standard phone line made up of two insulated copper wires
wrapped around each other. The twists minimize interference and attenuation.
UNC — Uniform (or Universal) Naming Convention. Used in IBM PC net-

working to completely specify a directory on a file server. The basic format is:
\\servername\sharename
where servername is the hostname of a network file server, and sharename

is the name of a networked or shared directory. Note this is not the same as the
conventional MS-DOS C:\WINDOWS directory name, such as:
\\server1\dave which might be set up to point to: C:\users\homedirs\dave on a
server called server1. It is possible to execute a program using this conven-
tion without having to specifically link a drive, by running:
\\server\share\directory\program.exe. The undocumented MS-DOS com-
mand, TRUENAME can be used to find out the UNC name of a file or direc-
tory on a network drive.
UPS — Uninterruptible Power Supply. Power supply to run a computer for a

short time in case of power loss.

UTP — Unshielded Twisted Pair. At least two pairs of insulated twisted pair
and wrapped in an outer cover.
User-level security — Used in Windows NT® to share resources. When you

attempt to access a shared resource, the server will make sure your user
account has been authorized to access the resource.
Virtual Circuits — Logical connections between sending and receiving

computers.
WAN — Wide Area Network. At least two LANs or MANs connected over a
great distance, sometimes even intercontinentally.
WINS — Windows Internet Naming Service. Used to resolve a NetBIOS

computer name to an IP address. WINS supports network client and server
computers running Windows and can provide name resolution for other com-
puters with special arrangements.
Workgroup — A group of users in a multi-user environment who share data.

Index
Symbols
# Guest Checks 8-32
Numerics
24-Hour Operation 3-127
A
Access Levels function tab 4-32
Adjust Payments 4-36
Assign Comp 4-34
Cash Drawers 4-38
CC Refunds 4-36
Clear Password 4-37
Delete Checkout 4-38
Delete Clockout 4-38
Delete Promo 4-34
Description 4-32
Downtime 4-38
Force Reconciliation 4-38
Level 4-33
Open Any Drawer 4-38
Reopen Check 4-38
Reprint 4-38
Rest Sales 4-33
Server Flash Rpt 4-34
Server Sales 4-33
Transfer Tables 4-36
View Tables 4-36
Void Items 4-38
Accounts Receivable 6-17
Adjust Payments 4-36
Adjust Tips 7-134
ADP Company # 3-33 Aloha Manager screen 1-8 Bartender 4-24
ADP Store # 3-33 Amount Tippable 6-46 Bartender May Enter a Guest
ADP Version # 3-34 Apply button 1-4 Count at Order Entry S 3-8
After __ Hrs/7th Day 3-31 Apply Surcharge 5-18 Base % 5-21
After __ Hrs/Day 3-31 Apply to All Eligible Items on Base Category 4-43
After __ Hrs/Week 3-31 Check 6-32 Base Text 3-134
Align Right Sides 7-126 AR Field on Receipt 6-17 Basic Gift Certificates 3-140,
All Tenders Round to 0.05 3-131 AR Sales Cat 5-31 6-53
Allow a Guest Count of Zero 3-7 AR Tax ID 5-54 Beep on Timeout 3-113
Allow Add Item 4-22 Ask for Description 5-24 Beeps 8-31
Allow Adjust Payments 3-111 Ask for Guest Count by Check 3-7 Blind Bartender 3-107
Allow Auto Menu Overwrite 5-48 Ask for Price 5-25 Blind Server 3-107
Allow Breaks with Open Ask for Transfer Name 3-11 BOGO Modifiers 6-31
Tables 4-26 Assign Amount 6-54 Break 7-135
Allow Clock-In Early 3-22 assign checkout buckets 2-25 Break In/Out 7-137
Allow Clock-In Late 3-22 Assign Comp 4-34 Breaks button 2-11
Allow Discount Items 6-31 Assign Driver 7-144 button commands
Allow Duplicate Table Authorize Using EDC 6-16 Align Right Sides 7-126
Numbers 3-9 Auto Apply 6-32, 6-37 Delete Button 7-117
Allow Employees Only One Shift, Auto Apply if Possible? 6-40 Edit Button 7-117
Per Day 3-22 Auto Clockout 3-24 Horizontal: Grow to
Allow Item Lookup 4-22 Auto Consolidate Scanned Checks Largest 7-124
Allow Merge Tabs 3-107 on Getcheck 3-10 Space Evenly Side to
Allow Overpayment 6-8 Auto Display Recipe 5-23 Side 7-126
Allow PreAuth with EDC 6-16 Auto Fill 6-20 Space Evenly Up and
Allow Prior for Check 6-28, 6-29, Auto Increment Pivot Seat on Down 7-128
6-49, 6-50 Category 3-7 button functions
Allow Prior for Table 6-28, 6-29, Auto Menu 5-102 Adjust Tips 7-134
6-49, 6-50 Auto Name Saved Tabs 3-10 Assign Driver 7-144
Allow Refund Orders, by Access Auto New Order 3-10 Break 7-135
Level 3-110 Auto Return Get Checks 4-27 Break In/Out 7-137
Allow Split Promos, Comps, Tax Auto Save Tab when NEW TAB is Calibrate 7-137
Exempt 3-111 Pressed 3-9 Checkout 7-144
Allow Subseq for Check 6-28, Auto Start Back of House Upon clock out 7-137
6-29, 6-49, 6-50 Startup 3-122 Close Check 7-137
Allow Subseq for Table 6-29, Automatic Release 3-13 Comp 7-137
6-50 Auto-Print when Food is delete 7-137
Allow Tip Out 4-25 Ordered 3-73 Delivery 7-137
Allow Tips 6-9 Delivery Information 7-138
Allow to Reprint Own B Force Tender 7-138
Checks 4-26 Back Office Security Levels func- Get Check 7-138
Allow to Void Own Items 4-25 tion tab 4-45 hold 7-138
Allow Unpaid Breaks 4-20 add, copy, edit, delete 4-46 Item Lookup 7-139, 7-140
Aloha eCard 3-140 HTML Page 4-46 Kodiak Exit 7-140
Aloha Gift Certificate Screen Timeout 4-46 Modify 7-140
Manager 3-140 Start Level 4-46 Open Drawer 7-140
I-2 Index Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Order Type 7-140 Other Interfaces 8-23 Item 5-18
PMS Check 7-141 Printer Interface 8-23 Combo 6-32
PMS Inquire 7-141 Serial Interface 8-23 Combo Check Name 6-33
Print Receipt 7-141 Cash Tenders Round to Command buttons
Quantity 7-142 0.05 3-131 Delete 1-4
Recall 7-142 Cashier 4-25, 4-27 Edit 1-4
Recipe 7-142 Cashier Auto Accepts Commands menu 7-85
Refund 7-142 Checks 3-12 Comp 7-137
Reopen Check 7-144 Categories function tab 5-29 Comp Items Eligible 6-29, 6-50
Repeat 7-142 AR Sales Cat 5-31 Company Code 3-34
reprint check 7-142 Exclude From Tipshare Component Name 6-41
Reroute Display Board 7-142 Calculations 5-31 Comps function tab 6-42
Run Application 7-144 PMS Sales Cat 5-30 Comps subtab 6-43
Sales Summary 7-145 Category 6-33, 6-41, 6-54 Amount Tippable 6-46
Script 7-153 CC Refunds 4-36 Check 6-43
Send 7-147 Chain 7-137 Eligible Items 6-44
Table 7-147 Change Due Detail for Non Cash First Available 6-45
Transfer Tables 7-149 Tenders 3-78 Manager Needed 6-46
Unassigned 7-149 change password 1-6 Maximum $ 6-44
View Mode 7-149 Check 6-10, 6-43 Must Enter Amount 6-46
Wall 7-151 Check # on Work w/Tables 3-9 Must Enter Name 6-46
Working with Tables 7-152 Check Minimum 6-38 Must Enter Percent 6-46
Button Height 7-120 Check Reduction promotion Must Enter Unit 6-46
Button Width 7-120 type 6-37 Must Select Items 6-46
Buy One Get One promotion Check Text 3-76, 3-95 Open Drawer 6-46
type 6-30 Checkout 7-144 Percent Off 6-44
Chit Name 5-13 Position 6-44
C Ckout Cash 3-78 Print Check 6-46
Calculate as Percentage 5-89 Clear Password 4-37 Report As 6-45
Calculate Overtime by Average Clock In Information function Restrictions subtab 6-49
Rate 3-32 tab 9-9 Allow Prior for
Calculate Overtime by Shift Clock In Report Available 3-30 Check 6-49, 6-50
Rate 3-32 Clock-In Round Threshold 3-30 Allow Prior for
Can Edit Clock In/Out 3-24 Clock-Out Round Threshold 3-30 Table 6-49, 6-50
Can Get Checks 4-22 Close a Group of Panels 7-107 Allow Subseq for
Cancel button 1-4 Close a Panel 7-106 Check 6-50
Cannot Close 4-26 Close Check 7-137 Allow Subseq for
Cannot Move Payment Close Check Upon Payment 6-8 Table 6-50
Types 3-111 Coconut Code 2-55, 2-56, 2-57 Comp Items
Cash 6-10 Code Page 8-29 Eligible 6-50
Cash Card 5-22, 6-10 Columns 7-120 Max Per Check 6-50
cash cards 8-48 Combine Gratuity Tax with Other Max Per Table 6-50
Cash Drawers (access Guest Check Tax 3-51 Promo Items
levels) 4-38 Combine on Check 6-8 Eligible 6-49
Cash Drawers function tab 8-22 Combine Price 6-41 Taxes subtab 6-47
Combine Price with Base Food Cost 6-48
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Index I-3

Guest Pays Tax 6-47 Default Guest Count for Section 6-57
Surcharge Comp Tables 3-7 DL Exp 4-13
Amount 6-47 Default Guest Count for Tabs 3-7 Do any items in this category ap-
Tax Comp Amount 6-47, Default Item Justification 3-91 pear on the check? 5-74
6-48 Default Selected ID 3-13 Do Not Copy CDX Files at
Tax Food Cost 6-48 Default Server 3-15 EOD 3-127
Tax ID 6-48 Default Tip Share 3-23 Do Not Print Inclusive Tax Break-
Compulsory Method 8-23 Default Weight 5-14 out on Check 3-134
Confirm Close Checks 3-104 Delay Send feature I-x Do Not Print Jobcode 4-22
Consolidate button 5-48 add Hold button 7-3 Do Not Print Tax Line if Tax
Consolidate Items with Different enable the feature 3-13 Amount is Zero 3-65
Modifiers 3-89 Delay Time 5-23 Do Not Print Voided Items 3-68
Consolidate Items with Identical Delete a Panel 7-106, 7-132 Do Not Show when Item 5-23
Modifiers 3-89 Delete Button 7-117 Do Not Show when Modifier 5-23
Consolidate Like Items on Delete button 1-4 Do Not Update Flash/Hourly Sales
Check 3-68 Delete Checkout 4-38 Report 4-22
Consolidate Llike Items on Single Delete Clockout 4-38 Do Not Verify Amount 6-8
Chit 3-84 Delete Promo 4-34 Dollar Amount 6-34
Control Name 5-14 Delivery 7-137 Don't Auto-Print When Bartender
Coordinates dialog box 7-88 Delivery Information 7-138 Closes Checks 3-73
Copy a Panel 7-105 Digits to Validate 6-14 Don't Auto-Print When Manager
Cost 5-14 Disable Add to Tab Button 3-107 Adjusts Checks 3-73
Count to Count 4-43 Disable Auto Ordering 3-10 Don't Output Primary Rate or Job
Count to Guests 4-43 Disable Auto-Grind 3-124 code 3-34
Coupon promotion type 6-33 Disable Fast Cash 3-10 Done button 1-4
CTS 8-23 Disable Hold 3-107 Downtime 4-38
Currency ID 6-57 Disable Labor Reporting 3-30 drink dispensers 8-48
Customize 1-17 Disable Multimedia 3-104 Driver Fee 4-13
Shared Navigation Bar 1-20 Disable No Sale 3-111
User Navigation Bar 1-18 Disable Petty Cash Accts 3-111 E
User Tools 1-21 Disable Real Time EDC Info 8-11
Updates 3-110 Edit Button 7-117
D Disable Repeat Order Edit button 1-4
Database Upgrade 10-20 Button 3-104 Edit Deposits 2-4
dated subdirectory 10-24 Disable Self Xfer 4-26 Edit Punches 2-6
Day of Business 3-116 Disable Split Items 3-111 Eligible Items 6-44
Day Parts function tab 7-57 Disable Standalone Chit Employee Minimum Age 3-23
Debug Events 3-124 Printing 3-93 Employee Scheduling 2-18
Decimal Places 6-57 Disable Tax Exempt 3-111 copy schedule 2-20
Decimal Separator 3-132, 6-57 Disable Transfers 3-107 edit schedule 2-20
Declare Cash Only 4-29 Display Adjustment 3-131 print schedule 2-22
Default % 3-51 Display Boards function tab 8-44
Default Amt 6-7 Scrolling Messages 8-47
Default Bar Guests 3-7 Display in Balance Due
Default Bartender 3-15 Section 6-57
Default Cashier 3-15 Display in Change Due

Employees function tab 4-5 Events function tab 7-5 Flex Tax ID #2 5-74
Back Office Security Event Time & Type dialog Flex Taxes 5-71
subtab 4-15 box 7-7 Flex Type 5-73
End Time 4-16 programmed event types 7-9 Floor Plan 7-72
Security Level Exception Modifier Group 5-39 Floor Plan Interface 7-70
button 4-16 Exception Modifiers 5-40, 5-48 FOH Flash Report Time
Start Time 4-16 Excess 6-8 Interval 3-80
Delivery subtab 4-13 Exchange Rate 6-58 FOH Theme 3-98
DL Exp 4-13 Exclude Category 3-74 Food Cost 6-27, 6-48
Driver Fee 4-13 Exclude from Tipshare Force End-of-Day 10-18
Insurance Exp 4-13 Calculations 5-31 Force Reconciliation 4-38
Mileage Fee 4-13 Exclusive 5-54 Force Tender 7-138
Employee subtab 4-6 Exempt Bartenders from Foreign Currencies function
Export ID # 4-7 Flow 5-36 tab 6-56
Mag Card Password Exempt Inclusive Tax 3-134 Currency ID 6-57
button 4-8 Expedite for 1 Printer 3-87 Decimal Places 6-57
Must Use Mag Cards 4-7 Expediter Printer 3-87 Decimal Separator 6-57
Number 4-5 Expiration 6-12 Display in Balance Due
Prefers Qwerty Export Code 4-19 Section 6-57
Keyboard 4-7 Export ID # 4-7 Display in Change Due
Job Codes subtab 4-11 Export utilities 2-50 Section 6-57
Job Code 4-10 Create Coconut Code Payroll Exchange Rate 6-58
Rate 4-11 File 2-55 Negative Format 6-58
Tax subtab 4-14 Create Coconut Code Sales Positive Format 6-58
Undefined Code #1 4-15 Mix File 2-57 Prefix 6-58
Zap subtab 4-11 Create Coconut Daily Sales Suffix 6-58
Leave of Absence 4-12 Files 2-56 Symbol 6-57
Reason # Button 4-12 Create Paychex Extract Thousands Separator 6-57
Terminated 4-12 File 2-58 Update Now 6-58
Transfer 4-12 Create PayUSA Extract Foreign Currency ID 6-11
Transfer to Unit 4-12 File 2-59 Free 6-31
Will Employee Free Modifiers 6-33, 6-37
Move 4-12 F Full Summary on Checkout 3-107
Enable EDC 3-137 features 7-72 function subtabs 1-10
Enable Memberships 3-19 Fileserver Recovery 10-26 function tabs 1-8
Enable Order Attribute 3-13 First Available 6-45
Enable Recipes 3-104 G
First Available Button 6-24
Enable Surcharges 3-56 First Day of Week 3-116 Get Check 7-138
End Date 6-23 Fiscal Printer 3-130 gift cards 3-140
End Time 4-16 Fixed Button Layout 7-95, 7-101, Gift Certificate 6-18
Enforce Unpaid Break Time 3-25 7-105 Gift Certificates function tab 6-53
Enter Details 6-19 Fixed Item Pricing function Assign Amount 6-54
Enter Totals 6-20 tab 5-90 Category 6-54
events Fixed Position 7-95, 7-101 Tax 2 ID 6-54
Reroute Display Board 7-38 Flex Tax ID #1 5-74 Tax ID 6-54
Set Order Screen Panel 7-39

Tracking 6-54 Formatting 3-129 Highlight if Modifier 5-19
Valid Ranges 6-55 Irregular Item Justification 3-91 Print Independently 5-19
VTax ID 6-54 Is Check Subtotal Less Than 5-74 Print when Held 5-19
Go Directly to Close and Get Is Item Quantity Less Than 5-74 Price subtab 5-20
Check 4-22 Item Lookup 7-139, 7-140 Base % 5-21
Grat Tax Cat ID 3-52 Item Tax Indicator 3-72 Modify Base Price 5-21
Grind Status 10-22 Item Unavailable Message 3-15 Price Level 5-20
Group Delete? 6-40 Items function tab
Group ID 4-40 Item subtab 5-13 J
Guest Check function tab 9-7 Automenu priority 5-17 Job Codes function tab 4-17
Guest Count Weight 5-24 Chit Name 5-13 Functions subtab 4-28
guest counts 3-5 Control Name 5-14 Declare Cash Only 4-29
item weight 5-24 Cost 5-14 Must Declare at
Guest Pays Surcharge 3-57 Default Weight 5-14 Checkout 4-29
Guest Pays Tax 6-26, 6-47 Member of Number of
Category 5-16 Attempts 4-29
H Never Print on Chit 5-26 Reconcile All
Hide Cash Drawer Amount 3-112 Primary Tax 5-14 Tenders 4-29
Highlight if Item 5-22 Secondary Tax 5-15 Job Code subtab
Highlight if Modifier 5-19 Surcharge 5-15 Allow Item Lookup 4-22
Horizontal Spacing 7-120 Vendor Tax 5-15 Allow Unpaid
Horizontal: Grow to Largest 7-124 Miscellaneous subtab 5-21 Breaks 4-20
House Accounts 6-11, 6-51 Ask for Description 5-24 Can Get Checks 4-22
HTML Page 4-46 Ask for Price 5-25 Do Not Print
HTML pages 1-24 Auto Display Jobcode 4-22
Recipe 5-23 Do Not Update Flash/
I Cash Card 5-22 Hourly Sales
Delay Time 5-23 Report 4-22
Icon (job codes) 4-18 Do Not Show when
ICVerify Export Code 4-19
Item 5-23 Go Directly to Close and
print settlement 2-61 Do Not Show when
settle current batch 2-60 Get Check 4-22
Modifier 5-23 Icon 4-18
Ignore Labor Schedule 4-22 Guest Count
In Kitchen 8-30 Ignore Labor
Weight 5-24 Schedule 4-22
Inc. Tax in Perf. Measures 3-78 Highlight if Item 5-22
Include Comps in Net Sales 3-57 Indirectly Tipped 4-21
Label ID 5-24 Manager Must
Include Promos in Net Sales 3-58 Recipe Bitmap 5-27
Inclusive 5-54 Checkout 4-21
Recipe Movie 5-27 Number 4-17
Indirectly Tipped 4-21 Recipe Text 5-27
Insurance Exp 4-13 Revenue Center 4-18
Show Modifier Shift Required 4-20
Interface Order Entry Independently 5-2
Terminal 8-10 Training 4-20
3 Table Service subtab 4-23
Interface Terminal 8-9 Modifiers subtab
International Daylight Savings Allow Breaks With Open
Apply Surcharge 5-18 Tables 4-26
Time 3-116 Combine Price with Base
International Field Allow Tip Out 4-25
Item 5-18

Allow to Reprint Own logout 1-7 Modify 7-140
Checks 4-26 Logout on Timeout 3-113 Modify Base Price 5-21
Allow to Void Own Move a Button 7-116
Items 4-25 M Must Declare at Checkout 4-29
Auto Return Get Mag Card Password button 4-8 Must Enter Amount 6-46
Checks 4-27 mag card passwords, adding 4-8 Must Enter Name 6-46
Bartender 4-24 Main Screen function tab 9-5 Must Enter Percent 6-46
Cannot Close 4-26 Manager Can Always Must Enter Unit 6-46
Cashier 4-27 Overpay 6-8 Must Select Items 6-46
Disable Self Xfer 4-26 Manager Force Transfer 3-11 Must Use Mag Cards 4-7
No Cash Manager Must Checkout 4-21
Transactions 4-2 N
Manager Needed 3-51, 6-25,
7 6-46 navigation bar 1-17
Order Mode button 4-28 Manager Override 3-51 Negative Format 6-58
Order Taker 4-25 Manager Required for Multiple Never Print on Chit 5-26
Pays Tip Share 4-25 Check Reprints 3-73 New Price 6-37
Pivot Seating 4-27 Manual Day Parts 3-107 New Price promotion type 6-36
Require Tab Name 4-27 Mark as Template 7-105 No Cash Transactions 4-27
Restrict from Seeing Max Amount 6-23 No Check Rounding 3-130
Sales 4-26 Max Items per Chit 3-87 No Daylight Savings Time 3-116
Sees Tabs 4-25 Max Lines per Chit 3-87 No Entry on Timeout 3-113
Send All Checks to Local Max Password Digits 3-109 No Gift Certificate
Bartender on Max per Check 6-29, 6-50 Numbers 3-111
Close 4-27 Max per Table 6-29, 6-50 No Guest Count is Requested
Send All Checks to Local Max Seats per Chit 3-87 when Check is Closed 3-8
Cashier on Max Seats per Tray Chit 3-95 No Interval Report 3-80
Close 4-27 Maximum $ 6-44 No Minimum Declared Tips 3-24
job codes, assign to Maximum % 3-51 No Open Sales on Server Sales
employee 4-10 Maximum Allowed 6-37 Report 3-58
K Maximum Check Amount 3-110 No PTD Hours on Clockout
Maximum Length 6-15 Chit 3-24
Kodiak Exit 7-140 Maximum Number of Items 3-123 No Sale Reasons function
Maximum Tip % 6-9 tab 7-66
L Member of Category 5-16 No Sale with Items 3-113
Label ID 5-24 Menus 5-42 Non-Repeating Breakpoints 5-55
Labels function tab 8-36 Message Box on Timeout 3-113 NoRegrind file 10-24
Labor Groups 4-40 Mileage Fee 4-13 Num Table Digits 3-10
Labor Report Interval 3-30 Min Guest 3-52 Number Copies of Cash In/
Limit Bartender to One Tab at a Min Password Digits 3-108 Out 3-94
Time 3-10 Min Wage 3-23 Number Employee 3-109
Limit by Percent 6-8 Min Wage Tipped 3-23 Number of Attempts 4-29
Lines Per Sheet 3-73 Minimum Amt 5-53 Number of Buttons 7-119
List All Surcharges As a Single Minimum Required 6-36 Number of Days to Keep
Surcharge 3-57 Modified By 5-19 On 3-125
List Most Recent Tables First 3-9 Modifier Screen 3-103 Number of Digits 3-132
log in 1-6 Modifiers 5-36 Number of ICVerify

Terminals 3-137 Tippable Sales 7-44 PMS Room # 6-17
Number of Minutes After Trailer 7-43 PMS Sales Cat 5-30
Ordered 3-112 Order Taker 4-25 PMS Tender ID 6-17
Number of Minutes for Allow Clock- Order Type 7-140 Positive Format 6-58
In Transaction 3-22 Other Items 6-41 Postfix Lines 3-72, 3-87
Number Required Components (2 - Output Sales as Whole Pre Text 3-134
10) 6-41 Dollars 3-34 Preferences 10-7
Numeric On 6-14 Overtime Type 3-30 Prefers Qwerty Keyboard 4-7
Prefix 6-58
O P Prefix Lines 3-72
Omit Control Totals 3-34 panel commands 7-91 Preloaded Logo 8-28
Omit Credit Card Tips 3-34 Close a Group of Price Changes 5-97
Open Any Drawer 4-38 Panels 7-107 Price Levels 5-20, 5-95, 5-99
Open Drawer 6-46, 7-140 Close a Panel 7-106 Price Levels function tab 5-95
Open Drawer on Close 6-8 Copy a Panel 7-105 Price separately? 6-41
Open on Refund Check 3-114 Delete a Panel 7-106, 7-132 Primary Tax 5-14
Open Time 3-116 Move a Button 7-116 Print # of Check Splits 3-79
OPOS 8-13, 8-16, 8-24, 8-27 Resize a Button 7-117 Print (parentheses) for Quantity
Optional Single Chit Text 3-85 Save a Group of Items 3-91
Order Entry Queues function Panels 7-153 Print 1 in Front of Quantity 1
tab 7-50 Show Panels for Items 3-90
Order Entry Terminal 8-9 Screen 7-153 Print a Grand Total 3-64
Order Modes function tab 7-41 Test a Screen 7-155 Print a Separator Line Between
Delivery Info subtab 7-49 Title Font 7-105 Priority 3-88
Order Mode Info subtab 7-45 Panel Editor 7-83 Print a Subtotal before
Category 7-47 Participates in Vizor 4-27 Comps 3-65
Category button 7-47 Pay Period Days 3-34 Print All Items on Each Chit 3-86,
Expediter Printer 7-48 Paychex 2-58 3-93
Expediter Printer Paychex Branch # 3-35 Print Balance on Receipt 6-17
button 7-49 Paychex Client # 3-36 Print Bar Code 3-69
Voucher Printer 7-47 Paychex Sitecode 3-36 Print Bartender Audit
Voucher Printer Payment Reconciliation 2-49 Check 3-107
button 7-48 Pays Tip Share 4-25 Print Cash Drawer Serial
Order Mode subtab 7-43 PayUSA 2-59 Number 3-129
All Items 7-44 Percent Off 6-44 Print Category Totals 3-64
Header 7-43 Percentage 6-34, 6-39 Print Check 6-25, 6-46
Include in Interval Performance Measures 4-42 Print Check Count 3-78
Total 7-44 Petty Accounts function tab 7-68 Print Check Counter 3-129,
Indicator 7-43 Pivot Seating 4-25, 4-27 3-130
Printer Group 7-43 pivot seating 3-90 Print Check Number on
Revenue Center 7-44 Pivot Seating Requires a Guest Chits 3-93
Revenue Center Count 3-7 Print Check on Close 6-7
button 7-44 Place PLU/SKU Button on POS Print Check Stub 3-76
Round to Nickel 7-44 Submenus 3-104 Print Checks 3-78
Tax ID 7-44 PMS 6-16 Print Clock In 3-30
Tax ID button 7-44 PMS Inquire 7-141 Print Complete Subtotal 3-69

Print Defined Comp Check Print Total, Tip and Gratuity Lines Restrictions subtab 6-28
Lines 3-65 on All Checks 3-65 Allow Prior for
Print Detail Tips on Clockout 3-24 Print Tray Chits 3-74 Check 6-28, 6-29
Print Divider Between Seats 3-74 Print True Comp Sales on Allow Prior for
Print Double Height Text 3-91 Checkout 3-78 Table 6-28, 6-29
Print Entrees in Bold 3-91 Print True Promo Sales on Allow Subseq for
Print Expiration 6-12 Checkout 3-78 Check 6-28, 6-29
Print Guest Count 3-78, 3-93 Print Two-Part Checks 3-76 Allow Subseq for
Print in Large Font 3-91 Print Void Chit when an Item is Table 6-29
Print Independently 5-19 Voided 3-94 Comp Items
Print Item Count before Print Void Chits at Remote Eligible 6-29
Subtotal 3-130 Printer 3-97 Max Per Check 6-29
Print Member Name on Chit 3-93 Print when Held 5-19 Max Per Table 6-29
Print Menu Name 3-69 Print Zero Lines on Promo Items
Print Message if Order Contains Checkout 3-78 Eligible 6-28
Items Routed to Mo 3-85 printer configuration 8-32 Taxes subtab 6-26
Print Modifiers in Red 3-91 Printer Groups function tab 8-34 Food Cost 6-27
Print Mods on Single Line 3-93 Printers function tab 8-26 Guest Pays Tax 6-26
Print Non-Cash Tenders 3-78 Options subtab 8-29 Surcharge Promotion
Print on Check 6-14, 6-15 Setup subtab 8-27 Amount 6-26
Print Only Custom Checkout 3-77 Priority 5-14, 5-17 Tax Applied Before
Print Only Selected Items in Process Button 2-30 Promotion 6-27
Red 3-91 Promo Items Eligible 6-28, 6-49 Tax Food Cost 6-27
Print Order Attribute on promotion types Tax ID 6-27
Check 3-69 Buy One Get One 6-30 VTax Food Cost 6-27
Print Order Mode on Chit in Check Reduction 6-37 VTax Promo
Red 3-93 Combo 6-32 Amount 6-27
Print PMS Guest Name 3-68 Coupon 6-33 Prompt for Amount when Fast
Print PMS Info 3-69 New Price 6-36 Cash is Used 3-10
Print Prices on Audit Check 3-107 Quick Combo 6-39 Prompt for Manager Password if
Print Receipt 7-141 Promotions 5-99 Unscheduled 3-22
Print Reference on Receipt 6-17 Promotions function tab 6-21 Provide Change 6-8
Print Report Button 2-30 Promotions subtab 6-22 Punch Edit - Limit Job Codes 3-24
Print Revenue Center 3-68 End Date 6-23 Punch Edit Num Prds 3-23
Print Rounded Indicator 3-131 First Available
Print Seat Totals 3-65 Button 6-24 Q
Print Signature Line 6-8 Manager Needed 6-25 Qualify 6-38
Print Store Id 3-130 Max Amount 6-23 Qualifying Items 6-38
Print Table Number In Red 3-91 Print Check 6-25 Quantity 7-142
Print Terminal Id 3-130 Report As 6-25 Quantity Pricing 5-91
Print the Number of Guests/ Start Date 6-23 Query Gift Card Balance 7-142
Items 3-69 Type 6-23 Quick Combo promotion
Print the Order Number in type 6-39
Bold 3-73 Qwerty 3-98
Print This Text before Tip
Line 3-65

R RI 8-23 Servers Presently on
Round Clock-In Times 3-30 Check(s) 2-31
Rate 4-11 Round Clock-Out Times 3-30 Share These Tips button 2-33
Reason # Button 4-12 Rows 7-120 Shared Navigation Bar
Recall 7-142 Run Application 7-144 subtab 1-20
Recipe Bitmap 5-27 Shift Required 4-20
Recipe Movie 5-27 S Show Cursor 3-97
Recipe Text 5-27 Show Entry Fields in Inverse 3-91
Sales Categories 4-41
Reconcile All Tenders 4-29 Show Fast Cash Huge 3-10
Sales per Check 4-43
Reconciliation subtab 6-18 Show Modifier
Sales per Hour 4-43
Refresh Checks 2-33 Independently 5-23
Sales to Guests 4-43
Refresh Data 10-5 Show Panels for Screen 7-153
Sales to Sales 4-43
Refund 7-142 Show Redundant Mode
Save a Group of Panels 7-153
Regrind Subdirectories 10-23 Indicator 3-97
Save button 1-4
Remove Tip Line if Auto Show Total on Order Entry
scales 8-48
Gratuity 6-9 Screen 3-107
Schedule is Not Required 3-22
Reopen Check 4-38, 7-144 Single Chit Only 3-84
Screen Flow Required 5-36
Repeat 7-142 Smart Tax 5-55
Screen Timeout 4-46
Repeating Breakpoints 5-55, Sort before Cut 3-88
Script 7-153
5-56 Sort by Revenue Center 3-79
Search Account # and Then Ac-
Report as 6-25, 6-45 Sort Checks by Check Close
count Name 3-59
Report Sales by Period 2-54 Time 3-98
Search Using Account #
Reprint 4-38 Sort Items According to
Only 3-59
Req'd Items 6-36 Priority 3-87
Search Using Account Name
Require Authorization 6-15 Sort Modifiers in Order by
Only 3-59
Require Drawer to Close 4-26 Entry 3-88
Secondary 5-54
Require Identification 6-13 Sort View Tables screen by Server,
Secondary Tax 5-15
Require Memberships for Then by Time 3-98
Security Key Information 3-119
Bartenders 3-19 Space Evenly Side to Side 7-126
Security Level button 4-16
Require Order Attribute 3-13 Space Evenly Up and
Sees Tabs 4-25
Require Tab Name 4-25, 4-27 Down 7-128
Select 6-41
Require Transfer Name 3-11 Start Date 6-23
Send 7-147
Required # 6-31 Start Front-of-House 10-11
Send All Checks to Local Bartend-
Required # of BOGO Items 6-31 Start Level 4-46
er on Close 4-27
Required Items 6-37 Start Time 4-16
Send All Checks to Local Cashier
Required Menu Category 3-15 Stop Front-of-House 10-11
on Close 4-27
Reroute Display Board 7-38 Store 8-9
Send Non-Checks to 8-28
Reroute Timeout 8-31 Store Collects Tips 4-27
Separate Tips and Grat in Tip
Resize a Button 7-117 Store Settings - Credit
Tracking 3-78
Rest Sales 4-33 Card 3-137
Server Flash Rpt 4-34
Restrict from Seeing Sales 4-26 EDC Setup subtab
Server Messages function
Restrict Void Items 3-111 Enable EDC 3-137
tab 9-11
Revenue Center 4-18, 8-9 Number of ICVerify
Server Override 3-51
revenue center 2-31 Terminals 3-137
Server Sales 4-33
Revenue Centers function Store Settings - Delivery 3-139
Servers Available to Add 2-31
tab 7-51
I - 10 Index Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Store Settings - Financials Store Settings - Gift Exempt Inclusive
Automatic Gratuity Certificate 3-140 Tax 3-134
subtab 3-50 Store Settings - Hotel 3-142 Indicator 3-134
Combine Gratuity Tax Store Settings - International Pre Text 3-134
With Other Guest International Date Tax Text 3-134
Check Tax 3-51 subtab 3-135 Store Settings - Labor 3-21
Default % 3-51 International subtab 3-129 Checkout Buckets
Grat Tax Cat ID 3-52 All Tenders Round to subtab 3-32
Manager Needed 3-51 0.05 3-131 Clock In/Out subtab 3-29
Manager Override 3-51 Cash Tenders Round to After __ Hrs/7th
Maximum % 3-51 0.05 3-131 Day 3-31
Min Guest 3-52 Display After __ Hrs/Day 3-31
On Tax 3-51 Adjustment 3-131 After __ Hrs/Week 3-31
Server Override 3-51 Fiscal Printer 3-130 Calculate Overtime by
Tip Out Account 3-52 International Field Average
Use Automatic Formatting 3-129 Rate 3-32
Gratuity 3-50 No Check Calculate Overtime by
House Accounts subtab Rounding 3-130 Shift Rate 3-32
Search Account # and Print Cash Drawer Serial Clock In Report
Then Account Number 3-129 Available 3-30
Name 3-59 Print Check Clock-In Round
Search using Account Counter 3-129, Threshold 3-30
Name only 3-59 3-130 Clock-Out Round
Search Ysing Account # Print Item Count Before Threshold 3-30
Only 3-59 Subtotal 3-130 Disable Labor
Members subtab 3-60 Print Rounded Reporting 3-30
Reports subtab 3-57 Indicator 3-131 Labor Report
Include Comps in Net Print Store Id 3-130 Interval 3-30
Sales 3-57 Print Terminal Id 3-130 Mult 3-31
Include Promos in Net Use International Bar Overtime Type 3-30
Sales 3-58 Codes Print Clock In 3-30
No Open Sales on Server (EAN) 3-129 Round Clock-In
Sales Special Currency Times 3-30
Report 3-58 subtab 3-132 Round Clock-Out
Taxes & Surcharges Decimal Times 3-30
subtab 3-56 Separator 3-132 Electronic Payroll Settings
Enable Surcharges 3-56 Number of Digits 3-132 subtab 3-33
Guest Pays Symbol 3-133 ADP Company # 3-33
Surcharge 3-57 Thousand ADP Store # 3-33
List All Surcharges As a Separator 3-133 ADP Version # 3-34
Single Use Special Company Code 3-34
Surcharge 3-57 Currency 3-132 Don't Output Primary
Surcharge Text 3-57 Taxes subtab 3-133 Rate or Job
Use Secondary Base Text 3-134 Code 3-34
Taxes 3-56 Do Not Print Inclusive Tax Omit Control Totals 3-34
Use Smart Taxes 3-56 Breakout On Omit Credit Card
Store Settings - Gift Cards 3-140 Check 3-134 Tips 3-34
Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Index I - 11

Output Sales As Whole Number of Minutes for Al- Memberships subtab 3-18
Dollars 3-34 low Clock-In Category 3-19
Pay Period Days 3-34 Transaction 3-22 Enable
Paychex Branch # 3-35 Prompt for Manager Memberships 3-1
Paychex Client # 3-36 Password if 9
Paychex Sitecode 3-36 unscheduled 3-2 Require Memberships for
Use ADP 3-33 2 Bartenders 3-19
Use Paychex 3-35 Schedule is Not The Minimum Number of
Use Payroll One 3-34 Required 3-22 Digits in a Mem-
Use PayUSA 3-34 Use Punctuality 3-22 bership
Use RealWorld Use Schedule 3-22 Numbe 3-20
Payroll 3-50 Store Settings - Order Entry 3-4 More Options subtab 3-14
Employee Settings Guest Counts subtab 3-5 Default Bartender 3-15
subtab 3-22 Allow a Guest Count of Default Cashier 3-15
Auto Clockout 3-24 Zero 3-7 Default Server 3-15
Can Edit Clock In/ Ask for Guest Count by Item Unavailable
Out 3-24 Check 3-7 Message 3-15
Default Tip Share 3-23 Auto Increment Pivot Required Menu
Employee Minimum Seat on Category 3-15
Age 3-23 Category 3-7 Options subtab 3-12
Min Wage 3-23 Bartender May Enter a Default Selected Id 3-13
Min Wage Tipped 3-23 Guest Count at or- Enable Order
No Minimum Declared der entry s 3-8 Attribute 3-13
Tips 3-24 Default Bar Guests 3-7 Order Mode 3-13
No PTD Hours on Clock- Default Guest Count for Require Order
out Chit 3-24 Tables 3-7 Attribute 3-13
Print Detail Tips on Default Guest Count for Pizza subtab 3-16
Clockout 3-24 Tabs 3-7 Left Half 3-17
Punch Edit - Limit Job No Guest Count is Re- Right Half 3-17
Codes 3-24 quested When Tabs & Tables subtab 3-9
Punch Edit Num Check is Allow Duplicate Table
Prds 3-23 Closed 3-8 Numbers 3-9
Tipshare on Comp'd Item Pivot Seating Requires a Auto Consolidate
Sales 3-23 Guest Count 3-7 Scanned Checks
Tipshare on Promo'd Item System Requests a on Getcheck 3-10
Sales 3-23 Guest Count When Auto Name Saved
Tipshare on Tax Check is Tabs 3-10
Amounts 3-24 Closed 3-8 Auto New Order 3-10
Scheduling subtab 3-21 System Requires a Guest Auto Save Tab When
Allow Clock-In Count When NEW TAB is
Early 3-22 Check is Pressed 3-9
Allow Clock-In Late 3-22 Closed 3-8 Check # on Work w/
Allow Employees only Use Entrees for Guest Tables 3-9
One Shift, Per Counts 3-7 Disable Auto
Day 3-22 Use Pivot Seating 3-7 Ordering 3-10
Verify Guest Count is at Disable Fast Cash 3-10
Least 3-7

Limit Bartender to One Print Complete Print Check Number on
Tab at a Subtotal 3-69 Chits 3-93
Time 3-10 Print Menu Name 3-69 Print Guest Count 3-93
List Most Recent Tables Print Order Attribute on Print Member Name on
First 3-9 Check 3-69 Chit 3-93
Num Table Digits 3-10 Print PMS Guest Print Message if Order
Prompt for Amount When Name 3-68 Contains Items
Fast Cash is Print PMS Info 3-69 Routed to
Used 3-10 Print Revenue Mo 3-85
Show Fast Cash Center 3-68 Print Mods on Single
Huge 3-10 Print the Number of Line 3-93
Toggle Auto Guests/ Print Order Mode on Chit
Ordering 3-10 Items 3-69 in Red 3-93
Transfers subtab 3-11 Check Style subtab 3-72 Print Void Chits at Re-
Ask for Transfer Auto-Print When Food is mote Printer 3-97
Name 3-11 Ordered 3-73 Sort Before Cut 3-88
Cashier Auto Accepts Don't Auto-Print When Sort Items According to
Checks 3-12 Bartender Closes Priority 3-87
Manager Force Checks 3-73 Sort Modifiers in Order by
Transfer 3-11 Don't Auto-Print When Entry 3-88
Require Transfer Manager Adjusts Use Full Paper
Name 3-11 Checks 3-73 Cuts 3-86
Transfer Merges Hard Check Prefix Chit Font subtab 3-89
Seats 3-12 Lines 3-73 Print Double Height
Store Settings - Printing 3-64 Item Tax Indicator 3-72 Text 3-91
Check Content 1 subtab 3-64 Lines Per Sheet 3-73 Print Entrees in
Do Not Print Tax Line if Manager Required for Bold 3-91
Tax Amount is Multiple Check Print in Large Font 3-91
Zero 3-65 Reprints 3-73 Print Modifiers in
Print a Grand Total 3-64 Postfix Lines 3-72 Red 3-91
Print a Subtotal Before Prefix Lines 3-72 Print Only Selected Items
Comps 3-65 Print the Order Number in in Red 3-91
Print Category Bold 3-73 Print Table Number in
Totals 3-64 Use Large Font for Red 3-91
Print Seat Totals 3-65 Check 3-73 Show Entry Fields in
Print This Text Before Tip Use Large Font for the Inverse 3-91
Line 3-65 Check Total 3-73 Chit Style subtab 3-86
Print Total, Tip and Gratu- Chit Content subtab 3-83 Exclude Category 3-74
ity Lines on All Disable Standalone Chit Expedite for 1
Checks 3-65 Printing 3-93 Printer 3-87
Check Content 2 subtab 3-68 Print a Separator Line Be- Expediter Printer 3-87
Consolidate Like Items on tween Max Items per Chit 3-87
Check 3-68 Priority 3-88 Max Lines per Chit 3-87
Do Not Print Voided Print All Items on Each Max Seats per Chit 3-87
Items 3-68 Chit 3-86, 3-93 Max Seats per Tray
Print Bar Code 3-69 Chit 3-95

Postfix Lines 3-87 Reports subtab 3-80 Show Total on Order En-
Print Divider Between FOH Flash Report Time try Screen 3-107
Seats 3-74 Interval 3-80 Use Aloha Spy 3-107
Print Tray Chits 3-74 No Interval Report 3-80 Use Non-Reset
Employee Checkout Cfg Store Settings - Security 3-106 Totals 3-107
subtab 3-77 Cash Drawer subtab 3-112 Restrictions subtab 3-110
Change Due Detail for Beep on Timeout 3-113 # of Minutes After
Non Cash Hide Cash Drawer Ordered 3-112
Tenders 3-78 Amount 3-112 Allow Adjust
Ckout Cash 3-78 Logout on Payments 3-111
Inc. Tax in Perf. Timeout 3-113 Allow Refund Orders, by
Measures 3-78 Message Box on Access
Print # of Check Timeout 3-113 Level 3-110
Splits 3-79 No Entry on Allow Split Promos,
Print Check Count 3-78 Timeout 3-113 Comps, Tax
Print Checks 3-78 No Sale With Exempt 3-111
Print Guest Count 3-78 Items 3-113 Cannot Move Payment
Print Non-Cash Open on Refund Types 3-111
Tenders 3-78 Check 3-114 Disable No Sale 3-111
Print Only Custom Use Access Level to De- Disable Petty Cash
Checkout 3-77 termine Bar Draw- Accts 3-111
Print True Comp Sales on er Access Disable Real Time
Checkout 3-78 Ri 3-113 Updates 3-110
Print True Promo Sales POS Password Settings Disable Split
on Checkout 3-78 subtab 3-108 Items 3-111
Print Zero Lines on Max Password Disable Tax
Checkout 3-78 Digits 3-109 Exempt 3-111
Separate Tips and Grat in Min Password No Gift Certificate
Tip Tracking 3-78 Digits 3-108 Numbers 3-111
Sort by Revenue Number Restrict Void
Center 3-79 Employee 3-109 Items 3-111
Multi-Part Checks POS Security subtab 3-106 Store Settings - Survey 3-143
subtab 3-74 Allow Merge Tabs 3-107 Survey subtab 3-143
Check Text 3-76 Blind Bartender 3-107 Use Survey 3-143
Print Check Stub 3-76 Blind Server 3-107 Store Settings - System 3-115
Print Two-Part Disable Add to Tab Aloha Settings subtab 3-123
Checks 3-76 Button 3-107 Debug Events 3-124
Stub Text 3-76 Disable Hold 3-107 Disable Auto-
Other Chits subtab 3-94 Disable Transfers 3-107 Grind 3-124
# Copies of Cash In/ Full Summary on Maximum Number of
Out 3-94 Checkout 3-107 Items 3-123
Check Text 3-95 Manual Day Parts 3-107 Date/Time subtab 3-115
Print Order-Taker Print Bartender Audit Day of Business 3-116
Chits 3-96 Check 3-107 First Day of Week 3-116
Print Void Chit When an Print Prices on Audit International Daylight
Item is Check 3-107 Savings
Voided 3-94 Time 3-116

No Daylight Savings FOH Theme 3-98 Tax Applied before
Time 3-116 Qwerty 3-98 Promotion 6-27
Open Time 3-116 Show Cursor 3-97 Tax Comp Amount 6-47, 6-48
Synchronize POS Time Show Redundant Mode Tax Food Cost 6-27, 6-48
With Back Office Indicator 3-97 Tax ID 5-53, 5-88, 6-27, 6-48,
Time 3-117 Sort Checks by Check 6-54
U.S. Daylight Savings Close Time 3-98 Tax Rate 5-53
Time 3-116 Sort View Tables Screen Tax Text 3-134
Disk Maintenance by Server, then by Taxes 5-52
subtab 3-125 Time 3-98 Taxes subtab 6-26, 6-47
Number of Days to Keep Store Settings - Video 3-141 Team Tip Distribution 2-29
On 3-125 Straight Sales 4-43 Check Association screen
Use the Archive Bit to Stub Text 3-76 Add button 2-33
Purge Data 3-125 Submenu ID 5-47 Check # 2-32
End Of Day subtab 3-126 Submenu Index 5-36 F&B $ 2-32
24-Hour Submenu Screen 3-103 Gratuity $ 2-32
Operation 3-127 Submenus 5-47 Gross $ 2-32
Do Not Copy CDX Files at Substitute Group 5-36 Open Time 2-32
EOD 3-127 Suffix 6-58 Owner 2-32
Winhook 3-126 Summary Chit 3-83 Refresh Checks 2-33
Interfaces subtab 3-121, Summary Chit with Single Remove button 2-33
3-123, 3-125 Chit 3-84 Revenue Center 2-31
Auto Start Back Of House Surcharge 5-15 Servers Available to
Upon Surcharge Comp Amount 6-47 Add 2-31
Startup 3-122 Surcharge Promotion Servers Presently on
Licensing subtab 3-118 Amount 6-26 Check(s) 2-31
Security Key Surcharge Text 3-57 Service $ 2-32
Information 3-119 Surcharges 5-87 Share These Tips
Store Information Surveys function tab 7-157 button 2-33
subtab 3-120 Banner subtab 7-159 Split $ 2-32
Store Settings - User Message 1-3 subtabs 7-161 Print Reports 2-30
Interface 3-97 Settings subtab 7-158 procedure
Order Screen subtab 3-103 Symbol 3-133, 6-57 add a server 2-35
Confirm Close Synchronize POS Time with Back print reports 2-39
Checks 3-104 Office Time 3-117 remove a server 2-36
Disable System Requests a Guest Count share tips among multiple
Multimedia 3-104 when Check is Closed 3-8 checks 2-38
Disable Repeat Order System Requires a Guest Count Process 2-30
Button 3-104 When Check is Closed 3-8 reports
Enable Recipes 3-104 sort by check 2-40
Modifier Screen 3-103 T sort by Server 2-40
Place PLU/SKU Button Table Items Only 3-90 Tenders function tab 6-4
on POS Tables function tab 7-61 Authorization subtab 6-15
Submenus 3-104 tare weight 8-48 Allow PreAuth With
Submenu Screen 3-103 Target Category 4-43 EDC 6-16
POS subtab 3-97 Tax 2 ID 6-54

Authorize Using Excess 6-8 Tipshare on Tax Amounts 3-24
EDC 6-16 Limit by Percent 6-8 Title Font 7-105
Maximum Length 6-15 Manager Can Always Toggle Auto Ordering 3-10
Print on Check 6-15 Overpay 6-8 Tools 1-17
Prompt 6-15 Maximum Tip % 6-9 Customize
Require Open Drawer on Shared Navigation Bar
Authorization 6-1 Close 6-8 subtab 1-20
5 Position 6-5 User Navigation Bar
Back Office subtab 6-16 Print Check on Close 6-7 subtab 1-17
Accounts Print Signature Line 6-8 User Tools subtab 1-21
Receivable 6-17 Printer 6-6 Track Two Only 8-13
AR Field on Provide Change 6-8 Tracking 6-54
Receipt 6-17 Remove Tip Line If Auto Training 4-20
Gift Certificate 6-18 Gratuity 6-9 Transfer Merges Seats 3-12
PMS 6-16 Report As 6-6 Transfer Tables 4-36
PMS Room # 6-17 Tip Refund % 6-9 Transfer to Unit 4-12
PMS Tender ID 6-17 Type subtab 6-10
Print Balance on Cash 6-10 U
Receipt 6-17 Cash Card 6-10 U.S. Daylight Savings
Verify Customer Check 6-10 Time 3-116
Data 6-17 Expiration 6-12 Undefined Code #1 4-15
Identification subtab 6-12 Foreign Currency Update Now 6-58
Digits To Validate 6-14 ID 6-11 Use Access Level to Determine
Maximum 6-13 House Accounts 6-11 Bar Drawer Access Ri 3-113
Minimum 6-13 Print Expiration 6-12 Use ADP 3-33
Numeric On 6-14 Verify Expiration 6-12 Use Aloha Spy 3-107
Print on Check 6-14 Term Type 8-9 Use Automatic Gratuity 3-50
Prompt 6-13 Terminals function tab 8-5 Use Bar Code Reader 8-13
Require Aloha Spy Server 8-16 Use Entrees for Guest Counts 3-7
Identification 6-13 Coin Changer 8-16 Use FOH COM Interface? 3-122
Validate 6-14 Magnetic Stripe Reader 8-12 Use Full Paper Cuts 3-86
Reconciliation subtab 6-18 Pole Display 8-11 Use International Bar Codes
Auto Fill 6-20 Store button 8-9 (EAN) 3-129
Enter Details 6-19 Terminated 4-12 Use Large Font for Check 3-73
Enter Totals 6-20 Termination Reasons 4-44 Use Large Font for the Check
Variance Amount Test a Screen 7-155 Total 3-73
Allowed 6-19 The Minimum Number of Digits in a Use Mag Stripe Reader 8-12
Tender subtab 6-5 Membership Numbe 3-20 Use Non-Reset Totals 3-107
Allow Overpayment 6-8 Thousand Separator 3-133 Use Paychex 3-35
Allow Tips 6-9 Thousands Separator 6-57 Use Payroll One 3-34
Close Check Upon Tip Out Account 3-52 Use PayUSA 3-34
Payment 6-8 Tip Refund % 6-9 Use Pivot Seating 3-7
Combine on Check 6-8 Tipshare on Comp'd Item Use Pole Display 8-15
Default Amt 6-7 Sales 3-23 Use Profit Center Code 2-54
Do Not Verify Tipshare on Promo'd Item Use Punctuality 3-22
Amount 6-8 Sales 3-23 Use RealWorld Payroll 3-50

Use Schedule 3-22
Use Secondary Taxes 3-56
Use Smart Taxes 3-56
Use Special Currency 3-132
Use Survey 3-143
Use the Archive Bit to Purge
Data 3-125
User Navigation Bar subtab 1-18
User Tools subtab 1-21
V
Valid Ranges 6-55
Validate 6-14
Variance Amount Allowed 6-19
Vendor 5-55
Vendor Tax 5-15
Verify Customer Data 6-17
Verify Data 10-9
Verify Expiration 6-12
Verify Guest Count is at Least 3-7
Vertical Spacing 7-120
View Tables 4-36
Void Items 4-38
Void Reasons function tab 7-63
Voucher Printer 8-8
VTax Food Cost 6-27
VTax ID 6-54
VTax Promo Amount 6-27
W
Will Employee Move 4-12
Windows Printer Name 8-28
Winhook 3-126


Aloha Table Service Users Guide Version 5.3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aloha Table Service Users Guide Version 5.3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aloha Table Service Users Guide Version 5.3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What information is covered in the copyright section?

What information is covered in the copyright section?

What does the table of contents provide?

What does the table of contents provide?

Aloha TableService

Aloha Technologies, LTD. is not responsible for any technical inaccuracies or

© Aloha Technologies, LTD., 2003. All Rights Reserved. ALOHA® is a U.S.

ii Table of Contents Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Table of Contents iii

iv Table of Contents Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Table of Contents v

vi Table of Contents Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Intuitive touch-screen interface — Touch the screen to place orders, run

Built-in redundancy — If a terminal fails, its sales information resides in

Simple check or item-splitting — Guest checks are simple to work with to

Comprehensive reporting — Complete information is available about sales,

Multiple graphical user interfaces — Define different interfaces for differ-

Server performance measurements — Distinguish easily those employees

Multiple job codes and per-employee access levels — Establish two or

Job code-specific menu assignments — Define specific menus for two or

Modular design — Incorporates several modules for reporting, scheduling

viii Introduction Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Aloha TableService v5.3

We added the Regrinding Sub-directories function to the manual to support

Supporting Chit Consolidation for Table Entry Items

Defining Default Item Weight for Guest Counting

Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Introduction ix

Aloha TableService v.5.2.8

Supporting Up to 999 Taxes

Suppressing Voucher Printing for Non-Cash Tenders

Supporting Russian Cyrillic Printing

x Introduction Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

We have clarified existing functionality in regards to qualifying items for a

Clarified Pricing Hierarchy

Supporting Up to 9,999 AutoMenus

Allowing 48 Items Per AutoMenu

You can now place up to 48 items on an AutoMenu. Submenus have the

Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Introduction xi

Chapter 1: Aloha Manager

Chapter 3: Store Settings

Chapter 4: Labor Maintenance Functions

Chapter 5: Menu Maintenance Functions

xii Introduction Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Chapter 7: System Maintenance Functions

Chapter 8: Hardware Maintenance Functions

Chapter 10: Utilities

Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Introduction xiii

Highlights a special point of interest about the topic under

Alerts you that the operation being described can cause

Points to a more complete discussion in another chapter of

Points to a useful hint that may save you time or trouble.

xiv Introduction Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

Standard Button Functions ............................................................... 1-4

This chapter contains information about establishing passwords for employ-

In this chapter, you learn how to:

• Establish and change passwords for all employees, including manag-

Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3 Aloha Manager 1–3

Click Done to exit the function.

1–4 Aloha Manager Aloha TableService User’s Guide v5.3

TableService File Menu